ENGINEERING TOMORROW

Programming Guide
VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

vlt-drives.danfoss.com
Contents Programming Guide

Contents

1 Introduction 3
1.1 Software Version 3
1.2 Approvals 3
1.3 Definitions 3
1.3.1 Frequency Converter 3
1.3.2 Input 3
1.3.3 Motor 3
1.3.4 References 4
1.3.5 Miscellaneous 4
1.4 Safety 6
1.5 Electrical Wiring 8
1.6 Integrated Motion Controller 11

2 How to Program 12
2.1 Graphical and Numerical Local Control Panels 12
2.1.1 LCD Display 13
2.1.2 Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings between Multiple Frequency Converters 15
2.1.3 Display Mode 15
2.1.4 Display Mode - Selection of Readouts 15
2.1.5 Parameter Set-up 17
2.1.6 Quick Menu Key Functions 17
2.1.7 Initial Commissioning 18
2.1.8 Main Menu Mode 19
2.1.9 Parameter Selection 19
2.1.10 Changing Data 19
2.1.11 Changing a Text Value 19
2.1.12 Changing a Data Value 20
2.1.13 Infinitely Variable Change of Numeric Data Value 20
2.1.14 Value, Step by Step 20
2.1.15 Readout and Programming of Indexed Parameters 20
2.1.16 How to Program on the Numerical Local Control Panel 20
2.1.17 LCP Keys 22

3 Parameter Descriptions 24
3.1 Parameters: 0-** Operation and Display 24
3.2 Parameters: 1-** Load and Motor 35
3.3 Parameters: 2-** Brakes 60
3.4 Parameters: 3-** Reference/Ramps 67
3.5 Parameters: 4-** Limits/Warnings 79
3.6 Parameters: 5-** Digital In/Out 88

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 1

Contents VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3.7 Parameters: 6-** Analog In/Out 111

3.8 Parameters: 7-** Controllers 120
3.9 Parameters: 8-** Communications and Options 131
3.10 Parameters: 9-** PROFIBUS 141
3.11 Parameters: 10-** DeviceNet CAN Fieldbus 141
3.12 Parameters: 12-** Ethernet 141
3.13 Parameters: 13-** Smart Logic Control 142
3.14 Parameters: 14-** Special Functions 163
3.15 Parameters: 15-** Drive Information 174
3.16 Parameters: 16-** Data Readouts 179
3.17 Parameters: 17-** Feedback 186
3.18 Parameters: 18-** Data Readouts 2 193
3.19 Parameters: 19-** Application Parameters 195
3.20 Parameters: 30-** Special Features 196
3.21 Parameters: 32-** MCO Basic Settings 199
3.22 Parameters: 33-** MCO Advanced Settings 199
3.23 Parameters: 34-** MCO Data Readouts 199
3.24 Parameters: 35-** Sensor Input Option 200
3.25 Parameters: 36-** Programmable I/O Option 203
3.26 Parameters: 42-** Safety Functions 205
3.27 Parameters: 43-** Unit Readouts 206

4 Integrated Motion Controller 209

4.1 Introduction 209
4.2 Positioning, Homing, Synchronization 210
4.3 Control 212

5 Parameter Lists 215

5.1 Introduction 215
5.2 Parameter Lists and Options, Software Version 7.60 (Standard) 216
5.3 Parameter Lists and Options, Software Version 48.20 (IMC) 243

6 Troubleshooting 267
6.1 Status Messages 267

7 Appendix 281
7.1 Symbols, Abbreviations, and Conventions 281

Index 282

2 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Introduction Programming Guide

1 Introduction 1 1

1.1 Software Version 1.3.3 Motor

Programming Guide Motor running
Software versions: 7.6X, 48.2X Torque generated on output shaft and speed from 0 RPM
to maximum speed on motor.
This programming guide can be used for all VLT® fJOG
AutomationDrive FC 301/FC 302 frequency converters with Motor frequency when the jog function is activated (via
software versions 7.6X and 48.2X. digital terminals).
The software version number can be read from
fM
parameter 15-43 Software Version.
Motor frequency.
Table 1.1 Software Version fMAX
Maximum motor frequency.
1.2 Approvals fMIN
Minimum motor frequency.
fM,N
Rated motor frequency (nameplate data).
IM
Motor current (actual).
IM,N
Rated motor current (nameplate data).
nM,N
1.3 Definitions Nominal motor speed (nameplate data).
ns
1.3.1 Frequency Converter
Synchronous motor speed.

IVLT,MAX 2 × par . 1 − 23 × 60 s
ns =
Maximum output current. par . 1 − 39
nslip
IVLT,N Motor slip.
Rated output current supplied by the frequency converter.
PM,N
UVLT,MAX Rated motor power (nameplate data in kW or hp).
Maximum output voltage.
TM,N
Rated torque (motor).
1.3.2 Input
UM
Control command Instant motor voltage.
Start and stop the connected motor with LCP and digital UM,N
inputs. Rated motor voltage (nameplate data).
Functions are divided into 2 groups.
Functions in group 1 have higher priority than functions in
group 2.

Group 1 Reset, coast stop, reset and coast stop, quick stop,
DC brake, stop, the [OFF] key.
Group 2 Start, pulse start, reversing, start reversing, jog,
freeze output.

Table 1.2 Function Groups

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 3

 Introduction VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

1 1 Break-away torque 1.3.5 Miscellaneous

Torque

175ZA078.10
Pull-out
Analog inputs
The analog inputs are used for controlling various
functions of the frequency converter.
There are 2 types of analog inputs:
Current input, 0–20 mA, and 4–20 mA
Voltage input, -10 V DC to +10 V DC.
Analog outputs
The analog outputs can supply a signal of 0–20 mA, 4–20
mA.
Automatic motor adaptation, AMA
AMA algorithm determines the electrical parameters for
the connected motor at standstill.
RPM
Brake resistor
Illustration 1.1 Break-away Torque
The brake resistor is a module capable of absorbing the
brake power generated in regenerative braking. This
regenerative brake power increases the DC-link voltage
ηVLT
and a brake chopper ensures that the power is transmitted
The efficiency of the frequency converter is defined as the
to the brake resistor.
ratio between the power output and the power input.
CT characteristics
Start-disable command
Constant torque characteristics used for all applications
A stop command belonging to Group 1 control commands
such as conveyor belts, displacement pumps, and cranes.
- see Table 1.2.
Digital inputs
Stop command
The digital inputs can be used for controlling various
A stop command belonging to Group 1 control commands
functions of the frequency converter.
- see Table 1.2.
Digital outputs
The frequency converter features 2 solid-state outputs that
1.3.4 References
can supply a 24 V DC (maximum 40 mA) signal.

Analog reference DSP

A signal transmitted to the analog inputs 53 or 54 (voltage Digital signal processor.
or current). ETR
Binary reference Electronic thermal relay is a thermal load calculation based
A signal transmitted to the serial communication port. on present load and time. Its purpose is to estimate the
motor temperature.
Preset reference
A defined preset reference to be set from -100% to +100% Hiperface®
of the reference range. Selection of 8 preset references via Hiperface® is a registered trademark by Stegmann.
the digital terminals.
Initializing
Pulse reference If initializing is carried out (parameter 14-22 Operation
A pulse frequency signal transmitted to the digital inputs Mode), the frequency converter returns to the default
(terminal 29 or 33). setting.
RefMAX Intermittent duty cycle
Determines the relationship between the reference input at An intermittent duty rating refers to a sequence of duty
100% full scale value (typically 10 V, 20 mA) and the cycles. Each cycle consists of an on-load and an off-load
resulting reference. The maximum reference value is set in period. The operation can be either periodic duty or non-
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference. periodic duty.
RefMIN LCP
Determines the relationship between the reference input at The local control panel makes up a complete interface for
0% value (typically 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA) and the resulting control and programming of the frequency converter. The
reference. The minimum reference value is set in control panel is detachable and can be installed up to 3 m
parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference. (10 ft) from the frequency converter, that is, in a front
panel with the installation kit option.

4 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Introduction Programming Guide

NLCP FC standard bus 1 1

Numerical local control panel interface for control and Includes RS485 bus with FC protocol or MC protocol. See
programming of the frequency converter. The display is parameter 8-30 Protocol.
numerical and the panel is used to show process values. THD
The NLCP has no storage and copy functions. Total harmonic distortion states the total contribution of
lsb harmonic.
Least significant bit. Thermistor
msb A temperature-dependent resistor placed on the frequency
Most significant bit. converter or the motor.
MCM Trip
Short for mille circular mil, an American measuring unit for A state entered in fault situations, for example if the
cable cross-section. 1 MCM=0.5067 mm2. frequency converter is subject to an overtemperature or
when the frequency converter is protecting the motor,
Online/offline parameters
process, or mechanism. The frequency converter prevents a
Changes to online parameters are activated immediately
restart until the cause of the fault has disappeared. To
after the data value is changed. Press [OK] to activate
cancel the trip state, restart the frequency converter. Do
changes to off-line parameters.
not use the trip state for personal safety.
Process PID
Trip lock
The PID control maintains the required speed, pressure,
The frequency converter enters this state in fault situations
temperature, and so on, by adjusting the output frequency
to protect itself. The frequency converter requires physical
to match the varying load.
intervention, for example when there is a short circuit on
PCD the output. A trip lock can only be canceled by discon-
Process control data. necting mains, removing the cause of the fault, and
Power cycle reconnecting the frequency converter. Restart is prevented
Switch off the mains until display (LCP) is dark, then turn until the trip state is canceled by activating reset or,
power on again. sometimes, by being programmed to reset automatically.
Do not use the trip lock state for personal safety.
Pulse input/incremental encoder
An external, digital pulse transmitter used for feeding back VT characteristics
information on motor speed. The encoder is used in Variable torque characteristics used for pumps and fans.
applications where great accuracy in speed control is VVC+
required. If compared with standard voltage/frequency ratio control,
RCD voltage vector control (VVC+) improves the dynamics and
Residual current device. the stability, both when the speed reference is changed
and in relation to the load torque.
Set-up
Save parameter settings in 4 set-ups. Change between the 60° AVM
4 parameter set-ups and edit 1 set-up, while another set- 60° asynchronous vector modulation
up is active. (parameter 14-00 Switching Pattern).
SFAVM Power factor
Switching pattern called stator flux-oriented asynchronous The power factor is the relation between I1 and IRMS.
vector modulation (parameter 14-00 Switching Pattern).
3 x U x I1 cosϕ
Slip compensation Power factor =
3 x U x IRMS
The frequency converter compensates for the motor slip by The power factor for 3-phase control:
giving the frequency a supplement that follows the
measured motor load keeping the motor speed almost I1 x cosϕ1 I1
Power factor = = since cosϕ1 = 1
constant. IRMS IRMS
The power factor indicates to which extent the frequency
SLC
converter imposes a load on the mains supply.
The SLC (smart logic control) is a sequence of user-defined
The lower the power factor, the higher the IRMS for the
actions executed when the associated user-defined events
same kW performance.
are evaluated as true by the SLC. (See
chapter 3.13 Parameters: 13-** Smart Logic Control). IRMS = I21 + I25 + I27 + .. + I2n
STW In addition, a high-power factor indicates that the different
Status word. harmonic currents are low.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 5

 Introduction VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

1 1 The DC coils in the frequency converters produce a high- • The ground leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA.
power factor, which minimizes the imposed load on the Ensure correct grounding of the equipment by a
mains supply. certified electrical installer.
Target position • Do not remove the plugs for the motor and
The final target position specified by positioning mains supply while the frequency converter is
commands. The profile generator uses this position to connected to mains. Check that the mains supply
calculate the speed profile. has been disconnected and that the necessary
time has elapsed before removing motor and
Commanded position
mains plugs.
The actual position reference calculated by the profile
generator. The frequency converter uses the commanded • The frequency converter has more voltage
position as setpoint for position PI. sources than L1, L2, and L3, when load sharing
(linking of DC intermediate circuit) or external
Actual position
24 V DC is installed. Check that all voltage
The actual position from an encoder, or a value that the
sources have been disconnected and that the
motor control calculates in open loop. The frequency
necessary time has elapsed before commencing
converter uses the actual position as feedback for position
repair work. For information about the discharge
PI.
time, see Table 1.3.
Position error
Position error is the difference between the actual position WARNING
and the commanded position. The position error is the
UNINTENDED START
input for the position PI controller.
When the frequency converter is connected to AC mains,
Position unit DC supply, or load sharing, the motor may start at any
The physical unit for position values. time. Unintended start during programming, service, or
repair work can result in death, serious injury, or
1.4 Safety
property damage. The motor can start via an external
switch, a fieldbus command, an input reference signal
WARNING from the LCP, or after a cleared fault condition.
HIGH VOLTAGE To prevent unintended motor start:
Frequency converters contain high voltage when
• Disconnect the frequency converter from the
connected to AC mains input, DC supply, or load sharing. mains.
Failure to perform installation, start-up, and maintenance
by qualified personnel can result in death or serious • Press [Off/Reset] on the LCP before
injury. programming parameters.

• Only qualified personnel must perform instal- • Completely wire and assemble the frequency
lation, start-up, and maintenance. converter, motor, and any driven equipment
before connecting the frequency converter to
• Before performing any service or repair work, AC mains, DC supply, or load sharing.
use an appropriate voltage measuring device to
make sure that there is no remaining voltage on
the drive.

Safety regulations
• Disconnect mains supply to the frequency
converter whenever repair work is to be carried
out. Check that the mains supply has been
disconnected and that the necessary time has
elapsed before removing motor and mains supply
plugs. For information about the discharge time,
see Table 1.3.
• [Off] does not disconnect the mains supply and
must not be used as a safety switch.
• Ground the equipment properly, protect the user
against supply voltage, and protect the motor
against overload in accordance with applicable
national and local regulations.

6 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Introduction Programming Guide

WARNING NOTICE 1 1
Hazardous situations must be identified by the machine
DISCHARGE TIME
builder/integrator who is responsible for considering the
The frequency converter contains DC-link capacitors,
necessary preventive means. More monitoring and
which can remain charged even when the frequency
protective devices may be included, always according to
converter is not powered. High voltage can be present
valid national safety regulations, for example law on
even when the warning LED indicator lights are off.
mechanical tools and regulations for the prevention of
Failure to wait the specified time after power has been
accidents.
removed before performing service or repair work can
result in death or serious injury.
Crane, lifts, and hoists
• Stop the motor. The controlling of external brakes must always have a
• Disconnect AC mains and remote DC-link power redundant system. The frequency converter can in no
supplies, including battery back-ups, UPS, and circumstances be the primary safety circuit. Comply with
DC-link connections to other frequency relevant standards, for example:
converters. Hoists and cranes: IEC 60204-32
Lifts: EN 81
• Disconnect or lock PM motor.
Protection mode
• Wait for the capacitors to discharge fully. The
Once a hardware limit on motor current or DC-link voltage
minimum duration of waiting time is specified
is exceeded, the frequency converter enters the protection
in Table 1.3 and is also visible on the product
mode. Protection mode means a change of the PWM
label on top of the frequency converter.
modulation strategy and a low switching frequency to
• Before performing any service or repair work, minimize losses. This continues for 10 s after the last fault
use an appropriate voltage measuring device to and increases the reliability and the robustness of the
make sure that the capacitors are fully frequency converter while re-establishing full control of the
discharged. motor.
In hoist applications, protection mode is not usable
because the frequency converter is unable to leave this
Voltage [V] Minimum waiting time (minutes)
mode again and therefore it extends the time before
4 7 15 activating the brake, which is not recommended.
200–240 0.25–3.7 kW – 5.5–37 kW
Protection mode can be disabled by setting
(0.34–5 hp) (7.5–50 hp)
parameter 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault to 0, which
means that the frequency converter trips immediately if 1
380–500 0.25–7.5 kW – 11–75 kW
of the hardware limits is exceeded.
(0.34–10 hp) (15–100 hp)
525–600 0.75–7.5 kW – 11–75 kW NOTICE
(1–10 hp) (15–100 hp) Disabling protection mode in hoisting applications
525–690 – 1.5–7.5 kW 11–75 kW (parameter 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault = 0) is
(2–10 hp) (15–100 hp) recommended.

Table 1.3 Discharge Time

NOTICE
When using the Safe Torque Off, always follow the
instructions in VLT® Frequency Converters - Safe Torque
Off Operating Instructions.

NOTICE
Control signals from, or internally within, the frequency
converter may in rare cases be activated in error, be
delayed, or fail to occur entirely. When used in situations
where safety is critical, for example when controlling the
electromagnetic brake function of a hoist application, do
not rely on these control signals exclusively.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 7

 Introduction VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

1 1 1.5 Electrical Wiring

130BC931.10
91 (L1) (U) 96
3 Phase 92 (L2) (V) 97
power
input 93 (L3) (W) 98
95 PE (PE) 99
Motor

88 (-) Switch Mode

DC bus
Power Supply
89 (+)
10Vdc 24Vdc (R+) 82 Brake
15mA 130/200mA resistor
50 (+10 V OUT) + - + -
+10Vdc (R-) 81
S201
0/-10Vdc -
1 2

53 (A IN)
ON
+10Vdc relay1
ON=0/4-20mA
0/4-20 mA S202 03
OFF=0/-10Vdc -
1 2

0/-10Vdc - +10Vdc
ON

54 (A IN) 240Vac, 2A
+10Vdc 02
0/4-20 mA
55 (COM A IN) 01
* relay2
12 (+24V OUT) 06
240Vac, 2A
13 (+24V OUT) P 5-00 05
400Vac, 2A
24V (NPN)
18 (D IN) 04
0V (PNP)
24V (NPN)
19 (D IN) 0V (PNP) (COM A OUT) 39 Analog Output
0/4-20 mA
(A OUT) 42
20 (COM D IN)
24V (NPN)
27 (D IN/OUT) 0V (PNP) S801
24V ON=Terminated
1 2

ON

OFF=Open

0V 5V
* 24V (NPN)
29 (D IN/OUT) 0V (PNP)
24V
S801 0V
0V
RS-485 RS-485
(N RS-485) 69
24V (NPN) Interface
32 (D IN) 0V (PNP) (P RS-485) 68
24V (NPN) **
33 (D IN) 0V (PNP) (COM RS-485) 61
: Chassis

* : Earth
37 (D IN)

Illustration 1.2 Basic Wiring Schematic Drawing

A=Analog, D=Digital
Terminal 37 is used for Safe Torque Off. For Safe Torque Off installation instructions, refer to the VLT® Frequency Converters -
Safe Torque Off Operating Instructions.
* Terminal 37 is not included in FC 301 (except enclosure type A1). Relay 2 and terminal 29 have no function in FC 301.
** Do not connect cable screen.

Very long control cables and analog signals may in rare cases, and depending on installation, result in 50/60 Hz ground
loops due to noise from mains supply cables.

If 50/60 Hz ground loops occur, consider breaking the shield or insert a 100 nF capacitor between shield and enclosure.

To avoid ground currents from both groups to affect other groups, connect the digital and analog inputs and outputs
separately to the common inputs (terminals 20, 55, and 39) of the frequency converter. For example, switching on the digital
input may disturb the analog input signal.

8 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Introduction Programming Guide

Input polarity of control terminals 1 1

130BA681.10
PNP (Source)

130BT106.10
+24 VDC

Digital input wiring

0 VDC
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37

Illustration 1.3 PNP (Source)

+24 VDC

130BT107.11
0 VDC

NPN (Sink)
Digital input wiring
Illustration 1.5 Grounding of Shielded/Armored Control Cables
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37

1.5.1 Start/Stop

Terminal 18 = Parameter 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [8]

Start.
Terminal 27 = Parameter 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [0]
No operation (Default [2] Coast inverse).
Terminal 37 = Safe Torque Off (where available).

130BA155.12
P 5-10 [8]

P 5-12 [0]
+24V

12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37

Illustration 1.4 NPN (Sink)

Start/Stop Safe Stop

NOTICE
Control cables must be shielded/armored.
Speed

See the section Grounding of Shielded Control Cables in the

design guide for the correct termination of control cables.

Start/Stop
[18]
Illustration 1.6 Start/Stop

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 9

 Introduction VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

1 1 1.5.2 Pulse Start/Stop

130BA021.12
12 +24V
Terminal 18 = Parameter 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input, [9]
Latched start.
Terminal 27 = Parameter 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input, [6] 18 Par. 5-10
Stop inverse.
Terminal 37 = Safe Torque Off (where available).
27 Par. 5-12

130BA156.12
P 5 - 12 [6]
P 5 - 10[9]
+24V

29 Par. 5-13

12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37

32 Par. 5-14

37

Illustration 1.8 Speed up/Speed down

Start Stop inverse Safe Stop

1.5.4 Potentiometer Reference

Speed
Voltage reference via a potentiometer
Reference source 1 = [1] Analog input 53 (default).
Terminal 53, low voltage = 0 V.
Terminal 53, high voltage = 10 V.
Terminal 53, low reference/feedback = 0 RPM.
Start (18)
Terminal 53, high reference/feedback = 1500 RPM.

Start (27)
Switch S201 = OFF (U)
+10V/30mA

130BA154.11
Illustration 1.7 Pulse Start/Stop

Speed RPM
P 6-15 39 42 50 53 54 55
1.5.3 Speed up/Speed Down

Terminals 29/32 = Speed up/Speed down

Terminal 18 = Parameter 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital
Input [9] Start (default).
Ref. voltage
P 6-11 10V
Terminal 27 = Parameter 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital
Input [19] Freeze reference.
Terminal 29 = Parameter 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital 1 kΩ
Input [21] Speed up.
Terminal 32 = Parameter 5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Illustration 1.9 Potentiometer Reference
Input [22] Speed down.

NOTICE
Terminal 29 only in FC x02 (x=series type).

10 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Introduction Programming Guide

1.6 Integrated Motion Controller 1 1

The integrated motion controller (IMC) enables position
control. For more information about IMC, see
chapter 4 Integrated Motion Controller.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 11

 How to Program VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

2 How to Program
2 2
2.1 Graphical and Numerical Local Control

130BA018.13
Panels
Easy programming of the frequency converter is done via
the graphical LCP (LCP 102). Consult the frequency Status 1(0) a

converter design guide when using the numerical local 1234rpm 10,4A 43,5Hz
control panel (LCP 101).
The LCP is divided into 4 functional groups: 1 b
1. Graphical display with status lines. 43,5Hz
2. Menu keys and indicator lights - changing
parameters and switching between display
Run OK c
functions.
3. Navigation keys and indicator lights.
Quick Main Alarm
2 Status
4. Operation keys and indicator lights. Menu Menu Log

The LCP display can show up to 5 items of operating data

while showing Status.

Ca
ck

n
Ba

ce
Display lines:

l
a. Status line: Status messages showing icons and
graphics.

Info
On OK
b. Line 1–2: Operator data lines showing data 3
defined or selected. Add up to 1 extra line by
Warn.
pressing [Status].
c. Status line: Status messages showing text. Alarm

NOTICE
Hand Auto
If start-up is delayed, the LCP shows the INITIALIZING 4 Off Reset
on on
message until it is ready. Adding or removing options
can delay the start-up.
Illustration 2.1 LCP

12 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

How to Program Programming Guide

2.1.1 LCD Display

130BP044.10
The display has backlight and a total of 6 alpha-numeric
lines. The display lines show the direction of rotation On 2 2
(arrow), the selected set-up and the programming set-up.
The display is divided into 3 sections.

Top section
Warn.
The top section shows up to 2 measurements in normal
operating status.
Middle section
Alarm
Illustration 2.3 Indicator Lights
The top line shows up to 5 measurements with related
unit, regardless of status (except in the case of alarm/
warning).
LCP keys
Bottom section The control keys are divided into functions. The keys below
The bottom section always shows the state of the the display and indicator lights are used for parameter set-
frequency converter in Status mode. up, including option of display indication during normal
operation.
130BP074.10

Status ! 1(1)
Top section

130BP045.10
43 RPM 5.44 A 25.3kW
Quick Main Alarm
Status
Menu Menu Log
1.4 Hz
Middle section
2.9% Illustration 2.4 LCP Keys

! Pwr.card temp (W29)

Bottom section
Auto Remote Running
[Status]
Illustration 2.2 Display Indicates the status of the frequency converter and/or the
motor. Select between 3 different readouts by pressing
[Status]: 5 line readouts, 4 line readouts, or smart logic
The active set-up (selected as the active set-up in control.
parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) is shown. When programming Press [Status] for selecting the mode of display or for
another set-up than the active set-up, the number of the changing back to display mode from either the quick
programmed set-up appears to the right. menu mode, the main menu mode, or the alarm mode.
Also use [Status] to toggle single or double readout mode.
Display contrast adjustment [Quick Menu]
Press [Status] and [▲] for darker display.
Allows quick access to different quick menus such as:
Press [Status] and [▼] for brighter display.
• My personal menu.
Most parameter set-ups can be changed immediately via
the LCP, unless a password has been created via
• Quick set-up.
parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password or via • Changes made.
parameter 0-65 Quick Menu Password. • Loggings.
Indicator lights Press [Quick Menu] to program the parameters belonging
If certain threshold values are exceeded, the alarm and/or to the Quick Menu. It is possible to switch directly
warning indicator lights up. A status and alarm text appear between quick menu mode and main menu mode.
on the LCP.
The ON indicator light is activated when the frequency [Main Menu]
converter receives mains voltage or via a DC bus terminal Is used for programming all parameters.
or 24 V external supply. At the same time, the back It is possible to switch directly between main menu mode
indicator light is on. and quick menu mode.
Parameter shortcut can be carried out by pressing down
• Green LED/On: Control section is working. [Main Menu] for 3 s. The parameter shortcut allows direct
• Yellow LED/Warn: Indicates a warning. access to any parameter.

• Flashing Red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 13

 How to Program VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

[Alarm Log] [Hand On]

Shows an alarm list of the 5 latest alarms (numbered A1– Enables control of the frequency converter via the LCP.
A5). To obtain extra details about an alarm, press the [Hand On] also starts the motor, and it is now possible to
2 2 navigation keys to maneuver to the alarm number and enter the motor speed data with the navigation keys. The
press [OK]. Information is shown about the condition of key can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
the frequency converter before it enters the alarm mode. parameter 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP.
External stop signals activated with control signals or a
[Back]
fieldbus override a start command via the LCP.
Returns to the previous step or layer in the navigation
structure. The following control signals are still active when [Hand
On] is activated:
[Cancel]
Last change or command is canceled as long as the display • [Hand on] - [Off] - [Auto On].
has not been changed. • Reset.
[Info] • Coast stop inverse.
Supplies information about a command, parameter, or
function in any display window. [Info] provides detailed
• Reversing.

information whenever help is needed. • Set-up select bit 0 - Set-up select bit 1.
Exit Info mode by pressing either [Info], [Back], or [Cancel]. • Stop command from serial communication.
• Quick stop.
Back
• DC brake.
Illustration 2.5 Back [Off]
Stops the connected motor. The key can be selected as [1]
Enable or [0] Disable via parameter 0-41 [Off] Key on LCP. If
no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is
inactive, the motor can be stopped by disconnecting the
Cancel
voltage.
Illustration 2.6 Cancel [Auto On]
Enables the frequency converter to be controlled via the
control terminals and/or serial communication. When a
start signal is applied on the control terminals and/or the
bus, the frequency converter starts. The key can be
Info
selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
Illustration 2.7 Info parameter 0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP.

NOTICE
An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs
Navigation keys has higher priority than the control keys [Hand On] –
The 4 navigation keys are used to navigate between the [Auto On].
different options available in Quick Menu, Main Menu, and
Alarm Log. Press the keys to move the cursor. [Reset]
[OK] Is used for resetting the frequency converter after an alarm
Use for selecting a parameter marked by the cursor and for (trip). It can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
enabling the change of a parameter. parameter 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP.
Local control keys The parameter shortcut can be carried out by pressing
Local control keys are at the bottom of the LCP. down the [Main Menu] key for 3 s. The parameter shortcut
provides direct access to any parameter.
130BP046.10

Hand Auto
Off Reset
on on

Illustration 2.8 Local Control Keys

14 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

How to Program Programming Guide

2.1.2 Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings 3. Select [2] All from LCP.
between Multiple Frequency 4. Press the [OK] key.
Converters
The parameter settings stored in the LCP are now
transferred to the frequency converter indicated by the
2 2
Once the set-up of a frequency converter is complete,
progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK].
store the data in the LCP or on a PC via MCT 10 Set-up
Software.
2.1.3 Display Mode

130BA027.10
In normal operation, up to 5 different operating variables
Alarm
can be indicated continuously in the middle section: 1.1,
Quick Main
Status Menu Menu Log 1.2, and 1.3, as well as 2 and 3.

2.1.4 Display Mode - Selection of Readouts

Ca

It is possible to toggle between 3 status readout screens

k

nc
c
Ba

el

by pressing [Status].
Operating variables with different formatting are shown in
each status view further in this section.
Info

On OK
Table 2.1 shows the measurements that can be linked to
Warn. each of the operating variables. When options are
mounted, additional measurements are available.
Alarm
Define the links via
• Parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small.
Hand
Off
Auto
on Reset • Parameter 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small.
on
• Parameter 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small.
• Parameter 0-23 Display Line 2 Large.
Illustration 2.9 LCP
• Parameter 0-24 Display Line 3 Large.

Data storage in LCP Each readout parameter selected in parameter 0-20 Display
Line 1.1 Small to parameter 0-24 Display Line 3 Large has its
NOTICE own scale and digits after a possible decimal point. The
Stop the motor before performing this operation.
larger the numeric value of a parameter is, the fewer digits
To store the data in the LCP:
are shown after the decimal point.
1. Go to parameter 0-50 LCP Copy.
Example: Current readout 5.25 A, 15.2 A, 105 A.
2. Press the [OK] key.
3. Select [1] All to LCP. Operating variable Unit
Parameter 16-00 Control Word hex
4. Press the [OK] key.
Parameter 16-01 Reference [Unit] [Unit]
All parameter settings are now stored in the LCP indicated Parameter 16-02 Reference [%] %
by the progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK]. Parameter 16-03 Status Word hex
Parameter 16-05 Main Actual Value [%] %
Connect the LCP to another frequency converter and copy Parameter 16-10 Power [kW] [kW]
the parameter settings to this frequency converter as well. Parameter 16-11 Power [hp] [hp]
Parameter 16-12 Motor Voltage [V]
Data transfer from LCP to frequency converter Parameter 16-13 Frequency [Hz]
NOTICE Parameter 16-14 Motor current [A]
Stop the motor before performing this operation. Parameter 16-16 Torque [Nm] Nm
To transfer the data from the LCP to the frequency Parameter 16-17 Speed [RPM] [RPM]
converter: Parameter 16-18 Motor Thermal %
1. Go to parameter 0-50 LCP Copy. Parameter 16-20 Motor Angle
2. Press the [OK] key. Parameter 16-30 DC Link Voltage V

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 15

 How to Program VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

Operating variable Unit Status view I

Parameter 16-32 Brake Energy /s kW This readout state is standard after start-up or initialization.
Press [Info] to obtain information about the units linked to
2 2 Parameter 16-33 Brake Energy Average
Parameter 16-34 Heatsink Temp.
kW
°C the shown operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2 and 3).
Parameter 16-35 Inverter Thermal % See the operating variables shown in Illustration 2.10.
Parameter 16-36 Inv. Nom. Current A

130BP041.10
Status 1 (1)
Parameter 16-37 Inv. Max. Current A 799 RPM 7.83 A 36.4 kw
Parameter 16-38 SL Controller State 1.1
Parameter 16-39 Control Card Temp. °C 0.000
Parameter 16-40 Logging Buffer Full 1.2
Parameter 16-50 External Reference 53.2 %
Auto Remote Ramping
Parameter 16-51 Pulse Reference 2
Parameter 16-52 Feedback[Unit] [Unit]
Parameter 16-53 Digi Pot Reference 3 1.3

Parameter 16-60 Digital Input bin

Illustration 2.10 Status View I
Parameter 16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting V
Parameter 16-62 Analog Input 53
Parameter 16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting V
Status view II
Parameter 16-64 Analog Input 54 See the operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3, and 2) shown in
Parameter 16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA] [mA] Illustration 2.11.
Parameter 16-66 Digital Output [bin] [bin] In the example, speed, motor current, motor power, and
Parameter 16-67 Pulse Input #29 [Hz] [Hz] frequency are selected as variables in the first and second
Parameter 16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz] [Hz] lines.
Parameter 16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz] [Hz]

130BP062.10
Status 1 (1)
Parameter 16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz] [Hz]
207RPM 5.25A 24.4 kW
Parameter 16-71 Relay Output [bin]
1.1
Parameter 16-72 Counter A
Parameter 16-73 Counter B
6.9 Hz
1.3
Parameter 16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1 hex
1.2
Parameter 16-82 Fieldbus REF 1 hex Auto Remote Running
Parameter 16-84 Comm. Option STW hex
2
Parameter 16-85 FC Port CTW 1 hex
Parameter 16-86 FC Port REF 1 hex Illustration 2.11 Status View II
Parameter 16-90 Alarm Word
Parameter 16-92 Warning Word
Parameter 16-94 Ext. Status Word Status view III
This state shows the event and action of the smart logic
Table 2.1 Units
control. For further information, see
chapter 3.13 Parameters: 13-** Smart Logic Control.
130BP063.10

Status 1 (1)
778 RPM 0.86 A 4.0 kW

State: 0 off 0 (off )

When: -
Do: -

Auto Remote Running

Illustration 2.12 Status View III

16 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

How to Program Programming Guide

2.1.5 Parameter Set-up Parameter Setting

Parameter 0-01 LanguageParameter 0-01 L

2 2
The frequency converter can be used for practically all anguage
assignments. The frequency converter offers an option Parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] [kW]
between 2 programming modes: Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage [V]
• Main menu mode. Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency [Hz]

• Quick menu mode. Parameter 1-24 Motor Current [A]

Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed [RPM]
Main menu provides access to all parameters. Quick menu
Parameter 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [0] No function1)
takes the user through a few parameters, making it
Parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor [1] Enable complete
possible to start operating the frequency converter.
Adaptation (AMA) AMA
Change a parameter in either main menu mode or quick
Parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference [RPM]
menu mode.
Parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference [RPM]
Parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time [s]
2.1.6 Quick Menu Key Functions
Parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time [s]
Parameter 3-13 Reference Site
Press [Quick Menu] to enter a list of different areas
contained in the Quick Menu. Table 2.2 Selection of Parameter
Select Q1 My Personal Menu to display the selected
1) If terminal 27 is set to [0] No function, no connection to +24 V on
personal parameters. These parameters are selected in
terminal 27 is necessary.
parameter 0-25 My Personal Menu. Up to 50 different
parameters can be added in this menu. Select Changes made to get information about:
• The last 10 changes. Use the [▲] [▼] navigation
keys to scroll between the last 10 changed
130BC916.10

0RPM 0.00A 1(1)

Quick Menus parameters.
Q1 My Personal Menu • The changes made since default setting.
Q2 Quick Setup Select Loggings to get information about the display line
Q4 Smart Setup readouts. The information is shown as graphs.
Q5 Changes Made Only parameters selected in parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1
Small and parameter 0-24 Display Line 3 Large can be
Illustration 2.13 Quick Menus
viewed. It is possible to store up to 120 samples in the
memory for later reference.

Select Q2 Quick Setup to go through a selection of

parameters to get the motor running almost optimally. The
default settings for the other parameters consider the
required control functions and the configuration of signal
inputs/outputs (control terminals).

The parameter selection is effected with the navigation

keys. The parameters in Table 2.2 are accessible.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 17

 How to Program VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

2.1.7 Initial Commissioning

2 2 The easiest way of carrying out the initial commissioning is by pressing [Quick Menu] and following the quick set-up
procedure using LCP 102 (read Table 2.3 from left to right). The example applies to open-loop applications.

Press

Quick
Menu Q2 Quick Menu. OK

Parameter 0-01 LanguageParameter 0-

OK Set language.
01 Language

Parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] OK Set motor nameplate power.

Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage OK Set nameplate voltage.

Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency OK Set nameplate frequency.

Parameter 1-24 Motor Current OK Set nameplate current.

Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed OK Set nameplate speed in RPM.

If terminal default is [2] Coast

inverse, it is possible to change
Parameter 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital
OK this setting to [0] No function.
Input
No connection to terminal 27 is
then needed for running AMA.
Set desired AMA function.
Parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor
OK Enable complete AMA is
Adaptation (AMA)
recommended.

Set the minimum speed of the

Parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference OK
motor shaft.

Set the maximum speed of the

Parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference OK
motor shaft.

Set the ramp-up time with

Parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time OK reference to synchronous motor
speed, ns.
Set the ramp-down time with
Parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down
OK reference to synchronous motor
Time
speed, ns.

Set the site from where the

Parameter 3-13 Reference Site OK
reference must work.

Table 2.3 Quick Set-up Procedure

18 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

How to Program Programming Guide

Another easy way of commissioning the frequency first digit of the parameter number (from the left) indicates
converter is by using the smart application set-up (SAS), the parameter group number.
which can also be found by pressing [Quick Menu]. To set
up the applications listed, follow the instructions on the All parameters can be changed in the Main Menu. 2 2
successive screens. However, depending on the choice of configuration
(parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode), some parameters can
The [Info] key can be used throughout the SAS to see help be hidden. For example, open loop hides all the PID
information for various selections, settings, and messages. parameters, and other enabled options make more
The following 3 applications are included: parameter groups visible.
• Mechanical brake.
• Conveyor. 2.1.9 Parameter Selection
• Pump/fan.
In the main menu mode, the parameters are divided into
The following 4 fieldbusses can be selected: groups. Select a parameter group with the navigation keys.
• PROFIBUS.
• PROFINET. After selecting a parameter group, select a parameter with
the navigation keys.
• DeviceNet.
The middle section on the display shows the parameter
• EtherNet/IP. number and name, and the selected parameter value.
NOTICE
The frequency converter ignores the start conditions

130BP067.10
740RPM 10.64A 1 [1]
when SAS is active. Basic Settings 0-0*

0 -01 Language

NOTICE
The smart set-up runs automatically on the first power- [0] English
up of the frequency converter or after a reset to factory
settings. If no action is taken, the SAS screen automat-
Illustration 2.15 Parameter Selection
ically disappears after 10 minutes.

2.1.8 Main Menu Mode 2.1.10 Changing Data

Press [Main Menu] to enter the main menu mode. The
The procedure for changing data is the same in the quick
readout in Illustration 2.14 appears on the display.
menu mode and the main menu mode. Press [OK] to
The middle and bottom sections in the display show a list
change the selected parameter.
of parameter groups, which can be selected by toggling
The procedure for changing data depends on whether the
the [▲] and [▼] keys.
selected parameter represents a numeric data value or a
text value.
130BP066.12

18.4% 5.22A 1(1) 2.1.11 Changing a Text Value

Main Menu
If the selected parameter is a text value, change the text
Keypad Set-Up value with the [▲] [▼] keys.
Parameter Data Set Place the cursor on the value to save and press [OK].

Parameter Data Check

130BP068.10

Drive Information 740RPM

Basic Settings
10.64 A 1 [1]
0-0*

07 Motor Setup 0 -01 Language

Illustration 2.14 Main Menu Mode

[0] English

Each parameter has a name and number which remain the Illustration 2.16 Changing a Text Value
same regardless of the programming mode. In the main
menu mode, the parameters are divided into groups. The

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 19

 How to Program VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

2.1.12 Changing a Data Value

130BP072.10
957RPM 11.58A 1 (1)

Start Adjustments 1-7*

2 2 If the selected parameter shows a numeric data value,

change the selected data value with the [◀] [▶] navigation
1-71 High starting torque time

keys and the [▲] [▼] navigation keys. Press [◀] [▶] keys to 0. 4s

move the cursor horizontally.

Illustration 2.20 Saving

130BP069.10
113 RPM 1.78 A 1(1)
Load depen. setting 1- 6*

1 - 60 Low speed load

2.1.14 Value, Step by Step
compensation
Certain parameters can be changed step by step. This
100%
applies to:
• Parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW].
Illustration 2.17 Changing a Data Value • Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage.
• Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency.
The parameters are changed both as a group of numeric
Press [▲] [▼] keys to change the data value. [▲] increases
data values and as numeric data values that are infinitely
the data value, and [▼] decreases the data value. Place the varying.
cursor on the value to save and press [OK].

2.1.15 Readout and Programming of

Indexed Parameters
130BP070.10

729RPM 6.21A 1(1)

Load depen. setting 1- 6*

1 - 60 Low speed load Parameters are indexed when placed in a rolling stack.
compensation Parameter 15-30 Fault Log: Error Code to
16 0% parameter 15-32 Alarm Log: Time contain a fault log, which
can be read out. Select a parameter, press [OK], and press
the keys [▲] [▼] to scroll through the value log.
Illustration 2.18 Saving a Data Value

For example, parameter 3-10 Preset Reference is changed as

follows:
2.1.13 Infinitely Variable Change of
Numeric Data Value 1. Select the parameter, press [OK], and press [▲] [▼]
to scroll through the indexed values.
If the selected parameter shows a numeric data value, 2. To change the parameter value, select the
select a digit with [◀] [▶]. indexed value and press [OK].
3. Change the value by pressing [▲] [▼].
130BP073.10

635 RPM 0.44 A 1 (1) 4. Press [OK] to accept the new setting.
Start Adjustments 1- 7*
5. Press [Cancel] to abort. Press [Back] to leave the
1 - 71 Start Delay parameter.
00.0s
2.1.16 How to Program on the Numerical
Local Control Panel
Illustration 2.19 Selecting a Digit
The following instructions are valid for the numerical LCP
(LCP 101).
Change the selected digit infinitely variably with [▲] [▼]. The control panel is divided into 4 functional groups:
The cursor indicates the selected digit. Place the cursor on 1. Numerical display.
the digit to save and press [OK].
2. Menu keys and indicator lights - changing
parameters and switching between display
functions.
3. Navigation keys and indicator lights.
4. Operation keys and indicator lights.

20 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

How to Program Programming Guide

Display line Status mode

Status messages showing icons and numeric value. Status mode shows the status of the frequency converter
or the motor.
Indicator lights
• Green LED/On: Indicates if control section is on. If an alarm occurs, the NLCP automatically switches to 2 2
status mode.
• Yellow LED/Wrn: Indicates a warning. Several alarms can be shown.
• Flashing red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm.
NOTICE
LCP keys Parameter copy is not possible with LCP 101 numerical
[Menu] local control panel.
Select 1 of the following modes:
• Status.

22.8

130BP077.10
• Quick set-up.
rpm
• Main menu.
Setup 1
130BA191.10
Illustration 2.22 Status Mode

A 17

130BP078.10
1 Setup Setup 1

Illustration 2.23 Alarm

Main Menu/Quick Set-up

Status Quick Main Are used for programming all parameters or only the
2 Menu Setup Menu parameters in the Quick Menu (see also description of the
LCP 102 in chapter 2.1 Graphical and Numerical Local
Control Panels).
When the value flashes, press [▲] or [▼] to change
parameter values.
ck
Ba

1. Press [Main Menu] to select main menu.

2. Select the parameter group [xx-__] and press
3 On OK [OK].
3. Select the parameter [__-xx] and press [OK].
Warn.
4. If the parameter is an array parameter, select the
Alarm array number and press [OK].
5. Select the required data value and press [OK].
Hand Auto
4
on
Off
on
Reset Parameters with functional options show values such as
[1], [2], and so on. For a description of the different
options, see the individual parameter descriptions in
Illustration 2.21 LCP Keys chapter 3 Parameter Descriptions.
[Back]
Used for stepping backwards.
[▲] [▼] are used for maneuvering between commands and
within parameters.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 21

 How to Program VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

frequency converter starts. The key can be selected as [1]

Enable or [0] Disable via parameter 0-42 [Auto on] Key on
LCP.
2 2 NOTICE
An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs
has higher priority than the control keys [Hand On] and
[Auto On].

[Reset]
Is used for resetting the frequency converter after an alarm
(trip). It can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
Illustration 2.24 Main Menu/Quick Set-up
parameter 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP.

2.1.17 LCP Keys 2.1.18 Initialization to Default Settings

Keys for local control are at the bottom of the LCP. Initialize the frequency converter to default settings in 2
ways.
130BP046.10

Recommended initialization (via

Hand Auto parameter 14-22 Operation Mode)
Off Reset
on on 1. Select parameter 14-22 Operation Mode.
2. Press [OK].
Illustration 2.25 LCP Keys
3. Select [2] initialization.
4. Press [OK].
[Hand On] 5. Disconnect the mains supply and wait until the
Enables control of the frequency converter via the LCP. display turns off.
[Hand On] also starts the motor and it is now possible to
enter the motor speed data with the navigation keys. The 6. Reconnect the mains supply. The frequency
key can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via converter is now reset.
parameter 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP. Parameter 14-22 Operation Mode initializes all except:
External stop signals activated with control signals, or a • Parameter 14-50 RFI Filter.
fieldbus, override a start command via the LCP.
• Parameter 8-30 Protocol.
The following control signals are still active when [Hand
On] is activated:
• Parameter 8-31 Address.

• [Hand On] - [Off] - [Auto On]. • Parameter 8-32 FC Port Baud Rate.

• Reset. • Parameter 8-35 Minimum Response Delay.

• Coast stop inverse. • Parameter 8-36 Max Response Delay.

• Reversing. • Parameter 8-37 Max Inter-Char Delay.

• Set-up select lsb - Set-up select msb. • Parameter 15-00 Operating hours to
parameter 15-05 Over Volt's.
• Stop command from serial communication.
• Quick stop.
• Parameter 15-20 Historic Log: Event to
parameter 15-22 Historic Log: Time.
• DC brake.
• Parameter 15-30 Fault Log: Error Code to
[Off] parameter 15-32 Alarm Log: Time.
Stops the connected motor. The key can be selected as [1]
Enable or [0] Disable via parameter 0-41 [Off] Key on LCP.
If no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is
inactive, stop the motor by disconnecting the voltage.
[Auto On]
Enables control of the frequency converter via the control
terminals and/or serial communication. When a start signal
is applied on the control terminals and/or the bus, the

22 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

How to Program Programming Guide

Manual initialization
1. Disconnect from mains and wait until the display
turns off.
2. 2a Press [Status] - [Main Menu] - [OK] at
2 2
the same time while powering up the
LCP 102, graphical display.
2b Press [Menu] - [OK] while powering up
the LCP 101, numerical display.
3. Release the keys after 5 s.
4. The frequency converter is now programmed
according to default settings.
This procedure initializes all except:
• Parameter 15-00 Operating hours.
• Parameter 15-03 Power Up's.
• Parameter 15-04 Over Temp's.
• Parameter 15-05 Over Volt's.
NOTICE
A manual initialization also resets serial communication,
RFI filter settings (parameter 14-50 RFI Filter), and fault
log settings.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 23

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3 Parameter Descriptions

3.1 Parameters: 0-** Operation and Display 0-01 Language

Option: Function:
3 3 Parameters related to the fundamental functions of the
frequency converter, function of the LCP keys, and configu-
[49] Russian Part of language package 3

ration of the LCP display. [50] Thai Part of language package 2

[51] Bahasa Part of language package 2

3.1.1 0-0* Basic Settings Indonesia
[52] Hrvatski Part of language package 3
0-01 Language
Option: Function: 0-02 Motor Speed Unit
Defines display language. The frequency Option: Function:
converter is delivered with 4 different
language packages. English and German
NOTICE
are included in all packages. English
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the
cannot be erased or manipulated.
motor is running.

[0] * English Part of language packages 1–4

The information shown in the display depends on
[1] Deutsch Part of language packages 1–4 settings in parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit and
parameter 0-03 Regional Settings. The default settings
[2] Francais Part of language package 1
of parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit and
[3] Dansk Part of language package 1 parameter 0-03 Regional Settings depend on to which
region of the world the frequency converter is
[4] Spanish Part of language package 1
supplied.
[5] Italiano Part of language package 1 NOTICE
[6] Svenska Part of language package 1 Changing the motor speed unit resets certain
parameters to their initial value. Select the
[7] Nederlands Part of language package 1 motor speed unit before modifying other
parameters.
[10] Chinese Part of language package 2

[20] Suomi Part of language package 1 [0] RPM Select to show motor speed variables and parameters
using motor speed (RPM).
[22] English US Part of language package 4
[1] * Hz Select to show motor speed variables and parameters
[27] Greek Part of language package 4 using output frequency (Hz).

[28] Bras.port Part of language package 4 0-03 Regional Settings

[36] Slovenian Part of language package 3 Option: Function:

[39] Korean Part of language package 2 NOTICE

This parameter cannot be adjusted while
[40] Japanese Part of language package 2
the motor is running.
[41] Turkish Part of language package 4

[42] Trad.Chinese Part of language package 2 [0] * Interna- Activate parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] for
tional setting the motor power in kW and set the
[43] Bulgarian Part of language package 3
default value of parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency
[44] Srpski Part of language package 3 to 50 Hz.
[45] Romanian Part of language package 3 [1] US Activate parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] for
setting the motor power in hp and set the
[46] Magyar Part of language package 3
default value of parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency
[47] Czech Part of language package 3 to 60 Hz.

[48] Polski Part of language package 4

24 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

0-04 Operating State at Power-up (Hand) 0-10 Active Set-up

Option: Function: Option: Function:
Select the operating mode upon Select the set-up to control the frequency
reconnection of the frequency converter to converter functions.
mains voltage after power down in hand-on
[0] Factory Cannot be changed. It contains the Danfoss
mode.
setup data set and can be used as a data source 3 3
[0] Resume Restart the frequency converter, maintaining when returning the other set-ups to a known
the start/stop settings (applied by [Hand On/ state.
Off]) selected before the power-down of the
[1] * Set-up 1 [1] Set-up 1 to [4] Set-up 4 are the 4 separate
frequency converter.
parameter set-ups within which all parameters
[1] * Forced stop, Restart the frequency converter with a saved can be programmed.
ref=old local reference after mains voltage reappears
[2] Set-up 2
and after pressing [Hand On].
[3] Set-up 3
[2] Forced stop, Reset the local reference to 0 upon restarting [4] Set-up 4
ref=0 the frequency converter. [9] Multi Set- Remote set-up selections using digital inputs
up and the serial communication port. This set-up
uses the settings from parameter 0-12 This Set-
3.1.2 0-1* Set-up Operations
up Linked to. Stop the frequency converter
before making changes to open and closed
Define and control the individual parameter set-ups.
loop functions.
The frequency converter has 4 parameter set-ups that can
be programmed independently of each other. This makes Use parameter 0-51 Set-up Copy to copy a set-up to 1 or all
the frequency converter very flexible and able to solve other set-ups. Stop the frequency converter before
advanced control functionality problems, often saving the switching between set-ups where parameters marked not
cost of external control equipment. Parameter set-ups can changeable during operation have different values. To avoid
be used to program the frequency converter to operate conflicting settings of the same parameter within 2
according to 1 control scheme in 1 set-up (for example different set-ups, link the set-ups together using
motor 1 for horizontal movement) and another control parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to. Parameters which are
scheme in another set-up (for example motor 2 for vertical not changeable during operation are marked FALSE in the
movement). Alternatively, parameter set-ups can be used parameter lists in chapter 5 Parameter Lists.
by an OEM machine builder to identically program all their
factory-fitted frequency converters for different machine 0-11 Edit Set-up
types within a range to have the same parameters. During Option: Function:
production/commissioning, simply select a specific set-up Select the set-up to be edited (that is
depending on which machine the frequency converter is programmed) during operation; either the
installed on. active set-up or 1 of the inactive set-ups.
The active set-up (that is the set-up in which the frequency
[0] Factory Cannot be edited but it is useful as a data
converter is currently operating) can be selected in
setup source to return the other set-ups to a known
parameter 0-10 Active Set-up and is shown in the LCP. By
state.
using multi set-up, it is possible to switch between set-ups
with the frequency converter running, or it can be stopped [1] * Set-up 1 [1] Set-up 1 to [4] Set-up 4 can be edited freely
via digital input or serial communication commands. If it is during operation, independently of the active
necessary to change set-ups while the frequency converter set-up.
is running, ensure that parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to [2] Set-up 2
is programmed as required. By using parameter 0-11 Edit
[3] Set-up 3
Set-up, it is possible to edit parameters within any of the
[4] Set-up 4
set-ups while continuing the operation of the frequency
[9] Active Set- Can also be edited during operation. Edit the
converter in its active set-up, which can be a different set-
up selected set-up from a range of sources: LCP,
up to the one being edited. By using parameter 0-51 Set-up
FC RS485, FC USB, or up to 5 fieldbus sites.
Copy, it is possible to copy parameter settings between the
set-ups to enable quicker commissioning if similar
parameter settings are required in different set-ups.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 25

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

Set-up 0-12 This Set-up Linked to

130BA199.10
1 Option: Function:
synchronized (or linked). Synchronization can be
2
P 0-11 performed in 2 ways:
3 1. Select the following options:

3 3 4 • [2] Set-up 2 in parameter 0-11 Edit Set-

up.
Set-up
• parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to to
1
[1] Set-up 1.

2 This starts the linking (synchronizing) process.

P 0-11
3

130BP075.10
0 RPM 0.00A 1(1)
4 Set-up Handling 0-1*
0-12 This Set-up Linked to
Set-up
1 [1] Setup 1

2 Illustration 3.2 Set-up 1

P 0-11
3

OR
4
2. While still in set-up 1, copy set-up 1 to set-up
PLC Fieldbus 2. Then set parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to
to [2] Set-up 2. This starts the linking process.
Set-up
1

130BP076.10
0 RPM 0.00A 1(1)
Set-up Handling 0-1*
2 0-12 This Set-up Linked to
P 0-11
3 [2] Setup 2

4
Illustration 3.1 Edit Set-up Illustration 3.3 Set-up 2

When completed, parameter 0-13 Readout:

0-12 This Set-up Linked to
Linked Set-ups reads {1,2} to indicate that all not
Option: Function: changeable during operation-parameters are now
To enable conflict-free changes from 1 set-up to the same in set-up 1 and set-up 2. If there are
another during operation, link set-ups changes to a not changeable during operation-
containing parameters which are not changeable parameter, for example parameter 1-30 Stator
during operation. The link ensures synchronizing Resistance (Rs), in set-up 2, they are also
of the not changeable during operation- changed automatically in set-up 1. A switch
parameter values when moving from 1 set-up between set-up 1 and set-up 2 during
to another during operation. Not changeable operation is now possible.
during operation-parameters can be identified
[0] * Not linked
by the label FALSE in the parameter lists in
[1] Set-up 1
chapter 5 Parameter Lists.
[2] Set-up 2
Parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to is used by
[3] Set-up 3
[9] Multi set-up in parameter 0-10 Active Set-up.
[4] Set-up 4
Multi set-up is used to move from 1 set-up to
another during operation (that is while the
motor runs).
Example:
Use multi set-up to shift from set-up 1 to set-up
2 while the motor runs. Program in set-up 1
first, then ensure that set-up 1 and set-up 2 are

26 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups 3.1.3 0-2* LCP Display

Array [5]
Define the variables shown in the LCP.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - View a list of all the set-ups linked by
255 ] parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to. The parameter NOTICE
has 1 index for each parameter set-up. The value For information on how to write display texts, refer to: 3 3
for each index shows which set-ups are linked to
• Parameter 0-37 Display Text 1.
that parameter set-up.
• Parameter 0-38 Display Text 2.
Index LCP value
• Parameter 0-39 Display Text 3.
0 {0}
1 {1,2}
2 {1,2} 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small
3 {3} Option: Function:
4 {4} Select a variable for display in line
1, left position.
Table 3.1 Set-up Link Example
[0] None No display value selected.

[9] Performance
0-14 Readout: Edit Set-ups / Channel
Monitor
Range: Function:
[15] Readout: actual
0* [-2147483648 - View the setting of parameter 0-11 Edit Set- setup
2147483647] up for each of the 4 different [37] Display Text 1
communication channels. When the
[38] Display Text 2
number is shown as a hex number, as it is
[39] Display Text 3
in the LCP, each number represents 1
[953] Profibus Warning
channel.
Word
Numbers 1–4 represent a set-up number; F
[1005] Readout Transmit
means factory setting; and A means active
Error Counter
set-up. The channels are, from right to left:
[1006] Readout Receive
LCP, FC bus, USB, HPFB1-5.
Error Counter
Example: The number AAAAAA21h means
the following: [1007] Readout Bus Off
Counter
• The frequency converter received
[1013] Warning Parameter
the setting set-up 2 via a fieldbus
[1230] Warning Parameter
channel. This selection is reflected
[1472] Legacy Alarm Word
in parameter 0-11 Edit Set-up.
[1473] Legacy Warning
• A user selected set-up 1 via the Word
LCP. [1474] Leg. Ext. Status
• All other channels are using the Word
active set-up. [1501] Running Hours
[1502] kWh Counter
0-15 Readout: actual setup [1580] Fan Running Hours
Range: Function: [1600] Control Word Present control word.
0* [0 - 255] Makes it possible to read out the active set-up, [1601] Reference [Unit] Total reference (sum of digital/
also when [9] Multi set-up is selected in analog/preset/bus/freeze reference/
parameter 0-10 Active Set-up. catch up and slow down) in
selected unit.

[1602] Reference % Total reference (sum of digital/

analog/preset/bus/freeze reference./
catch up and slow down) in
percent.

[1603] Status Word Present status word.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 27

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[1605] Main Actual Value Actual value as a percentage. [1633] Brake Energy Brake power transferred to an
[%] Average external brake resistor. The mean
[1606] Actual Position Actual position in position units power is calculated continuously for

3 3 selected in parameter 17-70 Position

Unit.
the most recent 120 s.

[1634] Heatsink Temp. Present heat sink temperature of

[1607] Target Position Active target position in position the frequency converter. The cutout
units selected in limit is 95 ±5 °C (203 ±9 °F);
parameter 17-70 Position Unit. cutting back in occurs at 70 ±5 °C
(203 ±9 °F).
[1608] Position Error Actual position PI error in position
units selected in [1635] Inverter Thermal Percentage load of the inverters.
parameter 17-70 Position Unit.
[1636] Inv. Nom. Current Nominal current of the frequency
[1609] Custom Readout converter.
[1610] Power [kW] Actual power consumed by the [1637] Inv. Max. Current Maximum current of the frequency
motor in kW. converter.
[1611] Power [hp] Actual power consumed by the [1638] SL Controller State State of the event executed by the
motor in hp. control.
[1612] Motor Voltage Voltage supplied to the motor. [1639] Control Card Temp. Temperature of the control card.
[1613] Frequency Motor frequency, that is the output [1644] Speed Error [RPM]
frequency from the frequency
[1645] Motor Phase U
converter in Hz.
Current
[1614] Motor current Phase current of the motor [1646] Motor Phase V
measured as effective value. Current

[1615] Frequency [%] Motor frequency, that is the output [1647] Motor Phase W
frequency from the frequency Current
converter in percent. [1648] Speed Ref. After
Ramp [RPM]
[1616] Torque [Nm] Actual motor torque in Nm.
[1650] External Reference Sum of the external reference as a
[1617] Speed [RPM] Speed in RPM (revolutions per percentage, that is the sum of
* minute), that is the motor shaft analog/pulse/bus.
speed in closed loop.
[1651] Pulse Reference Frequency in Hz connected to the
[1618] Motor Thermal Thermal load on the motor, digital inputs (18, 19 or 32, 33).
calculated by the ETR function.
[1652] Feedback[Unit] Reference value from programmed
[1619] KTY sensor digital inputs.
temperature
[1653] Digi Pot Reference
[1620] Motor Angle
[1657] Feedback [RPM]
[1621] Torque [%] High
[1660] Digital Input Signal states from the 6 digital
Res.
terminals (18, 19, 27, 29, 32, and
[1622] Torque [%] Present motor load as a percentage
33). There are 16 bits in total, but
of the rated motor torque.
only 6 of them are used. Input 18
[1623] Motor Shaft Power corresponds to the far left of the
[kW] used bits. Signal low = 0; Signal
[1624] Calibrated Stator high = 1.
Resistance [1661] Terminal 53 Switch Setting of input terminal 54.
[1625] Torque [Nm] High Setting Current = 0; Voltage = 1.
[1630] DC Link Voltage DC-link voltage in the frequency
[1662] Analog Input 53 Actual value at input 53 either as a
converter.
reference or protection value.
[1632] Brake Energy /s Present brake power transferred to
[1663] Terminal 54 Switch Setting of input terminal 54.
an external brake resistor.
Setting Current = 0; Voltage = 1.
Stated as an instant value.

28 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[1664] Analog Input 54 Actual value at input 54 either as [1689] Configurable
reference or protection value. Alarm/Warning
Word
[1665] Analog Output 42 Actual value at output 42 in mA.
[mA] Use parameter 6-50 Terminal 42
[1690] Alarm Word 1 or more alarms in a hex code.
3 3
Output to select the value to be [1691] Alarm Word 2 1 or more alarms in a hex code.
shown.
[1692] Warning Word 1 or more warnings in a hex code.
[1666] Digital Output [bin] Binary value of all digital outputs.
[1693] Warning Word 2 1 or more warnings in a hex code.
[1667] Freq. Input #29 Actual value of the frequency
[1694] Ext. Status Word 1 or more status conditions in a
[Hz] applied at terminal 29 as an
hex code.
impulse input.
[1836] Analog Input X48/2
[1668] Freq. Input #33 Actual value of the frequency
[mA]
[Hz] applied at terminal 33 as an
[1837] Temp. Input X48/4
impulse input.
[1838] Temp. Input X48/7
[1669] Pulse Output #27 Actual value of impulses applied to [1839] Temp. Input
[Hz] terminal 27 in digital output mode. X48/10
[1670] Pulse Output #29 Actual value of impulses applied to [1860] Digital Input 2
[Hz] terminal 29 in digital output mode. [3110] Bypass Status Word
[3111] Bypass Running
[1671] Relay Output [bin]
Hours
[1672] Counter A Application-dependent (for example
[4235] S-CRC Value
SLC control).
[4282] Safe Control Word
[1673] Counter B Application-dependent (for example
[4283] Safe Status Word
SLC control).
[4285] Active Safe Func.
[1675] Analog In X30/11 Actual value at input X30/11 either [4286] Safe Option Info
as reference or protection value. [9913] Idle time
[1676] Analog In X30/12 Actual value at input X30/12 either [9914] Paramdb requests
as reference or protection value. in queue
[9917] tCon1 time
[1677] Analog Out X30/8 Actual value at output X30/8 in mA.
[9918] tCon2 time
[mA] Use parameter 6-60 Terminal X30/8
[9919] Time Optimize
Output to select the value to be
Measure
shown.
[9920] HS Temp. (PC1)
[1678] Analog Out X45/1 [9921] HS Temp. (PC2)
[mA]
[9922] HS Temp. (PC3)
[1679] Analog Out X45/3
[9923] HS Temp. (PC4)
[mA]
[9924] HS Temp. (PC5)
[1680] Fieldbus CTW 1 Control word (CTW) received from
[9925] HS Temp. (PC6)
the bus master.
[9926] HS Temp. (PC7)
[1682] Fieldbus REF 1 Main reference value sent with [9927] HS Temp. (PC8)
control word from the bus master. [9951] PC Debug 0
[1684] Comm. Option Extended fieldbus communication [9952] PC Debug 1
STW option status word. [9953] PC Debug 2
[9954] PC Debug 3
[1685] FC Port CTW 1 Control word (CTW) received from
the bus master. [9955] PC Debug 4
[9956] Fan 1 Feedback
[1686] FC Port REF 1 Status word (STW) sent to the bus
[9957] Fan 2 Feedback
master.
[9958] PC Auxiliary Temp
[1687] Bus Readout [9959] Power Card Temp.
Alarm/Warning

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 29

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small Custom Readout (Value)

130BT105.12
P 16-09
Custom Readout
Select a variable for display in line 1, middle position. The Unit P 0-30
options are the same as those listed for parameter 0-20 Display Max value
P 0-32
Line 1.1 Small.
w)
0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small fl o
3 3 Select a variable for display in line 1, right position. The options
e.g
.s pe
e da
nd

s su
re
)
it ( re
are the same as those listed for parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Un (P )
e ar it er
Li n Un w
Small. tic ( Po
Min value ra ni
t
ad
Linear Qu cU
0-23 Display Line 2 Large bi
units only Cu Motor Speed
P 0-31
Select a variable for display in line 2. The options are the same 0 Motor Speed
as listed for parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small. High limit
P 4-13 (RPM)
P 4-14 (Hz)
0-24 Display Line 3 Large Illustration 3.4 Custom Readout
Select a variable for display in line 3.

0-25 My Personal Menu

The relation depends on the type of unit selected in
Range: Function: parameter 0-30 Custom Readout Unit:
Size [0 - Define up to 50 parameters to appear in the
related* 9999] Q1 Personal Menu, accessible via the [Quick Unit type Speed relation
Menu] key on the LCP. The parameters are Dimensionless
shown in the Q1 Personal Menu in the order Speed
they are programmed into this array
Flow, volume
parameter. Delete parameters by setting the
Flow, mass Linear
value to 0000.
Velocity
For example, this can be used to provide
Length
quick, simple access to just 1 or up to 50
Temperature
parameters, which require changing on a
regular basis (for example, for plant Pressure Quadratic
maintenance reasons) or by an OEM to Power Cubic
enable simple commissioning of their
equipment. Table 3.2 Speed Relations for Different Unit Types

3.1.4 0-3* LCP Custom Readout 0-30 Unit for User-defined Readout
Option: Function:
It is possible to customize the display elements for various It is possible to program a value to be shown in
purposes: the display of the LCP. The value has a linear,
• Custom readout. Value proportional to speed squared, or cubed relation to speed. This relation
(linear, squared, or cubed depending on unit depends on the unit selected (see Table 3.2). The
selected in parameter 0-30 Custom Readout Unit). actual calculated value can be read in
parameter 16-09 Custom Readout, and/or shown in
• Display text. Text string stored in a parameter.
the display by selecting [16-09] Custom Readout in
Custom readout parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small to
The calculated value to be shown is based on the settings parameter 0-24 Display Line 3 Large.
in:
[0] * None
• Parameter 0-30 Custom Readout Unit.
[1] %
• Parameter 0-31 Custom Readout Min Value (linear [5] PPM
only).
[10] 1/min
• Parameter 0-32 Custom Readout Max Value. [11] rpm

• Parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]. [12] Pulse/s

[20] l/s
• Parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz].
[21] l/min
• Actual speed. [22] l/h
[23] m³/s
[24] m³/min

30 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

0-30 Unit for User-defined Readout 0-32 Custom Readout Max Value
Option: Function: Range: Function:
[25] m³/h 100 Custom- [ par. 0-31 - This parameter sets the
[30] kg/s ReadoutUnit* 999999.99 maximum value to be shown
[31] kg/min CustomRea- when the speed of the motor
[32]
[33]
kg/h
t/min
doutUnit] has reached the set value for
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High
3 3
[34] t/h Limit [RPM] or
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High
[40] m/s
Limit [Hz] (depends on setting in
[41] m/min
parameter 0-02 Motor Speed
[45] m
Unit).
[60] °C
[70] mbar
0-33 Source for User-defined Readout
[71] bar
Option: Function:
[72] Pa
Enter the source of the user-defined
[73] kPa
readout.
[74] m WG
[80] kW [105] Torq relate to rated
[120] GPM [240] * Default Source
[121] gal/s
0-37 Display Text 1
[122] gal/min
Range: Function:
[123] gal/h
[124] CFM 0* [0 - Enter a text which can be viewed in the graphical
25] display by selecting [37] Display Text 1 in
[125] ft³/s
[126] ft³/min
• Parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small,
[127] ft³/h • Parameter 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small,
[130] lb/s • Parameter 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small,
[131] lb/min
• Parameter 0-23 Display Line 2 Large, or
[132] lb/h
[140] ft/s • Parameter 0-24 Display Line 3 Large.

[141] ft/min
0-38 Display Text 2
[145] ft
[160] °F
Range: Function:
[170] psi 0* [0 - Enter a text which can be viewed in the graphical
[171] lb/in² 25] display by selecting [38] Display Text 2 in

[172] in WG • Parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small,

[173] ft WG • Parameter 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small,
[176] kpsi • Parameter 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small,
[177] MPa
• Parameter 0-23 Display Line 2 Large, or
[178] kBar
[180] HP • Parameter 0-24 Display Line 3 Large.

0-31 Min Value of User-defined Readout 0-39 Display Text 3

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0 CustomRea- [ -999999.99 - This parameter sets the 0* [0 - Enter a text which can be viewed in the graphical
doutUnit* par. 0-32 minimum value of the custom- 25] display by selecting [39] Display Text 3 in
CustomRea- defined readout (occurs at zero • Parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small,
doutUnit] speed). Only possible to set
• Parameter 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small,
different from 0 when selecting
a linear unit in • Parameter 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small,
parameter 0-30 Unit for User- • Parameter 0-23 Display Line 2 Large, or
defined Readout. For quadratic
• Parameter 0-24 Display Line 3 Large.
and cubic units, the minimum
value is 0.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 31

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3.1.5 0-4* LCP Keypad 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP

Option: Function:
Enable, disable, and password protect individual keys on the Quick Menu, then define the password in
the LCP. parameter 0-65 Quick Menu Password.
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP [7] Enabled Resets the frequency converter without setting
3 3 Option: Function: without OFF it in Off mode.
[0] Disabled No effect when [Hand On] is pressed. Select [0] [8] Password Resets the frequency converter without setting
Disabled to avoid accidental start of the without OFF it in Off mode. A password is required when
frequency converter in hand-on mode. pressing [Reset] (see option [2] Password).
[1] Enabled The LCP switches to hand-on mode directly
when [Hand On] is pressed. 0-44 [Off/Reset] Key on LCP
Enable or disable the [Off/Reset] key.
[2] Password After pressing [Hand On] a password is
required. If parameter 0-40 [Hand on] Key on Option: Function:
LCP is included in My Personal Menu, define [0] Disabled
the password in parameter 0-65 Quick Menu [1] * Enabled
Password. Otherwise define the password in [2] Password
parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password.
0-45 [Drive Bypass] Key on LCP
[3] Hand Off/On When [Hand On] is pressed once, the LCP
Press [Off] and select [0] Disabled to avoid unintended stop of
switches to Off mode. When pressed again, the
the frequency converter. Press [Off] and select [2] Password to
LCP switches to hand-on mode.
avoid unauthorized bypass of the frequency converter. If
[4] Hand Off/On Same as option [3] Hand Off/On but a parameter 0-45 [Drive Bypass] Key on LCP is included in the Quick
w. Passw. password is required (see option [2] Password). Menu, define the password in parameter 0-65 Personal Menu
[9] Enabled, ref Password.
=0 Option: Function:
[0] Disabled Select to disable the
0-41 [Off] Key on LCP
key.
Option: Function:
[1] * Enabled
[0] Disabled Avoids accidental stop of the frequency converter.
[2] Password
[1] Enabled
[2] Password Avoids unauthorized stop. If parameter 0-41 [Off]
Key on LCP is included in the Quick Menu, then
3.1.6 0-5* Copy/Save
define the password in parameter 0-65 Quick Menu
Copy parameters from and to the LCP. Use these
Password.
parameters for saving and copying set-ups from 1
0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP frequency converter to another.

Option: Function: 0-50 LCP Copy

[0] Disabled Avoids accidental start of the frequency converter Option: Function:
in auto-on mode.
NOTICE
[1] Enabled This parameter cannot be
[2] Password Avoids unauthorized start in auto-on mode. If adjusted while the motor is
parameter 0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP is included in running.
the Quick Menu, then define the password in
parameter 0-65 Quick Menu Password. [0] * No copy
[1] All to LCP Copies all parameters in all set-ups
0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP from the frequency converter memory
Option: Function: to the LCP memory.
[0] Disabled No effect when [Reset] is pressed. Avoids [2] All from LCP Copies all parameters in all set-ups
accidental alarm reset. from the LCP memory to the frequency
[1] Enabled converter memory.
[2] Password Avoids unauthorized resetting. If [3] Size indep. from Copy only the parameters that are
parameter 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP is included in LCP independent of the motor size. The
latter selection can be used to program

32 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

0-50 LCP Copy 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password

Option: Function: Option: Function:
several frequency converters with the [0] * Full access Disables password defined in
same function without disturbing parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password.
motor data.
[1] LCP: Read Prevent unauthorized editing of Main Menu
[4] File from MCO to only parameters. 3 3
LCP
[2] LCP: No Prevent unauthorized viewing and editing of
[5] File from LCP to
access Main Menu parameters.
MCO
[6] Data from DYN to [3] Bus: Read Read-only functions for parameters on
LCP only fieldbus and/or FC standard bus.

[7] Data from LCP to [4] Bus: No No access to parameters is allowed via
DYN access fieldbus and/or FC standard bus.
[9] Safety Par. from
[5] All: Read only Read-only function for parameters on LCP,
LCP
fieldbus, or FC standard bus.
[10] Delete LCP copy Use to delete the copy after the
data transfer is complete. [6] All: No access No access from LCP, fieldbus, or FC standard
bus is allowed.
0-51 Set-up Copy
If [0] Full access is selected, parameter 0-60 Main Menu
Option: Function: Password, parameter 0-65 Personal Menu Password, and
[0] No copy No function. parameter 0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o Password are
* ignored.
[1] Copy to Copies all parameters in the present
set-up 1 programming set-up (defined in NOTICE
parameter 0-11 Programming Set-up) to set-up 1. A more complex password protection is available for
OEMs upon request.
[2] Copy to Copies all parameters in the present
set-up 2 programming set-up (defined in
parameter 0-11 Programming Set-up) to set-up 2. 0-65 Quick Menu Password
Range: Function:
[3] Copy to Copies all parameters in the present
set-up 3 programming set-up (defined in 200* [-9999 - Define the password for access to the Quick
parameter 0-11 Programming Set-up) to set-up 3. 9999] Menu via the [Quick Menu] key. If
parameter 0-66 Access to Quick Menu w/o
[4] Copy to Copies all parameters in the present
Password is set to [0] Full access, this parameter
set-up 4 programming set-up (defined in
is ignored.
parameter 0-11 Programming Set-up) to set-up 4.

[9] Copy to Copies the parameters in the present set-up to 0-66 Access to Quick Menu w/o Password
all each of the set-ups 1 to 4. If parameter 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password is set to [0]
Full access, then this parameter is ignored.

3.1.7 0-6* Password Option: Function:

[0] * Full access Disables the password defined in
0-60 Main Menu Password parameter 0-65 Quick Menu Password.

Range: Function: [1] LCP: Read only Prevents unauthorized editing of Quick
100* [-9999 - Define the password for access to the Main Menu parameters.
9999 ] Menu via the [Main Menu] key. If [3] Bus: Read only Read-only functions for Quick Menu
parameter 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o parameters on fieldbus and/or FC standard
Password is set to [0] Full access, this bus.
parameter is ignored.
[5] All: Read only Read-only function for Quick Menu
parameters on LCP, fieldbus, or frequency
converter standard bus.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 33

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

0-67 Bus Password Access

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 9999] Use this parameter to unlock the frequency
converter via fieldbus or MCT 10 Set-up Software.

3 3 0-68 Safety Parameters Password

Range: Function:
300* [0 - 9999]

0-69 Password Protection of Safety Parameters

Option: Function:
[0] * Disabled
[1] Enabled

34 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.2 Parameters: 1-** Load and Motor 1-00 Configuration Mode

Option: Function:
3.2.1 1-0* General Settings
[7] Extended Specific parameters in parameter groups 7-2*
PID Speed Process Ctrl. Feedb. to 7-5* Ext. Process PID Ctrl.
Define whether the frequency converter operates in speed
OL

3 3
mode or torque mode, and whether the internal PID
[8] Extended Specific parameters in parameter groups 7-2*
control should be active or not.
PID Speed Process Ctrl. Feedb. to 7-5* Ext. Process PID Ctrl.
1-00 Configuration Mode CL
Option: Function: [9] Positioning This option is available only with software
version 48.XX.
Select the application control principle to be
Activates the positioning mode.
used when a remote reference (that is via
analog input or fieldbus) is active. A remote [10] Synchroni- This option is available only with software
reference can only be active when zation version 48.XX.
parameter 3-13 Reference Site is set to [0] Activates the synchronization mode.
Linked to Hand/Auto or [1] Remote.

[0] Speed open Enables speed control (without feedback

1-01 Motor Control Principle
loop signal from motor) with automatic slip Option: Function:
compensation for almost constant speed at NOTICE
varying loads.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
Compensations are active, but can be
the motor is running.
disabled in parameter group 1-0* Load/Motor.
Set the speed control parameters in parameter
Select which motor control principle to
group 7-0* Speed PID Ctrl.
employ.
[1] Speed Enables speed closed-loop control with
[0] U/f Special motor mode, for parallel connected
closed loop feedback. Obtain full holding torque at 0
motors in special motor applications. When U/f
RPM.
is selected, the characteristic of the control
For increased speed accuracy, provide a
principle can be edited in parameter 1-55 U/f
feedback signal and set the speed PID control.
Characteristic - U and parameter 1-56 U/f
Set the speed control parameters in parameter
Characteristic - F.
group 7-0* Speed PID Ctrl.
[1] VVC+ Voltage vector control principle is suitable for
[2] Torque Enables torque closed-loop control with
most applications. The main benefit of VVC+
feedback. Only possible with Flux with motor
operation is that it uses a robust motor model.
feedback option, parameter 1-01 Motor Control
Principle. [2] Flux Flux vector control without encoder feedback,
sensorless for simple installation and robustness against
NOTICE sudden load changes.
This is valid for FC 302 only.
NOTICE
[3] Process Enables the use of process control in the This is valid for FC 302 only.
frequency converter. Set the process control
parameters in parameter groups 7-2* Process [3] Flux w/ High accuracy speed and torque control,
Ctrl. Feedb. and 7-3* Process PID Ctrl. motor feedb suitable for the most demanding applications.

[4] Torque open Enables the use of torque open loop in VVC+ NOTICE
loop mode (parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle). This is valid for FC 302 only.
Set the torque PID parameters in parameter
group 7-1* Torque PI Control.
The best shaft performance is normally achieved using
[5] Wobble Enables the wobble functionality in
either of the 2 flux vector control modes [2] Flux sensorless
parameter 30-00 Wobble Mode to
and [3] Flux with encoder feedback.
parameter 30-19 Wobble Delta Freq. Scaled.

[6] Surface Enables the surface winder control specific

Winder parameters in parameter groups 7-2* Process
Ctrl. Feedb. and 7-3* Process PID Ctrl.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 35

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

1-02 Flux Motor Feedback Source 1-03 Torque Characteristics

Option: Function: Option: Function:
NOTICE [5] Constant The function provides a constant power in the
Power field weakening area.
This parameter cannot be adjusted
The torque shape of motor mode is used as a
while the motor is running.
3 3 limit in the generator mode. This is done to limit
the power in generator mode that otherwise
Select the interface for which to receive
becomes considerably larger than in motor
feedback from the motor.
mode, due to the high DC-link voltage available
[1] * 24V encoder A and B channel encoder, which can be in generator mode.
connected to the digital input terminals
Pshaft W = ωmech rad/s × T Nm
32/33 only. Program Terminals 32/33 to
This relationship with the constant power is
No operation.
shown in Illustration 3.5:
[2] MCB 102 Encoder module option, which can be
T[Nm] P[W]

130BB655.10
configured in parameter group 17-1* Inc.
Tnom
Enc. Interface.
Pnom P
NOTICE
This is valid for FC 302 only. T
ωnom 2ωnom ω [rad/S]

[3] MCB 103 Optional resolver interface module, Illustration 3.5 Constant Power
which can be configured in parameter
group 17-5* Resolver Interface.

[4] MCO Encoder 1 Encoder interface 1 of the optional VLT®

1-04 Overload Mode
X56 Motion Control MCO 305.
Option: Function:
[5] MCO Encoder 2 Encoder interface 2 of the optional VLT®
X55 Motion Control MCO 305.
NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
[6] Analog Input 53 the motor is running.
[7] Analog Input 54
[8] Frequency input Use this parameter to configure the frequency
29 converter for either high or normal overload.
[9] Frequency input When selecting the frequency converter size,
33 always review the technical data in the
[11] MCB 15X operating guide or the design guide to know the
available output current.
1-03 Torque Characteristics
Option: Function: [0] * High Allows up to 160% over torque.
torque
NOTICE [1] Normal For oversized motor - allows up to 110% over
This parameter cannot be adjusted while torque torque.
the motor is running.
1-05 Local Mode Configuration
Select the torque characteristic required. Option: Function:
VT and AEO are both energy-saving operations.
Select which application configuration mode
[0] Constant Motor shaft output provides constant torque (parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode), that is
* torque under variable speed control. application control principle, to use when a
[1] Variable Motor shaft output provides variable torque local (LCP) reference is active. A local reference
torque under variable speed control. Set the variable can be active only when
torque level in parameter 14-40 VT Level. parameter 3-13 Reference Site is set to [0] Linked
to Hand/Auto or [2] Local. By default the local
[2] Auto Automatically optimizes energy consumption by reference is active in hand-on mode only.
Energy minimizing magnetization and frequency via
Optim. parameter 14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation [0] Speed
and parameter 14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency. open loop

36 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

1-05 Local Mode Configuration 1-07 Motor Angle Offset Adjust

Option: Function: Range: Function:
[1] Speed [4] Once with This option updates parameter 1-41 Motor Angle
Closed Store Offset automatically when the angle value is 0.
Loop This option is valid only for absolute feedback
[2] * As mode
par 1-00
devices. The function uses rotor detection and
then applies DC hold to make the offset
3 3
adjustment more accurate.
1-06 Clockwise Direction
Option: Function:
3.2.2 1-1* Special Settings
NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.
NOTICE
The parameters within this parameter group cannot be
adjusted while the motor is running.
This parameter defines the term clockwise
corresponding to the LCP direction arrow. Used for
easy change of direction of shaft rotation without 3.2.3 Asynchronous Motor Set-up
swapping motor wires.
Enter the following motor data. Find the information on
[0] * Normal The motor shaft turns in clockwise direction when
the motor nameplate.
the frequency converter is connected U⇒U, V⇒V,
and W⇒W to the motor.
1. Parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] or
[1] Inverse Motor shaft turns in counterclockwise direction parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP].
when the frequency converter is connected U⇒U,
2. Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage.
V⇒V, and W⇒W to the motor.
3. Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency.
1-07 Motor Angle Offset Adjust 4. Parameter 1-24 Motor Current.
Range: Function:
5. Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed.
NOTICE When running in flux control principle, or for optimum
This parameter is only valid for FC 302
performance in VVC+ mode, extra motor data is required to
and only in combination with a PM motor
set up the following parameters. Find the data in the
with feedback.
motor datasheet (this data is typically not available on the
motor nameplate). Run a complete automatic motor
0* [Manual] The functionality of this option depends on the adaptation (AMA) using parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor
type of the feedback device. This option sets the Adaptation (AMA) [1] Enable Complete AMA or enter the
frequency converter to use the motor angle parameters manually. Parameter 1-36 Iron Loss Resistance
offset entered in parameter 1-41 Motor Angle (Rfe) is always entered manually.
Offset, if an absolute feedback device is used.
1. Parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs).
If an incremental feedback device is selected, the
frequency converter automatically adjusts the 2. Parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr).
motor angle offset on the first start after power-
3. Parameter 1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1).
up, or when the motor data is changed.
4. Parameter 1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2).
[1] Auto The frequency converter adjusts the motor angle
offset automatically on the first start after power- 5. Parameter 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh).
up, or when the motor data is changed no 6. Parameter 1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe).
matter what feedback device is selected. This
means that options Manual and Auto are Application-specific adjustment when running VVC+
identical for the incremental encoder.
VVC+ is the most robust control mode. In most situations,
[2] Auto The frequency converter adjusts the motor angle it provides optimum performance without further
Every offset automatically on every start, or when the adjustments. Run a complete AMA for best performance.
Start motor data is changed.
Application-specific adjustment when running flux
[3] Off Selecting this option turns the automatic offset Flux control principle is the preferred control principle for
adjustment off. optimum shaft performance in dynamic applications.
Perform an AMA since this control mode requires precise

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 37

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

motor data. Depending on the application, further Programming motor data

adjustments may be required. After selecting a PM motor, the PM motor-related
parameters in parameter groups 1-2* Motor Data, 1-3* Adv.
See Table 3.3 for application-related recommendations.
Motor Data, and 1-4* Adv. Motor Data II are active.
Application Settings The necessary data is on the motor nameplate and on the
motor datasheet.
3 3 Low-inertia applications
High-inertia applications
Keep calculated values.
Parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Program the following parameters in the order listed:
Speed. 1. Parameter 1-24 Motor Current.
Increase current to a value between
2. Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed.
default and maximum depending on
the application. 3. Parameter 1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque.
Set ramp times matching the 4. Parameter 1-39 Motor Poles.
application. Too fast ramp up causes
an overcurrent or overtorque. Too
Run a complete AMA using parameter 1-29 Automatic
fast ramp down causes an
Motor Adaptation (AMA) [1] Enable Complete AMA.
overvoltage trip. If a complete AMA is not performed, configure the
High load at low speed Parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low following parameters manually:
Speed. 1. Parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)
Increase current to a value between Enter the line-to-common stator winding
default and maximum depending on resistance (Rs). If only line-line data is available,
the application. divide the line-line value by 2 to get the line-
No-load application Adjust parameter 1-18 Min. Current at common value.
No Load to achieve smoother motor 2. Parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld)
operation by reducing torque ripple Enter the line-to-common direct axis inductance
and vibration. of the PM motor.
Flux sensorless control Adjust parameter 1-53 Model Shift If only line-line data is available, divide the line-
principle only Frequency. line value by 2 to get the line-common value.
Example 1: If the motor oscillates at
3. Parameter 1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM.
5 Hz, and dynamics performance is
Enter the line-to-line back EMF of the PM Motor
required at 15 Hz, set
at 1000 RPM (RMS value). Back EMF is the voltage
parameter 1-53 Model Shift Frequency
generated by a PM motor when no frequency
to 10 Hz.
converter is connected and the shaft is turned
Example 2: If the application
externally. It is normally specified for nominal
involves dynamic load changes at
motor speed or for 1000 RPM measured between
low speed, reduce
2 lines. If the value is not available for a motor
parameter 1-53 Model Shift Frequency.
speed of 1000 RPM, calculate the correct value as
Observe the motor behavior to
follows:
make sure that the model shift
If back EMF is, for example, 320 V at 1800 RPM, it
frequency is not reduced too much.
can be calculated at 1000 RPM as follows:
Symptoms of inappropriate model
Back EMF = (Voltage/RPM)x1000 =
shift frequency are motor oscillations
(320/1800)x1000 = 178.
or frequency converter tripping.
Test motor operation
Table 3.3 Recommendations for Flux Applications 1. Start the motor at low speed (100–200 RPM). If
the motor does not turn, check the installation,
3.2.4 PM Motor Set-up general programming, and motor data.
2. Check if the start function in parameter 1-70 PM
NOTICE Start Mode fits the application requirements.
Valid for FC 302 only. Rotor detection
This function is the recommended selection for
This section describes how to set up a PM motor. applications where the motor starts from standstill, for
example pumps or conveyors. On some motors, a sound is
Initial programming steps heard when the frequency converter performs the rotor
To activate PM motor operation, select [1] PM, non-salient detection. This does not harm the motor.
SPM in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.

38 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

Parking 3.2.5 SynRM Motor Set-up with VVC+

This function is the recommended selection for
applications where the motor is rotating at slow speed, for This section describes how to set up a SynRM motor with
example windmilling in fan applications. VVC+.
Parameter 2-06 Parking Current and parameter 2-07 Parking
Time can be adjusted. Increase the factory setting of these
parameters for applications with high inertia. NOTICE 3 3
The SmartStart wizard covers the basic configuration of
Application-specific adjustment when running VVC+
SynRM motors.
VVC+ is the most robust control mode. In most situations,
it provides optimum performance without further
Initial programming steps
adjustments. Run a complete AMA for best performance.
To activate SynRM motor operation, select [5] Sync.
Start the motor at nominal speed. If the application does Reluctance in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
not run well, check the VVC+ PM settings. Table 3.4
Programming motor data
contains recommendations for various applications.
After performing the initial programming steps, the SynRM
Application Settings motor-related parameters in parameter groups 1-2* Motor
Low-inertia applications Increase parameter 1-17 Voltage filter
Data, 1-3* Adv. Motor Data, and 1-4* Adv. Motor Data II are
ILoad/IMotor<5 time const. by factor 5–10.
active.
Reduce parameter 1-14 Damping Use the motor nameplate data and the motor datasheet to
Gain. program the following parameters in the order listed:
Reduce parameter 1-66 Min. Current 1. Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency.
at Low Speed (<100%).
2. Parameter 1-24 Motor Current.
Low-inertia applications Keep the default values.
50>ILoad/IMotor>5 3. Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed.
High-inertia applications Increase parameter 1-14 Damping 4. Parameter 1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque.
ILoad/IMotor>50 Gain, parameter 1-15 Low Speed Filter
Run a complete AMA using parameter 1-29 Automatic
Time Const., and parameter 1-16 High
Motor Adaptation (AMA) [1] Enable Complete AMA or enter
Speed Filter Time Const.
the following parameters manually:
High load at low speed Increase parameter 1-17 Voltage filter 1. Parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs).
<30% (rated speed) time const.
Increase parameter 1-66 Min. Current 2. Parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld).
at Low Speed to adjust the starting 3. Parameter 1-44 d-axis Inductance Sat. (LdSat).
torque. 100% current provides
4. Parameter 1-45 q-axis Inductance Sat. (LqSat).
nominal torque as starting torque.
This parameter is independent of 5. Parameter 1-48 Inductance Sat. Point.
parameter 30-20 High Starting Torque Application-specific adjustments
Time [s] and parameter 30-21 High Start the motor at nominal speed. If the application does
Starting Torque Current [%]). Working not run well, check the VVC+ SynRM settings. Table 3.5
at a current level higher than 100% provides application-specific recommendations:
for a prolonged time can cause the
motor to overheat. Application Settings
Low-inertia applications Increase parameter 1-17 Voltage filter
Table 3.4 Recommendations for Various Applications
ILoad/IMotor<5 time const. by factor 5–10.
Reduce parameter 1-14 Damping
If the motor starts oscillating at a certain speed, increase
Gain.
parameter 1-14 Damping Gain. Increase the value in small
Reduce parameter 1-66 Min. Current
steps. Depending on the motor, this parameter can be set
at Low Speed (<100%).
to 10–100% higher than the default value.
Low-inertia applications Keep the default values.
Application-specific adjustment when running flux 50>ILoad/IMotor>5
Flux control principle is the preferred control principle for High-inertia applications Increase parameter 1-14 Damping
optimum shaft performance in dynamic applications. ILoad/IMotor>50 Gain, parameter 1-15 Low Speed Filter
Perform an AMA because this control mode requires Time Const., and parameter 1-16 High
precise motor data. Depending on the application, further Speed Filter Time Const.
adjustments may be required.
See chapter 3.2.3 Asynchronous Motor Set-up for application-
specific recommendations.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 39

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

Application Settings 1-10 Motor Construction

High-load at low speed Increase parameter 1-17 Voltage filter Option: Function:
<30% (rated speed) time const.
Increase parameter 1-66 Min. Current
NOTICE
at Low Speed to adjust the starting This option is valid for FC 302 only.
This option is fully functional in
3 3
torque. 100% current provides
nominal torque as starting torque. firmware version 7.31 and later.
This parameter is independent of Consult Danfoss before using this
parameter 30-20 High Starting Torque option in a frequency converter with
Time [s] and parameter 30-21 High an earlier firmware version.
Starting Torque Current [%]). Working
at a current level higher than 100%
1-11 Motor Model
for a prolonged time can cause the
motor to overheat. Option: Function:
Dynamic applications Increase parameter 14-41 AEO NOTICE
Minimum Magnetisation for highly This parameter is valid for FC 302 only.
dynamic applications. Adjusting
Automatically sets the factory values for the
parameter 14-41 AEO Minimum
selected motor. If the default value Std.
Magnetisation ensures a good
Asynchron is used, determine settings
balance between energy efficiency
manually according to the selection
and dynamics. Adjust
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
parameter 14-42 Minimum AEO
[1] Std. Default motor model when [0] Asynchron is
Frequency to specify the minimum
Asynchron selected in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
frequency at which the frequency
[2] Std. PM, non Selectable when [1] PM, non-salient SPM is
converter should use minimum
salient selected in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
magnetization.
[10] Danfoss Selectable when [1] PM, non-salient SPM is
Motor sizes less than 18 Avoid short ramp-down times.
OGD LA10 selected in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
kW (24 hp)
Only available for T4, T5 in 1.5–3 kW. Settings
Table 3.5 Recommendations for Various Applications are loaded automatically for this specific
motor.
If the motor starts oscillating at a certain speed, increase [11] Danfoss Selectable when [1] PM, non-salient SPM is
parameter 1-14 Damping Gain. Increase the damping gain OGD V210 selected in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
value in small steps. Depending on the motor, this Only available for T4, T5 in 0.75–3 kW.
parameter can be set to 10–100% higher than the default Settings are loaded automatically for this
value. specific motor.

1-10 Motor Construction 1-14 Damping Gain

Option: Function: Range: Function:
Select the motor design type. 140 [0 - The damping gain stabilizes the PM machine to
%* 250 %] run smoothly and with stability. The value of
[0] * Asynchron Use for asynchronous motors.
damping gain controls the dynamic performance
[1] PM, non Use for salient or non-salient PM motors. of the PM machine. High damping gain gives
salient SPM PM motors are divided into 2 groups, with high dynamic performance and low damping
either surface-mounted (SPM)/non-salient gain gives low dynamic performance. The
magnets or interior-mounted (IPM)/salient dynamic performance is related to the machine
magnets. data and load type. If the damping gain is too
NOTICE high or low, the control becomes unstable.

This option is valid for FC 302 only.

1-15 Low Speed Filter Time Const.
Range: Function:
[5] Sync. Use for synchronous reluctance motors.
Reluctance Size related* [0.01 - 20 This time constant is used below 10%
s] rated speed. Obtain quick control
through a short damping time
constant. However, if this value is too
short, the control becomes unstable.

40 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

1-16 High Speed Filter Time Const. 1-20 Motor Power [kW]
Range: Function: Range: Function:
Size related* [0.01 - 20 This time constant is used above 10% nominal rated output of the frequency
s] rated speed. Obtain quick control converter.
through a short damping time This parameter is visible in the LCP if
constant. However, if this value is too
short, the control becomes unstable.
parameter 0-03 Regional Settings is set to
[0] International.
3 3
1-17 Voltage filter time const. 1-21 Motor Power [HP]
Range: Function: Range: Function:
Size [0.001 - 1 Reduces the influence of high Size [ 0.09 - Enter the nominal motor power in hp
related* s] frequency ripple and system resonance related* 3000.00 according to the motor nameplate data.
in the calculation of supply voltage. hp] The default value corresponds to the
Without this filter, the ripples in the nominal rated output of the unit. This
currents can distort the calculated parameter is visible in the LCP if
voltage and affect the stability of the parameter 0-03 Regional Settings is [1] US.
system.
1-22 Motor Voltage
1-18 Min. Current at No Load Range: Function:
Range: Function: Size [ 10 - Enter the nominal motor voltage
0 %* [0 - 50 %] Adjust this parameter to achieve a smoother related* 1000 V] according to the motor nameplate
motor operation. data. The default value corresponds to
the nominal rated output of the unit.

3.2.6 1-2* Motor Data 1-23 Motor Frequency

Range: Function:
This parameter group contains input data from the
nameplate on the connected motor.
Size [20 - NOTICE
related* 1000
From software version 6.72 onwards,
Hz]
the output frequency of the frequency
NOTICE converter is limited to 590 Hz.
Changing the value of these parameters affects the
setting of other parameters.
Select the motor frequency value from the
motor nameplate data. If a value other than
NOTICE 50 Hz or 60 Hz is selected, adapt the load-
The following parameters have no effect when independent settings in parameter 1-50 Motor
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [1] PM, non- Magnetisation at Zero Speed to
salient SPM, [2] PM, salient IPM, [5] Sync. Reluctance: parameter 1-53 Model Shift Frequency. For

• Parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW]. 87 Hz operation with 230/400 V motors, set
the nameplate data for 230 V/50 Hz. To run at
• Parameter 1-21 Motor Power [HP]. 87 Hz, adapt parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High
• Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage. Limit [RPM] and parameter 3-03 Maximum
Reference.
• Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency.

1-24 Motor Current

1-20 Motor Power [kW] Range: Function:
Range: Function: Size [ 0.10 - Enter the nominal motor current
Size [ 0.09 - NOTICE related* 10000.00 A] value from the motor nameplate
related* 3000.00 data. The data is used for
This parameter cannot be adjusted
kW] calculating torque, motor overload
while the motor is running.
protection, and so on.

Enter the nominal motor power in kW

according to the motor nameplate data.
The default value corresponds to the

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 41

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

1-25 Motor Nominal Speed 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)

Range: Function: Option: Function:
Size [10 - 60000 Enter the nominal motor speed the best adjustment method (see parameter
related* RPM] value from the motor nameplate group 1-3* Adv. Motor Data).
data. The data is used for calculating For best performance, it is recommended to

3 3 motor compensations. nm,n = ns -

nslip.
obtain the advanced motor data from the
motor manufacturer to enter into
parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) through
1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque parameter 1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe).
Range: Function: Complete AMA cannot be performed on
permanent magnet motors.
Size [0.1 - Enter the value from the motor
related* 100000 nameplate data. The default value [2] Enable Performs a reduced AMA of the stator
Nm] corresponds to the nominal rated output. Reduced resistance Rs in the system only. This option is
This parameter is available when AMA available for standard asynchronous motors and
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set non-salient PM motors.
to [1] PM, non-salient SPM, that is the
parameter is valid for PM and non-salient NOTICE
SPM motors only.
• For the best adaptation of the frequency
converter, run AMA on a cold motor.
1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)
Option: Function: • AMA cannot be performed while the motor is
running.
NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while • AMA cannot run with a sine-wave filter
connected.
the motor is running.

The AMA function optimizes dynamic motor NOTICE

performance by automatically optimizing the It is important to set motor parameter group 1-2* Motor
advanced motor parameters Data correctly, since these form part of the AMA
(parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to algorithm. Perform an AMA to achieve optimum dynamic
parameter 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh)) at motor motor performance. It may take up to 10 minutes,
standstill. depending on the power rating of the motor.
Activate the AMA function by pressing [Hand
on] after selecting Enable Complete AMA or [2] NOTICE
Enable Reduced AMA. See also the section
Avoid generating external torque during AMA.
Automatic Motor Adaptation in the design guide.
After a normal sequence, the display reads:
Press [OK] to finish AMA. After pressing [OK], the NOTICE
frequency converter is ready for operation. If 1 of the settings in parameter group 1-2* Motor Data is
changed, parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to
[0] Off
parameter 1-39 Motor Poles, the advanced motor
*
parameters, return to default setting.
[1] Enable Performs
Complete • AMA of the stator resistance RS,
AMA
• The rotor resistance Rr,
NOTICE
AMA works problem-free on 1 motor size down, typically
• The stator leakage reactance X1, works on 2 motor sizes down, rarely works on 3 sizes
• The rotor leakage reactance X2, and down, and never work on 4 sizes down. Keep in mind
that the accuracy of the measured motor data is poorer
• The main reactance Xh.
when operating on motors smaller than the nominal
Do not select this option if an LC filter is used frequency converter size.
between the frequency converter and the
motor.
FC 301: The complete AMA does not include Xh
measurement for FC 301. Instead, the Xh value
is determined from the motor database. RS is

42 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.2.7 1-3* Adv. Motor Data 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)

Range: Function:
Parameters for advanced motor data. Ensure that the
motor data in parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to
NOTICE
parameter 1-39 Motor Poles matches the motor. The default The parameter value is updated
after each torque calibration if
settings are based on standard motor values. If the motor
parameters are not set correctly, a malfunction of the option [3] 1st start with store or 3 3
frequency converter system may occur. If the motor data is option [4] Every start with store is
unknown, running an AMA (automatic motor adaptation) is selected in parameter 1-47 Torque
recommended. See parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor Calibration.
Adaptation (AMA).
Parameter groups 1-3* Adv. Motor Data and 1-4* Adv. Motor
1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr)
Data II cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.
Range: Function:

NOTICE Size [ 0.0100 - NOTICE

related* 100.0000
A simple check of the X1 + Xh sum value is to divide the Parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr)
Ohm]
line-to-line motor voltage by the sqrt(3) and divide this does not have effect when
value by the motor no load current. [VL-L/sqrt(3)]/INL = parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is
X1 + Xh, see Illustration 3.6. These values are important set to [1] PM, non-salient SPM, [5]
to magnetize the motor properly. For high-pole motors, Sync. Reluctance.
it is highly recommended to perform this check.
Set the rotor resistance value Rr to
improve shaft performance using 1 of
P 1-34
130BA065.12

P 1-30 P 1-33
I1 Rs X1δ X'2δ these methods:
• Run an AMA on a cold motor.
The frequency converter
measures the value from the
U1 motor. All compensations are
P 1-36 P 1-35 P 1-31
RFe Xh R'r reset to 100%.

• Enter the Rr value manually.

Obtain the value from the motor
supplier.
Illustration 3.6 Motor Equivalent Diagram of an Asynchronous
Motor
• Use the Rr default setting. The
frequency converter establishes
the setting based on the motor
nameplate data.
1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)
Range: Function: 1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1)
Size [ 0.0140 - Set the line-to-common stator resistance Range: Function:
related* 140.0000 value. Enter the value from a motor Size [ 0.0400 - Set the stator leakage reactance of the
Ohm] datasheet or perform an AMA on a cold related* 400.0000 motor using 1 of these methods:
motor. Ohm] • Run an AMA on a cold motor.
NOTICE The frequency converter
measures the value from the
For salient PM motors:
motor.
AMA is not available.
If only line-line data is available, • Enter the X1 value manually.
divide the line-line value by 2 to Obtain the value from the
achieve the line-to-common (star motor supplier.
point) value. Alternatively, measure • Use the X1 default setting. The
the value with an ohmmeter. This frequency converter establishes
also takes the resistance of the the setting based on the motor
cable into account. Divide the nameplate data.
measured value by 2 and enter the
See Illustration 3.6.
result.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 43

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1) 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh)

Range: Function: Range: Function:
NOTICE measures the value from the
motor.
The parameter value is updated
after each torque calibration if 2. Enter the Xh value manually.
3 3 option [3] 1st start with store or Obtain the value from the
option [4] Every start with store is motor supplier.
selected in parameter 1-47 Torque 3. Use the Xh default setting.
Calibration. The frequency converter
establishes the setting based
NOTICE on the motor nameplate data.
This parameter is only relevant for
asynchronous motors. 1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe)
Range: Function:
Size [0 - Enter the equivalent iron loss
1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2)
related* 10000.000 resistance (RFe) value to compensate
Range: Function: Ohm] for iron loss in the motor.
Size [ 0.0400 - Set the rotor leakage reactance of the The RFe value cannot be found by
related* 400.0000 motor using 1 of these methods: performing an AMA.
Ohm] • Run an AMA on a cold motor. The RFe value is especially important in
The frequency converter torque control applications. If RFe is
measures the value from the unknown, leave parameter 1-36 Iron
motor. Loss Resistance (Rfe) on default setting.

• Enter the X2 value manually.

Obtain the value from the
1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld)
motor supplier. Range: Function:
Size [0.0 - Enter line-to-common direct axis
• Use the X2 default setting. The
frequency converter establishes related* 1000.0 inductance of the PM motor. Obtain the
the setting based on the motor mH] value from the permanent magnet motor
nameplate data. datasheet.
If only line-line data is available, divide
See Illustration 3.6.
the line-line value by 2 to achieve the
NOTICE line-common (star point) value. Alterna-
The parameter value is updated tively, measure the value with an
after each torque calibration if inductance meter. This also takes the
option [3] 1st start with store or inductance of the cable into account.
option [4] Every start with store is Divide the measured value by 2 and enter
selected in parameter 1-47 Torque the result.
Calibration. This parameter is only active when
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to
[1] PM, non-salient SPM (Permanent
NOTICE Magnet Motor) or [5] Sync. Reluctance.
This parameter is only relevant for For a selection with 1 decimal, use this
asynchronous motors. parameter. For a selection with 3 decimals,
use parameter 30-80 d-axis Inductance (Ld).
FC 302 only.
1-35 Main Reactance (Xh)
Range: Function: NOTICE
Size [ 1.0000 - Set the main reactance of the motor The parameter value is updated
related* 10000.0000 using 1 of these methods: after each torque calibration if
Ohm] 1. Run an AMA on a cold motor. option [3] 1st start with store or
The frequency converter option [4] Every start with store is
selected in parameter 1-47 Torque
Calibration.

44 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq) 1-41 Motor Angle Offset

Range: Function: Range: Function:
Size related* [0.000 - 1000 Set the value of the q-axis 0* [-32768 Enter the correct offset angle between the PM
mH] inductance. See the motor - 32767] motor and the index position (single-turn) of the
datasheet. attached encoder or resolver. The value range of

1-39 Motor Poles

0–32768 corresponds to 0–2 x pi (radians). To
obtain the offset angle value: After frequency
3 3
Range: Function: converter start-up, apply DC hold and enter the
value of parameter 16-20 Motor Angle into this
Size related* [2 - 128] Enter the number of motor poles.
parameter.
This parameter is only active when
Poles ~nn@ 50 Hz ~nn@ 60 Hz
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [1] PM,
2 2700–2880 3250–3460
non-salient SPM (Permanent Magnet Motor).
4 1350–1450 1625–1730
6 700–960 840–1153 1-44 d-axis Inductance Sat. (LdSat)
Table 3.6 Pole Number for Normal Speed Ranges Range: Function:
Size [0 - This parameter corresponds to the
Table 3.6 shows the pole number for normal speed ranges related* 1000 mH] inductance saturation of Ld. Ideally, this
of various motor types. Define motors designed for other parameter has the same value as
frequencies separately. The motor pole value is always an parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld). If
even number because it refers to the total pole number, the motor supplier provides an induction
not pairs of poles. The frequency converter creates the curve, enter the induction value at 200%
initial setting of parameter 1-39 Motor Poles based on of the nominal value.
parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency and parameter 1-25 Motor
Nominal Speed. 1-45 q-axis Inductance Sat. (LqSat)

1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM Range: Function:

Size [0 - This parameter corresponds to the
Range: Function:
related* 1000 mH] inductance saturation of Lq. Ideally, this
Size [0 - Set the nominal back EMF for the motor
parameter has the same value as
related* 9000 V] when running at 1000 RPM.
parameter 1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq). If
Back EMF is the voltage generated by a PM
the motor supplier provides an induction
motor when no frequency converter is
curve, enter the induction value at 200%
connected and the shaft is turned
of the nominal value.
externally. Back EMF is normally specified
for nominal motor speed or for 1000 RPM
1-46 Position Detection Gain
measured between 2 lines. If the value is
not available for a motor speed of 1000 Range: Function:
RPM, calculate the correct value as follows. 100 %* [20 - Adjusts the amplitude of the test pulse
If back EMF is for example 320 V at 1800 200 %] during position detection at start. Adjust
RPM, it can be calculated at 1000 RPM: this parameter to improve the position
Example measurement.
Back EMF 320 V at 1800 RPM. Back
EMF=(Voltage/ 1-47 Torque Calibration
RPM)*1000=(320/1800)*1000=178. Option: Function:
This parameter is only active when Use this parameter to optimize the torque estimate
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to in the full speed range. The estimated torque is
options that enable PM (permanent based on the shaft power, Pshaft = Pm - Rs x I2. Make
magnet) motors. sure that the Rs value is correct. The Rs value in this
formula is equal to the power loss in the motor, the
NOTICE cable, and the frequency converter. When this
When using PM motors, it is parameter is active, the frequency converter
recommended to use brake resistors. calculates the Rs value during power-up, ensuring
the optimal torque estimate and optimal
performance. Use this feature in cases when it is not
possible to adjust parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance
(Rs) on each frequency converter to compensate for

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 45

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

1-47 Torque Calibration 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed

Option: Function: This parameter is not visible on the LCP.
the cable length, frequency converter losses, and the Range: Function:
temperature deviation on the motor. Enter a value which is a percentage of the rated
[0] Off magnetizing current. If the setting is too low,
3 3 [1] 1st Calibrates at the first start-up after power-up and the torque on the motor shaft may be reduced.
start keeps this value until reset by a power cycle. Magn. current

130BA045.11
after
100%
pwr-up
Par.1-50
[2] Every Calibrates at every start-up, compensating for a
start possible change in motor temperature since last Par.1-51 Hz
start-up. The value is reset after a power cycle. Par.1-52 RPM

Illustration 3.7 Motor Magnetization

[3] 1st The frequency converter calibrates the torque at the
start first start-up after power-up. This option is used to
with update motor parameters:
store • Parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs). 1-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [RPM]
• Parameter 1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance This parameter is not visible on the LCP.
(X1).
Range: Function:
• Parameter 1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance Size [10 - NOTICE
(X2). related* 300 RPM]
Parameter 1-51 Min Speed Normal
• Parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld). Magnetising [RPM] has no effect
[4] Every The frequency converter calibrates the torque at when parameter 1-10 Motor
start every start-up, compensating for a possible change Construction=[1] PM, non-salient
with in motor temperature since last start-up. This option SPM.
store is used to update motor parameters:
• Parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs). Set the required speed for normal
magnetizing current. If the speed is set
• Parameter 1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance
lower than the motor slip speed,
(X1).
parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at
• Parameter 1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance Zero Speed and parameter 1-51 Min Speed
(X2). Normal Magnetising [RPM] are of no
• Parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld). significance.
Use this parameter along with
1-48 Inductance Sat. Point parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at
Range: Function: Zero Speed. See Table 3.6.

Size related* [1 - 500 %] Inductance saturation point.

1-52 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [Hz]
Range: Function:
3.2.8 1-5* Load Indep. Setting Size [0 - Set the required frequency for normal
related* 250.0 Hz] magnetizing current. If the frequency is
1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed set lower than the motor slip frequency,
This parameter is not visible on the LCP. parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at
Zero Speed is inactive.
Range: Function:
Use this parameter along with
100 % [0 - NOTICE parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at
* 300 %]
Parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed. See Illustration 3.7.
Zero Speed has no effect when
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1]
PM, non-salient SPM.

Use this parameter along with

parameter 1-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetising
[RPM] to obtain a different thermal load on the
motor when running at low speed.

46 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

1-53 Model Shift Frequency 1-53 Model Shift Frequency

Range: Function: Range: Function:
Size [4 - NOTICE fN,M x 0.1 fN,M x 0.125

130BA147.10
related* 18.0
This parameter cannot be adjusted
Hz] Variable
while the motor is running. current Flux model 2
model
3 3
Flux model shift P 1-53 fout
Enter the frequency value for shift between 2 Illustration 3.9 Parameter 1-00 Configu-
models for determining motor speed. Select ration Mode = [0] Speed open loop,
the value based on settings in parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle = [2]
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode and Flux sensorless
parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle.

There are 2 options:

• Shift between flux model 1 and flux
1-54 Voltage reduction in fieldweakening
model 2, or
Range: Function:
• Shift between variable current mode
and flux model 2. 0 V* [0 - 100 The value of this parameter reduces the
V] maximum voltage available for the flux of the
NOTICE motor in field weakening, providing more
This is valid for FC 302 only. voltage for torque. Increasing the value
increases the risk of stalling at high speed.
Flux model 1 – flux model 2
This model is used when 1-55 U/f Characteristic - U
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to [1] Array [6]
Speed closed loop or [2] Torque, and Range: Function:
parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is set to
Size [0 - Enter the voltage at each frequency point
[3] Flux w/motor feedback. With this parameter,
related* 1000 V] to manually form a U/f characteristic
it is possible to make an adjustment of the
matching the motor.
shifting point where the frequency converter
The frequency points are defined in
changes between flux model 1 and flux model
parameter 1-56 U/f Characteristic - F.
2, which is useful in some sensitive speed and
This parameter is an array parameter [0-5]
torque control applications.
and is only accessible when
fN,M x 0.1 fN,M x 0.125 parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is
130BA146.11

set to [0] U/f.

Flux model 1 Flux model 2

1-56 U/f Characteristic - F

P 1-53 fout Array [6]
Illustration 3.8 Parameter 1-00 Configu- Range: Function:
ration Mode = [1] Speed closed loop or [2]
Size [0 - Enter the frequency points to manually
Torque and parameter 1-01 Motor Control
related* 1000.0 Hz] form a U/f characteristic matching the
Principle = [3] Flux w/motor feedback
motor.
The voltage at each point is defined in
parameter 1-55 U/f Characteristic - U.
Variable current - flux model - sensorless This parameter is an array parameter [0–
This model is used when 5] and is only accessible when
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to [0] parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is
Speed open loop and parameter 1-01 Motor set to [0] U/f.
Control Principle is set to [2] Flux sensorless.
In speed open loop in flux mode, the speed is
determined from the current measurement.
Below fnorm x 0.1, the frequency converter
runs on a variable current model. Above fnorm
x 0.125 the frequency converter runs on a flux
model.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 47

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

Motor Voltage 1-59 Flying Start Test Pulses Frequency

130BA166.10
Par 1-55 [x]
Range: Function:
Size [0 - Asynchronous motor: Set the frequency of
1-55[5]
related* 500 %] the flying start test pulses that are used to
1-55[4]
detect the motor direction. For

3 3 1-55[3]
asynchronous motors, the value 100%
means that the slip is doubled. Increase this
1-55[2] value to reduce the generated torque.
For synchronous motors, this value is the
1-55[1]
1-55[0] percentage nm,n of the free-running motor.
Above this value, flying start is always
1-56 1-56 1-56 1-56 1-56 1-56
[0] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] performed. Below this value, the start mode
is selected in parameter 1-70 PM Start Mode
Output Frequency
Par 1-56 [x]
Illustration 3.10 U/f Characteristic
3.2.9 1-6* Load Depend. Setting

1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation

1-57 Torque Estimation Time Constant
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
100 %* [0 - Enter the % value to compensate voltage in
150 ms* [50 - 1000 NOTICE 300 %] relation to load when the motor is running
ms]
This parameter is only valid with at low speed and obtain the optimum U/f
software version 48.XX. characteristic. The motor size determines the
frequency range within which this parameter
Enter the time constant for the torque is active.
estimation below model change point in
flux sensorless control principle. Motor size Changeover
0.25 - 7.5 kW <10 Hz
1-58 Flying Start Test Pulses Current
Range: Function: Um

130BA046.11
Size [0 - NOTICE 100%
Par.1-60 Par.1-61

related* 200 %]
This parameter is only available in
VVC+.

NOTICE 60%

This parameter has effect on PM

motors only.

Sets the current level for the flying start test

pulses that are used to detect the motor
0%
direction. 100% means Im,n. Adjust the value fout
Changeover
to be high enough to avoid noise influence,
but low enough to avoid affecting the Illustration 3.11 Changeover
accuracy (current must be able to drop to 0
before the next pulse). Reduce the value to
reduce the generated torque. 1-61 High Speed Load Compensation
Default is 30% for asynchronous motors, but Range: Function:
may vary for PM motors. For adjusting PM
100 %* [0 - Enter the % value to compensate voltage in
motors, the value tunes for back EMF and d-
300 %] relation to load when the motor is running
axis inductance of the motor.
at high speed and obtain the optimum U/f
characteristic. The motor size determines the
frequency range within which this parameter
is active.

48 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

Motor size Changeover 1-65 Resonance Dampening Time Constant

0.25 - 7.5 kW >10 Hz Range: Function:
Table 3.7 Changeover Frequency 5 ms* [5 - 50 NOTICE
ms]
Parameter 1-65 Resonance Dampening
1-62 Slip Compensation Time Constant has no effect when
Range: Function: parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] 3 3
PM, non-salient SPM.
Size [-500 Enter the % value for slip compensation to
related* - compensate for tolerances in the value of
500 %] nM,N. Slip compensation is calculated automat- Set parameter 1-64 Resonance Dampening and
ically, that is on the basis of the nominal parameter 1-65 Resonance Dampening Time
motor speed nM,N. Constant to help eliminate high frequency
This function is not active when resonance problems. Enter the time constant
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to that provides the best dampening.
[1] Speed closed loop or [2] Torque torque
control with speed feedback or when 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed
parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is set to Range: Function:
[0] U/f special motor mode. Size [1 - Enter the minimum motor current at low
related* 200 % speed, see parameter 1-53 Model Shift
1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant ] Frequency. Increasing this current improves
Range: Function: motor torque at low speed.
Size [0.05 - NOTICE Parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed is
enabled when parameter 1-00 Configuration
related* 5 s]
Parameter 1-63 Slip Compensation
Mode [0] Speed open loop only. The frequency
Time Constant has no effect when
converter runs with constant current through
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction =
motor for speeds below 10 Hz.
[1] PM, non-salient SPM.
For speeds above 10 Hz, the motor flux
model in the frequency converter controls
Enter the slip compensation reaction the motor. Parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor
speed. A high value results in slow Mode and/or parameter 4-17 Torque Limit
reaction, and a low value results in quick Generator Mode automatically adjust
reaction. If low-frequency resonance parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed. The
problems arise, use a longer time setting. parameter with the highest value adjusts
parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed. The
1-64 Resonance Dampening current setting in parameter 1-66 Min. Current
Range: Function: at Low Speed is composed of the torque
100 [0 - NOTICE generating current and the magnetizing
%* 500 %] current.
Parameter 1-64 Resonance Dampening has
Example: Set parameter 4-16 Torque Limit
no effect when parameter 1-10 Motor
Motor Mode to 100% and set
Construction=[1] PM, non-salient SPM.
parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode to
60%. Parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed
Enter the resonance damping value. Set
automatically adjusts to about 127%,
parameter 1-64 Resonance Dampening and
depending on the motor size.
parameter 1-65 Resonance Dampening Time
Constant to help eliminate high frequency
1-67 Load Type
resonance problems. To reduce resonance
This parameter is valid for FC 302 only.
oscillation, increase the value of
parameter 1-64 Resonance Dampening. Option: Function:
[0] * Passive load For conveyors, fan, and pump applications.

[1] Active load Use for hoisting applications. This option

allows the frequency converter to ramp up at
0 RPM. When [1] Active Load is selected, set
parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed to a
level which corresponds to maximum torque.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 49

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

1-68 Motor Inertia 1-72 Start Function

Range: Function: Option: Function:
0 kgm²* [0.0000 - Enter the motor inertia to obtain an Select the start function during start delay.
10000.0000 improved torque readout and This parameter is linked to
kgm²] therefore a better estimate of the parameter 1-71 Start Delay.

3 3 mechanical torque on the shaft.

Available in flux control principle
[0] DC Hold/ Energizes motor with a DC hold current
delay time (parameter 2-00 DC Hold Current) during the
only.
start delay time.

1-69 System Inertia [1] DC Brake/ Energizes motor with a DC brake current
delay time (parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current) during the
Range: Function:
start delay time.
Size [0000 - NOTICE
related* 10000.0000 [2] Coast/delay Motor coasted during the start delay time
Valid for FC 302 only.
kgm²] * time (inverter off).
This parameter cannot be
adjusted while motor is [3] Start speed Only possible with VVC+.
running. cw Connect the function described in
parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] and
Active in flux open loop only. Used parameter 1-76 Start Current in the start delay
to compute the acceleration torque time.
at low speed. Used in the torque Regardless of the value applied by the
limit controller. reference signal, the output speed applies the
setting of the start speed in
parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] or
3.2.10 1-7* Start Adjustments parameter 1-75 Start Speed [Hz], and the
output current corresponds to the setting of
1-70 PM Start Mode the start current in parameter 1-76 Start
Current. This function is typically used in
Select the start-up mode. This is done to initialize the VVC+
hoisting applications without counterweight
control core for previously free-running motor. Both selections
and especially in applications with a cone-
estimate the speed and angle. Active for PM and SynRM motors
motor where the start is clockwise, followed
in VVC+ only.
by rotation in the reference direction.
Option: Function:
[4] Horizontal Only possible with VVC+.
[0] * Rotor Detection Estimates the electrical angle of the
operation For obtaining the function described in
rotor and uses this as a starting point.
parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] and
Standard selection for VLT®
parameter 1-76 Start Current during the start
AutomationDrive applications.
delay time. The motor rotates in the reference
[1] Parking The parking function applies DC current direction. If the reference signal equals zero
across the stator winding and rotates (0), parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] is ignored
the rotor to electrical 0 position and the output speed equals zero (0). The
(typically selected for HVAC output current corresponds to the setting of
applications). Parking current and time the start current in parameter 1-76 Start
are configured in parameter 2-06 Parking Current.
Current and parameter 2-07 Parking Time.
[5] VVC+/Flux For the function described in
[2] Rotor Detect w/ clockwise parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] only. The
Parking start current is calculated automatically. This
function uses the start speed in the start delay
1-71 Start Delay
time only. Regardless of the value set by the
Range: Function: reference signal, the output speed equals the
0 s* [0 - 25.5 s] This parameter refers to the start function setting of the start speed in
selected in parameter 1-72 Start Function. parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM]. [3] Start
Enter the time delay required before speed/current clockwise and [5] VVC+/Flux
commencing acceleration. clockwise are typically used in hoisting
applications. [4] Start speed/current in reference
direction is particularly used in applications

50 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

1-72 Start Function 1-74 Start Speed [RPM]

Option: Function: Range: Function:
with counterweight and horizontal movement. Size [0 - Set a motor start speed. After the start
related* 600 signal, the output speed leaps to set value.
RPM] Set the start function in
[6] Hoist Mech. For utilizing mechanical brake control
Brake Rel functions (parameter 2-24 Stop Delay to
parameter 1-72 Start Function to [3] Start
speed cw, [4] Horizontal operation, or [5] VVC
3 3
parameter 2-28 Gain Boost Factor). This
+ /Flux clockwise, and set a start delay time
parameter is only active in flux control
principle, in a mode with motor feedback or in parameter 1-71 Start Delay.
sensorless mode.
1-75 Start Speed [Hz]
[7] VVC+/Flux
Range: Function:
counter-cw
Size [0 - This parameter can be used for hoist
1-73 Flying Start related* 500.0 applications (cone rotor). Set a motor start
Option: Function: Hz] speed. After the start signal, the output
speed leaps to the set value. Set the start
NOTICE function in parameter 1-72 Start Function to
This parameter cannot be adjusted while [3] Start speed cw, [4] Horizontal operation, or
the motor is running.
[5] VVC+/Flux clockwise, and set a start delay
time in parameter 1-71 Start Delay.
This function makes it possible to catch a
motor which is spinning freely due to a mains 1-76 Start Current
dropout.
Range: Function:
[0] Disabled No function 0 [0 - Some motors, for example cone rotor motors,
[1] Enabled Enables the frequency converter to catch and A* par. need extra current/starting speed to disengage
control a spinning motor. 1-24 A] the rotor. To obtain this boost, set the required
When parameter 1-73 Flying Start is enabled, current in parameter 1-76 Start Current. Set
parameter 1-71 Start Delay and parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM]. Set
parameter 1-72 Start Function have no function. parameter 1-72 Start Function to [3] Start speed cw
When parameter 1-73 Flying Start is enabled, or [4] Horizontal operation, and set a start delay
parameter 1-58 Flying Start Test Pulses Current time in parameter 1-71 Start Delay.
and parameter 1-59 Flying Start Test Pulses This parameter can be used for hoist applications
Frequency are used to specify the conditions for (cone rotor).
the flying start.

[2] Enabled
3.2.11 1-8* Stop Adjustments
Always
[3] Enabled Ref.
1-80 Function at Stop
Dir.
[4] Enab. Option: Function:
Always Ref. Select the frequency converter function
Dir. after a stop command or after the speed is
ramped down to the settings in
NOTICE parameter 1-81 Min Speed for Function at
This function is not recommended for hoisting Stop [RPM].
applications.
[0] Coast Leaves motor in free mode. The motor is
For power levels above 55 kW, flux mode must be used
* disconnected from the frequency converter.
to achieve the best performance.
[1] DC hold Energizes the motor with a DC hold current
(see parameter 2-00 DC Hold Current).
NOTICE
To obtain the best flying start performance, the [2] Motor check Checks if a motor has been connected.
advanced motor data, parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance [3] Pre- Builds up a magnetic field while the motor
(Rs) to parameter 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh), must be magnetizing is stopped. This allows the motor to
correct. produce torque quickly at subsequent start
commands (asynchronous motors only). This

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 51

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

1-80 Function at Stop 1-83 Precise Stop Function

Option: Function: Option: Function:
premagnetizing function does not help the NOTICE
very first start command.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
Two different solutions are available to the motor is running.
3 3 premagnetize the machine for the first start Valid for FC 302 only.
command:
1. Start the frequency converter with [0] Precise Only optimal when the operational speed, for
a 0 RPM reference and wait 2-4 * ramp example the operational speed of a conveyor belt,
rotor time constants before stop is constant. This is an open-loop control. Achieves
increasing the speed reference. high repetitive precision at the stop point.
2. Set parameter 1-71 Start Delay to [1] Cnt stop Counts the number of pulses, typically from an
the required premagnetizing time with encoder, and generates a stop signal after a pre-
(2–4 rotor time constants. See the reset programmed number of pulses, defined in
time constants description further parameter 1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value, has
in this section). been received at terminal 29 or terminal 33.
2.1 Set parameter 1-72 Start This is direct feedback with one-way closed-loop
Function to either [0] DC control.
hold or [1] DC Brake. The counter function is activated (starts timing) at
the edge of the start signal (when it changes from
2.2 Set the DC hold or DC
stop to start). After each precise stop, the number
brake current magnitude
of pulses counted during ramp down to 0 RPM is
(parameter 2-00 DC Hold
reset.
Current or
parameter 2-01 DC Brake [2] Cnt stop Same as [2] Cnt stop with reset but the number of
Current) to be equal to w/o pulses counted during ramp down to 0 RPM is
I_pre-mag = Unom/(1.73 reset deducted from the counter value entered in
x Xh) parameter 1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value.
Sample rotor time constants = This reset function can be used to compensate for
(Xh+X2)/(6.3*Freq_nom*Rr) the extra distance done during ramping down
1 kW = 0.2 s and to reduce the impacts of gradual wear of
10 kW = 0.5 s mechanical parts.
100 kW = 1.7 s [3] Speed Stops at precisely the same point, regardless of
1000 kW = 2.5 s comp the present speed. The stop signal is delayed
[4] DC Voltage U0 When the motor is stopped, the stop internally when the present speed is lower than
parameter 1-55 U/f Characteristic - U [0] the maximum speed (set in parameter 4-19 Max
defines the voltage at 0 Hz. Output Frequency).
The delay is calculated on the basis of the
[5] Coast at low When the reference is below reference speed of the frequency converter and
reference parameter 1-81 Min Speed for Function at not on the basis of the actual speed. Make sure
Stop [RPM], the motor is disconnected from that the frequency converter has ramped up
the frequency converter. before activating the speed compensated stop.
[6] Motor check, [4] Com cnt Same as Speed comp stop but after each precise
alarm stop stop, the number of pulses counted during ramp
w/rst down to 0 RPM is reset.
1-81 Min Speed for Function at Stop [RPM]
Range: Function: [5] Comp Same as Speed comp stop but the number of
cnt stop pulses counted during ramp down to 0 RPM is
Size related* [0 - 600 Set the speed at which to activate
w/o r deducted from the counter value entered in
RPM] parameter 1-80 Function at Stop.
parameter 1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value.
1-82 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz] This reset function can be used to compensate for
the extra distance done during ramping down
Range: Function:
and to reduce the impacts of gradual wear of
Size related* [ 0 - 20.0 Set the output frequency at which to mechanical parts.
Hz] activate parameter 1-80 Function at
Stop. The precise stop functions are advantageous in
applications where high precision is required.

52 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

If using a standard stop command, the accuracy is 3.2.12 1-9* Motor Temperature
determined by the internal task time. That is not the case
when using the precise stop function. It eliminates the task 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection
time dependence and increases the accuracy substantially.
Option: Function:
The frequency converter tolerance is normally given by its
task time. However, by using its special precise stop Motor thermal protection can be implemented
function, the tolerance is independent of the task time using a range of techniques:
• Via a PTC sensor in the motor
3 3
because the stop signal immediately interrupts the
execution of the frequency converter program. The precise windings connected to 1 of the
stop function gives a highly reproducible delay from the analog or digital inputs
stop signal is given until the ramping down starts. Run a (parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source).
test to find this delay as it is a sum of sensor, PLC, See chapter 3.2.13 PTC Thermistor
frequency converter, and mechanical parts. Connection.

To ensure optimum accuracy, there should be at least 10 • Via a KTY sensor in the motor
winding connected to an analog
cycles during ramping down, see:
• Parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time. input (parameter 1-96 Thermistor
Sensor Resource). See
• Parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time. chapter 3.2.14 KTY Sensor Connection.
• Parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time. • Via calculation (ETR = Electronic
• Parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time. Thermal Relay) of the thermal load,
based on the actual load and time.
The precise stop function is set up here and enabled from
The calculated thermal load is
DI at terminal 29 or terminal 33.
compared with the rated motor
1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value current IM,N and the rated motor
Range: Function: frequency fM,N. See chapter 3.2.15 ETR
and chapter 3.2.16 ATEX ETR.
100000* [0 - Enter the counter value to be used in
999999999] the integrated precise stop function, • Via a mechanical thermal switch
parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function. (Klixon type). See
The maximum permissible frequency at chapter 3.2.17 Klixon.
terminal 29 or 33 is 110 kHz. For the North American market: The ETR
NOTICE functions provide class 20 motor overload
protection in accordance with NEC.
Not used for selections [0] Precise
ramp stop and [3] Speed comp stop [0] No Continuously overloaded motor when no
in parameter 1-83 Precise Stop protection warning or trip of the frequency converter is
Function. required.

[1] Thermistor Activates a warning when the connected

warning thermistor or KTY sensor in the motor reacts
1-85 Precise Stop Speed Compensation Delay
in the event of motor overtemperature.
Range: Function:
[2] Thermistor Stops (trips) the frequency converter when
10 ms* [0 - Enter the delay time for sensors, PLCs, and so
trip connected thermistor or KTY sensor in the
100 ms] on for use in parameter 1-83 Precise Stop
motor reacts in the event of motor overtem-
Function. In speed compensated stop mode,
perature.
the delay time at different frequencies has a
major influence on the stop function. The thermistor cutout value must be more
than 3 kΩ.
NOTICE
Integrate a thermistor (PTC sensor) in the
Not used for selections [0] Precise ramp
motor for winding protection.
stop, [1] Cnt stop with reset, and [2] Cnt
stop w/o reset in parameter 1-83 Precise [3] ETR Calculates the load when set-up 1 is active
Stop Function. warning 1 and activates a warning on the display when
the motor is overloaded. Program a warning
signal via 1 of the digital outputs.

[4] ETR trip 1 Calculates the load when set-up 1 is active

and stops (trips) the frequency converter when
the motor is overloaded. Program a warning
signal via 1 of the digital outputs. The signal

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 53

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

1-90 Motor Thermal Protection Using a digital input and 10 V as supply:

Option: Function: Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor
temperature is too high.
appears in the event of a warning and if the
Parameter set-up:
frequency converter trips (thermal warning).
• Set parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2]
[5] ETR Thermistor Trip.
3 3 warning 2
• Set parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source to [6] Digital
[6] ETR trip 2
Input.
[7] ETR

+10V
warning 3

130BA152.10
[8] ETR trip 3 39 42 50 53 54 55
[9] ETR
warning 4
[10] ETR trip 4 OFF

[20] ATEX ETR Activates the thermal monitoring function for 12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37

Ex-e motors for ATEX. Enables

parameter 1-94 ATEX ETR cur.lim. speed
reduction, parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR interpol.
ON
points freq., and parameter 1-99 ATEX ETR R
PTC / Thermistor <800 Ω >2.7 kΩ
interpol points current.
Illustration 3.13 PTC Thermistor Connection - Digital Input
[21] Advanced
ETR

NOTICE Using an analog input and 10 V as supply:

Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor
If [20] ATEX ETR is selected, follow the instructions in the
temperature is too high.
dedicated chapter of the design guide and the
Parameter set-up:
instructions provided by the motor manufacturer.
• Set parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2]
Thermistor Trip.
NOTICE
If [20] ATEX ETR is selected, set parameter 4-18 Current
• Set parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source to [2] Analog
Input 54.
Limit to 150%.
+10V

130BA153.11
3.2.13 PTC Thermistor Connection 39 42 50 53 54 55
OFF

R
175HA183.11

(Ω)

ON
PTC / Thermistor <3.0 k Ω R
>3.0 k Ω
4000
Illustration 3.14 PTC Thermistor Connection - Analog Input
3000

1330
Input Supply voltage Threshold
digital/analog cutout values
550
Digital 10 V <800 Ω⇒2.7 kΩ
Analog 10 V <3.0 kΩ⇒3.0 kΩ
250
Table 3.8 Threshold Cutout Values

 [°C]
NOTICE
Check that the selected supply voltage follows the
-20 °C  nominal -5 °C  nominal +5 °C
 nominal specification of the used thermistor element.
Illustration 3.12 PTC Profile

54 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.2.14 KTY Sensor Connection NOTICE

If the temperature of the motor is utilized through a
NOTICE thermistor or KTY sensor, the PELV is not complied with
FC 302 only. if there are short circuits between motor windings and
the sensor. Put extra isolation on the sensor to comply
KTY sensors are used especially in permanent magnet
servo motors (PM motors) for dynamic adjusting of motor
with PELV.
3 3
parameters as stator resistance (parameter 1-30 Stator 3.2.15 ETR
Resistance (Rs)) for PM motors and also rotor resistance
(parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr)) for asynchronous The calculations estimate the need for a lower load at
motors, depending on winding temperature. The lower speed due to less cooling from the fan incorporated
calculation is: in the motor.

Rs = Rs20° C x (1 + αcu x ΔT) Ω where αcu = 0 . 00393

175ZA052.12
t [s]

KTY sensors can be used for motor protecting 2000

(parameter 1-97 Thermistor Threshold level). 1000
600
FC 302 can handle 3 types of KTY sensors, defined in 500
parameter 1-95 Thermistor Sensor Type. The actual sensor 400
300
temperature can be read out from
200
parameter 16-19 Thermistor Sensor Temperature. fOUT = 1 x f M,N(par. 1-23)
100
fOUT = 2 x f M,N
60
4500 50 fOUT = 0.2 x f M,N
130BB917.10

40
4000 30
20 IM
3500 10
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 IMN(par. 1-24)
3000
Illustration 3.16 ETR Profile
Resistance [Ohm]

2500

2000
3.2.16 ATEX ETR
1500

The VLT® PTC Thermistor Card MCB 112 offers ATEX-

1000
approved monitoring of motor temperature. Alternatively,
an external ATEX-approved PTC protection device can be
500
used.
0

NOTICE
-25 0 25 50 75 100 125 150
Temperature [°C]

KTY type 1 KTY type 2 KTY type 3

Only use ATEX Ex-e-approved motors for this function.
See motor nameplate, approval certificate, datasheet, or
Illustration 3.15 KTY Type Selection
contact motor supplier.

When controlling an Ex-e motor with increased safety, it is

KTY Sensor 1: 1 kΩ at 100 °C (212 °F) (for example Philips
important to ensure certain limitations. The parameters
KTY 84-1)
that must be programmed are presented in Table 3.9.
KTY Sensor 2: 1 kΩ at 25 °C (77 °F) (for example Philips
KTY 83-1)
KTY Sensor 3: 2 kΩ at 25 °C (77 °F) (for example Infineon
KTY-10)

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 55

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

Function Setting Parameter set-up:

Parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal [20] ATEX ETR • Set parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2]
Protection Thermistor Trip.
Parameter 1-94 ATEX ETR cur.lim. 20%
• Set parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source to [6] Digital
speed reduction Input.

3 3 Parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR interpol.

130BA151.11
+24V

GND
points freq.
Motor nameplate. OFF

B
A
Parameter 1-99 ATEX ETR interpol 12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
points current
Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency Enter the same value as for
parameter 4-19 Max Output
Frequency. ON
Parameter 4-19 Max Output Motor nameplate, possibly PTC / Thermistor
<6.6 k Ω >10.8 k Ω R
Frequency reduced for long motor cables, Illustration 3.17 Thermistor Connection
sine-wave filter, or reduced
supply voltage.
Parameter 4-18 Current Limit Forced to 150% by 1-90 [20]
1-91 Motor External Fan
Parameter 5-15 Terminal 33 [80] PTC Card 1
Option: Function:
Digital Input
[0] * No No external fan is required, that is the motor is
Parameter 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe [4] PTC 1 Alarm
derated at low speed.
Stop
Parameter 14-01 Switching Check that the default value [1] Yes Applies an external motor fan (external ventilation), so
Frequency fulfills the requirement from no derating of the motor is required at low speed. The
motor nameplate. If not, use upper curve in Illustration 3.16 (fout = 1 x fM,N) is
sine-wave filter. followed if the motor current is lower than nominal
Parameter 14-26 Trip Delay at 0 motor current (see parameter 1-24 Motor Current). If
Inverter Fault the motor current exceeds nominal current, the
operation time still decreases as if no fan was
Table 3.9 Parameters installed.

NOTICE 1-93 Thermistor Source

Compare the minimum switching frequency requirement Option: Function:
stated by the motor manufacturer to the minimum
switching frequency of the frequency converter, the
NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
default value in parameter 14-01 Switching Frequency. If
while the motor is running.
the frequency converter does not meet this requirement,
use a sine-wave filter.
NOTICE
More information about ATEX ETR thermal monitoring can Set digital input to [0] PNP - Active at
be found in Application Note for FC 300 ATEX ETR Thermal 24 V in parameter 5-00 Digital I/O Mode.
Monitoring Function.
Select the input to which the thermistor (PTC
3.2.17 Klixon sensor) should be connected. An analog
input option [1] Analog Input 53 or [2] Analog
Input 54 cannot be selected if the analog
The Klixon type thermal circuit breaker uses a KLIXON®
input is already in use as a reference source
metal dish. At a predetermined overload, the heat caused
(selected in parameter 3-15 Reference 1 Source,
by the current through the disc causes a trip.
parameter 3-16 Reference 2 Source, or
parameter 3-17 Reference 3 Source).
Using a digital input and 24 V as supply:
When using VLT® PTC Thermistor Card MCB
Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor
112, always select [0] None.
temperature is too high.
[0] * None
[1] Analog
Input 53
[2] Analog
Input 54

56 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

1-93 Thermistor Source 1-96 Thermistor Sensor Resource

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[3] Digital input NOTICE
18 Connection of thermistor sensor between
[4] Digital input terminals 54 and 55 (GND). See

[5]
19
Digital input
Illustration 3.15. 3 3
32
[0] * None
[6] Digital input
[2] Analog
33
Input 54
1-94 ATEX ETR cur.lim. speed reduction
1-97 Thermistor Threshold level
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %] NOTICE 80 °C* [-40 - 140 °C] Select the thermistor sensor threshold
Valid for FC 302 only. level for motor thermal protection.

Only visible if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal 1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. points freq.
Protection is set to [20]. Range: Function:

Configure the reaction for operating in Ex-e current limit.

Size related* [ 0 - 1000.0 NOTICE
Hz]
0%: The frequency converter does not change anything Valid for FC 302 only.
besides issuing warning 163, ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning.
>0%: The frequency converter issues warning 163, ATEX ETR Only visible if parameter 1-90 Motor
cur.lim.warning and reduces motor speed following ramp 2 Thermal Protection is set to [20].
(parameter group 3-5* Ramp 2).
Enter the 4 frequency points [Hz] from the motor
nameplate into this array. Table 3.10 shows the example of
Example:
frequency/current points.
Actual reference = 50 RPM
Parameter 1-94 ATEX ETR cur.lim. speed reduction = 20%
Resulting reference = 40 RPM NOTICE
All frequency/current limit points from the motor
1-95 Thermistor Sensor Type
nameplate or motor datasheet must be programmed.
Option: Function:
NOTICE
130BB909.10
Valid for FC 302 only. 100%

Select the used type of thermistor sensor. 80 %

[0] * KTY Sensor 1 1 kΩ at 100 °C (212 °F).

[1] KTY Sensor 2 1 kΩ at 25 °C (77 °F). 40 %

[2] KTY Sensor 3 2 kΩ at 25 °C (77 °F).

[3] Pt1000

1-96 Thermistor Sensor Resource

5 Hz 15 Hz 25 Hz 50 Hz
Option: Function:
Illustration 3.18 Example of ATEX ETR Thermal Limitation
NOTICE Curve.
Valid for FC 302 only. x-axis: fm [Hz]
y-axis: Im/Im,n x 100 [%]
Selecting analog input terminal 54 to be used
as thermistor sensor input. Terminal 54 cannot
be selected as thermistor source if otherwise
used as reference (see parameter 3-15 Reference
Resource 1 to parameter 3-17 Reference Resource
3).

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 57

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

Parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. Parameter 1-99 ATEX ETR 3. Parameter 1-14 Damping Gain.
points freq. interpol points current
4. Parameter 1-47 Torque Calibration.
[0]=5 Hz [0]=40%
[1]=15 Hz [1]=80%
5. Parameter 1-58 Flying Start Test Pulses Current.
[2]=25 Hz [2]=100% 6. Parameter 1-59 Flying Start Test Pulses Frequency.

3 3 [3]=50 Hz [3]=100% 7. Parameter 1-70 PM Start Mode.

Table 3.10 Interpolation Points 8. Parameter 30-20 High Starting Torque Time [s].
9. Parameter 30-21 High Starting Torque Current [%].
All operating points underneath the curve are allowed
continuously. Above the line, however, these are only NOTICE
allowed for a limited time calculated as a function of the Standard parameters still need configuration (for
overload. In the event of a machine current greater than example parameter 4-19 Max Output Frequency).
1.5 times the rated current, shutdown is immediate.

1-99 ATEX ETR interpol points current Application Settings

Low inertia applications Increase parameter 1-17 Voltage filter
Only visible if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection is set to
ILoad/IMotor <5 time const. by factor 5–10.
[20] or [21].
Reduce parameter 1-14 Damping
Range: Function: Gain.
Size related* [0 - 100 %] NOTICE Reduce parameter 1-66 Min. Current
Valid for FC 302 only. at Low Speed (<100%).
Low inertia applications Keep calculated values.
Definition of thermal limitation curve. 50>ILoad/IMotor >5
For example, see parameter 1-98 ATEX High inertia applications Increase parameter 1-14 Damping
ETR interpol. points freq. ILoad/IMotor > 50 Gain, parameter 1-15 Low Speed Filter
Time Const., and parameter 1-16 High
Use the 4 current points [A] from the motor nameplate. Speed Filter Time Const.
Calculate the values as percentage of nominal motor High load at low speed Increase parameter 1-17 Voltage filter
current, Im/Im,n x 100 [%], and enter into this array. <30% (rated speed) time const.
Increase parameter 1-66 Min. Current
Together with parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. points freq., at Low Speed (>100% for longer time
these constitute a table (f [Hz],I [%]). can overheat the motor).

Table 3.11 Recommendations for VVC+ Applications

NOTICE
All frequency/current limit points from the motor If the motor starts oscillating at a certain speed, increase
nameplate or motor datasheet must be programmed. parameter 1-14 Damping Gain. Increase the value in small
steps. Depending on the motor, a good value for this
3.2.18 PM Settings parameter can be 10% or 100% higher than the default
value.
If [2] Std. PM, non-salient is selected in
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction, enter the motor Adjust starting torque in parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low
parameters manually in the following order: Speed. 100% provides nominal torque as starting torque.
1. Parameter 1-24 Motor Current.
2. Parameter 1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque.
3. Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed.
4. Parameter 1-39 Motor Poles.
5. Parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs).
6. Parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld).
7. Parameter 1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM.
The following parameters have been added for PM motors.
1. Parameter 1-41 Motor Angle Offset.
2. Parameter 1-07 Motor Angle Offset Adjust.

58 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

Application Settings
Low inertia applications Keep calculated values.
High inertia applications Parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low
Speed.
Increase speed to a value between

3 3
default and maximum depending on
application.
Set ramp times matching the
application. Too fast ramp-up causes
an overcurrent/overtorque. Too fast
ramp-down causes an overvoltage
trip.
High load at low speed Parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low
Speed.
Increase speed to a value between
default and maximum depending on
application.

Table 3.12 Recommendations for Flux Applications

Adjust starting torque in parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low

Speed. 100% provides nominal torque as starting torque.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 59

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3.3 Parameters: 2-** Brakes 2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]

Range: Function:
3.3.1 2-0* DC brakes
Size related* [ 0 - par. Set the DC brake cut-in speed for
4-13 RPM] activation of the DC brake current
Parameter group for configuring the DC brake and DC hold
set in parameter 2-01 DC Brake

3 3
functions.
Current, upon a stop command.
2-00 DC Hold Current
Range: Function: 2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz]
Range: Function:
50 [0 - NOTICE
%* 160 %]
The maximum value depends on the rated
Size [ 0 - par. NOTICE
related* 4-14 Hz]
motor current. Parameter 2-04 DC Brake Cut In
Avoid 100% current for too long. It may Speed [Hz] is not effective when
damage the motor. parameter 1-10 Motor Construction
Low values of DC hold produce larger than = [1] PM, non-salient SPM.
expected currents with larger motor power
sizes. This error increases as the motor Set the DC brake cut-in speed for
power increases. activation of the DC brake current set in
parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current after a
Enter a value for holding current as a percentage stop command.
of the rated motor current IM,N set in
parameter 1-24 Motor Current. 100% DC hold 2-05 Maximum Reference
current corresponds to IM,N. Range: Function:
This parameter holds the motor function (holding Size [ par. 3-02 - This is an access parameter to
torque) or preheats the motor. related* 999999.999 parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference
This parameter is active if DC hold is selected in ReferenceFeed- for legacy products. The maximum
parameter 1-72 Start Function [0] or backUnit] reference is the highest value
parameter 1-80 Function at Stop [1]. obtainable by summing all
references. The maximum reference
2-01 DC Brake Current unit matches the option selected in
Range: Function: parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode
50 [0 - NOTICE and the unit in
%* 1000 % parameter 3-01 Reference/Feedback
The maximum value depends on the rated
] Unit.
motor current.
Avoid 100% current for too long. It may
2-06 Parking Current
damage the motor.
Range: Function:
Enter a value for current as a percentage of the 50 %* [0 - Set current as percentage of rated motor
rated motor current IM,N, see parameter 1-24 Motor 1000 %] current, parameter 1-24 Motor Current. Is
Current. 100% DC brake current corresponds to used when enabled in parameter 1-70 PM
IM,N. Start Mode.
DC brake current is applied on a stop command,
when the speed is lower than the limit set in 2-07 Parking Time
parameter 2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]; when Range: Function:
the DC Brake Inverse function is active, or via the 3 s* [0.1 - 60 s] Set the duration of the parking current set in
serial communication port. The braking current is parameter 2-06 Parking Current, once activated.
active during the time period set in
parameter 2-02 DC Braking Time.
3.3.2 2-1* Brake Energy Funct.
2-02 DC Braking Time
Range: Function: Parameter group for selecting dynamic brake parameters.
Only valid for frequency converters with brake chopper.
10 s* [0 - 60 s] Set the duration of the DC brake current set in
parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current, once 2-10 Brake Function
activated. Option: Function:
[0] Off No brake resistor is installed.

60 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

2-10 Brake Function 2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW)

Option: Function: Range: Function:
[1] Resistor A brake resistor is incorporated in the system, for breaking time within the 120 s period,
brake dissipation of surplus brake energy as heat. Tbr.
Connecting a brake resistor allows a higher DC- Ubr is the DC voltage where the brake
link voltage during braking (generating operation).
The resistor brake function is only active in
resistor is active. This depends on the
unit as follows:
3 3
frequency converters with an integral dynamic T2 units: 390 V
brake. T4 units: 810 V
T5 units: 810 V
[2] AC brake Is selected to improve braking without using a
T6 units: 943 V/1099 V for D – F frames
brake resistor. This parameter controls an
T7 units: 1099 V
overmagnetization of the motor when running
with a generatoric load. This function can improve NOTICE
the OVC function. Increasing the electrical losses If Rbr is not known, or if Tbr is
in the motor allows the OVC function to increase different from 120 s, the practical
the braking torque without exceeding the approach is to run the brake
overvoltage limit. application, read
NOTICE parameter 16-33 Brake Energy
Average and then enter this
The AC brake is not as efficient as dynamic
+ 20% in parameter 2-12 Brake
braking with resistor.
Power Limit (kW).
AC brake is for VVC+ mode in both open
and closed loop.
2-13 Brake Power Monitoring

2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm) Option: Function:

This parameter is only active in frequency
Range: Function:
converters with a brake.
Size [ 5.00 - Set the brake resistor value in Ω. This
related* 65535.00 value is used for monitoring the power This parameter enables monitoring of the
Ohm] to the brake resistor in power to the brake resistor. The power is
parameter 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring. calculated based on the resistance
This parameter is only active in frequency (parameter 2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm)), the
converters with an integral dynamic DC-link voltage, and the resistor duty time.
brake. [0] * Off No brake power monitoring required.
Use this parameter for values without
[1] Warning 120s Activates a warning on the display when
decimals. For a selection with 2 decimals,
the power transmitted during the duty
use parameter 30-81 Brake Resistor (ohm).
time exceeds 100% of the monitoring limit
(parameter 2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW).
2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW)
The warning disappears when the
Range: Function:
transmitted power drops below 80% of the
Size [ 0.001 - Parameter 2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) is monitoring limit.
related* 2000.000 the expected average power dissipated in
[2] Trip 120s Trips the frequency converter and displays
kW] the brake resistor over a period of 120 s.
an alarm when the calculated power
It is used as the monitoring limit for
exceeds 100% of the monitoring limit.
parameter 16-33 Brake Energy Average and
thereby specifies when a warning/alarm is [3] Warning & trip Activates both of the above, including
to be given. 120s warning, trip, and alarm.
To calculate parameter 2-12 Brake Power
[4] Warning 30s
Limit (kW), the following formula can be
[5] Trip 30s
used.
[6] Warning & trip
U 2br V × t br s
Pbr, avg W =
Rbr Ω × T br s 30s
Pbr,avg is the average power dissipated in [7] Warning 60s
the brake resistor, Rbr is the resistance of [8] Trip 60s
the brake resistor. tbr is the active [9] Warning & trip
60s
[10] Warning 300s

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 61

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

2-13 Brake Power Monitoring 2-15 Brake Check

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[11] Trip 300s [1] Warning Monitors brake resistor and brake IGBT for a short
[12] Warning & trip circuit and runs a test for brake resistor discon-
300s nection during power-up.

3 3 [13] Warning 600s

[14] Trip 600s
[2] Trip Monitors for a short circuit or disconnection of
the brake resistor, or a short circuit of the brake
[15] Warning & trip IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter
600s cuts out while showing an alarm (trip lock).

If power monitoring is set to [0] Off or [1] Warning, the [3] Stop and Monitors for a short circuit or disconnection of
brake function remains active, even if the monitoring limit trip the brake resistor, or a short circuit of the brake
is exceeded. This may lead to thermal overload of the IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter
resistor. It is also possible to generate a warning via a ramps down to coast and then trips. A trip lock
relay/digital output. The measuring accuracy of the power alarm is shown (for example, warnings 25, 27, or
monitoring depends on the accuracy of the resistance of 28).
the resistor (better than ±20%).
[4] AC brake Monitors for a short circuit or disconnection of
2-15 Brake Check the brake resistor, or a short circuit of the brake
Option: Function: IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter
performs a controlled ramp-down. This option is
Parameter 2-15 Brake Check is only active in
available for FC 302 only.
frequency converters with an integral dynamic
brake. [5] Trip Lock

Select type of test and monitoring function to NOTICE

check the connection to the brake resistor, or
Remove a warning arising with [0] Off or [1] Warning by
whether a brake resistor is present, and then
cycling the mains supply. The fault must be corrected
show a warning or an alarm in the event of a
first. For [0] Off or [1] Warning, the frequency converter
fault.
keeps running even if a fault is located.
NOTICE
The brake resistor disconnection function 2-16 AC brake Max. Current
is tested during power-up. However, the Range: Function:
brake IGBT test is performed when there is
100 %* [ 0 - 1000.0 %] Enter the maximum permissible current
no braking. A warning or trip disconnects
when using AC braking to avoid
the brake function.
overheating of motor windings.

The testing sequence is as follows: NOTICE

1. The DC-link ripple amplitude is
Parameter 2-16 AC brake Max. Current has no effect when
measured for 300 ms without braking.
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction=[1] PM, non salient
2. The DC-link ripple amplitude is SPM.
measured for 300 ms with the brake
turned on.
2-17 Over-voltage Control
3. If the DC-link ripple amplitude while
Option: Function:
braking is lower than the DC-link ripple
Overvoltage control (OVC) reduces the risk
amplitude before braking + 1%: Brake
of the frequency converter tripping due to
check has failed by returning a warning or
an overvoltage on the DC-link caused by
alarm.
generative power from the load.
4. If the DC-link ripple amplitude while
[0] * Disabled No OVC required.
braking is higher than the DC-link ripple
amplitude before braking + 1%: Brake [1] Enabled (not Activates OVC except when using a stop
check is OK. at stop) signal to stop the frequency converter.

[0] Off Monitors brake resistor and brake IGBT for a short [2] Enabled Activates OVC.
* circuit during operation. If a short circuit occurs,
Warning 25 Brake resistor short-circuited appears. NOTICE
Do not enable OVC in hoisting applications.

62 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

2-18 Brake Check Condition Select [32] Mechanical Brake Control for applications with
Range: Function: an electro-magnetic brake in parameter 5-40 Function Relay,
parameter 5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output, or
[0] * At Power Up Brake check is performed at power-
parameter 5-31 Terminal 29 Digital Output. When selecting
up.
[32] Mechanical brake control, the mechanical braking is
[1] After Coast Situations Brake check is performed after coast closed from start-up until the output current is above the
situations. level selected in parameter 2-20 Release Brake Current. 3 3
During stop, the mechanical braking activates when the
2-19 Over-voltage Gain speed drops below the level specified in
Range: Function: parameter 2-21 Activate Brake Speed [RPM]. If the frequency
100 %* [10 - 200 %] Select overvoltage gain. converter enters an alarm condition, an overcurrent, or
overvoltage situation, the mechanical braking immediately
cuts in. This is also the case during Safe Torque Off.
3.3.3 2-2* Mechanical Brake
NOTICE
Parameters for controlling operation of an electro-magnetic
Protection mode and trip delay features
(mechanical) brake, typically required in hoisting
(parameter 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit and
applications.
parameter 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault) may delay
To control a mechanical braking, a relay output (relay 01 or
the activation of the mechanical braking in an alarm
relay 02) or a programmed digital output (terminal 27 or
condition. These features must be disabled in hoisting
29) is required. Normally, this output must be closed
applications.
during periods when the frequency converter is unable to
hold the motor, for example due to an excessive load.

130BA074.12
Start 1=on
term.18 0=off
Par 1-71
Start delay time
Par 2-21
Activate brake
Shaft speed speed
Par 1-74
Start speed
Output current

Pre-magnetizing
current or
DC hold current Par 2-20
Par 1-76 Start current/
Release brake current
Par 2-23 Par 2-00 DC hold current
Brake delay time

Reaction time EMK brake

on
Relay 01
off
Mechanical brake
locked
Mechanical brake
free
Time
Illustration 3.19 Mechanical Braking

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 63

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

2-20 Release Brake Current 2-24 Stop Delay

Range: Function: Range: Function:
Size [0 - Set the motor current for release of the 0 s* [0 - 5 Set the time interval from the moment when the
related* par. mechanical braking when a start condition s] motor is stopped until the brake closes.
16-37 A] is present. The default value is the To adjust transition of the load to the mechanical

3 3 maximum current the inverter can provide

for the particular power size. The upper
braking, set parameter 2-23 Activate Brake Delay and
parameter 2-24 Stop Delay.
limit is specified in parameter 16-37 Inv. This parameter is a part of the stop function.
Max. Current.

NOTICE 2-25 Brake Release Time

When mechanical brake control Range: Function:
output is selected, but no mechanical 0.20 s* [0 - 5 s] This value defines the time it takes for the
braking is connected, the function mechanical brake to open. This parameter
does not work by default setting due must act as a timeout when brake feedback is
to too low motor current. activated.

2-21 Activate Brake Speed [RPM] 3.3.4 Hoist Mechanical Brake

Range: Function:
The hoist mechanical brake control supports the following
Size [ 0 - par. Set the motor speed for activation of the
functions:
related* 4-53 RPM] mechanical braking, when a stop
condition is present. The upper speed • 2 channels for mechanical braking feedback to
offer further protection against unintended
limit is specified in
behavior resulting from broken cable.
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High.
• Monitoring of mechanical braking feedback
2-22 Activate Brake Speed [Hz] throughout the complete cycle. This helps protect
Range: Function: the mechanical brake, especially if more
frequency converters are connected to the same
Size related* [ 0 - 5000.0 Set the motor frequency for
shaft.
Hz] activation of the mechanical
braking when a stop condition is • No ramp-up until feedback confirms that
present. mechanical brake is open.
• Improved load control at stop. If the value of
2-23 Activate Brake Delay parameter 2-23 Activate Brake Delay is too low,
Range: Function: Warning 22 Hoist mech. brake is activated and the
0 s* [0 - Enter the brake delay time of the coast after ramp- torque is not allowed to ramp down.
5 s] down time. The shaft is held at zero speed with full
• The transition when motor takes over the load
holding torque. Ensure that the mechanical braking from the brake can be configured.
has locked the load before the motor enters coast Parameter 2-28 Gain Boost Factor can be increased
mode. See Mechanical Brake Control section in the to minimize the movement. To achieve smooth
design guide. transition, change the setting from the speed
To adjust transition of the load to the mechanical control to the position control during the
braking, set parameter 2-23 Activate Brake Delay and changeover.
parameter 2-24 Stop Delay.
- Set parameter 2-28 Gain Boost Factor to
Setting of brake delay parameters does not affect 0 to enable position control during
the torque. The frequency converter does not parameter 2-02 DC Braking Time. This
register that mechanical braking is holding the load. enables parameter 2-30 Position P Start
After setting parameter 2-23 Activate Brake Delay, the Proportional Gain to
torque drops to 0 after a few minutes. The sudden parameter 2-33 Speed PID Start Lowpass
torque change leads to movement and noise. Filter Time, which are PID parameters for
the position control.

64 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

130BA642.12
Motor
Speed Torque Ramp Brake Release Ramp 1 Up Ramp 1 Down Stop Delay Activate Brake Torque Ramp
Up Time Time P. 3-41 P. 3-42 P. 2-24 Delay Down Time

3 3
p. 2-27 p. 2-25 P. 2-23 p. 2-29
Torque Ref. p. 2-26

W22 A22 A22

Active Active Active W22
Torque
Active
Ref.

Brake
Relay
High Contact no.1
E.g. DI32 [70] Mech. Brake Feedback
Mech Brake Low
Feedback
High
Contact no.2
Low OPTIONAL
E.g. DI33 [71] Mech. Brake Feedback
Open
Mech Brake
Position
Closed

Gain Boost. p. 2-28

Gain Boost or
Postion Control

Illustration 3.20 Brake Release Sequence for Hoist Mechanical Brake Control

Parameter 2-26 Torque Ref to parameter 2-33 Speed PID Start 2-28 Gain Boost Factor
Lowpass Filter Time are only available for the hoist Range: Function:
mechanical brake control (flux with motor feedback).
1* [0 - Only active in flux closed loop. The function ensures
4] a smooth transition from torque control mode to
2-26 Torque Ref speed control mode when the motor takes over the
Range: Function: load from the brake.
0% [ -300 - The value defines the torque applied against the Increase to minimize the movement. Activate the
* 300 %] closed mechanical brake before release. advanced mechanical braking (parameter group 2-3*
The torque/load on a crane is positive and is 10– Adv. Mech Brake) by setting parameter 2-28 Gain
160%. To obtain the best starting point, set Boost Factor to 0.
parameter 2-26 Torque Ref to approximately 70%.
The torque/load on a lift can be both positive 2-29 Torque Ramp Down Time
and negative and between -160% and +160%. To Range: Function:
obtain the best starting point, set 0 s* [0 - 5 s] Torque ramp-down time.
parameter 2-26 Torque Ref to 0%.
The higher the torque error is
(parameter 2-26 Torque Ref vs. actual torque), the 3.3.5 2-3* Adv. Mech Brake
more movement during load takeover.
Parameter 2-30 Position P Start Proportional Gain to
2-27 Torque Ramp Up Time parameter 2-33 Speed PID Start Lowpass Filter Time can be
Range: Function: set up for very smooth transition change from speed
control to position control during parameter 2-25 Brake
0.2 s* [0 - 5 s] The value defines the duration of the torque
Release Time - the time when the load is transferred from
ramp in clockwise direction. Value 0 enables
the mechanical brake to the frequency converter.
very fast magnetization in flux control principle.
Parameter 2-30 Position P Start Proportional Gain to
parameter 2-33 Speed PID Start Lowpass Filter Time are
activated when parameter 2-28 Gain Boost Factor is set to 0.
See Illustration 3.20 for more information.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 65

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

2-30 Position P Start Proportional Gain

Range: Function:
0.0000* [0.0000 - 1.0000]

2-31 Speed PID Start Proportional Gain

3 3 Range:
0.0150* [0.0000 - 1.0000]
Function:

2-32 Speed PID Start Integral Time

Range: Function:
200.0 ms* [1.0 - 20000.0 ms]

2-33 Speed PID Start Lowpass Filter Time

Range: Function:
10.0 ms* [0.1 - 100.0 ms]

2-34 Zero Speed Position P Proportional Gain

Range: Function:
0.0000* [0.0000 - NOTICE
1.0000]
This parameter is available only
with software version 48.XX.

Enter the proportional gain for

position control at standstill in speed
mode.

66 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.4 Parameters: 3-** Reference/Ramps 3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit

Option: Function:
Parameters for handling of reference, definition of
[60] °C
limitations, and configuration of the reaction of the
frequency converter to changes. [70] mbar
[71] bar

3.4.1 3-0* Reference Limits [72]

[73]
Pa
kPa
3 3
[74] m WG
3-00 Reference Range
[80] kW
Option: Function: [120] GPM
Select the range of the reference signal and the [121] gal/s
feedback signal. Signal values can be positive only, [122] gal/min
or positive and negative. The minimum limit may [123] gal/h
have a negative value, unless [1] Speed closed loop
[124] CFM
control or [3] Process is selected in
[125] ft³/s
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.
[126] ft³/min
[0] Min - Select the range of the reference signal and the [127] ft³/h
Max feedback signal. Signal values can be positive only, [130] lb/s
or positive and negative. The minimum limit may [131] lb/min
have a negative value, unless [1] Speed closed loop
[132] lb/h
control or [3] Process is selected in
[140] ft/s
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.
[141] ft/min
[1] -Max - For both positive and negative values (both [145] ft
+Max directions, relative to parameter 4-10 Motor Speed [150] lb ft
Direction). [160] °F
[170] psi
3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit [171] lb/in²
Option: Function: [172] in WG
Select the unit to be used in process PID control [173] ft WG
references and feedbacks. Parameter 1-00 Configu- [180] HP
ration Mode must be either [3] Process or [8]
Extended PID Control. 3-02 Minimum Reference

[0] None
Range: Function:
[1] % Size [ -999999.999 - Enter the minimum reference. The
[2] RPM related* par. 3-03 minimum reference is the lowest
ReferenceFeed- value obtainable by summing all
[3] Hz
backUnit] references.
[4] Nm
Minimum reference is active only
[5] PPM
when parameter 3-00 Reference Range
[10] 1/min
is set to [0] Min.- Max.
[12] Pulse/s
[20] l/s The minimum reference unit matches:

[21] l/min • The configuration of

parameter 1-00 Configuration
[22] l/h
Mode: for [1] Speed closed
[23] m³/s
loop, RPM; for [2] Torque,
[24] m³/min
Nm.
[25] m³/h
[30] kg/s • The unit selected in
parameter 3-01 Reference/
[31] kg/min
Feedback Unit.
[32] kg/h
[33] t/min If option [10] Synchronization is
[34] t/h selected in parameter 1-00 Configu-
[40] m/s ration Mode, this parameter defines
the maximum speed deviation when
[41] m/min
performing the position offset
[45] m

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 67

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3-02 Minimum Reference 3-05 On Reference Window

Range: Function: Range: Function:
defined in parameter 3-26 Master • Position mode: Speed
Offset. window for on target
status. See also

3 3 3-03 Maximum Reference

Range: Function:
parameter 3-08 On Target
Window.

Size [ par. 3-02 - Enter the maximum reference. The

3-06 Minimum Position
related* 999999.999 maximum reference is the highest
ReferenceFeed- value obtainable by summing all Range: Function:
backUnit] references. -100000 [ -2147483648 NOTICE
CustomRea- - 2147483647
The maximum reference unit This parameter is only
doutUnit2* CustomRea-
matches: available with software
doutUnit2]
• The configuration selected version 48.XX.
in parameter 1-00 Configu-
ration Mode: For [1] Speed Enter the minimum position.
closed loop, RPM; for [2] This parameter defines the
Torque, Nm. position range in linear axis
• The unit selected in mode (parameter 17-76 Position
parameter 3-00 Reference Axis Mode) and in the position
Range. limit function
(parameter 4-73 Position Limit
If [9] Positioning is selected in
Function).
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode,
this parameter defines the default
3-07 Maximum Position
speed for positioning.
Range: Function:
3-04 Reference Function 100000 NOTICE
CustomRea- [ -2147483647
Option: Function: This parameter is only
doutUnit2* - 2147483647
[0] Sum Sums both external and preset reference available with software
CustomRea-
sources. version 48.XX.
doutUnit2]
[1] External/ Use either the preset or the external reference
Enter the maximum position. This
Preset source.
parameter defines the position
Shift between external and preset via a
range in linear and axis modes
command or a digital input.
(parameter 17-76 Position Axis
Mode).
3-05 On Reference Window
Range: Function: Position range limits:
• Linear:
Size [0 - 999999.999 NOTICE Parameter 3-06 Minimum
related* ReferenceFeed-
This parameter is only available Position to
backUnit]
with software version 48.XX. parameter 3-07 Maximum
Position.
Enter the tolerance window for on
• Rotary: 0–
reference or on target status.
parameter 3-07 Maximum
Depending on the option selected
Position.
in parameter 1-00 Configuration
Mode, this parameter defines the The position limit function uses
following: this parameter
(parameter 4-73 Position Limit
• Speed mode: Speed
window for on reference Function).
status.

• Torque mode: Torque

window for on reference
status.

68 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3-08 On Target Window

130BA149.10
12 (+24V)
Range: Function:
Preset 76543210
5 CustomRea- [0 - NOTICE 10101010 29 [P 5-13=Preset ref. bit 0]
doutUnit2* 2147483647
This parameter is only
CustomRea-
available with software 11001100 32 [P 5-14=Preset ref. bit 1]
doutUnit2]
version 48.XX.
11110000 33 [P 5-15=Preset ref. bit 2]
3 3
The frequency converter
considers the positioning
completed and sends the on
Illustration 3.21 Preset Reference
target signal when the actual
position is within
parameter 3-08 On Target
Preset ref. bit 2 1 0
Window for the duration of
Preset ref. 0 0 0 0
parameter 3-09 On Target Time
Preset ref. 1 0 0 1
and the actual speed is less
than parameter 3-05 On Preset ref. 2 0 1 0
Reference Window. Preset ref. 3 0 1 1
Preset ref. 4 1 0 0
3-09 On Target Time Preset ref. 5 1 0 1
Range: Function: Preset ref. 6 1 1 0
Preset ref. 7 1 1 1
1 ms* [0 - 60000 NOTICE
ms]
This parameter is only available with Table 3.13 Preset Reference Bits
software version 48.XX.
3-11 Jog Speed [Hz]
Enter the time for evaluating the on Range: Function:
target window, see also parameter 3-08 On
Size [ 0 - par. The jog speed is a fixed output speed
Target Window.
related* 4-14 Hz] at which the frequency converter is
running when the jog function is
3.4.2 3-1* References activated.
See also parameter 3-80 Jog Ramp Time.

Select the preset reference(s). Select Preset ref. bit 0/1/2

3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value
[16], [17], or [18] for the corresponding digital inputs in
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs. Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - Enter a percentage (relative) value to be either
3-10 Preset Reference
100 %] added to or deducted from the actual reference
Array [8] for catch up or slow down. If catch up is selected
Range: 0-7 via 1 of the digital inputs (parameter 5-10 Terminal
Range: Function: 18 Digital Input to parameter 5-15 Terminal 33
0 %* [-100 - Enter up to 8 different preset references (0-7) in Digital Input), the percentage (relative) value is
100 %] this parameter, using array programming. The added to the total reference. If slow down is
preset reference is stated as a percentage of the selected via 1 of the digital inputs
value RefMAX (parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference). (parameter 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input to
If a RefMIN different from 0 parameter 5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input), the
(parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference) is percentage (relative) value is deducted from the
programmed, the preset reference is calculated total reference. Obtain extended functionality with
as a percentage of the full reference range, that the DigiPot function. See parameter group 3-9*
is on the basis of the difference between RefMAX Digital Potentiometer.
and RefMIN. Afterwards, the value is added to
RefMIN. When using preset references, select
preset reference bit 0/1/2 [16], [17] or [18] for the
corresponding digital inputs in parameter group
5-1* Digital Inputs.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 69

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3-13 Reference Site

130BA278.10
Z
Option: Function: 00
*Y/1
Select which reference site to activate. X+X

[0] Linked to Use local reference when in hand-on mode, or X

* Hand / remote reference when in auto-on mode.
3 3 Auto
[1] Remote Use remote reference in both hand-on mode and
Y
auto-on mode.
-100 0 100 %
[2] Local Use local reference in both hand-on mode and
P 3-14
auto-on mode.
Illustration 3.23 Actual Reference
NOTICE
When set to [2] Local, the frequency
converter starts with this setting again 3-15 Reference Resource 1
after a power-down. Option: Function:
Select the reference input to be used for
[3] Linked to Select this option to enable the FFACC factor in the first reference signal.
H/A MCO parameter 32-66 Acceleration Feed-Forward. Parameter 3-15 Reference Resource 1,
Enabling FFACC reduces jitter and makes the parameter 3-16 Reference Resource 2, and
transmission from the motion controller to the parameter 3-17 Reference Resource 3
control card of the frequency converter faster. define up to 3 different reference signals.
This leads to faster response times for dynamic The sum of these reference signals
applications and position control. For more defines the actual reference.
information about FFACC, see VLT® Motion
[0] No function
Control MCO 305 Operating Instructions.
[1] Analog Input 53

3-14 Preset Relative Reference [2] Analog Input 54

[7] Frequency input
Range: Function:
29
0% [-100 The actual reference, X, is increased or decreased
[8] Frequency input
* - with the percentage Y, set in parameter 3-14 Preset
33
100 %] Relative Reference.
[11] Local bus Reference from terminals 68 and 69.
This results in the actual reference Z. Actual reference
reference (X) is the sum of the inputs selected in: [20] Digital pot.meter
• Parameter 3-15 Reference 1 Source. [21] Analog input VLT® General Purpose I/O MCB 101
• Parameter 3-16 Reference 2 Source. X30/11

• Parameter 3-17 Reference 3 Source. [22] Analog input VLT® General Purpose I/O MCB 101
X30/12
• Parameter 8-02 Control Source.
[29] Analog Input
X48/2
130BA059.12

Y
Relative Z Resulting
X Z=X+X*Y/100
actual 3-16 Reference Resource 2
reference
Option: Function:
Illustration 3.22 Preset Relative Reference Select the reference input to be used
for the 2nd reference signal.
Parameter 3-15 Reference Resource 1,
parameter 3-16 Reference Resource 2,
and parameter 3-17 Reference Resource 3
define up to 3 different reference
signals. The sum of these reference
signals defines the actual reference.

[0] No function
[1] Analog Input 53
[2] Analog Input 54

70 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3-16 Reference Resource 2 3-18 Relative Scaling Reference Resource

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[7] Frequency input (labeled X in Illustration 3.24). This
29 product is then added to the actual
[8] Frequency input reference (X+X*Y/100) to give the
33
[11] Local bus Reference from terminals 68 and 69.
resulting actual reference.
3 3

130BA059.12
Y
reference Relative Z Resulting
actual
X Z=X+X*Y/100 reference
[20] Digital pot.meter
[21] Analog input
X30/11 Illustration 3.24 Resulting Actual
[22] Analog input Reference
X30/12
[29] Analog Input
X48/2 [0] * No function
[1] Analog Input 53
3-17 Reference Resource 3 [2] Analog Input 54
Option: Function: [7] Frequency input
Select the reference input to be used 29
for the 3rd reference signal. [8] Frequency input
Parameter 3-15 Reference Resource 1, 33
parameter 3-16 Reference Resource 2, [11] Local bus Reference from terminals 68 and 69.
and parameter 3-17 Reference Resource 3 reference
define up to 3 different reference [20] Digital pot.meter
signals. The sum of these reference [21] Analog input
signals defines the actual reference. X30/11
[0] No function [22] Analog input
[1] Analog Input 53 X30/12
[2] Analog Input 54 [29] Analog Input
[7] Frequency input X48/2
29
3-19 Jog Speed [RPM]
[8] Frequency input
Range: Function:
33
Size [0 - Enter a value for the jog speed nJOG, which
[11] Local bus Reference from terminals 68 and 69.
related* par. 4-13 is a fixed output speed. The frequency
reference
RPM] converter runs at this speed when the jog
[20] Digital pot.meter
function is activated. The maximum limit is
[21] Analog input
defined in parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High
X30/11
Limit [RPM].
[22] Analog input
See also parameter 3-80 Jog Ramp Time.
X30/12
[29] Analog Input
X48/2 3.4.3 3-2* References II
3-18 Relative Scaling Reference Resource
3-20 Preset Target
Option: Function:
Range: Function:
NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
0 CustomRea- [-2147483648 - NOTICE
doutUnit2* 2147483647
This parameter is only
while the motor is running. CustomRea-
available with software
doutUnit2]
version 48.XX.
Select a variable value to be added to
the fixed value (defined in
Array [8]
parameter 3-14 Preset Relative Reference).
Set up to 8 target positions.
The sum of the fixed and variable values
Select from the 8 preset
(labeled Y in Illustration 3.24) is
multiplied by the actual reference

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 71

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3-20 Preset Target 3-25 Master Bus Resolution

Range: Function: Range: Function:
positions using digital inputs 65536* [128 - 65536] NOTICE
or the fieldbus control word.
This parameter is only available
with software version 48.XX.
3 3 3-21 Touch Target
Range: Function: Enter the resolution of the fieldbus
0 CustomRea- [-2147483648 - NOTICE master signal (fieldbus reference 1) in
doutUnit2* 2147483647 synchronization mode.
This parameter is only
CustomRea-
available with software
doutUnit2] 3-26 Master Offset
version 48.XX.
Range: Function:
Enter the target position in 0 CustomRea- [-2147483648 NOTICE
touch probe positioning doutUnit2* - 2147483647
This parameter is only
mode. This parameter defines CustomRea-
available with software
the distance from the doutUnit2]
version 48.XX.
detection event of the touch
probe sensor to the final
Enter the position offset
target position in position
between the master and the
units.
slave in synchronization mode.
This value is added to the
3-22 Master Scale Numerator
follower position at each
Range: Function: activation of a digital input with
1* [-2147483648 NOTICE option [113] Enable Reference or
- 2147483647] bit 5 of the fieldbus control
This parameter is only available with
software version 48.XX. word. Parameter 3-02 Minimum
Reference defines the maximum
deviation from the actual master
Parameter 3-22 Master Scale Numerator and
speed during the execution of
parameter 3-23 Master Scale Denominator
the offset.
define the gear ratio between the master
and the slave in synchronization mode.
3-27 Virtual Master Max Ref
Par . 3 − 22
Master revolutions =
Par . 3 − 23 Range: Function:
× Slave revolutions 50.0 [0.0 - NOTICE
Hz* 590.0
This parameter is available only with
3-23 Master Scale Denominator Hz]
software version 48.XX.
Range: Function:
1* [-2147483648 - NOTICE Enter the maximum reference for the virtual
2147483647]
This parameter is only available master. The actual reference is set relative to
with software version 48.XX. this value using the source selected in
parameter 3-15 Reference Resource 1 or fieldbus
See parameter 3-22 Master Scale reference 1. The rotation direction is controlled
Numerator. by the forward/reverse signal on a digital input
or fieldbus. Use parameter group 3-6* Ramp 3 to
3-24 Master Lowpass Filter Time configure acceleration and deceleration.

Range: Function:
20 ms* [1 - 2000 ms] NOTICE
This parameter is only available
with software version 48.XX.

Enter the time constant for master speed

calculation in synchronizing mode.

72 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3-28 Master Offset Speed Ref

130BA168.10
Speed
Range: Function:
1500 [0 - NOTICE Ramp (X) S-Ramp
Ramp (X) S-Ramp
RPM* 65000 Ratio at Dec.End
This parameter is only available with Ratio at Accel.End
RPM]
software version 48.XX. Ramp (X)
Ramp (X)
S-Ramp
Ratio at
Linear
Jerk compensated
S-Ramp
Ratio at 3 3
Enter the speed reference for changing the Dec.End
Accel.End
master offset in synchronization mode. To
ensure compatibility with software versions Ramp (X) Ramp (X)
48.01 and 48.10, this parameter is only Up Time Down Time

active when parameter 3-02 Minimum Illustration 3.26 Linear Ramping Times
Reference is set to 0.

3-40 Ramp 1 Type

3.4.4 Ramps
3-4* Ramp 1 Option: Function:
NOTICE
For each of the 4 ramps (parameter groups 3-4* Ramp 1, If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and
3-5* Ramp 2, 3-6* Ramp 3, and 3-7* Ramp 4) configure the the reference during ramping is changed,
ramp parameters: the ramp time may be prolonged to
• Ramp type, realize a jerk-free movement, which may
result in a longer start or stop time.
• Ramping times (duration of acceleration and
deceleration), and Extra adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or
switching initiators may be necessary.
• Level of jerk compensation for S-ramps.
Start by setting the linear ramping times corresponding to Select the ramp type, depending on
Illustration 3.25 and Illustration 3.26. requirements for acceleration/deceleration.
A linear ramp gives constant acceleration during
ramping. An S-ramp gives non-linear
130BA872.10

RPM
acceleration, compensating for jerk in the
P 4-13 application.
High-limit
Reference [0] * Linear
ns
[1] S-ramp Acceleration with lowest possible jerk.
P 4-11
Low limit Const
Jerk
P 3-*1 P 3-*2 Time [2] S-ramp S-ramp based on the values set in
Ramp (X)Up Ramp (X) Down
Time (Acc) Time (Dec) Const parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time and
tacc tdec
Time parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time.
Illustration 3.25 Linear Ramping Times
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time
Range: Function:
If S-ramps are selected, set the level of non-linear jerk Size [ 0.01 - Enter the ramp-up time, that is the
compensation required. Set jerk compensation by defining related* 3600 s] acceleration time from 0 RPM to the
the proportion of ramp-up and ramp-down times where synchronous motor speed nS. Select a ramp-
acceleration and deceleration are variable (that is, up time which prevents the output current
increasing or decreasing). The S-ramp acceleration and from exceeding the current limit in
deceleration settings are defined as a percentage of the parameter 4-18 Current Limit during ramping.
actual ramp time. The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in
speed mode. See ramp-down time in
parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time.
t acc s x ns RPM
Par . 3 − 41 =
ref RPM

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 73

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time 3.4.5 3-5* Ramp 2

Range: Function:
Size [ 0.01 - Enter the ramp-down time, that is the
To select ramp parameters, see parameter group 3-4* Ramp
related* 3600 s] deceleration time from the synchronous
1.
motor speed ns to 0 RPM. Select a ramp- 3-50 Ramp 2 Type
3 3 down time such that no overvoltage occurs
in the inverter due to regenerative operation
Option: Function:
Select the ramp type, depending on
of the motor, and such that the generated
requirements for acceleration/deceleration. A
current does not exceed the current limit set
linear ramp gives constant acceleration during
in parameter 4-18 Current Limit. The value
ramping. An S-ramp gives non-linear
0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in speed mode.
acceleration, compensating for jerk in the
See ramp-up time in parameter 3-41 Ramp 1
application.
Ramp Up Time.
t dec s x ns RPM
[0] * Linear
Par . 3 − 42 =
ref RPM [1] S-ramp Acceleration with lowest possible jerk.
Const Jerk
3-45 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start
[2] S-ramp S-ramp based on the values set in
Range: Function: Const parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time and
50 %* [1 - Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time Time parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time.
99 %] (parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time) in
which the acceleration torque increases. The NOTICE
larger the percentage value, the greater the
If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
during ramping is changed, the ramp time may be
lower the torque jerks occurring in the
prolonged to realize a jerk-free movement, which may
application.
result in a longer start or stop time.
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching
3-46 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End initiators may be necessary.
Range: Function:
50 %* [1 - Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time
99 %] (parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time) in
Range: Function:
which the acceleration torque decreases. The
Size [ 0.01 - Enter the ramp-up time, that is the
larger the percentage value, the greater the
related* 3600 s] acceleration time from 0 RPM to the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
nominal motor speed ns. Select a ramp-up
lower the torque jerks in the application.
time such that the output current does not
3-47 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start exceed the current limit in
parameter 4-18 Current Limit during ramping.
Range: Function:
The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in
50 %* [1 - Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down speed mode. See ramp-down time in
99 %] time (parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time) parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time.
where the deceleration torque increases. The
t acc s x ns RPM
larger the percentage value, the greater the Par . 3 − 51 =
ref RPM
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
lower the torque jerks in the application. 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time
Range: Function:
3-48 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End Size [ 0.01 Enter the ramp-down time, that is the
Range: Function: related* - 3600 deceleration time from the nominal motor
50 %* [1 - Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down s] speed ns to 0 RPM. Select a ramp-down time
99 %] time (parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time) such that no overvoltage occurs in the
where the deceleration torque decreases. The frequency converter due to regenerative
larger the percentage value, the greater the operation of the motor, and such that the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the generated current does not exceed the
lower the torque jerks in the application. current limit set in parameter 4-18 Current
Limit. The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s
in speed mode. See ramp-up time in
parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time.

74 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time 3-60 Ramp 3 Type

Range: Function: Option: Function:
Par . 3 − 52 =
t dec s x ns RPM [1] S-ramp Accelerates with lowest possible jerk.
ref RPM
Const Jerk
3-55 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start [2] S-ramp S-ramp based on the values set in
Range: Function: Const
Time
parameter 3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time and
parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time.
3 3
50 %* [1 - Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
99 %] (parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time) in
which the acceleration torque increases. The
NOTICE
larger the percentage value, the greater the If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the during ramping is changed, the ramp time may be
lower the torque jerks in the application. prolonged to realize a jerk-free movement, which may
result in a longer start or stop time.
3-56 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End Extra adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching
initiators may be necessary.
Range: Function:
50 %* [1 - Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
99 %] (parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time) in
3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time
which the acceleration torque decreases. The Range: Function:
larger the percentage value, the greater the Size [ 0.01 - Enter the ramp-up time, which is the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the related* 3600 s] acceleration time from 0 RPM to the
lower the torque jerks in the application. nominal motor speed ns. Select a ramp-up
time such that the output current does not
3-57 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start exceed the current limit in
Range: Function: parameter 4-18 Current Limit during
ramping. The value 0.00 corresponds to
50 %* [1 - Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
0.01 s in speed mode. See ramp-down time
99 %] time (parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time)
in parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time.
where the deceleration torque increases. The
larger the percentage value, the greater the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time
lower the torque jerks in the application. Range: Function:
Size [ 0.01 - Enter the ramp-down time, which is the
3-58 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End related* 3600 s] deceleration time from the nominal motor
Range: Function: speed ns to 0 RPM. Select a ramp-down
time such that no overvoltage occurs in the
50 %* [1 - Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
inverter due to regenerative operation of the
99 %] time (parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time)
motor, and such that the generated current
where the deceleration torque decreases. The
does not exceed the current limit set in
larger the percentage value, the greater the
parameter 4-18 Current Limit. The value 0.00
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
corresponds to 0.01 s in speed mode. See
lower the torque jerks in the application.
ramp-up time in parameter 3-61 Ramp 3
Ramp up Time.
3.4.6 3-6* Ramp 3 t dec s x ns RPM
Par . 3 − 62 =
ref RPM

Configure ramp parameters, see parameter group 3-4*

3-65 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start
Ramp 1.
Range: Function:
3-60 Ramp 3 Type 50 %* [1 - Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
Option: Function: 99 %] (parameter 3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time) in
Select the ramp type, depending on which the acceleration torque increases. The
requirements for acceleration and deceleration. larger the percentage value, the greater the
A linear ramp gives constant acceleration jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
during ramping. An S-ramp gives non-linear lower the torque jerks in the application.
acceleration, compensating for jerk in the
application.

[0] * Linear

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 75

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3-66 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End 3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time
Range: Function: Range: Function:
50 %* [1 - Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time Size [ 0.01 - Enter the ramp-up time, which is the
99 %] (parameter 3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time) in related* 3600 s] acceleration time from 0 RPM to the rated
which the acceleration torque decreases. The motor speed ns. Select a ramp-up time such

3 3 larger the percentage value, the greater the

jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
that the output current does not exceed the
current limit in parameter 4-18 Current Limit
lower the torque jerks in the application. during ramping. The value 0.00 corresponds
to 0.01 s in speed mode. See ramp-down
3-67 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start time in parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down
Range: Function: Time.

50 %* [1 - Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down Par . 3 − 71 =

t acc s x ns RPM
ref RPM
99 %] time (parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time)
where the deceleration torque increases. The 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time
larger the percentage value, the greater the
Range: Function:
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
Size [ 0.01 - Enter the ramp-down time, which is the
lower the torque jerks in the application.
related* 3600 s] deceleration time from the nominal motor
speed ns to 0 RPM. Select a ramp-down
3-68 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End
time such that no overvoltage occurs in the
Range: Function: inverter due to regenerative operation of the
50 %* [1 - Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down motor, and such that the generated current
99 %] decel time (parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down does not exceed the current limit set in
Time) where the deceleration torque decreases. parameter 4-18 Current Limit. The value 0.00
The larger the percentage value, the greater corresponds to 0.01 s in speed mode. See
the jerk compensation achieved, and thus the ramp-up time in parameter 3-71 Ramp 4
lower the torque jerks in the application. Ramp up Time.
t dec s x ns RPM
Par . 3 − 72 =
ref RPM
3.4.7 3-7* Ramp 4
3-75 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start
Configure ramp parameters, see parameter group 3-4* Range: Function:
Ramp 1. 50 %* [1 - Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
3-70 Ramp 4 Type 99 %] (parameter 3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time) in
which the acceleration torque increases. The
Option: Function:
larger the percentage value, the greater the
Select the ramp type, depending on
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
requirements for acceleration and deceleration.
lower the torque jerks in the application.
A linear ramp gives constant acceleration
during ramping. An S-ramp gives non-linear
3-76 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End
acceleration, compensating for jerk in the
Range: Function:
application.
50 %* [1 - Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
[0] * Linear
99 %] (parameter 3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time) in
[1] S-ramp Accelerates with lowest possible jerk. which the acceleration torque decreases. The
Const Jerk larger the percentage value, the greater the
[2] S-ramp S-ramp based on the values set in jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
Const parameter 3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time and lower the torque jerks in the application.
Time parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time.
3-77 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start
NOTICE Range: Function:
If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference
50 %* [1 - Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
during ramping is changed, the ramp time may be
99 %] time (parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time)
prolonged to realize a jerk-free movement, which may
where the deceleration torque increases. The
result in a longer start or stop time.
larger the percentage value, the greater the
More adjustments of the S-ramp ratios or switching
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
initiators may be necessary.
lower the torque jerks in the application.

76 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3-78 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End 3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time
Range: Function: Range: Function:
50 %* [1 - Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down parameter 4-18 Current Limit). Quick stop is
99 %] time (parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time) activated with a signal on a selected digital
where the deceleration torque decreases. The input, or via the serial communication port.
larger the percentage value, the greater the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
3 3

130BA069.10
RPM
lower the torque jerks in the application.

P 4-13 RPM
3.4.8 3-8* Other Ramps high limit

Reference
3-80 Jog Ramp Time P 1-25
Motor speed
Range: Function:
Size [0.01 Enter the jog ramp time, i.e. the acceleration/ P 4-11 RPM
low limit
related* - 3600 deceleration time between 0 RPM and the
s] rated motor frequency ns. Ensure that the
Time
resulting output current required for the given P 3-81
jog ramp time does not exceed the current Qramp

limit in parameter 4-18 Current Limit. The jog

Qstop
ramp time starts after activation of a jog
signal via the LCP, a selected digital input, or Illustration 3.28 Quick Stop Ramp Time
the serial communication port. When jog state
is disabled, then the normal ramping times
are valid. 3-82 Quick Stop Ramp Type
Option: Function:
130BA070.10

RPM
Select the ramp type, depending on
requirements for acceleration and
P 4-13 RPM
deceleration. A linear ramp gives constant
high limit acceleration during ramping. An S-ramp
P 1-25 gives non-linear acceleration, compen-
Motor speed
sating for jerk in the application.
P 3-19
Jog speed [0] * Linear
P 4-11 RPM [1] S-ramp Const
low limit Jerk
t jog t jog Time
[2] S-ramp Const
P 3-80 P 3-80
Ramp up Ramp down Time
(acc) (dec)
3-83 Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start
Illustration 3.27 Jog Ramp Time
Range: Function:
50 %* [1 - Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
t jog s x ns RPM
99 %] time (parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time)
Par . 3 − 80 =
Δ jog speed par . 3 − 19 RPM where the deceleration torque increases. The
3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time larger the percentage value, the greater the
Range: Function: jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
lower the torque jerks in the application.
Size [0.01 - Enter the quick–stop ramp-down time, that
related* 3600 s] is the deceleration time from the
3-84 Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End
synchronous motor speed to 0 RPM. Ensure
that no resulting overvoltage occurs in the Range: Function:
inverter due to regenerative operation of 50 %* [1 - Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
the motor required to achieve the given 99 %] time (parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time)
ramp-down time. Ensure also that the where the deceleration torque decreases. The
generated current required to achieve the larger the percentage value, the greater the
given ramp-down time does not exceed jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
the current limit (set in lower the torque jerks in the application.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 77

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3-89 Ramp Lowpass Filter Time 3-91 Ramp Time

Use this parameter to set how smoothly the speed changes. Range: Function:
Range: Function: reference by the step size specified in
1 ms* [1 - 200 ms] parameter 3-90 Step Size.

3 3 3.4.9 3-9* Digital Pot.Meter

3-92 Power Restore
Option: Function:
The digital potentiometer enables increase or decrease of [0] * Off Resets the digital potentiometer reference to 0% after
the actual reference by adjusting the set-up of the digital power-up.
inputs using the functions increase, decrease, or clear. To [1] On Restores the most recent digital potentiometer
activate the function, set at least 1 digital input to increase reference at power-up.
or decrease.
3-93 Maximum Limit
Speed Range: Function:
130BA158.11
100 %* [-200 - Set the maximum allowed value for the
200 %] resulting reference. This is recommended if
the digital potentiometer is used for fine-
P 3-95 tuning of the resulting reference.
Time (s)
Inc 3-94 Minimum Limit
Illustration 3.29 Increase Actual Reference Range: Function:
-100 %* [-200 - Set the minimum permissible value for the
200 %] resulting reference. This is recommended if
Speed the digital potentiometer is used for fine-
130BA159.11

tuning of the resulting reference.

P 3-95
3-95 Ramp Delay
Range: Function:
Time (s) Size [0 - Enter the delay required from activation of the
Dec
related* 0] digital potentiometer function until the
Inc frequency converter starts to ramp the
Illustration 3.30 Increase/Decrease Actual Reference reference. With a delay of 0 ms, the reference
starts to ramp when increase/decrease is
activated. See also parameter 3-91 Ramp Time.

3-90 Step Size

Range: Function:
0.10 % [0.01 - Enter the increment size required for
* 200 %] increase/decrease as a percentage of the
synchronous motor speed, ns. If increase/
decrease is activated, the resulting reference
is increased or decreased by the value set in
this parameter.

3-91 Ramp Time

Range: Function:
1 [0 - Enter the ramp time, that is the time for
s* 3600 s] adjustment of the reference 0–100% of the
specified digital potentiometer function (increase,
decrease, or clear).
If increase/decrease is activated for longer than the
ramp delay period specified in
parameter 3-95 Ramp Delay, the actual reference is
ramped up/down according to this ramp time. The
ramp time is defined as the time used to adjust the

78 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.5 Parameters: 4-** Limits/Warnings 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
Range: Function:
3.5.1 4-1* Motor Limits
setting in parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High
Limit [Hz].
Define torque, current, and speed limits for the motor, and

3 3
the reaction of the frequency converter when the limits are
4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
exceeded.
A limit may generate a message in the display. A warning Range: Function:
always generates a message in the display or on the Size [ par. Enter the maximum limit for motor
fieldbus. A monitoring function may initiate a warning or a related* 4-11 - speed. The motor speed high limit can
trip, after which the frequency converter stops and 60000 be set to correspond to the manufac-
generates an alarm message. RPM] turer’s maximum nominal motor speed.
The motor speed high limit must exceed
4-10 Motor Speed Direction the setting in parameter 4-11 Motor
Option: Function: Speed Low Limit [RPM].
NOTICE
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running. Range: Function:
Size [ par. Enter the maximum limit for motor speed in
Select the motor speed direction(s) required. Use related* 4-12 - Hz. Parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit
this parameter to prevent unwanted reversing. par. [Hz] can be set to correspond to the
When parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set 4-19 Hz] manufacturer's recommended maximum
to [3] Process, parameter 4-10 Motor Speed motor speed. The motor speed high limit
Direction is set to [0] Clockwise as default. The must exceed the value in
setting in parameter 4-10 Motor Speed Direction parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz].
does not limit options for setting The output frequency must not exceed 10%
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]. of the switching frequency
(parameter 14-01 Switching Frequency).
[0] Clockwise The reference is set to CW rotation. Reversing
input (default terminal 19) must be open.
4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode
[1] Counter The reference is set to CCW rotation. Reversing Range: Function:
clockwise input (default terminal 19) must be closed. If
Size related* [ 0 - 1000.0 %] This function limits the
reversing is required with reverse input open, the
Application [Application torque on the shaft to
motor direction can be changed by
dependent* dependent] protect the mechanical
parameter 1-06 Clockwise Direction.
installation.
[2] Both Allows the motor to rotate in both directions.
directions NOTICE
Changing parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode when
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to [0] Speed
Range: Function: open loop, parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed is
Size [ 0 - par. Enter the minimum limit for motor speed. automatically readjusted.
related* 4-13 The motor speed low limit can be set to
RPM] correspond to the manufacturer’s
recommended minimum motor speed.
NOTICE
The torque limit reacts to the actual, non-filtered torque,
The motor speed low limit must not
including torque spikes. This is not the torque that is
exceed the setting in
seen from the LCP or the fieldbus as that torque is
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit
filtered.
[RPM].

4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode
Range: Function: Range: Function:
Size [0 - Enter the minimum limit for motor speed. 100 %* [ 0 - 1000.0 %] This function limits the torque on the
related* par. 4-14 The motor speed low limit can be set to shaft to protect the mechanical instal-
Hz] correspond to the minimum output lation.
frequency of the motor shaft. The motor
speed low limit must not exceed the

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 79

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

4-18 Current Limit 4-20 Torque Limit Factor Source

Range: Function: Option: Function:
Size [ 1.0 - NOTICE [14] Analog in X30-12
related* 1000.0 % [16] Analog in X30-12
If [20] ATEX ETR is selected in
] inv
parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal
3 3 Protection, set parameter 4-18 Current 4-21 Speed Limit Factor Source
Limit current limit to 150%.
Option: Function:
Select an analog input for scaling the
This is a true current limit function that
settings in parameter 4-19 Max Output
continues in the oversynchronous range.
Frequency 0–100% (or the other way
However, due to field weakening the motor
around). The signal levels corresponding
torque at current limit will drop accordingly
to 0% and 100% are defined in the
when the voltage increase stops above the
analog input scaling, for example
synchronized speed of the motor.
parameter group 6-1* Analog Input 1. This
parameter is only active when
4-19 Max Output Frequency
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is in
Range: Function:
[4] Torque Open Loop.
Size [1 - NOTICE [0] * No function
related* 590
This parameter cannot be adjusted [2] Analog in 53
Hz]
while the motor is running.
[4] Analog in 53 inv
[6] Analog in 54
NOTICE [8] Analog in 54 inv
Maximum output frequency cannot [10] Analog in X30-11
exceed 10% of the inverter switching [12] Analog in X30-11
frequency (parameter 14-01 Switching inv
Frequency). [14] Analog in X30-12
[16] Analog in X30-12
Provides a final limit on the output frequency inv
for improved safety in applications where
overspeeding is to be avoided. This limit is 4-23 Brake Check Limit Factor Source
final in all configurations (independent of the Select the input source for the function in parameter 2-15 Brake
setting in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode). Check. If several frequency converters are carrying out a brake
check simultaneously, the resistance in the grid leads to a
4-20 Torque Limit Factor Source voltage drop on the mains or DC-link and a false brake check
Option: Function: can occur. Use an external current sensor on every brake resistor.
If an application requires a 100% valid brake check, connect the
Select an analog input for scaling the
sensor to an analog input.
settings in parameter 4-16 Torque Limit
Motor Mode and parameter 4-17 Torque Option: Function:
Limit Generator Mode 0–100% (or [0] * DC-link voltage The frequency converter
inverse). The signal levels corresponding performs the brake check by
to 0% and 100% are defined in the monitoring the DC-link
analog input scaling, for example voltage. The frequency
parameter group 6-1* Analog Input 1. This converter injects current in
parameter is only active when the brake resistor which
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is in lowers the DC-link voltage.
Speed Open Loop or Speed Closed Loop.
[1] Analog Input 53 Select to use an external
[0] * No function current sensor for brake
[2] Analog in 53 monitoring.
[4] Analog in 53 inv [2] Analog Input 54 Select to use an external
[6] Analog in 54 current sensor for brake
[8] Analog in 54 inv monitoring.
[10] Analog in X30-11
[12] Analog in X30-11
inv

80 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

4-24 Brake Check Limit Factor Warning 90, Feedback monitor is active as soon as the value
Range: Function: in parameter 4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error is exceeded,
regardless of the setting in parameter 4-32 Motor Feedback
98 [0 - Enter the limit factor that parameter 2-15 Brake
Loss Timeout. Warning/Alarm 61, Feedback Error is related to
%* 100 % Check uses when performing the brake check. The
the motor feedback loss function.
] frequency converter uses the limit factor
depending on the selection in
parameter 4-23 Brake Check Limit Factor Source:
4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error
Range: Function:
3 3
[0] DC-link voltage - the frequency converter
300 RPM* [1 - 600 RPM] Select the maximum allowed error in
applies the factor to the EEPROM data in the DC-
speed (output speed vs. feedback).
link.
[1] Analog Input 53 or [2] Analog Input 54 - the Speed

130BA221.10
brake check fails if the input current on the analog [rpm]

input is lower than the maximum input current

multiplied by the limit factor.

For example, in the following configuration the

brake check fails if the input current is lower than
16 mA: ncalc
• A current transducer with a range of 4-20 nactual
mA is connected to analog input 53.

• Parameter 4-24 Brake Check Limit Factor is

P 4-31
set to 80%.

3.5.2 4-3* Motor Feedback Monitoring

The parameter group includes monitoring and handling of P 4-32 Time

[sec]
motor feedback devices, such as encoders, resolvers, and
Illustration 3.31 Motor Feedback Speed Error
so on.

4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function

Option: Function: 4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout
This function is used to monitor Range: Function:
consistency in the feedback signal, that is Size [0 - 60 Set the timeout value allowing the speed
if the feedback signal is available. related* s] error set in parameter 4-31 Motor Feedback
Select which action the frequency Speed Error to be exceeded before
converter should take if a feedback fault is enabling the function selected in
detected. The selected action is to take parameter 4-30 Motor Feedback Loss
place when the feedback signal differs Function.
from the output speed by the value set in
parameter 4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error 4-34 Tracking Error Function
for longer than the value set in
Option: Function:
parameter 4-32 Motor Feedback Loss
This function is used to monitor that the
Timeout.
application follows the expected speed profile. In
[0] Disabled closed loop, the speed reference to the PID is
[1] Warning compared to the encoder feedback (filtered). In
[2] Trip open loop, the speed reference to the PID is
[3] Jog compensated for slip and compared to the
[4] Freeze Output frequency that is sent to the motor
[5] Max Speed (parameter 16-13 Frequency).
[6] Switch to Open The reaction is activated if the measured
Loop difference is more than the value specified in
[7] Select Setup 1 parameter 4-35 Tracking Error for the time
[8] Select Setup 2 specified in parameter 4-36 Tracking Error Timeout.
[9] Select Setup 3 A tracking error in closed loop does not imply
that there is a problem with the feedback signal.
[10] Select Setup 4
[11] Stop & Trip

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 81

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

4-34 Tracking Error Function 3.5.3 4-4* Speed Monitor

Option: Function:
A tracking error can be the result of torque limit 4-43 Motor Speed Monitor Function
at too heavy loads. Option: Function:
[0] Disable NOTICE
3 3 [1] Warning This parameter is only available in the
[2] Trip flux control principle.
[3] Trip after
stop Select how the frequency converter reacts
when the motor speed monitor-function
Warning/Alarm 78, Tracking Error is related to the tracking
detects overspeed or wrong rotation direction.
error function.
When the motor speed monitor is active, the
4-35 Tracking Error frequency converter detects an error if the
Range: Function: following conditions are true for a time period
10 [1 - 600 Enter the maximum permissible speed error specified in parameter 4-45 Motor Speed
RPM* RPM] between the motor speed and the output Monitor Timeout:
of the ramp when not ramping. In open • The actual speed differs from the
loop, the motor speed is estimated and in reference speed in
closed loop, it is the feedback from parameter 16-48 Speed Ref. After Ramp
encoder/resolver. [RPM].

• The difference between the speeds

4-36 Tracking Error Timeout exceeds the value in
Range: Function: parameter 4-44 Motor Speed Monitor
1 s* [0 - 60 s] Enter the timeout period during which an error Max.
greater than the value set in In speed closed loop, the actual speed is the
parameter 4-35 Tracking Error is permissible. feedback from the encoder measured during
the time defined in parameter 7-06 Speed PID
4-37 Tracking Error Ramping Lowpass Filter Time. In open loop, the actual
Range: Function: speed is the estimated motor speed.

100 [1 - 600 Enter the maximum permissible speed Speed

130BE199.10
nRef
RPM* RPM] error between the motor speed and the
output of the ramp when ramping. In 0rpm

open loop, the motor speed is estimated -nRef

Time
and in closed loop, the encoder measures
the speed.
Solid line Parameter 16-48 Speed Ref. After
Ramp [RPM]
4-38 Tracking Error Ramping Timeout
Dotted Parameter 4-44 Motor Speed
Range: Function: line Monitor Max
1 s* [0 - 60 s] Enter the timeout period during which an error
greater than the value set in Illustration 3.32 Speed Reference and
parameter 4-37 Tracking Error Ramping while Maximum Allowed Speed Difference
ramping is permissible.

4-39 Tracking Error After Ramping Timeout

[0] Disabled
Range: Function: [1] Warning The frequency converter reports warning 101,
5 s* [0 - 60 s] Enter the timeout period after ramping where Speed monitor when the speed is outside the
parameter 4-37 Tracking Error Ramping and limit.
parameter 4-38 Tracking Error Ramping Timeout
[2] Trip The frequency converter trips and reports
are still active.
alarm 101, Speed monitor.

[3] Jog
[4] Freeze
Output
[5] Max Speed

82 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

4-43 Motor Speed Monitor Function

130BA064.10
Imotor

Option: Function:
[6] Switch to ILIM ON REF
(P 4-18)
Open Loop
[7] Select IHIGH

[8]
Setup 1
Select
(P 4-51)
3 3
IN RANGE
Setup 2
[9] Select
ILOW
Setup 3
(P 4-50)
[10] Select
Setup 4 nmotor [RPM]

[11] Stop & Trip nMIN nLOW REF nHIGH nMAX

(P 4-11) (P 4-52) (P 4-53) (P 4-13)
[12] Trip/ The frequency converter reports alarm 101,
Warning Speed monitor in running mode and warning Illustration 3.33 Adjustable Warnings
101, Speed monitor in stop or coast mode. This
option is only available in closed-loop
operation. 4-50 Warning Current Low
[13] Trip/Catch Select when there is a need to catch a load, Range: Function:
for example when mechanical braking fails. 0 A* [ 0 - par. Enter the ILOW value. When the motor current
This option is available in closed loop only. 4-51 A] falls below this limit, the display reads Current
The frequency converter trips and reports Low. The signal outputs can be programmed to
alarm 101, Speed monitor in running mode. In produce a status signal on terminal 27 or 29 (FC
stop mode, the frequency converter catches 302 only) and on relay output 01 or 02 (FC 302
the flying load and reports warning 101, Speed only). Refer to Illustration 3.33.
monitor.
In catch mode, the frequency converter 4-51 Warning Current High
applies holding torque to control the zero Range: Function:
speed on a potentially malfunctioning brake
Size [ par. Enter the IHIGH value. When the motor
(closed loop). To exit this mode, send a new
related* 4-50 - par. current exceeds this limit, the display
start signal to the frequency converter. A coast
16-37 A] reads Current High. The signal outputs can
or Safe Torque Off also terminates the
be programmed to produce a status
function.
signal on terminal 27 or 29 (FC 302 only)
and on relay output 01 or 02 (FC 302
4-44 Motor Speed Monitor Max
only). Refer to Illustration 3.33.
Range: Function:
300 RPM* [10 - 500 RPM] 4-52 Warning Speed Low

4-45 Motor Speed Monitor Timeout Range: Function:

0 RPM* [ 0 - par. Enter the nLOW value. When the motor speed
Range: Function:
4-53 RPM] exceeds this limit, the display reads Speed
0.1 s* [0 - 60 s]
low. The signal outputs can be programmed
to produce a status signal on terminal 27 or
3.5.4 4-5* Adjustable Warnings 29 (FC 302 only) and on relay output 01 or
02 (FC 302 only).
Use these parameters to adjust warning limits for current,
speed, reference, and feedback. 4-53 Warning Speed High
Warnings are shown on the LCP and can be programmed Range: Function:
to be outputs or to be read out via fieldbus in the Size [ par. Enter the nHIGH value. When the motor
extended status word. related* 4-52 - speed exceeds this value, the display
60000 reads Speed high. The signal outputs can
RPM] be programmed to produce a status
signal on terminals 27 or 29 and on relay
outputs 01 or 02. Refer to
Illustration 3.33.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 83

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

4-54 Warning Reference Low 4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function

Range: Function: Option: Function:
-999999.999* [ -999999.999 - Enter the lower reference limit. event of a missing motor phase. Enable this
par. 4-55] When the actual reference drops function to avoid motor damage.
below this limit, the display See also chapter 3.5.5 Combinations of parameters

3 3 indicates RefLOW. The signal

outputs can be programmed to
4-58 and 4-59.

[0] Disabled The frequency converter does not issue a missing

produce a status signal on
motor phase alarm. Not recommended due to
terminal 27 or 29 (FC 302 only)
risk of motor damage.
and on relay output 01 or 02 (FC
302 only). [1] Trip 100 For a quick detection time and alarm in the
ms event of a missing motor phase.
4-55 Warning Reference High [2] Trip 1000
Range: Function: ms
999999.999* [ par. 4-54 - Enter the upper reference limit. [3] Trip Special option relevant for crane applications
999999.999] When the actual reference exceeds 100ms when lowering a small load that lets the
this limit, the display reads Refhigh. 3ph frequency converter avoid false detections of
The signal outputs can be detec. missing motor phase.
programmed to produce a status This option is a reduced version of option [1] Trip
signal on terminal 27 or 29 (FC 100 ms.
302 only) and on relay output 01 1-phase missing is handled as in option [1] Trip
or 02 (FC 302 only). 100 ms. 3-phase detection is reduced compared
to option [1] Trip 100 ms.
4-56 Warning Feedback Low The 3-phase detection is only working at start-up
and in the low speed range where a significant
Range: Function:
current is running, avoiding false trips during
Size [ -999999.999 - Enter the lower feedback limit.
small motor current.
related* par. 4-57 When the feedback drops below
ReferenceFeed- this limit, the display reads NOTICE
backUnit] FeedbLow. The signal outputs can Only available for FC 302 flux closed loop.
be programmed to produce a
status signal on terminal 27 or
[5] Motor The frequency converter detects automatically
29 (FC 302 only) and on relay
Check when the motor is disconnected and resumes
output 01 or 02 (FC 302 only).
operation once the motor is connected again.

4-57 Warning Feedback High NOTICE

Range: Function: Valid for FC 302 only.
Size [ par. 4-56 - Enter the upper feedback limit.
related* 999999.999 When the feedback exceeds this
4-59 Motor Check At Start
ReferenceFeed- limit, the display reads FeedbHigh.
backUnit] The signal outputs can be Option: Function:
programmed to produce a status NOTICE
signal on terminal 27 or 29 (FC This parameter cannot be adjusted while the
302 only) and on relay output 01 motor is running.
or 02 (FC 302 only).

4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function

NOTICE
Valid for FC 302 only.
Option: Function:
NOTICE Use this parameter to detect the missing motor phase
This parameter cannot be adjusted while during motor standstill. Shows alarm 30, Motor phase U
the motor is running. missing, alarm 31, Motor phase V missing, or alarm 32,
Motor phase W missing in the event of a missing motor
The missing motor phase function detects phase during standstill. Use this function before
whether the motor phase is missing during disengaging a mechanical brake. Enable this function
motor rotation. Shows alarm 30, 31, or 32 in the to avoid motor damage.

84 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

4-59 Motor Check At Start 4-62 Bypass Speed To [RPM]

Option: Function: Array [4]
See also chapter 3.5.5 Combinations of parameters 4-58 Range: Function:
and 4-59. Size related* [ 0 - par. Some systems call for avoiding

CAUTION
[0] * Off 4-13 RPM] certain output speeds due to

RISK OF MOTOR DAMAGE

resonance problems in the system.
Enter the upper limits of the speeds
3 3
Using this option may lead to motor damage. to be avoided.

The frequency converter does not issue a missing 4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz]
motor phase alarm. Array [4]
[1] On Before each start, the frequency converter checks if all Range: Function:
3 motor phases are present. The check is performed Size related* [ 0 - par. Some systems call for avoiding
without any movement on ASM motors. For PM and 4-14 Hz] certain output speeds due to
SynRM motors, the check is performed as part of the resonance problems in the system.
position detection. Enter the upper limits of the speeds
to be avoided.
When parameter 4-59 Motor Check At Start is set to [1] On,
do not set parameter 4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function to
the following options: 3.5.6 4-7* Position Monitor

• [0] Disabled. 4-70 Position Error Function

• [5] Motor check. Option: Function:

NOTICE
3.5.5 4-6* Speed Bypass This parameter is only available with
software version 48.XX.
Some systems require that certain output frequencies or Select the function which is activated when the
speeds are avoided due to resonance problems in the position error exceeds the maximum allowed
system. A maximum of 4 frequency or speed ranges can value. Position error is the difference between the
be avoided. actual position and the commanded position. The
position error is the input for the position PI
4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM]
controller.
Array [4]
[0] * Disabled The frequency converter does not monitor the
Range: Function: position error.
Size related* [ 0 - par. Some systems call for avoiding [1] Warning The frequency converter issues a warning when
4-13 RPM] certain output speeds due to the maximum allowed position error is exceeded.
resonance problems in the system. The frequency converter continues operation.
Enter the lower limits of the speeds [2] Trip The frequency converter trips when the
to be avoided. maximum allowed position error is exceeded.

4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz] 4-71 Maximum Position Error

Array [4] Range: Function:
Range: Function: 1000 Custom- [0 - NOTICE
ReadoutUnit2* 2147483647
Size related* [ 0 - par. Some systems require that certain This parameter is only
CustomRea-
4-14 Hz] output frequencies or speeds are available with software
doutUnit2]
avoided due to resonance problems version 48.XX.
in the system. Enter the lower limits
of the speeds to be avoided. Enter the maximum allowed
position tracking error in
position units defined in
parameter group 17-7* Position
Scaling. If this value is exceeded
during the time set in
parameter 4-72 Position Error

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 85

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

4-71 Maximum Position Error 4-73 Position Limit Function

Range: Function: Option: Function:
Timeout the position error The frequency converter issues a warning when
function in at limit position.
parameter 4-70 Position Error
[6] Position When the set target is outside the position
3 3 Function is activated.
Stop & limits, the frequency converter uses the position
Trip limit as target. This option works in all modes of
4-72 Position Error Timeout
operation including speed and torque control.
Range: Function: The frequency converter trips when at limit
0.100 [0.000 - NOTICE position.
s* 60.000 s]
This parameter is only available with [7] Speed When the set target is outside the position
software version 48.XX. Stop limits, the frequency converter performs a ramp
down and stops at the limit position. This option
If the error defined in works in all modes of operation. The frequency
parameter 4-71 Maximum Position Error is converter issues a warning at stop.
present longer than the time in this [8] Speed When the set target is outside the position
parameter, the frequency converter activates Stop & limits, the frequency converter performs a ramp
the function selected in Trip down and stops at the limit position. This option
parameter 4-70 Position Error Function. works in all modes of operation. The frequency
converter trips at stop.
4-73 Position Limit Function
Option: Function: 4-74 Start Fwd/Rev Function
NOTICE Option: Function:
This parameter is only available with NOTICE
software version 48.XX. This parameter is only available with
software version 48.XX.
Select the function which is activated when the
position is outside the limits defined in Select the action that the frequency converter
parameter 3-06 Minimum Position and executes when there is an active signal on a
parameter 3-07 Maximum Position. digital input with options [12] Enable Start
[0] Disabled The frequency converter does not monitor the Forward or [13] Enable Start Reverse selected.
position limits. The frequency converter executes the function
selected in this parameter when running into
[1] Warning The frequency converter issues a warning when
an end limit switch and then the motion is
the position is outside the limits.
only allowed in the opposite direction. When
[2] Warning & The frequency converter issues a warning when an option with trip is selected, the frequency
Trip the set target is outside the position limits. The converter can resume motion only after reset.
frequency converter starts the positioning and
[0] Stop The frequency converter stops the motor.
then trips when the position limit is reached.
*
[3] Abs. Pos. The frequency converter monitors position limits [1] Stop & The frequency converter stops the motor and
* Mode only in absolute positioning mode. The Warning shows warning 215, Start Fwd/Rev.
Stop frequency converter issues a warning and stops
[2] Stop & Trip The frequency converter stops the motor and
at the position limit when the target position is
trips with alarm 215, Start Fwd/Rev.
outside the position limits.
[3] Qstop The frequency converter performs the quick
[4] Abs. Pos. The frequency converter monitors position limits
stop.
Md. Stop only in absolute positioning mode. The
& Trip frequency converter stops at the position limit [4] Qstop & The frequency converter performs the quick
and trips when the target position is outside the Warning stop and shows warning 215, Start Fwd/Rev.
position limits.
[5] Qstop & The frequency converter performs the quick
[5] Position When the set target is outside the position Trip stop and trips with alarm 215, Start Fwd/Rev.
Stop limits, the frequency converter uses the position
[6] Coast The frequency converter coasts the motor.
limit as target. This option works in all modes of
operation including speed and torque control. [7] Coast & The frequency converter coasts the motor and
Warning shows warning 215, Start Fwd/Rev.

86 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

4-74 Start Fwd/Rev Function

Option: Function:
[8] Coast & The frequency converter coasts the motor and
Trip trips with alarm 215, Start Fwd/Rev.

[9] Zero Speed The frequency converter ramps down and

Ref keeps the motor magnetized at zero speed. In 3 3
the positioning and the synchronization
modes the position controller stays active and
retains the actual position.

4-75 Touch Timout

Range: Function:
6000.0 [0.1 - Enter the timeout for the touch probe
s* 6000.0 s] positioning. When the touch probe
positioning is active, if the frequency
converter does not detect the touch
probe sensor within this time, the
frequency converter trips with alarm 216,
Touch Timeout. The value 6000 equals Off.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 87

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3.6 Parameters: 5-** Digital In/Out Group 1 Reset, coast stop, reset, and coast stop, quick stop,
DC brake, stop, and the [Off] key.
3.6.1 5-0* Digital I/O Mode Group 2 Start, pulse start, reversing, start reversing, jog,
and freeze output.
Parameters for configuring the input and output using
Table 3.14 Function Groups
3 3
NPN and PNP.

5-00 Digital I/O Mode Digital input function Select Terminal

Option: Function: No operation [0] All, terminal 32, 33

NOTICE Reset [1] All

Coast inverse [2] All, terminal 27
Perform a power cycle to activate the
Coast and reset inverse [3] All
parameter once it has been changed.
Quick stop inverse [4] All
DC brake inverse [5] All
Digital inputs and programmed digital outputs are
pre-programmable for operation either in PNP or NPN Stop inverse [6] All
systems. Start [8] All, terminal 18
Latched start [9] All
[0] * PNP Action on positive directional pulses (↕). PNP systems
Reversing [10] All, terminal 19
are pulled down to GND.
Start reversing [11] All
[1] NPN Action on negative directional pulses (↕). NPN Enable start forward [12] All
systems are pulled up to +24 V, internally in the Enable start reverse [13] All
frequency converter. Jog [14] All, terminal 29
Preset reference on [15] All
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode
Preset ref bit 0 [16] All
Option: Function: Preset ref bit 1 [17] All
NOTICE Preset ref bit 2 [18] All
This parameter cannot be adjusted while Freeze reference [19] All
the motor is running. Freeze output [20] All
Speed up [21] All
[0] * Input Defines terminal 27 as a digital input. Speed down [22] All
Set-up select bit 0 [23] All
[1] Output Defines terminal 27 as a digital output.
Set-up select bit 1 [24] All
Precise stop inverse [26] 18, 19
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode
Precise start, stop [27] 18, 19
Option: Function:
Catch up [28] All
NOTICE Slow down [29] All
This parameter is available for FC 302 only. Counter input [30] 29, 33
Pulse input edge [31] 29, 33
[0] * Input Defines terminal 29 as a digital input. triggered
Pulse input time based [32] 29, 33
[1] Output Defines terminal 29 as a digital output.
Ramp bit 0 [34] All
Ramp bit 1 [35] All
3.6.2 5-1* Digital Inputs Latched precise start [40] 18, 19
Latched precise stop [41] 18, 19
The digital inputs are used for selecting various functions inverse
in the frequency converter. All digital inputs can be set to External interlock [51] –
the functions listed in Table 1.2. DigiPot increase [55] All
DigiPot decrease [56] All
Functions in group 1 have higher priority than functions in DigiPot clear [57] All
group 2. DigiPot hoist [58] All
Counter A (up) [60] 29, 33
Counter A (down) [61] 29, 33
Reset Counter A [62] All
Counter B (up) [63] 29, 33

88 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

Digital input function Select Terminal parameter 3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time. When
Counter B (down) [64] 29, 33 the motor stops, the shaft is in free mode.
Reset counter B [65] All Logic 0⇒quick stop.
Mech. brake feedb. [70] All [5] DC brake Inverted input for DC brake (NC). Stops motor
Mech. brake feedb. inv. [71] All inverse by energizing it with a DC current for a certain

3 3
PID error inv. [72] All time period. See parameter 2-01 DC Brake
PID reset I-part [73] All Current to parameter 2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed
[RPM]. The function is only active when the
PID enable [74] All
value in parameter 2-02 DC Braking Time is
MCO specific [75] –
different from 0. Logic 0⇒DC brake.
PTC card 1 [80] All
[6] Stop Stop inverted function. Generates a stop
PROFIdrive OFF2 [91] –
inverse function when the selected terminal goes from
PROFIdrive OFF3 [92] –
logical level 1 to logical level 0.
Light load detection [94] All
Mains Loss [96] 32, 33 The stop is performed according to the
selected ramp time:
Mains loss inverse [97] 32, 33
Start edge triggered [98] –
• Parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down
Time,
Safety option reset [100] –
Enable master offset [108] – • Parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down
Start virtual master [109] – Time,

Start homing [110] All • Parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down

Activate touch [111] All Time, and
Relative position [112] All • Parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down
Enable reference [113] All Time.
Sync. to Pos. Mode [114] All
Home sensor [115] 18, 32, 33
NOTICE
Home sensor inverse [116] 18, 32, 33
When the frequency converter is at the
torque limit and has received a stop
Touch sensor [117] 18, 32, 33
command, it may not stop by itself. To
Touch sensor inverse [118] 18, 32, 33
ensure that the frequency converter
Speed mode [119] –
stops, configure a digital output to [27]
Table 3.15 Digital Input Function Torque limit and stop. Connect this digital
output to a digital input that is
VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/FC 302 standard terminals configured as coast.
are 18, 19, 27, 29, 32, and 33. VLT® General Purpose I/O [8] Start (Default digital input 18): Select start for a
MCB 101 terminals are X30/2, X30/3, and X30/4. start/stop command. Logic 1 = start,
Terminal 29 functions as an output only in FC 302. logic 0 = stop.
[9] Latched If a pulse is applied for minimum 2 ms, the
Functions dedicated to only 1 digital input are stated in start motor starts. The motor stops when stop
the associated parameter. inverse is activated, or a reset command (via
DI) is given.
[10] Reversing (Default digital input 19). Change the direction
All digital inputs can be programmed to these functions:
of motor shaft rotation. Select logic 1 to
reverse. The reversing signal only changes the
[0] No No reaction to signals transmitted to the
direction of rotation. It does not activate the
operation terminal.
start function. Select both directions in
[1] Reset Resets frequency converter after a trip/alarm. parameter 4-10 Motor Speed Direction. The
Not all alarms can be reset. function is not active in process closed loop.
[2] Coast (Default digital input 27): Coast stop, inverted [11] Start Used for start/stop and for reversing on the
inverse input (NC). The frequency converter leaves the reversing same wire. Signals on start are not allowed at
motor in free mode. Logic 0⇒coast stop. the same time.
[3] Coast and Reset and coast stop inverted input (NC). [12] Enable Disengages the counterclockwise movement
reset Leaves motor in free mode and resets start and allows clockwise direction.
inverse frequency converter. Logic 0⇒coast stop and forward
reset.
[13] Enable Disengages the clockwise movement and
[4] Quick stop Inverted input (NC). Generates a stop in start allows counterclockwise direction.
inverse accordance with quick stop ramp time set in reverse

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 89

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

[14] Jog (Default digital input 29): Activate jog speed. Shut down Catch up
See parameter 3-11 Jog Speed [Hz]. Unchanged speed 0 0
[15] Preset Shifts between external reference and preset Reduced by %-value 1 0
reference reference. It is assumed that [1] External/preset Increased by %-value 0 1
on has been selected in parameter 3-04 Reference Reduced by %-value 1 1

3 3
Function. Logic 0 = external reference active;
logic 1 = 1 of the 8 preset references is active. Table 3.17 Shut Down/Catch Up
[16] Preset ref Preset reference bit 0, 1, and 2 enable a choice
bit 0 between 1 of the 8 preset references according [22] Speed Same as [21] Speed up.
to Table 3.16. down
[17] Preset ref Same as [16] Preset ref bit 0. [23] Set-up Select [23] Set-up select bit 0 or select [24] Set-up
bit 1 select bit select bit 1 to select 1 of the 4 set-ups. Set
[18] Preset ref Same as [16] Preset ref bit 0. 0 parameter 0-10 Active Set-up to Multi Set-up.
bit 2 [24] Set-up (Default digital input 32): Same as [23] Set-up
select bit select bit 0.
Preset ref. bit 2 1 0 1
Preset ref. 0 0 0 0 [26] Precise Sends an inverted stop signal when the precise
Preset ref. 1 0 0 1 stop inv. stop function is activated in
Preset ref. 2 0 1 0 parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function.
Preset ref. 3 0 1 1 Precise stop inverse function is available for
Preset ref. 4 1 0 0 terminals 18 or 19.
Preset ref. 5 1 0 1 [27] Precise Use when [0] Precise ramp stop is selected in
Preset ref. 6 1 1 0 start, stop parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function.
Preset ref. 7 1 1 1 Precise start, stop is available for terminals 18
and 19.
Table 3.16 Preset Reference Bit Precise start ensures that the rotor turning angle
from standing still to reference is the same for
[19] Freeze Freezes the actual reference, which is now the each start (for same ramp time, same setpoint).
ref point of enable/condition to be used for [21] Speed This function is the equivalent to the precise
up and [22] Speed down. If speed up/speed down is stop where the rotor turning angle from
used, the speed change always follows ramp 2 reference to standing still is the same for each
(parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time and stop.
parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time) in the When using parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function
range 0–parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference. option [1] Cnt stop with reset or [2] Cnt stop w/o
[20] Freeze Freezes the actual motor frequency (Hz), which is reset:
output now the point of enable/condition to be used for The frequency converter needs a precise stop-
[21] Speed up and [22] Speed down. If speed up/ signal before reaching the value of
speed down is used, the speed change always parameter 1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value. If this
follows ramp 2 (parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up signal is not supplied, the frequency converter
Time and parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time) does not stop when the value in
in the range 0–parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency. parameter 1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value is
NOTICE reached.
Trigger precise start, stop by a digital input. The
When freeze output is active, the frequency
function is available for terminals 18 and 19.
converter cannot be stopped via a low [8]
[28] Catch up Increases reference value by percentage
Start signal. Stop the frequency converter
(relative) set in parameter 3-12 Catch up/slow
via a terminal programmed for [2] Coasting
Down Value.
inverse or [3] Coast and reset inverse.
[29] Slow Reduces reference value by percentage (relative)
[21] Speed Select [21] Speed up and [22] Speed down for digital
down set in parameter 3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value.
up control of the up/down speed (motor potenti-
[30] Counter Precise stop function in parameter 1-83 Precise
ometer). Activate this function by selecting either
input Stop Function acts as counter stop or speed
[19] Freeze ref or [20] Freeze output. When speed
compensated counter stop with or without
up/speed down is activated for less than 400 ms,
reset. The counter value must be set in
the resulting reference is increased/decreased by
parameter 1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value.
0.1%. If speed up/speed down is activated for more
[31] Pulse Counts the number of pulse flanks per sample
than 400 ms, the resulting reference follows the
edge time. This gives a higher resolution at high
setting in ramping up/down parameters 3-x1/3-x2.
triggered

90 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

frequencies, but is not as precise at lower counter value of parameter 1-84 Precise Stop
frequencies. Use this pulse principle for Counter Value is reached.
encoders with low resolution (for example 30 [41] Latched Sends a latched stop signal when the precise
PPR). Precise Stop stop function is activated in
inverse parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function. The

130BB463.10
Pulse

3 3
Sample time latched precise stop inverse function is
available for terminals 18 or 19.
[51] External This function makes it possible to give an
Illustration 3.34 Pulse Flanks per Sample
interlock external fault to the frequency converter.
Time
This fault is treated in the same way as an
internally generated alarm.
[55] DigiPot Increase signal to the digital potentiometer
[32] Pulse Measures the duration between pulse flanks. Increase function described in parameter group 3-9*
time- This gives a higher resolution at lower Digital Pot. Meter.
based frequencies, but is not as precise at higher
[56] DigiPot Decrease signal to the digital potentiometer
frequencies. This principle has a cutoff
Decrease function described in parameter group 3-9*
frequency, which makes it unsuited for encoders
Digital Pot. Meter.
with low resolutions (for example 30 PPR) at low
[57] DigiPot Clears the digital potentiometer reference
speeds.
Clear described in parameter group 3-9* Digital Pot.
Meter.
Speed [rpm] Speed [rpm]
130BB462.10

[60] Counter A (Terminal 29 or 33 only). Input for increment

counting in the SLC counter.
a Time[sec] b Time[sec]
[61] Counter A (Terminal 29 or 33 only). Input for decrement
a: Low encoder b: Standard encoder counting in the SLC counter.
resolution resolution [62] Reset Input for reset of counter A.
Counter A
Pulse [63] Counter B (Terminal 29 or 33 only). Input for increment
130BB464.10

Timer
Sample time
Time counter
Time Start Read Timer: Read Timer:
counting in the SLC counter.
20 timer tides 20 timer tides
[64] Counter B (Terminal 29 or 33 only). Input for decrement
counting in the SLC counter.
Illustration 3.35 Duration Between Pulse
[65] Reset Input for reset of counter B.
Flanks
Counter B
[70] Mech. Brake Brake feedback for hoisting applications: Set
Feedback parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle to [3]
[34] Ramp bit Enables a selection between 1 of the 4 ramps Flux w/ motor feedback; set
0 available, according to Table 3.18. parameter 1-72 Start Function to [6] Hoist
[35] Ramp bit Same as [34] Ramp bit 0. mech brake Ref.
1 [71] Mech. Brake Inverted brake feedback for hoisting
Feedback applications.
Preset ramp bit 1 0
inv.
Ramp 1 0 0
[72] PID error When enabled, this option inverts the
Ramp 2 0 1
inverse resulting error from the process PID
Ramp 3 1 0
controller. Available only if
Ramp 4 1 1 parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to
[6] Surface Winder, [7] Extended PID Speed OL,
Table 3.18 Preset Ramp Bit
or [8] Extended PID Speed CL.
[73] PID reset I- When enabled, this option resets the I-part
[40] Latched A latched precise start only requires a pulse
part of the process PID controller. Equivalent to
Precise Start of 3 ms on terminals 18 or 19.
parameter 7-40 Process PID I-part Reset.
When using for parameter 1-83 Precise Stop
Available only if parameter 1-00 Configuration
Function [1] Cnt stop with reset or [2] Cnt stop
Mode is set to [6] Surface Winder, [7] Extended
w/o reset:
PID Speed OL, or [8] Extended PID Speed CL.
When the reference is reached, the frequency
converter internally enables the precise stop [74] PID enable Enables the extended process PID controller.
signal. This means that the frequency Equivalent to parameter 7-50 Process PID
converter does the precise stop when the Extended PID. Available only if
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 91

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

[7] Extended PID Speed OL or [8] Extended PID [100] Safe Option Resets the safety option. Available only when
Speed CL. Reset the safety option is mounted.
[80] PTC Card 1 All digital inputs can be set to [80] PTC Card [107] Target Changes the sign of the set target position.
1. However, only 1 digital input must be set Inverse For example, if the set target is 1000, the
to this option. activation of this option changes the value

3 3
[91] PROFIdrive The functionality is the same as the to -1000.
OFF2 corresponding control word bit of the [108] Enable This option is valid only with software
PROFIBUS/PROFINET option. Master version 48.XX.
[92] PROFIdrive The functionality is the same as the Offset Activates the master offset selected in
OFF3 corresponding control word bit of the parameter 3-26 Master Offset when
PROFIBUS/PROFINET option. parameter 17-93 Master Offset Selection has a
[94] Light Load Evacuation mode for lifts or elevators. The selection from [1] Absolute to [5] Relative
Detection function magnetizes the motor before Touch Sensor.
opening the mechanical brake. The motion [109] Start Virtual This option is valid only with software
starts in the direction (up or down) defined Master version 48.XX.
by VLT® Lift Controller MCO 361 using the Starts the virtual master configured in
speed of parameter 30-27 Light Load Speed parameter 3-27 Virtual Master Max Ref.
[%]. This motion continues for the time [110] Start This option is valid only with software
specified in parameter 30-25 Light Load Delay Homing version 48.XX.
[s] while measuring the current. If the motor Starts the homing function selected in
current exceeds the reference current in parameter 17-80 Homing Function. Must
parameter 30-26 Light Load Current [%], the remain high until homing is done, otherwise
lift is obstructed. The direction is reversed homing is aborted.
after the delay time specified in [111] Activate This option is valid only with software
parameter 30-25 Light Load Delay [s]. For the Touch version 48.XX.
feature to run, a start or start reverse Activates the monitoring of the touch sensor
command is needed, together with selecting input.
this digital input. [112] Relative This option is valid only with software
NOTICE Position version 48.XX.
Flying start overrules light load This option selects between absolute and
detection. relative positioning. The option is valid for
the next positioning command.
[96] Mains Loss Select to improve kinetic back-up.
[113] Enable This option is valid only with software
When the mains voltage goes back to a level
Reference version 48.XX.
that is close to (but still lower than) the
Positioning mode: The frequency converter
detection level, the output speed increases
activates the selected positioning type and
and kinetic back-up remains active. To avoid
target and starts the motion towards the
this situation, send a status signal to the
new target. The motion starts either
frequency converter. When the signal on the
immediately or when active positioning is
digital input is low (0), the frequency
completed, depending on settings of
converter forcibly turns off the kinetic back-
parameter 17-90 Absolute Position Mode and
up.
parameter 17-91 Relative Position Mode.
NOTICE Synchronization mode: High signal locks the
Only available for pulse inputs at actual follower position to the actual master
terminals 32/33. position. The follower starts and catches up
[97] Mains Loss When the signal on the digital input is high with the master. Low signal stops the
Inverse (1), the frequency converter forcibly turns off synchronization and the follower makes a
the kinetic back-up. For more details, see the controlled stop.
description of [96] Mains loss. [114] Sync. to This option is valid only with software
NOTICE Pos. Mode version 48.XX.
Select positioning in synchronization mode.
Only available for pulse inputs at
terminals 32/33. [115] Home This option is valid only with software
Sensor version 48.XX.
[98] Start edge Edge-triggered start command. Keeps the
Normally open contact for defining the home
triggered start command alive. It can be used for a
position. The function is defined in
start push key.
parameter 17-80 Homing Function. Available
only at digital inputs 18, 32, and 33.

92 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

[116] Home This option is valid only with software 5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input
Sensor Inv. version 48.XX.
Option: Function:
Normally closed contact for defining the
No operation Functions are described in parameter group 5-1*
home position. The function is defined in
Digital Inputs.
parameter 17-80 Homing Function. Available

3 3
only at digital inputs 18, 32, and 33. 5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input
[117] Touch This option is valid only with software Option: Function:
Sensor version 48.XX.
Select the function from the available digital
Normally open contact. Serves as a reference
input range and the additional options [60]
for touch probe positioning. Available only at
Counter A, [61] Counter A, [63] Counter B and
digital inputs 18, 32, and 33.
[64] Counter B. Counters are used in smart
[118] Touch This option is valid only with software
logic control functions.
Sensor version 48.XX.
[0] * No operation Functions are described in parameter group
Normally closed contact. Serves as a
5-1* Digital Inputs.
reference for touch probe positioning.
Available only at digital inputs 18, 32, and 5-16 Terminal X30/2 Digital Input
33.
Option: Function:
[119] Speed This option is valid only with software
[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module
mode version 48.XX.
VLT® General Purpose I/O MCB 101 is
Select the speed mode when [9] Positioning
installed in the frequency converter.
or [10] Synchronization is selected in
Functions are described in parameter group
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode. Speed
5-1* Digital Inputs.
reference is set by reference resource 1 or
fieldbus REF1 relative to 5-17 Terminal X30/3 Digital Input
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference.
Option: Function:
5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module
Option: Function: VLT® General Purpose I/O MCB 101 is
installed in the frequency converter.
[8] * Start Functions are described in parameter group 5-1*
Functions are described in parameter group
Digital Inputs.
5-1* Digital Inputs.
5-11 Terminal 19 Digital Input
5-18 Terminal X30/4 Digital Input
Option: Function:
Option: Function:
[10] * Reversing Functions are described in parameter group 5-1*
[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module
Digital Inputs.
VLT® General Purpose I/O MCB 101 is
5–12 Terminal 27 Digital Input installed in the frequency converter.
Option: Function: Functions are described in parameter group
5-1* Digital Inputs.
[2] * Coast inverse Functions are described in parameter group
5-1* Digital Inputs. 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop
5–13 Terminal 29 Digital Input Use this parameter to configure the Safe Torque Off functionality.
A warning message makes the frequency converter coast the
Option: Function:
motor and enables the automatic restart. An alarm message
NOTICE makes the frequency converter coast the motor and requires a
This parameter is available for FC 302 only. manual restart (via a fieldbus, Digital I/O, or by pressing [RESET]
Select the function from the available digital input on the LCP). When the VLT® PTC Thermistor Card MCB 112 is
range and the additional options [60] Counter A, [61] mounted, configure the PTC options to get the full benefit from
Counter A, [63] Counter B, and [64] Counter B. Counters the alarm handling.
are used in smart logic control functions. Option: Function:
[14] * Jog Functions are described in parameter group 5-1* [1] Safe Stop Alarm Coasts the frequency converter when
Digital Inputs. Safe Torque Off is activated. Manual
reset from LCP, digital input, or
5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input
fieldbus.
Option: Function:
[3] Safe Stop Coasts the frequency converter when
Select the function from the available digital
Warning Safe Torque Off is activated (terminal
input range.
37 off). When the Safe Torque Off

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 93

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop NOTICE

Use this parameter to configure the Safe Torque Off functionality. Selecting Auto Reset/Warning enables automatic restart
A warning message makes the frequency converter coast the of the frequency converter.
motor and enables the automatic restart. An alarm message
makes the frequency converter coast the motor and requires a

3 3 manual restart (via a fieldbus, Digital I/O, or by pressing [RESET]

on the LCP). When the VLT® PTC Thermistor Card MCB 112 is
Function Num PTC
ber
Relay

mounted, configure the PTC options to get the full benefit from No Function [0] – –
the alarm handling. Safe Torque Off [1]* – Safe Torque Off
Option: Function: Alarm [A68]
Safe Torque Off [3] – Safe Torque Off
circuit is re-established, the frequency
Warning [W68]
converter continues without manual
reset. PTC 1 Alarm [4] PTC 1 Safe Torque –
Off [A71]
[4] PTC 1 Alarm Coasts the frequency converter when
PTC 1 Warning [5] PTC 1 Safe Torque –
Safe Torque Off is activated. Manual
Off [W71]
reset from LCP, digital input, or
PTC 1 & Relay A [6] PTC 1 Safe Torque Safe Torque Off
fieldbus.
Off [A71] [A68]
[5] PTC 1 Warning Coasts the frequency converter when PTC 1 & Relay W [7] PTC 1 Safe Torque Safe Torque Off
Safe Torque Off is activated (terminal Off [W71] [W68]
37 off). When the Safe Torque Off PTC 1 & Relay A/W [8] PTC 1 Safe Torque Safe Torque Off
circuit is re-established, the frequency Off [A71] [W68]
converter continues without manual PTC 1 & Relay W/A [9] PTC 1 Safe Torque Safe Torque Off
reset, unless a digital input set to [80] Off [W71] [A68]
PTC Card 1 is still enabled.
Table 3.19 Overview of Functions, Alarms, and Warnings
[6] PTC 1 & Relay A This option is used when the VLT®
PTC Thermistor Card MCB 112 gates W means warning and A means alarm. For further information, see
with a stop key through a safety relay Alarms and Warnings in the Troubleshooting section in the design
to terminal 37. Coasts the frequency guide or the operating instructions.
converter when Safe Torque Off is
A dangerous failure related to Safe Torque Off issues alarm
activated. Manual reset from LCP,
72, Dangerous failure.
digital input, or fieldbus.
Refer to Table 6.1.
[7] PTC 1 & Relay This option is used when the VLT®
W PTC Thermistor Card MCB 112 gates 5-20 Terminal X46/1 Digital Input
with a stop key through a safety relay Option: Function:
to terminal 37. Coasts the frequency [0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module
converter when Safe Torque Off is VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB 113 is
activated (terminal 37 off). When the installed in the frequency converter.
Safe Torque Off circuit is re- Functions are described in parameter group
established, the frequency converter 5-1* Digital Inputs.
continues without manual reset,
unless a digital input set to [80] PTC 5-21 Terminal X46/3 Digital Input
Card 1 is still enabled. Option: Function:
[8] PTC 1 & Relay This option makes it possible to use a [0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module
A/W combination of alarm and warning. VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB 113 is
installed in the frequency converter.
[9] PTC 1 & Relay This option makes it possible to use a
Functions are described in parameter group
W/A combination of alarm and warning.
5-1* Digital Inputs.

NOTICE 5-22 Terminal X46/5 Digital Input

Options [4] PTC 1 Alarm to [9] PTC 1 & Relay W/A are only Option: Function:
available when the MCB 112 is connected.
[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module
VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB 113 is
installed in the frequency converter.
Functions are described in parameter group
5-1* Digital Inputs.

94 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

5-23 Terminal X46/7 Digital Input [4] Enable/no Ready for operation. No start or stop
warning command has been given (start/disable).
Option: Function:
No warnings are active.
[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module
[5] VLT running The motor runs and shaft torque is
VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB 113 is
present.
installed in the frequency converter.

3 3
[6] Running/no The output speed is higher than the
Functions are described in parameter group
warning speed set in parameter 1-81 Min Speed for
5-1* Digital Inputs.
Function at Stop [RPM]. The motor runs
5-24 Terminal X46/9 Digital Input and there are no warnings.

Option: Function: [7] Run in Motor runs within the programmed

range/no current and speed ranges set in
[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module
warning parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low to
VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB 113 is
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High. There
installed in the frequency converter.
are no warnings.
Functions are described in parameter group
[8] Run on Motor runs at reference speed. No
5-1* Digital Inputs.
reference/no warnings.
5-25 Terminal X46/11 Digital Input warning
Option: Function: [9] Alarm An alarm activates the output. There are
no warnings.
[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module
[10] Alarm or An alarm or a warning activates the
VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB 113 is
warning output.
installed in the frequency converter.
[11] At torque limit The torque limit set in
Functions are described in parameter group
parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode
5-1* Digital Inputs.
or parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator
5-26 Terminal X46/13 Digital Input Mode has been exceeded.
Option: Function: [12] Out of current The motor current is outside the range
range set in parameter 4-18 Current Limit.
[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module
[13] Below current, Motor current is lower than set in
VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB 113 is
low parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low.
installed in the frequency converter.
Functions are described in parameter group [14] Above current, Motor current is higher than set in
5-1* Digital Inputs. high parameter 4-51 Warning Current High.
[15] Out of range Output frequency is outside the
frequency range set in
3.6.3 5-3* Digital Outputs parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low and
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High.
The 2 solid-state digital outputs are common for terminals
[16] Below speed, Output speed is lower than the setting in
27 and 29. Set the I/O function for terminal 27 in
low parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low.
parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode, and set the I/O function
[17] Above speed, Output speed is higher than the setting
for terminal 29 in parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode.
high in parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High.
[18] Out of Feedback is outside the range set in
NOTICE feedback range parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low and
These parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High.
running. [19] Below Feedback is below the limit set in
feedback low parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low.
[0] No operation Default for all digital outputs and relay [20] Above Feedback is above the limit set in
outputs. feedback high parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High.
[1] Control ready The control card is ready, for example: [21] Thermal The thermal warning turns on when the
Feedback from a frequency converter warning temperature exceeds the limit in the
controlled by a 24 V external supply (VLT® motor, the frequency converter, the brake
24 V DC Supply MCB 107) and the main resistor, or the thermistor.
power to the unit is not detected. [22] Ready, no Frequency converter is ready for
[2] Drive ready The frequency converter is ready for thermal operation, and there is no overtem-
operation and applies a supply signal on warning perature warning.
the control board. [23] Remote, ready, Frequency converter is ready for
[3] Drive ready/ The frequency converter is ready for no thermal operation and is in Auto On mode. There
remote control operation and is in Auto On mode. warning is no overtemperature warning.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 95

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

[24] Ready, no Frequency converter is ready for [47] Bus Ctrl Off at Controls output via bus. The state of the
over/ operation and the mains voltage is within timeout output is set in parameter 5-90 Digital &
undervoltage the specified voltage range (see the Relay Bus Control. If a bus timeout occurs,
section General Specifications in the the output state is set low (off).
frequency converter design guide). [51] MCO- Active when a VLT® Advanced Cascade

3 3
[25] Reverse The motor runs (or is ready to run) controlled Controller MCO 102 or VLT® Motion
clockwise when logic = 0 and counter- Control MCO 305 is connected. The
clockwise when logic = 1. The output output is controlled from option.
changes when the reversing signal is [55] Pulse output
applied. [60] Comparator 0 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If
[26] Bus OK Active communication (no timeout) via comparator 0 is evaluated as TRUE, the
the serial communication port. output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
[27] Torque limit Use in performing a coast stop and in [61] Comparator 1 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If
and stop torque limit condition. If the frequency Comparator 1 is evaluated as TRUE, the
converter has received a stop signal and output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
is at the torque limit, the signal is logic 0. [62] Comparator 2 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If
[28] Brake, no brake Brake is active and there are no warnings. comparator 2 is evaluated as TRUE, the
warning output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
[29] Brake ready, no Brake is ready for operation and there are [63] Comparator 3 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If
fault no faults. comparator 3 is evaluated as TRUE, the
[30] Brake fault Output is logic 1 when the brake IGBT is output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
(IGBT) short-circuited. Use this function to [64] Comparator 4 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If
protect the frequency converter if there is comparator 4 is evaluated as TRUE, the
a fault on the brake modules. To cut out output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
the main voltage from the frequency [65] Comparator 5 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If
converter, use the output/relay. comparator 5 is evaluated as TRUE, the
[31] Relay 123 Relay is activated when [0] Control word is output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
selected in parameter group 8-** [70] Logic Rule 0 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
Communications and Options. logic rule 0 is evaluated as TRUE, the
[32] Mechanical Enables control of an external mechanical output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
brake control brake. For more information on [71] Logic Rule 1 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
mechanical brake control, refer to the logic rule 1 is evaluated as TRUE, the
frequency converter design guide. output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
[33] Safe stop Indicates that the Safe Torque Off on [72] Logic Rule 2 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
activated (FC terminal 37 is activated. logic rule 2 is evaluated as TRUE, the
302 only) output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
[35] External [73] Logic Rule 3 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
Interlock logic rule 3 is evaluated as TRUE, the
[40] Out of ref Active when the actual speed is outside output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
range settings in parameter 4-52 Warning Speed [74] Logic Rule 4 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
Low to parameter 4-55 Warning Reference logic rule 4 is evaluated as TRUE, the
High. output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
[41] Below Active when actual speed is below speed [75] Logic Rule 5 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
reference low reference setting. logic rule 5 is evaluated as TRUE, the
[42] Above Active when actual speed is above speed output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
reference high reference setting. [80] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
[43] Extended PID Output A The output goes high whenever the
Limit smart logic action [38] Set dig. out. A high
[45] Bus Ctrl Controls output via bus. The state of the is executed. The output goes low
output is set in parameter 5-90 Digital & whenever the smart logic action [32] Set
Relay Bus Control. If a bus timeout occurs, dig. out. A low is executed.
the output state is retained. [81] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
[46] Bus Ctrl On at Controls output via bus. The state of the Output B The input goes high whenever the smart
timeout output is set in parameter 5-90 Digital & logic action [39] Set dig. out. B high is
Relay Bus Control. If a bus timeout occurs, executed. The input goes low whenever
the output state is set high (on).

96 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

the smart logic action [33] Set dig. out. B Reference site Local Remote
low is executed. set in reference reference
[82] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action. parameter 3-13 R active active
Output C The input goes high whenever the smart eference Site [120] [121]
logic action [40] Set dig. out. C high is Reference site: 0 1

3 3
executed. The input goes low whenever Remote
the smart logic action [34] Set dig. out. C parameter 3-13 Re
low is executed. ference Site [1]
[83] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action. Remote
Output D The input goes high whenever the smart Reference site:
logic action [41] Set dig. out. D high is Linked to Hand/
executed. The input goes low whenever Auto
the smart logic action [35] Set dig. out. D Hand 1 0
low is executed. Hand⇒off 1 0
[84] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action. Auto⇒off 0 0
Output E The input goes high whenever the smart Auto 0 1
logic action [42] Set dig. out. E high is
executed. The input goes low whenever Table 3.20 Local Reference Active
the smart logic action [36] Set dig. out. E
low is executed. [121] Remote Output is high when
[85] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action. reference parameter 3-13 Reference Site = [1] Remote
Output F The input goes high whenever the smart active or [0] Linked to hand/auto while the LCP is
logic action [43] Set dig. out. F high is in Auto On mode. See Table 3.20.
executed. The input goes low whenever [122] No alarm Output is high when no alarm is present.
the smart logic action [37] Set dig. out. F [123] Start command Output is high when there is an active
low is executed. active start command (that is via digital input
[90] kWh counter Sends a pulse (200 ms pulse width) to bus connection, Hand On, or Auto On),
pulse output terminal whenever kWh counter and no stop or start command is active.
changes (parameter 15-02 kWh Counter). [124] Running Output is high when the frequency
[96] Reverse After This option is available only with software reverse converter runs counterclockwise (the
Ramp version 48.XX. logical product of the status bits running
Indicates if the direction of rotation AND reverse).
should be reversed. Depends on whether [125] Drive in hand Output is high when the frequency
the speed reference is positive or mode converter is in Hand On mode (as
negative after the ramp specified in indicated by the LED light above [Hand
parameter 16-48 Speed Ref. After Ramp On]).
[RPM]. [126] Drive in Auto Output is high when the frequency
[98] Virtual Master This option is available only with software mode converter is in Auto On mode (as
Dir. version 48.XX. indicated by the LED light above [Auto
A virtual master signal that controls the On]).
rotation direction of followers. [151] ATEX ETR cur. Selectable if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal
[120] Local reference Output is high when alarm Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR or [21]
active parameter 3-13 Reference Site = [2] Local. Advanced ETR. If Alarm 164 ATEX ETR
cur.lim.alarm is active, the output is 1.
Reference site Local Remote
[152] ATEX ETR freq. Selectable if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal
set in reference reference
alarm Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR or [21]
parameter 3-13 R active active
Advanced ETR. If Alarm 166 ATEX ETR
eference Site [120] [121]
freq.lim.alarm is active, the output is 1.
Reference site: 1 0
[153] ATEX ETR cur. Selectable if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal
Local
warning Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR or [21]
parameter 3-13 Re
Advanced ETR. If Alarm 163, ATEX ETR
ference Site [2]
cur.lim.warning is active, the output is 1.
Local
[154] ATEX ETR freq. Selectable if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal
warning Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR or [21]
Advanced ETR. If Warning 165, ATEX ETR
freq.lim.warning is active, the output is 1.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 97

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

[188] AHF Capacitor The capacitors are turned on at 20% The position is outside the limits set in
Connect (hysteresis of 50% gives an interval of 10– parameter 3-06 Minimum Position and
30%). The capacitors are disconnected parameter 3-07 Maximum Position.
below 10%. The off delay is 10 s and [226] Touch on This option is available only with software
restarts if the nominal power goes above Target version 48.XX.

3 3
10% during the delay. Parameter 5-80 AHF Target position is reached in touch probe
Cap Reconnect Delay is used to guarantee position mode.
a minimum off-time for the capacitors. [227] Touch This option is available only with software
[189] External fan The internal logics for the internal fan Activated version 48.XX.
control control is transferred to this output to Touch probe positioning active. The
make it possible to control an external frequency converter monitors the touch
fan (relevant for hp duct cooling). probe sensor input.
[190] Safe Function
5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output
active
[191] Safe Opt. Reset Option: Function:
req. [0] * No operation Functions are described in parameter group
[192] RS Flipflop 0 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. 5-3* Digital Outputs.
[193] RS Flipflop 1 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators.
5-31 Terminal 29 Digital Output
[194] RS Flipflop 2 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators.
Option: Function:
[195] RS Flipflop 3 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators.
[196] RS Flipflop 4 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. NOTICE
[197] RS Flipflop 5 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. This parameter is applicable for FC 302
[198] RS Flipflop 6 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. only.
[199] RS Flipflop 7 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. [0] * No operation Functions are described in parameter group
[221] IGBT-cooling Use this option for handling the 5-3* Digital Outputs.
overcurrent trips. When the frequency
converter detects an overcurrent 5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101)
condition, it shows alarm 13, Overcurrent Option: Function:
and triggers a reset. If the overcurrent [0] No operation This parameter is active when
condition occurs the third time in a row, option module VLT® General
the frequency converter shows alarm 13, Purpose I/O MCB 101 is mounted
Overcurrent and initiates a 3-minute delay in the frequency converter.
before the next reset. Functions are described in
[222] Homing OK This option is available only with software parameter group 5-3* Digital
version 48.XX. Outputs.
Homing is completed with the selected
[1] Control Ready
homing function (parameter 17-80 Homing
[2] Drive ready
Function).
[3] Drive rdy/rem ctrl
[223] On Target This option is available only with software
[4] Enable / no warning
version 48.XX.
Positioning is completed and the on [5] Running
target signal is sent when the actual [6] Running / no warning
position is within parameter 3-05 On [7] Run in range/no warn
Reference Window for the duration of [8] Run on ref/no warn
parameter 3-09 On Target Time and the [9] Alarm
actual speed does not exceed [10] Alarm or warning
parameter 3-05 On Reference Window. [11] At torque limit
[224] Position Error This option is available only with software [12] Out of current range
version 48.XX. [13] Below current, low
The position error exceeds the value in [14] Above current, high
parameter 4-71 Maximum Position Error for [15] Out of speed range
the time set in parameter 4-72 Position [16] Below speed, low
Error Timeout.
[17] Above speed, high
[225] Position Limit This option is available only with software
[18] Out of feedb. range
version 48.XX.
[19] Below feedback, low
[20] Above feedback, high

98 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101) 5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101)
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[21] Thermal warning [121] Remote ref active
[22] Ready,no thermal W [122] No alarm
[23] Remote,ready,no TW [123] Start command activ
[24]
[25]
Ready, Voltage OK
Reverse
[124] Running reverse
[125] Drive in hand mode
3 3
[26] Bus OK [126] Drive in auto mode
[27] Torque limit & stop [151] ATEX ETR cur. alarm
[28] Brake, no brake war [152] ATEX ETR freq. alarm
[29] Brake ready, no fault [153] ATEX ETR cur. warning
[30] Brake fault (IGBT) [154] ATEX ETR freq. warning
[31] Relay 123 [188] AHF Capacitor Connect
[32] Mech brake ctrl [189] External Fan Control
[33] Safe stop active [190] Safe Function active
[38] Motor feedback error [191] Safe Opt. Reset req.
[39] Tracking error [192] RS Flipflop 0
[40] Out of ref range [193] RS Flipflop 1
[41] Below reference, low [194] RS Flipflop 2
[42] Above ref, high [195] RS Flipflop 3
[43] Extended PID Limit [196] RS Flipflop 4
[45] Bus ctrl. [197] RS Flipflop 5
[46] Bus ctrl, 1 if timeout [198] RS Flipflop 6
[47] Bus ctrl, 0 if timeout [199] RS Flipflop 7
[50] On Reference [222] Homing Ok This option is available only with
[55] Pulse output software version 48.XX.
[60] Comparator 0 [223] On Target This option is available only with
[61] Comparator 1 software version 48.XX.
[62] Comparator 2
[224] Position Error This option is available only with
[63] Comparator 3
software version 48.XX.
[64] Comparator 4
[65] Comparator 5 [225] Position Limit This option is available only with
[70] Logic rule 0 software version 48.XX.

[71] Logic rule 1 [226] Touch on Target This option is available only with
[72] Logic rule 2 software version 48.XX.
[73] Logic rule 3 [227] Touch Activated This option is available only with
[74] Logic rule 4 software version 48.XX.
[75] Logic rule 5
[80] SL digital output A 5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101)
[81] SL digital output B Option: Function:
[82] SL digital output C
[0] No operation This parameter is active when
[83] SL digital output D
option module VLT® General
[84] SL digital output E
Purpose I/O MCB 101 is mounted
[85] SL digital output F in the frequency converter.
[90] kWh counter pulse Sends a pulse (200 ms pulse Functions are described in
width) to output terminal parameter group 5-3* Digital
whenever kWh counter changes Outputs.
(parameter 15-02 kWh Counter).
[1] Control Ready
[96] Reverse After Ramp This option is available only with [2] Drive ready
software version 48.XX.
[3] Drive rdy/rem ctrl
[98] Virtual Master Dir. This option is available only with [4] Enable / no warning
software version 48.XX. [5] Running
[120] Local ref active [6] Running / no warning
[7] Run in range/no warn

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 99

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101) 5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101)
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[8] Run on ref/no warn [84] SL digital output E
[9] Alarm [85] SL digital output F
[10] Alarm or warning [120] Local ref active

3 3 [11]
[12]
At torque limit
Out of current range
[121] Remote ref active
[122] No alarm
[13] Below current, low [123] Start command activ
[14] Above current, high [124] Running reverse
[15] Out of speed range [125] Drive in hand mode
[16] Below speed, low [126] Drive in auto mode
[17] Above speed, high [151] ATEX ETR cur. alarm
[18] Out of feedb. range [152] ATEX ETR freq. alarm
[19] Below feedback, low [153] ATEX ETR cur. warning
[20] Above feedback, high [154] ATEX ETR freq. warning
[21] Thermal warning [189] External Fan Control
[22] Ready,no thermal W [190] Safe Function active
[23] Remote,ready,no TW [191] Safe Opt. Reset req.
[24] Ready, Voltage OK [192] RS Flipflop 0
[25] Reverse [193] RS Flipflop 1
[26] Bus OK [194] RS Flipflop 2
[27] Torque limit & stop [195] RS Flipflop 3
[28] Brake, no brake war [196] RS Flipflop 4
[29] Brake ready, no fault [197] RS Flipflop 5
[30] Brake fault (IGBT) [198] RS Flipflop 6
[31] Relay 123 [199] RS Flipflop 7
[32] Mech brake ctrl
[33] Safe stop active 3.6.4 5-4* Relays
[39] Tracking error
[40] Out of ref range Parameters for configuring the timing and the output
[41] Below reference, low functions for the relays.
[42] Above ref, high
5-40 Function Relay
[43] Extended PID Limit
[45] Bus ctrl. Option: Function:
[46] Bus ctrl, 1 if timeout Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1].
[47] Bus ctrl, 0 if timeout VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB 113:
[51] MCO controlled Relay 3 [2], Relay 4 [3], Relay 5 [4],
Relay 6 [5].
[59] Remote,enable,no TW
[60] Comparator 0 VLT® Relay Card MCB 105: Relay 7 [6],
Relay 8 [7], Relay 9 [8].
[61] Comparator 1
[62] Comparator 2
[51] MCO controlled Active when an MCO 102 or VLT®
Motion Control MCO 305 is connected.
[63] Comparator 3
The output is controlled from option.
[64] Comparator 4
[221] IGBT-cooling Use this option for handling the
[65] Comparator 5
overcurrent trips. When the frequency
[70] Logic rule 0
converter detects an overcurrent
[71] Logic rule 1
condition, it shows alarm 13,
[72] Logic rule 2
Overcurrent and triggers a reset. If the
[73] Logic rule 3
overcurrent condition occurs the third
[74] Logic rule 4 time in a row, the frequency converter
[75] Logic rule 5 shows alarm 13, Overcurrent and
[80] SL digital output A initiates a 3 minute delay before the
[81] SL digital output B next reset.
[82] SL digital output C [0] No operation All digital and relay outputs are by
[83] SL digital output D default set to No Operation.

100 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

5-40 Function Relay 5-40 Function Relay

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[1] Control Ready The control card is ready, for example: and parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback
Feedback from a frequency converter High.
where the control is supplied by an [19] Below feedback, Feedback is below the limit set in
external 24 V supply (VLT® 24 V DC
Supply MCB 107) and the main power [20]
low
Above feedback,
parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low.
Feedback is above the limit set in
3 3
to frequency converter is not detected. high parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High.
[2] Drive ready The frequency converter is ready to [21] Thermal warning Thermal warning turns on when the
operate. Mains and control supplies are temperature exceeds the limit either in
OK. motor, frequency converter, brake
[3] Drive rdy/rem ctrl The frequency converter is ready for resistor, or connected thermistor.
operation and is in Auto On mode. [22] Ready,no thermal The frequency converter is ready for
[4] Enable / no Ready for operation. No start or stop W operation and there is no overtem-
warning commands have been applied (start/ perature warning.
disable). No warnings are active. [23] Remote,ready,no The frequency converter is ready for
[5] Running The motor is running, and shaft torque TW operation and is in Auto On mode.
is present. There is no overtemperature warning.
[6] Running / no Output speed is higher than the speed [24] Ready, Voltage OK The frequency converter is ready for
warning set in parameter 1-81 Min Speed for operation and the mains voltage is
Function at Stop [RPM]. The motor runs within the specified voltage range (see
and there are no warnings. the General Specifications section in the
[7] Run in range/no The motor runs within the design guide).
warn programmed current and the speed [25] Reverse The motor runs (or is ready to run)
ranges set in parameter 4-50 Warning clockwise when logic = 0 and counter-
Current Low and clockwise when logic = 1. The output
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High. No changes as soon as the reversing
warnings. signal is applied.
[8] Run on ref/no The motor runs at reference speed. No [26] Bus OK Active communication (no timeout) via
warn warnings. the serial communication port.
[9] Alarm An alarm activates the output. No [27] Torque limit & Use in performing a coasted stop and
warnings. stop frequency converter in torque limit
[10] Alarm or warning An alarm or a warning activates the condition. If the frequency converter
output. has received a stop signal and is in
[11] At torque limit The torque limit set in torque limit, the signal is logic 0.
parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor [28] Brake, no brake Brake is active and there are no
Mode or parameter 4-17 Torque Limit war warnings.
Generator Mode has been exceeded. [29] Brake ready, no Brake is ready for operation and there
[12] Out of current The motor current is outside the range fault are no faults.
range set in parameter 4-18 Current Limit. [30] Brake fault (IGBT) Output is logic 1 when the brake IGBT
[13] Below current, The motor current is lower than set in is short-circuited. Use this function to
low parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low. protect the frequency converter if
[14] Above current, The motor current is higher than set in there is a fault on the brake module.
high parameter 4-51 Warning Current High. Use the digital output/relay to cut out
[15] Out of speed Output speed/frequency is outside the the main voltage from the frequency
range frequency range set in converter.
parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low and [31] Relay 123 Digital output/relay is activated when
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High. [0] Control Word is selected in
[16] Below speed, low Output speed is lower than the setting parameter group 8-** Comm. and
in parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low. Options.
[17] Above speed, Output speed is higher than the [32] Mech brake ctrl Selection of mechanical brake control.
high setting in parameter 4-53 Warning When selected parameters in
Speed High. parameter group 2-2* Mechanical Brake
[18] Out of feedb. Feedback is outside the range set in are active. The output must be
range parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low reinforced to carry the current for the
coil in the brake. Usually solved by

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 101

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

5-40 Function Relay 5-40 Function Relay

Option: Function: Option: Function:
connecting an external relay to the [47] Bus ctrl, 0 if Controls output via bus. The state of
selected digital output. timeout the output is set in
[33] Safe stop active NOTICE parameter 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus

3 3 This option is applicable for FC Control. If a bus timeout occurs, the

output state is set low (Off).
302 only.
[50] On Reference
Indicates that the Safe Torque Off on
[51] MCO controlled
terminal 37 has been activated.
[59] Remote, enable,
[36] Control word bit Activate relay 1 by control word from
no TW
11 fieldbus. No other functional impact in
[60] Comparator 0 See parameter group 13-1*
the frequency converter. Typical
Comparators. If comparator 0 in SLC is
application: Controlling auxiliary device
TRUE, the output goes high. Otherwise,
from fieldbus. The function is valid
it is low.
when [0] FC profile in
[61] Comparator 1 See parameter group 13-1*
parameter 8-10 Control Word Profile is
Comparators. If comparator 1 in SLC is
selected.
TRUE, the output goes high. Otherwise,
[37] Control word bit Activate relay 2 (FC 302 only) by
it is low.
12 control word from fieldbus. No other
[62] Comparator 2 See parameter group 13-1*
functional impact in the frequency
Comparators. If comparator 2 in SLC is
converter. Typical application:
TRUE, the output goes high. Otherwise,
Controlling auxiliary device from
it is low.
fieldbus. The function is valid when [0]
FC profile in parameter 8-10 Control [63] Comparator 3 See parameter group 13-1*
Word Profile is selected. Comparators. If comparator 3 in SLC is
TRUE, the output goes high. Otherwise,
[38] Motor feedback Failure in the speed feedback loop
it is low.
error from motor running in closed loop.
The output can eventually be used to [64] Comparator 4 See parameter group 13-1*
prepare switching the frequency Comparators. If comparator 4 in SLC is
converter in open loop in an TRUE, the output goes high. Otherwise,
emergency case. it is low.

[39] Tracking error When the difference between [65] Comparator 5 See parameter group 13-1* Smart Logic
calculated speed and actual speed in Control. If comparator 5 in SLC is TRUE,
parameter 4-35 Tracking Error is larger the output goes high. Otherwise, it is
than selected, the digital output/relay low.
is active. [70] Logic rule 0 See parameter group 13-4* Smart Logic
[40] Out of ref range Active when the actual speed is Control. If logic rule 0 in SLC is TRUE,
outside settings in the output goes high. Otherwise, it is
parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low to low.
parameter 4-55 Warning Reference High. [71] Logic rule 1 See parameter group 13-4* Smart Logic
[41] Below reference, Active when actual speed is below Control. If logic rule 1 in SLC is TRUE,
low speed reference setting. the output goes high. Otherwise, it is
low.
[42] Above ref, high Active when actual speed is above
speed reference setting. [72] Logic rule 2 See parameter group 13-4* Smart Logic
Control. If logic rule 2 in SLC is TRUE,
[43] Extended PID
the output goes high. Otherwise, it is
Limit
low.
[45] Bus ctrl. Controls digital output/relay via bus.
[73] Logic rule 3 See parameter group 13-4* Smart Logic
The state of the output is set in
Control. If logic rule 3 in SLC is TRUE,
parameter 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus
the output goes high. Otherwise, it is
Control. The output state is retained in
low.
the event of bus timeout.
[74] Logic rule 4 See parameter group 13-4* Smart Logic
[46] Bus ctrl, 1 if Controls output via bus. The state of
Control. If logic rule 4 in SLC is TRUE,
timeout the output is set in
the output goes high. Otherwise, it is
parameter 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus
low.
Control. If a bus timeout occurs, the
output state is set high (on).

102 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

5-40 Function Relay 5-40 Function Relay

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[75] Logic rule 5 See parameter group 13-4* Smart Logic Reference site Local Remote
Control. If logic rule 5 in SLC is TRUE, set in referenc reference
the output goes high. Otherwise, it is parameter 3-13 e active

[80] SL digital output

low.
See parameter 13-52 SL Controller
Reference Site active
[120]
[121]
3 3
A Action. Output A is low on smart logic Reference site: 1 0
action [32]. Output A is high on smart Local
logic action [38]. parameter 3-13 R
[81] SL digital output See parameter 13-52 SL Controller eference Site [2]
B Action. Output B is low on smart logic Local
action [33]. Output B is high on smart Reference site: 0 1
logic action [39]. Remote
[82] SL digital output See parameter 13-52 SL Controller parameter 3-13 R
C Action. Output C is low on smart logic eference Site [1]
action [34]. Output C is high on smart Remote
logic action [40]. Reference site:
[83] SL digital output See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Linked to Hand/
D Action. Output D is low on smart logic Auto
action [35]. Output D is high on smart Hand 1 0
logic action [41]. Hand⇒off 1 0
[84] SL digital output See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Auto⇒off 0 0
E Action. Output E is low on smart logic Auto 0 1
action [36]. Output E is high on smart
logic action [42]. Table 3.21 Local Reference Active
[85] SL digital output See parameter 13-52 SL Controller
F Action. Output F is low on smart logic [121] Remote ref active Output is high when
action [37]. Output F is high on smart parameter 3-13 Reference Site = [1]
logic action [43]. Remote or [0] Linked to hand/auto while
[96] Reverse After This option is available only with the LCP is in Auto On mode. See
Ramp software version 48.XX. Table 3.21.
See the description in [122] No alarm Output is high when no alarm is
chapter 3.6.3 5-3* Digital Outputs. present.
[98] Virtual Master Dir. This option is available only with [123] Start command Output is high when the start
software version 48.XX. activ command is high (that is via digital
See the description in input, bus connection, [Hand On], or
chapter 3.6.3 5-3* Digital Outputs. [Auto On]), and a stop has been last
[120] Local ref active Output is high when command.
parameter 3-13 Reference Site = [2] Local [124] Running reverse Output is high when the frequency
or when parameter 3-13 Reference Site converter is running counterclockwise
= [0] Linked to hand auto at the same (the logical product of the status bits
time as the LCP is in Hand On mode. running AND reverse).
[125] Drive in hand Output is high when the frequency
mode converter is in Hand On mode (as
indicated by the LED light above [Hand
On]).
[126] Drive in auto Output is high when the frequency
mode converter is in Auto On mode (as
indicated by LED on above [Auto On]).
[151] ATEX ETR cur. Selectable if parameter 1-90 Motor
alarm Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If alarm 164,
ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm is active, the
output is 1.
[152] ATEX ETR freq. Selectable if parameter 1-90 Motor
alarm Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 103

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

5-40 Function Relay 5-40 Function Relay

Option: Function: Option: Function:
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If alarm 166, [224] Position Error This option is available only with
ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm is active, the software version 48.XX.
output is 1. The position error exceeds the value in

3 3 [153] ATEX ETR cur.

warning
Selectable if parameter 1-90 Motor
Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX
parameter 4-71 Maximum Position Error
for the time set in
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If alarm 163, parameter 4-72 Position Error Timeout.
ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning is active, the [225] Position Limit This option is available only with
output is 1. software version 48.XX.
[154] ATEX ETR freq. Selectable if parameter 1-90 Motor The position is outside the limits set in
warning Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX parameter 3-06 Minimum Position and
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If warning parameter 3-07 Maximum Position.
165, ATEX ETR freq.lim.warning is active, [226] Touch on Target This option is available only with
the output is 1. software version 48.XX.
[188] AHF Capacitor Target position is reached in touch
Connect probe position mode.
[189] External Fan The internal logics for the internal fan [227] Touch Activated This option is available only with
Control control is transferred to this output to software version 48.XX.
make it possible to control an external Touch probe positioning active. The
fan (relevant for HP duct cooling). frequency converter monitors the
[190] Safe Function touch probe sensor input.
active
5-41 On Delay, Relay
[191] Safe Opt. Reset
req. Array [20]

[192] RS Flipflop 0 See parameter group 13-1* Range: Function:

Comparators. 0.01 s* [0.01 - Enter the delay of the relay cut-in time.
[193] RS Flipflop 1 See parameter group 13-1* 600 s] Select 1 of 2 internal mechanical relays in
Comparators. an array function. See
[194] RS Flipflop 2 See parameter group 13-1* parameter 5-40 Function Relay for details.
Comparators.

130BA171.10
[195] RS Flipflop 3 See parameter group 13-1*
Selected
Comparators. Event
[196] RS Flipflop 4 See parameter group 13-1*
Comparators. Relay
[197] RS Flipflop 5 See parameter group 13-1* output

Comparators. On Delay Off Delay

P 5-41 P 5-42
[198] RS Flipflop 6 See parameter group 13-1*
Comparators.
Selected
[199] RS Flipflop 7 See parameter group 13-1*
Event
Comparators.
[222] Homing Ok This option is available only with Relay
software version 48.XX. output
Homing is completed with the selected
On Delay
homing function
P 5-41
(parameter 17-80 Homing Function).
Illustration 3.36 On Delay, Relay
[223] On Target This option is available only with
software version 48.XX.
Positioning is completed and the on
target signal is sent when the actual
position is within parameter 3-05 On
Reference Window for the duration of
parameter 3-09 On Target Time and the
actual speed does not exceed
parameter 3-05 On Reference Window.

104 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

5-42 Off Delay, Relay 5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency

Array[20] Range: Function:
Range: Function: 100 [0 - 110000 Enter the low frequency limit
0.01 s* [0.01 - Enter the delay of the relay cutout time. Select Hz* Hz] corresponding to the low motor shaft
600 s] 1 of 2 internal mechanical relays in an array speed (that is low reference value) in
function. See parameter 5-40 Function Relay for
details. If the selected event condition changes
parameter 5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb.
Value. Refer to Illustration 3.38.
3 3
before a delay timer expires, the relay output
is unaffected. 5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency
Range: Function:

130BA172.10
Size [0 - 110000 Enter the high frequency limit
related* Hz] corresponding to the high motor shaft
Selected
speed (that is high reference value) in
Event
parameter 5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./
Feedb. Value.
Relay
output
5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Range: Function:
On Delay Off Delay
P 5-41 P 5-42 0 ReferenceFeed- [-999999.999 - Enter the low reference
Illustration 3.37 Off Delay, Relay backUnit* 999999.999 value limit for the motor
ReferenceFeed- shaft speed [RPM]. This is
backUnit] also the lowest feedback
If the selected event condition changes before the on value, see also
delay or off delay timer expires, the relay output is parameter 5-57 Term. 33 Low
unaffected. Ref./Feedb. Value. Set
terminal 29 to digital input
(parameter 5-02 Terminal 29
3.6.5 5-5* Pulse Input
Mode = [0] input (default)
and parameter 5-13 Terminal
The pulse input parameters are used to define an
29 Digital Input = applicable
appropriate window for the impulse reference area by
value).
configuring the scaling and filter settings for the pulse
inputs. Input terminals 29 or 33 act as frequency reference
5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value
inputs. Set terminal 29 (parameter 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital
Range: Function:
Input) or terminal 33 (parameter 5-15 Terminal 33 Digital
Input) to [32] Pulse input. If terminal 29 is used as an input, Size [-999999.999 - Enter the high reference value
set parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode to [0] Input. related* 999999.999 [RPM] for the motor shaft speed
ReferenceFeed- and the high feedback value, see
backUnit] also parameter 5-58 Term. 33 High
130BA076.10

Ref.
(RPM) Ref./Feedb. Value. Select terminal 29
High as a digital input
ref.
value (parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode =
P 5-53/
p 5-58 [0] input (default) and
parameter 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital
Input = applicable value).
This parameter is available for FC
Low
302 only.
ref.
value
P 5-52/
p 5-57 5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29
Low freq. High freq. Input
P 5-50/ P 5-51/ (Hz)
P 5-55 P 5-56 Range: Function:
Illustration 3.38 Pulse Input 100 [1 - 1000 Enter the pulse filter time constant. The
ms* ms] pulse filter dampens oscillations of the
feedback signal, which is an advantage if
there is a lot of noise in the system. A high
time constant value results in better

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 105

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29 3.6.6 5-6* Pulse Outputs
Range: Function:
dampening but also increases the time NOTICE
delay through the filter. These parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is
running.
3 3 5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency
Range: Function: These parameters configure pulse outputs with their
100 Hz* [0 - 110000 Enter the low frequency corresponding functions and scaling. Terminals 27 and 29 are allocated to
Hz] to the low motor shaft speed (that is pulse output via parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode and
low reference value) in parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode, respectively.
parameter 5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb.
Value. Output value

130BA089.11
5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency
High output
Range: Function: value
100 Hz* [0 - 110000 Enter the high frequency corresponding P 5-60(term27)
P 5-63(term29)
Hz] to the high motor shaft speed (that is
high reference value) in
parameter 5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb.
Value.

5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

High freq. Output
Range: Function: P 5-62(term27) (Hz)
0* [-999999.999 - Enter the low reference value [RPM] for P 5-65(term29)
999999.999 ] the motor shaft speed. This is also the Illustration 3.39 Configuration of Pulse Outputs
low feedback value, see also
parameter 5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb.
Value. Options for readout output variables:

5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Parameters for configuring the scaling and
Range: Function: output functions of pulse outputs. The
Size [-999999.999 - Enter the high reference value pulse outputs are designated to terminals
related* 999999.999 [RPM] for the motor shaft 27 or 29. Select terminal 27 output in
ReferenceFeed- speed. See also parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode and
backUnit] parameter 5-53 Term. 29 High terminal 29 output in
Ref./Feedb. Value. parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode.
[0] No operation
5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33 [45] Bus control
Range: Function: [48] Bus control
100 [1 - 1000 NOTICE timeout
ms* ms] [51] MCO-
This parameter cannot be adjusted
controlled
while the motor is running.
[97] Reference After This option is available only with software
Ramp version 48.XX.
Enter the pulse filter time constant. The
Actual speed reference after the ramp.
low-pass filter reduces the influence and
Use this output as master signal for speed
dampens oscillations on the feedback
synchronization of follower frequency
signal from the control.
converters. The reference is set in
This is an advantage if there is a lot of
parameter 16-48 Speed Ref. After Ramp
noise in the system.
[RPM].
[99] Virtual Master This option is available only with software
Speed version 48.XX.
Virtual master signal for controlling the
speed or position of the followers.

106 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

[100] Output 5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable

frequency
Option: Function:
[101] Reference
[102] Feedback
NOTICE
[103] Motor current This parameter is available for FC
302 only.
[104] Torque relative
to limit 3 3
[105] Torque relative [0] No operation Select the display output for terminal
to rated 29.
[106] Power [45] Bus ctrl.
[107] Speed [48] Bus ctrl., timeout
[108] Torque [97] Reference After This option is available only with
[109] Max. out freq Ramp software version 48.XX.
Actual speed reference after the ramp.
5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable
Use this output as master signal for
Option: Function: speed synchronization of follower
[0] No operation Select the display output for terminal frequency converters. The reference is
27. set in parameter 16-48 Speed Ref. After
Ramp [RPM].
[45] Bus ctrl.
[48] Bus ctrl., timeout [99] Virtual Master This option is available only with
[97] Reference After This option is available only with Speed software version 48.XX.
Ramp software version 48.XX. Virtual master signal for controlling the
Actual speed reference after the ramp. speed or position of the followers.
Use this output as master signal for [100] Output frequency
speed synchronization of follower
[101] Reference
frequency converters. The reference is
[102] Feedback
set in parameter 16-48 Speed Ref. After
[103] Motor Current
Ramp [RPM].
[104] Torque rel to
[99] Virtual Master This option is available only with limit
Speed software version 48.XX. [105] Torq relate to
Virtual master signal for controlling the rated
speed or position of the followers. [106] Power
[100] Output frequency [107] Speed
[101] Reference [108] Torque
[102] Feedback [109] Max Out Freq
[103] Motor Current [119] Torque % lim
[104] Torque rel to limit
5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq #29
[105] Torq relate to
rated Range: Function:
[106] Power Size [0 - 110000 Set the maximum frequency for
[107] Speed related* Hz] terminal 29 corresponding to the
output variable set in
[108] Torque
parameter 5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse
[109] Max Out Freq
Output Variable.
[119] Torque % lim

5-62 Pulse Output Max Freq #27 5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable
Range: Function: Select the variable for readout on terminal X30/6.
Size [0 - 32000 Set the maximum frequency for This parameter is active when VLT® General Purpose I/O MCB 101
related* Hz] terminal 27 corresponding to the is installed in the frequency converter.
output variable selected in Same options and functions as parameter group 5-6* Pulse
parameter 5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Outputs.
Output Variable. Option: Function:
[0] No operation
[45] Bus ctrl.
[48] Bus ctrl., timeout

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 107

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable parameter 1-02 Flux Motor Feedback Source and
Select the variable for readout on terminal X30/6.
parameter 7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source. The encoder
used is a dual-channel (A and B) 24 V type. Maximum
This parameter is active when VLT® General Purpose I/O MCB 101
input frequency: 110 kHz.
is installed in the frequency converter.
Same options and functions as parameter group 5-6* Pulse

3 3 Outputs.
Option: Function:
Encoder connection to the frequency converter
24 V incremental encoder. Maximum cable length is 5 m.

+24 V DC
[97] Reference After This option is available only with

130BA090.12
GND
Ramp software version 48.XX.

B
Actual speed reference after the
ramp. Use this output as master
signal for speed synchronization of
follower frequency converters. The
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
reference is set in
parameter 16-48 Speed Ref. After
Ramp [RPM].

[99] Virtual Master This option is available only with

Speed software version 48.XX.
Virtual master signal for controlling
the speed or position of the
followers.

[100] Output frequency

[101] Reference
[102] Feedback
[103] Motor Current
[104] Torque rel to limit
[105] Torq relate to rated
[106] Power
[107] Speed
[108] Torque
[109] Max Out Freq
[119] Torque % lim
24 V or 10–30 V encoder
5-68 Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6
Illustration 3.40 Encoder Connection
Range: Function:
Size [0 - NOTICE
related* 32000 Hz]
This parameter cannot be adjusted
130BA646.10

CW
while the motor is running. A

Select the maximum frequency on B

terminal X30/6 referring to the output
variable in parameter 5-66 Terminal X30/6
Pulse Output Variable.
This parameter is active when VLT®
General Purpose I/O MCB 101 is installed
in the frequency converter.

CCW
A
3.6.7 5-7* 24 V Encoder Input

Connect the 24 V encoder to terminal 12 (24 V DC supply),

B
terminal 32 (channel A), terminal 33 (channel B), and
terminal 20 (GND). The digital inputs 32/33 are active for Illustration 3.41 Encoder Rotation Direction
encoder inputs when [1] 24 V encoder is selected in

108 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

5-70 Term 32/33 Pulses Per Revolution 3.6.9 5-9* Bus-controlled

Range: Function:
1024* [1 - 4096] Set the encoder pulses per revolution on the
This parameter group selects digital and relay outputs via a
motor shaft. Read the correct value from the
fieldbus setting.
encoder. 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control

5-71 Term 32/33 Encoder Direction

Range: Function: 3 3
0* [0 - 2147483647] This parameter holds the state of the
Option: Function: digital outputs and relays that is
NOTICE controlled by bus.
This parameter cannot be adjusted A logical '1' indicates that the output is
while the motor is running. high or active.
A logical '0' indicates that the output is
Change the detected encoder rotation low or inactive.
direction without changing the wiring to the
encoder. Bit 0 Digital output terminal 27
Bit 1 Digital output terminal 29
[0] * Clockwise Sets channel A 90° (electrical degrees)
Bit 2 Digital output terminal X 30/6
behind channel B upon clockwise rotation of
Bit 3 Digital output terminal X 30/7
the encoder shaft.
Bit 4 Relay 1 output terminal
[1] Counter Sets channel A 90° (electrical degrees) ahead Bit 5 Relay 2 output terminal
clockwise of channel B upon clockwise rotation of the
Bit 6 Option B relay 1 output terminal
encoder shaft.
Bit 7 Option B relay 2 output terminal
Bit 8 Option B relay 3 output terminal
5-72 Term 32/33 Encoder Type
Bit 9–15 Reserved for future terminals
Option: Function:
Bit 16 Option C relay 1 output terminal
NOTICE Bit 17 Option C relay 2 output terminal
This parameter is only available Bit 18 Option C relay 3 output terminal
with software version 48.XX. Bit 19 Option C relay 4 output terminal
Bit 20 Option C relay 5 output terminal
Select the signal type of the encoder Bit 21 Option C relay 6 output terminal
connected to terminals 32, 33. Bit 22 Option C relay 7 output terminal
[0] * Quadrature A/B Encoder with 2 tracks: A and B, displaced Bit 23 Option C relay 8 output terminal
Format 90° for detecting the rotational direction. Bit 24–31 Reserved for future terminals

[1] Single Channel Encoder with 1 track connected to Table 3.22 Bus-controlled Digital Outputs and Relays
33 terminal 33.

[2] Signle Channel Encoder with 1 track connected to 5-93 Pulse Out #27 Bus Control
w/Dir. terminal 33. The direction is set with a Range: Function:
signal on terminal 32: 0 V = forward/ 0 %* [0 - Set the output frequency transferred to
clockwise, 24 V = reverse/counter 100 %] output terminal 27 when the terminal is
clockwise. configured as [45] Bus Controlled in
parameter 5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output
Variable.
3.6.8 5-8* I/O Options
5-94 Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset
5-80 AHF Cap Reconnect Delay
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - Set the output frequency transferred to output
25 s* [1 - 120 Guarantees a minimum off-time for the
100 %] terminal 27 when the terminal is configured as
s] capacitors. The timer starts once the AHF
[48] Bus Ctrl Timeout in parameter 5-60 Terminal
capacitor disconnects and has to expire before
27 Pulse Output Variable and a timeout is
the output is allowed to be on again. It only
detected.
turns on again if the frequency converter
power is 20–30%.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 109

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

5-95 Pulse Out #29 Bus Control

Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - Set the output frequency transferred to
100 %] output terminal 29 when the terminal is
configured as [45] Bus Controlled in

3 3 parameter 5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output

Variable.

5-96 Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset

Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - Set the output frequency transferred to output
100 %] terminal 29 when the terminal is configured as
[48] Bus Ctrl Timeout in parameter 5-63 Terminal
29 Pulse Output Variable and a timeout is
detected.

5-97 Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control

Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - Set the output frequency transferred to
100 %] output terminal X30/6 when the terminal is
configured as [45] Bus ctrl. in
parameter 5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output
Variable.

5-98 Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset

Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - Set the output frequency transferred to output
100 %] terminal X30/6 when the terminal is configured
as [48] Bus Ctrl Timeout in
parameter 5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output
Variable and a timeout is detected.

110 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.7 Parameters: 6-** Analog In/Out 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function
Option: Function:
3.7.1 6-0* Analog I/O Mode
[0] * Off
[1] Freeze Frozen at the present value.
The analog inputs can be allocated to be either voltage
output
(FC 301: 0–10 V, FC 302: 0 to ±10 V) or current input (FC
301/FC 302: 0/4–20 mA).
[2] Stop Overruled to stop.
3 3
[3] Jogging Overruled to jog speed.

NOTICE [4] Max. Overruled to max. speed.

Thermistors may be connected to either an analog or a speed
digital input. [5] Stop and Overruled to stop with subsequent trip.
trip
[20] Coast
6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time
[21] Coast and
Range: Function:
trip
10 [1 - Enter the live zero timeout in s. Live zero timeout
s* 99 s] time is active for analog inputs, that is terminal 53
or terminal 54, used as reference or feedback
3.7.2 6-1* Analog Input 1
sources.
Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for analog
If the reference signal value associated with the
input 1 (terminal 53).
selected current input drops below 50% of the
value set in:
Ref./Feedback
• Parameter 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage.

130BT103.10
[RPM]

• Parameter 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current. Par 6-xx

'High Ref./ 1500

• Parameter 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage. Feedb. Value'

1200
• Parameter 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current.
900
for a time period longer than the time set in
600
parameter 6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time, the function
selected in parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Par 6-xx 300
'Low Ref./ 150
Function is activated. Feedb. Value'
Ex. 1V 5V 10 V
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function Par 6-xx Par 6-xx Analog input
'Low Voltage'or 'High Voltage'or
'Low Current' 'High Current'
Option: Function:
Illustration 3.42 Analog Input 1
Select the timeout function. If the input signal
on terminal 53 or 54 is below 50% of the value
in:
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
• Parameter 6-10 Terminal 53 Low
Voltage. Range: Function:
Size [ -10.00 - Enter the low voltage value. This
• Parameter 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current.
related* par. 6-11 V] analog input scaling value should
• Parameter 6-20 Terminal 54 Low correspond to the minimum reference
Voltage. value set in parameter 6-14 Terminal 53
• Parameter 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current. Low Ref./Feedb. Value.

for a time period defined in parameter 6-00 Live

Zero Timeout Time, then the function set in
6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage
parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function is Range: Function:
activated. 10 V* [ par. 6-10 Enter the high voltage value. This analog
If several timeouts occur simultaneously, the - 10 V] input scaling value should correspond to the
frequency converter prioritizes the timeout high reference feedback value set in
functions as follows: parameter 6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb.
1. Parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Value.
Function.

2. Parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout

Function.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 111

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0.14 [0 - Enter the low current value. This reference Size [ -10.00 - Enter the low voltage value. This analog
mA* par. 6-13 signal should correspond to the minimum related* par. 6-21 V] input scaling value should correspond
mA] reference value, set in to the minimum reference value set in

3 3 parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference. Set the

value to exceed 2 mA in order to activate the
parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference. See
also chapter 3.4 Parameters: 3-**
live zero timeout function in Reference/Ramps.
parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function.
6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage
6-13 Terminal 53 High Current Range: Function:
Range: Function: 10 V* [ par. 6-20 Enter the high voltage value. This analog
20 mA* [ par. 6-12 - Enter the high current value - 10 V] input scaling value should correspond to the
20 mA] corresponding to the high reference/ high reference feedback value set in
feedback set in parameter 6-15 Terminal 53 parameter 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb.
High Ref./Feedb. Value. Value.

6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0* [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input scaling value that Size [0 - Enter the low current value. This reference
999999.999 ] corresponds to the low voltage/low related* par. 6-23 signal should correspond to the minimum
current set in parameter 6-10 Terminal 53 mA] reference value, set in
Low Voltage and parameter 6-12 Terminal parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference. Enter
53 Low Current. the value that exceeds 2 mA to activate
the live zero timeout function in
6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function.
Range: Function:
6-23 Terminal 54 High Current
Size [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input scaling
related* 999999.999 value that corresponds to the Range: Function:
ReferenceFeed- maximum reference feedback 20 mA* [ par. 6-22 Enter the high current value
backUnit] value set in - 20 mA] corresponding to the high reference
parameter 6-11 Terminal 53 High feedback value set in
Voltage and parameter 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb.
parameter 6-13 Terminal 53 High Value.
Current.
6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0 ReferenceFeed- [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input
0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 NOTICE backUnit* 999999.999 scaling value that
s] ReferenceFeed- corresponds to the
This parameter cannot be adjusted
backUnit] minimum reference
while the motor is running.
feedback value set in
parameter 3-02 Minimum
Enter the filter time constant. This
Reference.
constant is a first-order digital low-pass
filter time for suppressing electrical noise
6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value
in terminal 53. A high value improves
dampening but also increases the delay Range: Function:
through the filter. Size [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input scaling
related* 999999.999 value that corresponds to the
ReferenceFeed- maximum reference feedback
3.7.3 6-2* Analog Input 2 backUnit] value set in
parameter 3-03 Maximum
Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for analog Reference.
input 2 (terminal 54).

112 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant 6-36 Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant
Range: Function: Range: Function:
0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 NOTICE 0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 NOTICE
s] s]
This parameter cannot be adjusted This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running. while the motor is running.
3 3
Enter the filter time constant. This is a Enter the filter time constant. This
first-order digital low-pass filter time constant is a first-order digital low-pass
constant for suppressing electrical noise in filter time for suppressing electrical noise
terminal 54. Increasing the value improves in terminal X30/11. A high value improves
dampening but also increases the time dampening but also increases the delay
delay through the filter. through the filter.

3.7.4 6-3* Analog Input 3 General Purpose 3.7.5 6-4* Analog Input X30/12
I/O MCB 101
Parameter group for configuring the scale and limits for
Parameter group for configuring the scale and limits for analog input 4 (X30/12) placed on VLT® General Purpose
analog input 3 (X30/11) in VLT® General Purpose I/O MCB I/O MCB 101.
101.
6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage
6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0.07 V* [ 0 - par. Sets the analog input scaling value to
0.07 V* [ 0 - par. Sets the analog input scaling value to 6-41 V] correspond to the low reference feedback
6-31 V] correspond to the low reference feedback value set in parameter 6-44 Term. X30/12
value (set in parameter 6-34 Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.
Low Ref./Feedb. Value).
6-41 Terminal X30/12 High Voltage
6-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage Range: Function:
Range: Function: 10 V* [ par. 6-40 - Sets the analog input scaling value to
10 V* [ par. 6-30 - Sets the analog input scaling value to 10 V] correspond to the high reference feedback
10 V] correspond to the high reference feedback value set in parameter 6-45 Term. X30/12
value (set in parameter 6-35 Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
High Ref./Feedb. Value).
6-44 Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
6-34 Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0* [-999999.999 - Sets the analog output scaling value to
0* [-999999.999 - Sets the analog input scaling value to 999999.999 ] correspond to the low voltage value set
999999.999 ] correspond to the low voltage value (set in parameter 6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low
in parameter 6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage.
Voltage).
6-45 Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value
6-35 Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value Range: Function:
Range: Function: 100* [-999999.999 - Sets the analog input scaling value to
100* [-999999.999 - Sets the analog input scaling value to 999999.999 ] correspond to the high voltage value
999999.999 ] correspond to the high-voltage value set in parameter 6-41 Terminal X30/12
(set in parameter 6-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage.
High Voltage).

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 113

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

6-46 Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant 6-50 Terminal 42 Output

Range: Function: Option: Function:
0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 NOTICE [103] Motor The value is taken from parameter 16-37 Inv.
s] Current Max. Current. The inverter maximum current
This parameter cannot be adjusted
(160% current) is equal to 20 mA.
while the motor is running.
3 3 Example: Inverter normal current (11 kW) is
24 A. 160 %=38.4 A. Motor normal current is
Enter the filter time constant. This
22 A, the readout is 11.46 mA.
constant is a first-order digital low-pass
20 mA x 22 A
= 11 . 46 mA
filter time for suppressing electrical noise 38 . 4 A

in terminal X30/12. A high value improves In case the normal motor current is equal to
dampening but also increases the delay 20 mA, the output setting of
through the filter. parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale
is:
IVLT Max x 100 38 . 4 x 100
3.7.6 6-5* Analog Output 1 IMotorNorm
=
22
= 175 %

[104] Torque rel to The torque setting is related to the setting

Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for analog limit in parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode.
output 1, that is terminal 42. Analog outputs are current [105] Torq relate The torque is related to the motor torque
outputs: 0/4–20 mA. Common terminal (terminal 39) is the to rated setting.
same terminal and has the same electrical potential for [106] Power Taken from parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW].
analog common and digital common connection. [107] Speed Taken from parameter 3-03 Maximum
Resolution on analog output is 12 bit. Reference. 20 mA equals the value in
6-50 Terminal 42 Output parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference.
[108] Torque Torque reference related to 160% torque.
Option: Function:
[109] Max Out 0 Hz = 0 mA, parameter 4-19 Max Output
Select the function of terminal 42 as an
Freq Frequency = 20 mA.
analog current output. Depending on the
[113] PID
selection the output is either a 0–20 mA or
Clamped
4–20 mA output. The current value can be
Output
read out in the LCP in
[119] Torque %
parameter 16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA].
lim
[0] No Indicates no signal on the analog output.
[130] Output freq. 0 Hz = 4 mA, 100 Hz = 20 mA.
operation
4-20mA
[52] MCO
[131] Reference Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min-Max]
0-20mA
4-20mA 0% = 4 mA; 100% = 20 mA
[53] MCO
Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max-Max]
4-20mA
-100% = 4 mA; 0% = 12 mA; +100% =
[58] Actual This option is available only with software
20 mA.
Position version 48.XX.
[132] Feedback
The actual position. 0–20 mA corresponds to
4-20mA
parameter 3-06 Minimum Position to
[133] Motor cur. The value is taken from parameter 16-37 Inv.
parameter 3-07 Maximum Position.
4-20mA Max. Current. The inverter maximum current
[59] Actual This option is available only with software
(160% current) is equal to 20 mA.
Position version 48.XX.
Example: Inverter normal current (11 kW) is
4-20mA The actual position. 4–20 mA corresponds to
24 A. 160% = 38.4 A. Motor normal current
parameter 3-06 Minimum Position to
is 22 A, the readout is 11.46 mA.
parameter 3-07 Maximum Position.
16 mA x 22 A
+ 4 mA = 13 . 17 mA
[100] Output 0 Hz = 0 mA; 100 Hz = 20 mA. 38 . 4 A

frequency In case the normal motor current is equal to

[101] Reference Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min - Max] 20 mA, the output setting of
0% = 0 mA; 100% = 20 mA parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale
Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max - Max] is:
IVLT Max x 100 38 . 4 x 100
-100% = 0 mA; 0% = 10 mA; +100% = 20 = = 175 %
IMotorNorm 22
mA.
[134] Torq.% lim The torque setting is related to the setting
[102] Feedback
4-20 mA in parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode.

114 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

6-50 Terminal 42 Output 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale

Option: Function: Range: Function:
[135] Torq.% nom The torque setting is related to the motor 100 [0 - Scale the maximum output of the selected
4-20mA torque setting. %* 200 %] analog signal at terminal 42. Set the value to the
[136] Power Taken from parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW]. maximum value of the current signal output.
4-20mA
[137] Speed Taken from parameter 3-03 Maximum
Scale the output to give a current lower than 20
mA at full scale; or 20 mA at an output below
3 3
4-20mA Reference. 20 mA = value in 100% of the maximum signal value. If 20 mA is
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference. the required output current at a value 0–100% of
[138] Torque Torque reference related to 160% torque. the full-scale output, program the percentage
4-20mA value in the parameter, that is 50% = 20 mA. If a
[139] Bus ctrl. An output value set from fieldbus process current 4–20 mA is required at maximum output
0-20 mA data. The output works independently of (100%), calculate the percentage value as follows:
internal functions in the frequency converter.
20 mA/desired maximum current x 100 %
[140] Bus ctrl. An output value set from fieldbus process
20
i . e . 10 mA : x 100 = 200 %
4-20 mA data. The output works independently of 10

internal functions in the frequency converter.

130BA075.13
Current
(mA)

[141] Bus ctrl Parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low 20

0-20mA t.o. defines the behavior of the analog output in

case of fieldbus timeout.
[142] Bus ctrl Parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low 0/4

4-20mA t.o. defines the behavior of the analog output in 0% Analogue Analogue 100% Variable for
output Output output

case of fieldbus timeout. Min Scale Max Scale example:

par. 6-51 par. 6-52 Speed (RPM)

[147] Main act val Illustration 3.44 Output Max. Scale

0-20mA
[148] Main act val
4-20mA 6-53 Terminal 42 Output Bus Control
[149] Torque % Analog output at 0 torque is 12 mA.
Range: Function:
lim 4-20mA Motoring torque increases the output
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Holds the level of output 42 if controlled by
current to maximum torque limit 20 mA (set
bus.
in parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode).
Generating torque decreases the output to
6-54 Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset
torque limit in generator mode (set in
parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode) Range: Function:
Example: Parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor 0 %* [0 - Holds the preset level of output 42.
Mode = 200% and parameter 4-17 Torque 100 %] If a timeout function is selected in
Limit Generator Mode = 200%. 20 mA = parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output, the output
200% motoring and 4 mA = 200% is preset to this level if a fieldbus timeout
generating. occurs.
0mA 4mA 12 mA 20 mA
130BB372.10

Par 4-17 0% Torque Par 4-16 6-55 Analog Output Filter

(200%) (200%)
Option: Function:
The following readout parameters from selection in
Illustration 3.43 Torque Limit
parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output have a filter
selected when parameter 6-55 Analog Output Filter is
on:
[150] Max Out Fr 0 Hz = 0 mA, parameter 4-19 Max Output
4-20mA Frequency = 20 mA. Selection 0–20 mA 4–20 mA
Motor current (0–Imax) [103] [133]
6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale
Torque limit (0–Tlim) [104] [134]
Range: Function:
Rated torque (0–Tnom) [105] [135]
0 %* [0 - Scale for the minimum output (0 mA or 4 mA) Power (0–Pnom) [106] [136]
200 %] of the analog signal at terminal 42.
Speed (0–Speedmax) [107] [137]
Set the value to be the percentage of the full
range of the variable selected in Table 3.23 Readout Parameters
parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 115

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

6-55 Analog Output Filter 6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[0] * Off Filter off. [113] PID Clamped
Output
[1] On Filter on.
[119] Torque %

3 3 3.7.7 6-6* Analog Output 2 MCB 101

lim
[130] Output freq. 0 Hz = 4 mA, 100 Hz = 20 mA.
4-20mA
Analog outputs are current outputs: 0/4–20 mA. Common [131] Reference Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min.-Max.]
terminal (terminal X30/8) is the same terminal and 4-20mA 0% = 4 mA; 100% = 20 mA.
electrical potential for analog common connection. Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max-Max.]
Resolution on analog output is 12 bit. -100% = 4 mA; 0% = 12 mA; +100% = 20
mA.
6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output
[132] Feedback
Option: Function: 4-20mA
Select the function of terminal X30/8 as an [133] Motor cur. The value is taken from parameter 16-37 Inv.
analog current output. Depending on the 4-20mA Max. Current. The inverter maximum current
selection, the output is either a 0–20 mA or (160% current) is equal to 20 mA.
4–20 mA output. The current value can be Example: Inverter normal current (11 kW) =
read out in the LCP in 24 A. 160% = 38.4 A. Motor normal current
parameter 16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA]. = 22 A Readout 11.46 mA.
[0] No When no signal on the analog output is 16 mA x 22 A
= 9 . 17 mA
38 . 4 A
operation present.
In case the normal motor current is equal to
[52] MCO
20 mA, the output setting of
0-20mA
parameter 6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale is:
[100] Output 0 Hz = 0 mA; 100 Hz = 20 mA.
IVLT Max. x 100 38 . 4 x 100
frequency IMotorNorm
=
22
= 175 %

[101] Reference Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min. - Max.] [134] Torq.% lim The torque setting is related to the setting
0% = 0 mA; 100% = 20 mA. 4-20 mA in parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode.
Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max. - [135] Torq.% nom The torque setting is related to the motor
Max.] -100% = 0 mA; 0% = 10 mA; +100% = 4-20mA torque setting.
20 mA
[136] Power Taken from parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW].
[102] Feedback 4-20mA
[103] Motor The value is taken from parameter 16-37 Inv. [137] Speed Taken from parameter 3-03 Maximum
Current Max. Current. The inverter maximum current 4-20mA Reference. 20 mA = value in
(160% current) is equal to 20 mA. parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference.
Example: Inverter normal current (11 kW) =
[138] Torque Torque reference related to 160% torque.
24 A. 160% = 38.4 A. Motor normal current
4-20mA
= 22 A, readout is 11.46 mA.
[139] Bus ctrl. An output value set from fieldbus process
20 mA x 22 A
= 11 . 46 mA
38 . 4 A 0-20 mA data. The output works independently of
In case the normal motor current is equal to internal functions in the frequency
20 mA, the output setting of converter.
parameter 6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale is: [140] Bus ctrl. An output value set from fieldbus process
IVLT Max. x 100 38 . 4 x 100 4-20 mA data. The output works independently of
= = 175 %
IMotorNorm 22
internal functions in the frequency
[104] Torque rel to The torque setting is related to the setting converter.
limit in parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode. [141] Bus ctrl Parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low
[105] Torq relate The torque is related to the motor torque 0-20mA t.o. defines the behavior of the analog output in
to rated setting. case of bus timeout.
[106] Power Taken from parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW]. [142] Bus ctrl Parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low
[107] Speed Taken from parameter 3-03 Maximum 4-20mA t.o. defines the behavior of the analog output in
Reference. 20 mA = value in case of bus timeout.
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference. [149] Torque % Torque reference. Parameter 3-00 Reference
[108] Torque Torque reference related to 160% torque. lim 4-20mA Range [Min.-Max.] 0% = 4 mA; 100% = 20
[109] Max Out In relation to parameter 4-19 Max Output mA.
Freq Frequency.

116 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output 3.7.8 6-7* Analog Output 3 MCB 113
Option: Function:
Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max. - Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for analog
Max.] -100% = 4 mA; 0% = 12 mA; +100% = output 3, terminals X45/1, and X45/2. Analog outputs are
20 mA. current outputs: 0/4–20 mA. Resolution on analog output
[150] Max Out Fr
4-20mA
In relation to parameter 4-19 Max Output
Frequency.
is 11 bit.
6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output
3 3
6-61 Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale Option: Function:
Select the function of terminal X45/1 as an
Range: Function:
analog current output.
0 %* [0 - Scales the minimum output of the selected analog
[0] No operation When no signal on the analog output is
200 %] signal on terminal X30/8. Scale the minimum value
present.
as a percentage of the maximum signal value. For
[52] MCO 305 0-20
example, enter the value 25% if the output should
mA
be 0 mA at 25% of the maximum output value.
[53] MCO 305 4-20
The value can never exceed the corresponding
mA
setting in parameter 6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale
if the value is below 100%. [100] Output 0 Hz = 0 mA; 100 Hz = 20 mA.
frequency
This parameter is active when General VLT®
0-20 mA
Purpose I/O MCB 101 is mounted in the frequency
converter. [101] Reference Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min. -
0-20 mA Max.] 0% = 0 mA; 100% = 20 mA.
6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max. -
Max.] -100% = 0 mA; 0% = 10 mA; +100%
Range: Function:
= 20 mA.
100 [0 - Scales the maximum output of the selected
[102] Feedback
%* 200 % analog signal on terminal X30/8. Scale the value
[103] Motor current The value is taken from
] to the required maximum value of the current
0-20 mA parameter 16-37 Inv. Max. Current. The
signal output. Scale the output to give a lower
inverter maximum current (160% current)
current than 20 mA at full scale or 20 mA at an
is equal to 20 mA.
output below 100% of the maximum signal value.
Example: Inverter normal current (11 kW) =
If 20 mA is the required output current at a value
24 A. 160% = 38.4 A. Motor normal current
between 0–100% of the full-scale output,
= 22 A, readout 11.46 mA.
program the percentage value in the parameter, 20 mA x 22 A
= 11 . 46 mA
that is 50%=20 mA. If a current 4–20 mA is 38 . 4 A

required at maximum output (100%), calculate In case the normal motor current is equal
the percentage value as follows: to 20 mA, the output setting of
parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max
20 mA / desired maximum current x 100 %
Scale is:
20 − 4
i . e . 10 mA : x 100 = 160 % IVLT Max x 100
10 38 . 4 x 100
= = 175 %
IMotorNorm 22
6-63 Terminal X30/8 Bus Control [104] Torque rel to The torque setting is related to the setting
Range: Function: lim 0-20 mA in parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode.
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Holds the level of output X30/8 if controlled [105] Torque rel to The torque is related to the motor torque
by bus. rated motor setting.
torque 0-20
6-64 Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout Preset mA
Range: Function: [106] Power 0-20 Taken from parameter 1-20 Motor Power
mA [kW].
0 %* [0 - Holds the preset level of output X30/8.
100 %] If there is a fieldbus timeout and a timeout [107] Speed 0-20 Taken from parameter 3-03 Maximum
function is selected in parameter 6-60 Terminal mA Reference. 20 mA = value in
X30/8 Output, the output is preset to this level. parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference.
[108] Torque ref. Torque reference related to 160% torque.
0-20 mA
[109] Max. out freq In relation to parameter 4-19 Max Output
0-20 mA Frequency.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 117

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output 6-71 Terminal X45/1 Output Min. Scale
Option: Function: Range: Function:
[130] Output freq. 0 Hz = 4 mA, 100 Hz = 20 mA. 0.00%* [0.00 - Scale the minimum output of the selected
4-20 mA 200.00%] analog signal at terminal X45/1 as a
[131] Reference Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min.-Max.] percentage of the maximum signal value.

3 3 4-20 mA 0% = 4 mA; 100% = 20 mA.

Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max-Max.]
For example, if 0 mA (or 0 Hz) is required
at 25% of the maximum output value, then
-100% = 4 mA; 0% = 12 mA; +100% = 20 program 25%. Scaling values up to 100%
mA. can never exceed the corresponding setting
[132] Feedback 4-20 in parameter 6-72 Terminal X45/1 Max. Scale.
mA
6-72 Terminal X45/1 Output Max. Scale
[133] Motor cur. The value is taken from
4-20 mA parameter 16-37 Inv. Max. Current. The Range: Function:
inverter maximum current (160% current) 100%* [0.00 - Scale the maximum output of the selected
is equal to 20 mA. 200.00%] analog signal at terminal X45/1. Set the value
Example: Inverter normal current (11 kW) = to the maximum value of the current signal
24 A. 160% = 38.4 A. Motor normal current output. Scale the output to give a current
= 22 A, readout 11.46 mA. lower than 20 mA at full scale, or 20 mA at
16 mA x 22 A
= 9 . 17 mA
an output below 100% of the maximum
38 . 4 A
signal value. If 20 mA is the required output
In case the normal motor current is equal
current at a value between 0–100% of the
to 20 mA, the output setting of
full-scale output, program the percentage
parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max
value in the parameter, for example 50% =
Scale is:
20 mA. If a current 4–20 mA is required at
IVLT Max x 100 38 . 4 x 100
IMotorNorm
=
22
= 175 % maximum output (100%), calculate the
percentage value as follows (example where
[134] Torque % lim. The torque setting is related to the setting
required maximum output is 10 mA):
4-20 mA in parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode.
IRANGE mA
[135] Torque % The torque setting is related to the motor IDESIRED MAX mA
x 100 %

nom 4-20 mA torque setting. =

20 − 4 mA
x 100 % = 160 %
10 mA
[136] Power 4-20 Taken from parameter 1-20 Motor Power
mA [kW]. Current

130BA877.10
[137] Speed 4-20 Taken from parameter 3-03 Maximum [mA]

mA Reference. 20 mA = value in
20
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference.
[138] Torque 4-20 Torque reference related to 160% torque.
mA
[139] Bus ctrl. 0-20 An output value set from fieldbus process
mA data. The output works independently of
internal functions in the frequency 0/4
converter.
0% Analogue Analogue 100% Variable for
[140] Bus ctrl. 4-20 An output value set from fieldbus process output Min Output Max output
Scale Scale example:Speed
mA data. The output works independently of par. 6-71 par. 6-72 [RPM]
internal functions in the frequency
Illustration 3.45 Output Maximum Scale
converter.
[141] Bus ctrl. 0-20 Parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low
mA, timeout defines the behavior of the analog output
6-73 Terminal X45/1 Output Bus Control
in case of a fieldbus timeout.
[142] Bus ctrl. 4-20 Parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low Range: Function:
mA, timeout defines the behavior of the analog output 0.00%* [0.00 - 100.00%] Holds the level of analog output 3
in case of a fieldbus timeout. (terminal X45/1) if controlled by bus.
[150] Max. out freq In relation to parameter 4-19 Max Output
4-20 mA Frequency.

118 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

6-74 Terminal X45/1 Output Timeout Preset 6-82 Terminal X45/3 Output Max. Scale
Range: Function: Option: Function:
0.00%* [0.00 - Holds the preset level of analog output 3 IRANGE mA
x 100 %
IDESIRED MAX mA
100.00%] (terminal X45/1). 20 − 4 mA
= x 100 % = 160 %
If there is a fieldbus timeout and a 10 mA

timeout function is selected in

parameter 6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output, the
6-83 Terminal X45/3 Output Bus Control 3 3
output is preset to this level. Option: Function:
[0.00%] * 0.00 - 100.00% Holds the level of output 4 (X45/3) if
controlled by bus.
3.7.9 6-8* Analog Output 4 MCB 113
6-84 Terminal X45/3 Output Timeout Preset
Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for analog
Option: Function:
output 4, terminals X45/3 and X45/4. Analog outputs are
[0.00%] * 0.00 - Holds the preset level of output 4
current outputs: 0/4 to 20 mA. Resolution on analog
100.00% (X45/3). If there is a fieldbus timeout and
output is 11 bit.
a timeout function is selected in
6-80 Terminal X45/3 Output parameter 6-80 Terminal X45/3 Output, the
Option: Function: output is preset to this level.
Select the function of terminal X45/3 as an
analog current output.
[0] * No operation Same selections available as for
parameter 6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output.

6-81 Terminal X45/3 Output Min. Scale

Option: Function:
[0.00%] * 0.00 - Scales the minimum output of the
200.00% selected analog signal on terminal X45/3.
Scale the minimum value as a percentage
of the maximum signal value, for example,
0 mA (or 0 Hz) is required at 25% of the
maximum output value and 25% is
programmed. The value can never exceed
the corresponding setting in
parameter 6-82 Terminal X45/3 Max. Scale if
value is below 100%.
This parameter is active when VLT®
Extended Relay Card MCB 113 is mounted
in the frequency converter.

6-82 Terminal X45/3 Output Max. Scale

Option: Function:
[0.00%] 0.00 - Scales the maximum output of the selected
* 200.00% analog signal on terminal X45/3. Scale the
value to the required maximum value of the
current signal output. Scale the output to
give a lower current than 20 mA at full scale
or 20 mA at an output below 100% of the
maximum signal value. If 20 mA is the
required output current at a value between
0–100% of the full-scale output, program
the percentage value in the parameter, for
example, 50% = 20 mA. If a current of 4–
20 mA is required at maximum output
(100%), calculate the percentage value as
follows (example where required maximum
output is 10 mA):

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 119

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3.8 Parameters: 7-** Controllers

3.8.1 7-0* Speed PID Ctrl.

NOTICE
3 3 If separate encoders are used (FC 302 only), adjust the
ramp-related parameters according to the gear ratio
between the 2 encoders.

7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source

Option: Function:
NOTICE
This parameter cannot be
adjusted while the motor is
running.

Select the encoder for closed loop

feedback.
The feedback may come from a
different encoder (typically mounted
on the application itself ) than the
motor-mounted encoder feedback
selected in parameter 1-02 Flux Motor
Feedback Source.

[0] Motor feedb. P1-02

[1] 24V encoder
[2] MCB 102
[3] MCB 103
[4] MCO Encoder 1 X56
[5] MCO Encoder 2 X55
[6] Analog Input 53
[7] Analog Input 54
[8] Frequency input 29
[9] Frequency input 33
[11] MCB 15X

120 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.8.2 Speed PID Droop

This feature implements precise torque sharing between

multiple motors on a common mechanical shaft.
Speed PID droop is useful for marine and mining
applications, where redundancy and higher dynamics are
required. Speed PID droop allows to reduce inertia by 3 3
utilizing multiple small motors instead of 1 big motor.
Illustration 3.46 shows the concept of the feature:

130BE197.10
VLT 1

Set-point Speed Torque

Ramp - M1
Calculation PID PID

Droop

VLT 2

Set-point Speed Torque

External Set-point Ramp - M2
Calculation PID PID

Droop

VLT 3

Set-point Speed Torque

Ramp - PID M3
Calculation PID

Droop

Illustration 3.46 Speed PID Droop

The value in parameter 7-01 Speed PID Droop ensures that Use speed trim if the application requires the following
the load is shared equally between the motors. If the features:
torque on the motor is 100% of nominal motor torque, the • Accurate speed (the actual shaft speed matches
frequency converter reduces its output to this motor by the reference speed).
100% of the value in parameter 7-01 Speed PID Droop. If the
torque is 50% of nominal motor torque, the frequency
• Precise speed adjustment down to 0 RPM.

converter reduces its output to this motor by 50% of the

value in parameter 7-01 Speed PID Droop. This ensures that
the motors share the load evenly.
A side effect of using speed PID droop is that the actual
shaft speed does not match the reference exactly. Speed
PID droop is not efficient in low-speed applications
because the adjustment range may be insufficient.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 121

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

Enabling PID droop

To enable speed PID droop:
• Run the frequency converter in 1 of the following
modes:
• Flux closed loop (parameter 1-01 Motor

3 3 Control Principle, [3] Flux w/ motor feedb).

• Flux sensorless (parameter 1-01 Motor
Control Principle, [2] Flux sensorless).
• Run the frequency converter in speed mode
(parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode, option [0]
Speed open loop or [1] Speed closed loop).
• Ensure that parameter 1-62 Slip Compensation
contains the default value (0%).
• Ensure that all frequency converters in the torque
sharing system use the same speed reference and
start and stop signal.
• Ensure that all frequency converters in the torque
sharing system use the same parameter settings.
• Adjust the value in parameter 7-01 Speed PID
Droop.

NOTICE
Do not use overvoltage control when using the PID
droop function (select [0] Disabled in
parameter 2-17 Over-voltage Control).

NOTICE
If the speed reference is lower than the value in
parameter 7-01 Speed PID Droop, the frequency converter
makes the PID droop factor equal to the speed reference.

Example for a PM motor

In a set-up with the following configuration:
• Reference speed = 1500 RPM.
• Parameter 7-01 Speed PID Droop = 50 RPM.
The frequency converter provides the following output:

Load on the motor Output

0% 1500 RPM
100% 1450 RPM
100% regenerative load 1550 RPM

Table 3.24 Output with Speed PID Droop

This is why droop is sometimes referred to as negative slip

compensation (the frequency converter reduces the output
instead of increasing it).

122 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.8.3 Speed Trim A set-up with a single source, where the master frequency
converter sends information about torque to all followers,
The speed trim function is an add-on to the speed PID is limited by the number of available analog outputs on
droop. The speed trim provides torque sharing with precise the master frequency converter. It is possible to use a
speed down to 0 RPM. The function requires wiring of cascade principle, which overcomes this limitation but
makes the control less fast and less accurate.
analog signals.
The master frequency converter operates in speed mode. 3 3
In speed trim, the master frequency converter runs normal The follower frequency converters operate in speed mode
speed PID without droop. The follower frequency with the speed trim. The trim function uses torque data
converters use the speed PID droop, but instead of from all frequency converters in the system.
reacting on their own load they compare their own load to
the load of other frequency converters in the system and
then use that data as input for the speed PID droop.

130BE998.10
VLT 1

Set-point Speed Torque

Ramp M1
Calculation PID PID

VLT 2

Set-point Speed Torque

External Set-point Ramp - M2
Calculation PID PID

Droop

VLT 3

Set-point Speed Torque

Ramp - M3
Calculation PID PID

Droop

Illustration 3.47 Speed Trim

Illustration 3.47 shows a single source set-up where the

master sends the torque signal to all followers. The
number of available analog outputs on the master limits
this set-up. To overcome the limitation of the number of
analog outputs, use a cascade principle. The cascade
principle makes the control slower and less accurate
compared with the set-up using analog outputs.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 123

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

7-01 Speed PID Droop 7-04 Speed PID Differentiation Time

The droop function allows the frequency converter to decrease Range: Function:
the motor speed proportional to the load. The droop value is feedback. The quicker the error changes,
directly proportional to the load value. Use the droop function the stronger the gain from the differen-
when several motors are mechanically connected and the load tiator. The gain is proportional with the

3 3 on motors can differ.

Ensure that parameter 1-62 Slip Compensation has a default
speed at which errors change. Setting this
parameter to zero disables the differen-
setting. tiator. This parameter is used with
Range: Function: parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode [1] Speed
0 RPM* [0 - 200 RPM] Enter the droop value at closed loop control.
100% load.
7-05 Speed PID Diff. Gain Limit
7-02 Speed PID Proportional Gain Range: Function:
Range: Function: 5* [1 - Set a limit for the gain provided by the differen-
Size [0 Enter the speed controller proportional gain. 20] tiator. Consider limiting the gain at higher
related* - 1] The proportional gain amplifies the error (that frequencies. For example, set up a pure D-link at
is, the deviation between the feedback signal low frequencies and a constant D-link at higher
and the setpoint). This parameter is used with frequencies. This parameter is used with
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode [0] Speed parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode [1] Speed closed
open loop and [1] Speed closed loop control. loop control.
Quick control is obtained at high amplification.
Increasing amplification makes the process less 7-06 Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time
stable. Range: Function:
Use this parameter for values with 3 decimals. Size [0.1NOTICE
For values with 4 decimals, use related* - 100
Severe filtering can be detrimental to
parameter 3-83 Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel. ms]
dynamic performance.
Start.
This parameter is used with
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode [1]
7-03 Speed PID Integral Time
Speed closed loop and [2] Torque control.
Range: Function: Adjust the filter time in flux sensorless to
Size [1.0 - Enter the speed controller integral time, 3–5 ms.
related* 20000 which determines the time the internal PID
ms] control takes to correct errors. The greater Set a time constant for the speed control low-
the error, the more quickly the gain pass filter. The low-pass filter improves steady-
increases. The integral time causes a delay state performance and dampens oscillations on
of the signal and therefore a dampening the feedback signal. This is an advantage if
effect and can be used to eliminate steady- there is a great amount of noise in the system,
state speed error. Obtain quick control see Illustration 3.48. For example, if a time
through a short integral time, though if the constant (τ) of 100 ms is programmed, the cut-
integral time is too short, the process off frequency for the low-pass filter is 1/0.1 =
becomes unstable. An excessively long 10 RAD/s, corresponding to (10/2 x π) = 1.6 Hz.
integral time disables the integral action, The PID regulator only regulates a feedback
leading to major deviations from the signal that varies by a frequency of less than 1.6
required reference, since the process Hz. If the feedback signal varies by a higher
regulator takes too long to regulate errors. frequency than 1.6 Hz, the PID regulator does
This parameter is used with [0] Speed open not react.
loop and [1] Speed closed loop control, set in Practical settings of parameter 7-06 Speed PID
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode. Lowpass Filter Time taken from the number of
pulses per revolutions from encoder:
7-04 Speed PID Differentiation Time
Range: Function:
Size [0 - Enter the speed controller differentiation
related* 200 ms] time. The differentiator does not react to
constant error. It provides gain proportional
to the rate of change of the speed

124 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

7-06 Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time 7-07 Speed PID Feedback Gear Ratio
Range: Function: Range: Function:
Encoder PPR Parameter 7-06 Speed PID 1* [ 0.0001 - 32.0000] The frequency converter multiplies the
Lowpass Filter Time speed feedback by this ratio.
512 10 ms

3 3

130BA871.10
1024 5 ms
2048 2 ms
4096 1 ms

Table 3.25 Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time n1 n2

Motor
Feedback

175ZA293.11
Disturbed feedback signal
Par 7-07=1.00 Par 7-07=n1/n2

Illustration 3.49 Speed PID Feedback Gear Ratio

7-08 Speed PID Feed Forward Factor

Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 500 %] The reference signal bypasses the speed
controller by the amount specified. This
feature increases the dynamic performance
of the speed control loop.

7-09 Speed PID Error Correction w/ Ramp

0.6 t (Sec.)
Range: Function:
Size related* [10 - The speed error between ramp and
100000 RPM] actual speed is held up against the
Lowpass filter
setting in this parameter. If the
speed error exceeds this parameter
fg = 10 Hz
entry, the speed error is corrected
via ramping in a controlled way.
Feedback
Motor
130BC026.10

Speed
Filtered feedback signal

7-09

Torque Time
Limit
Motor
Speed

7-09

Torque
Limit Time
Ramp Motor Speed
0.6 t (Sec.)
Illustration 3.50 Speed Error between Ramp and Actual Speed
Illustration 3.48 Feedback Signal

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 125

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3.8.4 7-1* Torque PI Control 3.8.5 7-2* Process Ctrl. Feedb.

Parameters for configuring the torque PI control. Select the feedback sources for the process PID control,
and how this feedback should be handled.
7-10 Torque PI Feedback Source
Select the feedback source for the torque controller. 7-20 Process CL Feedback 1 Resource
3 3 Option: Function: Option: Function:
[0] * Controller Off Select to operate in open loop. The effective feedback signal is made
up of the sum of up to 2 different
[1] Analog Input 53 Select to use torque feedback from the
input signals.
analog input.
Select which frequency converter input
[2] Analog Input 54 Select to use torque feedback from the should be treated as the source of the
analog input. first of these signals. The second input
signal is defined in
[3] Estimed Torque Select to use the torque feedback
parameter 7-22 Process CL Feedback 2
estimated by the frequency converter.
Resource.

7-12 Torque PI Proportional Gain [0] * No function

Range: Function: [1] Analog Input 53

100 %* [0 - 500 %] Enter the proportional gain value for the [2] Analog Input 54
torque controller. Selection of a high value [3] Frequency input
makes the controller react faster. Too high 29
a setting leads to controller instability. [4] Frequency input
33
7-13 Torque PI Integration Time [7] Analog Input
Range: Function: X30/11
[8] Analog Input
0.020 s* [0.002 - 2 s] Enter the integration time for the torque
X30/12
controller. Selection of a low value makes
[15] Analog Input
the controller react faster. Too low a
X48/2
setting leads to controller instability.
7-22 Process CL Feedback 2 Resource
7-16 Torque PI Lowpass Filter Time
Option: Function:
Enter the time constant for the torque control low-pass filter.
The effective feedback signal is made
Range: Function: up of the sum of up to 2 different
5 ms* [0.1 - 100 ms] input signals. Select which frequency
converter input should be treated as
7-18 Torque PI Feed Forward Factor
the source of the second of these
Enter the torque feed forward factor value. The reference signal signals. The first input signal is defined
bypasses the torque controller by this value. in parameter 7-20 Process CL Feedback 1
Range: Function: Resource.
0 %* [0 - 100 %] [0] * No function
[1] Analog Input 53
7-19 Current Controller Rise Time
[2] Analog Input 54
Range: Function:
[3] Frequency input
Size related* [15 - 100 %] Enter the value for the rise time of 29
the current controller as a
[4] Frequency input
percentage of the control period.
33
[7] Analog Input
X30/11
[8] Analog Input
X30/12
[15] Analog Input
X48/2

126 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.8.6 7-3* Process PID Ctrl. 7-36 Process PID Diff. Gain Limit
Range: Function:
7-30 Process PID Normal/ Inverse Control 5* [1 - 50] Enter a limit for the differentiator gain. If there is
Option: Function: no limit, the differentiator gain increases when
Normal and inverse controls are implemented by there are fast changes. To obtain a pure differen-
introducing a difference between the reference
signal and the feedback signal.
tiator gain at slow changes and a constant
differentiator gain where fast changes occur, limit
3 3
the differentiator gain.
[0] * Normal Set process control to increase the output
frequency.
7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor
[1] Inverse Set process control to decrease the output Range: Function:
frequency.
0 %* [0 - Enter the PID feed forward factor. The factor
200 %] sends a constant fraction of the reference signal
7-31 Process PID Anti Windup
to bypass the PID control, so the PID control
Option: Function: only affects the remaining fraction of the control
[0] Off Continue regulation of an error even when the output signal. Any change to this parameter affects the
frequency cannot be increased or decreased. motor speed. When the feed forward factor is
activated, it provides less overshoot and high
[1] * On Cease regulation of an error when the output
dynamics when changing the setpoint.
frequency can no longer be adjusted.
Parameter 7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor is
active when parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode
7-32 Process PID Start Speed
is set to [3] Process.
Range: Function:
0 RPM* [0 - Enter the motor speed to be attained as a 7-39 On Reference Bandwidth
6000 start signal for commencement of PID
Range: Function:
RPM] control. When the power is switched on, the
5 %* [0 - Enter the on-reference bandwidth. When the
frequency converter starts to ramp and then
200 %] PID control error (the difference between the
operates under speed open-loop control.
reference and the feedback) is less than the
When the process PID start speed is reached,
value of this parameter, the on-reference
the frequency converter changes to process
status bit is 1.
PID control.

7-33 Process PID Proportional Gain 3.8.7 7-4* Advanced Process PID Ctrl.
Range: Function:
Size related* [0 - 10] Enter the PID proportional gain. The This parameter group is only used if parameter 1-00 Config-
proportional gain multiplies the error uration Mode is set to [7] Extended PID speed CL or [8]
between the setpoint and the feedback Extended PID Speed OL.
signal.
7-40 Process PID I-part Reset
7-34 Process PID Integral Time Option: Function:
Range: Function: [0] * No
[1] Yes Select [1] Yes to reset the I-part of the process PID
10000 s* [0.01 - Enter the PID integral time. The integrator
controller. The selection automatically returns to [0]
10000 s] provides an increasing gain at a constant
No. Resetting the I-part makes it possible to start from
error between the setpoint and the
a well-defined point after changing something in the
feedback signal. The integral time is the
process, for example changing a textile roll.
time needed by the integrator to reach
the same gain as the proportional gain.
7-41 Process PID Output Neg. Clamp
7-35 Process PID Differentiation Time Range: Function:
Range: Function: -100 %* [ -100 - par. 7-42 %] Enter a negative limit for the
process PID controller output.
0 s* [0 - 10 s] Enter the PID differentiation time. The differen-
tiator does not react to a constant error, but
provides a gain only when the error changes.
The shorter the PID differentiation time, the
stronger the gain from the differentiator.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 127

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

7-42 Process PID Output Pos. Clamp 7-45 Process PID Feed Fwd Resource
Range: Function: Option: Function:
100 %* [ par. 7-41 - 100 %] Enter a positive limit for the index 1 for feed forward [748] (and
process PID controller output. index 2 for reference [1682]).

[36] MCO
3 3 7-43 Process PID Gain Scale at Min. Ref.
Range: Function: 7-46 Process PID Feed Fwd Normal/ Inv. Ctrl.
100 %* [0 - Enter a scaling percentage to apply to the Option: Function:
100 %] process PID output when operating at the [0] * Normal Select [0] Normal to set the feed-forward factor to
minimum reference. The scaling percentage is treat the FF resource as a positive value.
adjusted linearly between the scale at
[1] Inverse Select [1] Inverse to treat the feed-forward resource
minimum reference (parameter 7-43 Process PID
as a negative value.
Gain Scale at Min. Ref.) and the scale at
maximum reference (parameter 7-44 Process
7-48 PCD Feed Forward
PID Gain Scale at Max. Ref.).
Range: Function:
7-44 Process PID Gain Scale at Max. Ref. 0* [0 - 65535] This parameter contains the value of
parameter 7-45 Process PID Feed Fwd Resource
Range: Function:
[32] Bus PCD.
100 %* [0 - Enter a scaling percentage to apply to the
100 %] process PID output when operating at the
7-49 Process PID Output Normal/ Inv. Ctrl.
maximum reference. The scaling percentage is
adjusted linearly between the scale at
Option: Function:
minimum reference (parameter 7-43 Process PID [0] * Normal Select [0] Normal to use the resulting output from
Gain Scale at Min. Ref.) and the scale at the process PID controller as is.
maximum reference (parameter 7-44 Process [1] Inverse Select [1] Inverse to invert the resulting output
PID Gain Scale at Max. Ref.). from the process PID controller. This operation is
performed after the feed-forward factor is applied.
7-45 Process PID Feed Fwd Resource
Option: Function:
3.8.8 7-5* Ext. Process PID Ctrl.
[0] * No function Select which frequency converter input
should be used as the feed-forward
This parameter group is only used if parameter 1-00 Config-
factor. The factor is added to the output
uration Mode is set to [7] Extended PID speed CL or [8]
of the PID controller. This increases
Extended PID Speed OL.
dynamic performance.

[1] Analog Input 53 7-50 Process PID Extended PID

[2] Analog Input 54 Option: Function:
[7] Frequency input [0] Disabled Disable the extended parts of the process PID
29 controller.
[8] Frequency input [1] * Enabled Enable the extended parts of the PID controller.
33
[11] Local bus 7-51 Process PID Feed Fwd Gain
reference
Range: Function:
[20] Digital pot.meter
1* [0 - The feed forward is used to obtain the required level
[21] Analog input
100] based on a well-known signal available. The PID
X30/11
controller then only takes care of the smaller part of
[22] Analog input
the control, necessary because of unknown
X30/12
characters. The standard feed-forward factor in
[29] Analog Input
parameter 7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor is
X48/2
always related to the reference, whereas
[32] Bus PCD Selects a fieldbus reference configured parameter 7-51 Process PID Feed Fwd Gain has more
by parameter 8-02 Control Word Source. options. In winder applications, the feed-forward
Change parameter 8-42 PCD Write factor is typically the line speed of the system.
Configuration for the bus used to make
the feed forward available in
parameter 7-48 PCD Feed Forward. Use

128 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

7-52 Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp up 7-90 Position PI Feedback Source
Range: Function: Option: Function:
0.01 s* [0.01 - 10 s] Controls the dynamics of the feed-forward [3] MCB 103 Resolver connected to resolver option (B-option
signal when ramping up. slot). Configure the resolver in parameter group
17-5* Resolver Interface.
7-53 Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp down
Range: Function:
7-91 Position PI Droop 3 3
Range: Function:
0.01 s* [0.01 - 10 s] Controls the dynamics of the feed-forward
0.0 °* [0.0 - Enter the motor angle deviation at 100% load
signal when ramping down.
360.0 °] in a load sharing system. The system is 2 or
7-56 Process PID Ref. Filter Time more mechanically connected motors in
positioning or synchronization mode. In
Range: Function:
positioning mode, configure
0.001 s* [0.001 - 1 Set a time constant for the reference first- parameter 7-01 Speed PID Droop to allow a
s] order low-pass filter. The low-pass filter speed deviation.
improves steady-state performance and
dampens oscillations on the reference/ 7-92 Position PI Proportional Gain
feedback signals. However, severe filtering
Range: Function:
can be detrimental to dynamic
performance.
0.0150* [0.0000 - NOTICE
1.0000]
This parameter is only available
7-57 Process PID Fb. Filter Time with software version 48.XX.
Range: Function:
0.001 s* [0.001 - 1 Set a time constant for the feedback first- Enter the proportional gain for the
s] order low-pass filter. The low-pass filter position PI controller. Increasing the gain
improves steady-state performance and value makes the control more dynamic
dampens oscillations on the reference/ but less stable. 0=Off.
feedback signals. However, severe filtering
can be detrimental to dynamic 7-93 Position PI Integral Time
performance. Range: Function:
20000.0 [1.0 - NOTICE
ms* 20000.0 ms]
3.8.9 7-9* Position PI Ctrl. This parameter is only available
with software version 48.XX.
Parameters for configuring the position controller.
Enter the integral time for the
7-90 Position PI Feedback Source
position PI controller. Decreasing the
Option: Function: value makes the control more
NOTICE dynamic but less stable. 20000=Off.
This parameter is only available with
software version 48.XX. 7-94 Position PI Feedback Scale Numerator

Select the feedback source for the position PI Range: Function:

controller. 1* [-2000000000 NOTICE
[0] * Motor Use the feedback source selected as motor - 2000000000]
This parameter is only available with
feedb. feedback in parameter 1-02 Flux Motor Feedback software version 48.XX.
P1-02 Source. In flux sensorless control principle the
estimated position from motor control is used. This parameter is the numerator in the
[1] 24V A 24 V encoder connected to terminals 32, 33. equation which defines the gear ratio
encoder NOTICE between the motor and the feedback device
Set parameter 5-14 Terminal 32 Digital when the feedback device is not mounted
Input and parameter 5-15 Terminal 33 on the motor shaft.
Digital Input to [0] No operation. Encoder revolutions =
Par . 7 − 94
Par . 7 − 95
[2] MCB 102 Encoder connected to an encoder option (B-
× Motor revolutions
option slot). Configure the encoder in
parameter group 17-1* Inc. Enc. Interface.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 129

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

7-95 Position PI Feebback Scale Denominator

Range: Function:
1* [-2000000000 - NOTICE
2000000000]
This parameter is only available
with software version 48.XX.
3 3
See parameter 7-94 Position PI
Feedback Scale Numerator.

7-97 Position PI Maximum Speed Above Master

Range: Function:
100 RPM* [0 - 65000 NOTICE
RPM]
This parameter is only available
with software version 48.XX.

Enter the value by which the follower

speed is allowed to exceed the actual
master speed. Valid only in synchroni-
zation mode.

7-98 Position PI Feed Forward Factor

Range: Function:
98 %* [0 - 110 %] NOTICE
This parameter is only available with
software version 48.XX.

Enter the amount by which the speed

reference calculated by the profile generator
is allowed to bypass the position PI
controller.

7-99 Position PI Minimum Ramp Time

Range: Function:
0.01 s* [0.000 - NOTICE
3600 s]
This parameter is only available with
software version 48.XX.

Enter the shortest ramp time for the output

of the Position PI controller. Use this
parameter to limit acceleration when
correcting large position deviations, for
example when starting synchronization with
a running master or after recovering from
an overload situation during positioning.

130 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.9 Parameters: 8-** Communications and 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time
Options Range: Function:
20 s* [0.1 - Enter the maximum time expected to pass
NOTICE 18000.0 s] between the reception of 2 consecutive
Chapter 3.9 Parameters: 8-** Communications and Options telegrams. If this time is exceeded, it indicates
covers all the product series included in this operating
guide, but the options and parameter range may vary for
that the serial communication has stopped.
The function selected in
3 3
the different product series. For additional information, parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout Function
consult the product-specific programming guide. is then carried out. A valid control word
triggers the timeout counter.
3.9.1 8-0* General Settings 8-04 Control Word Timeout Function
Select the timeout function. The timeout function activates when
8-01 Control Site
the control word fails to be updated within the time period
The setting in this parameter overrides the settings in specified in parameter 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time.
parameter 8-50 Coasting Select to parameter 8-56 Preset Reference
Option: Function:
Select.
Option: Function:
NOTICE
To change the set-up after a timeout,
[0] Digital and ctrl.word Use both digital input and
configure as follows:
control word.
1. Set parameter 0-10 Active Set-up
[1] Digital only Use digital inputs only.
to [9] Multi set-up.
[2] Controlword only Use control word only.
2. Select the relevant link in
parameter 0-12 This Set-up
8-02 Control Word Source
Linked to.
Select the source of the control word: 1 of 2 serial interfaces or 4
installed options. During initial power-up, the frequency
converter automatically sets this parameter to [3] Option A if it [0] Off Resumes control via fieldbus (fieldbus or
detects a valid fieldbus option installed in slot A. When the standard), using the most recent control word.
option is removed, the frequency converter detects a configu- [1] Freeze Freezes output frequency until communication
ration change, sets parameter 8-02 Control Word Source to default output resumes.
setting [1] FC RS485, and trips. If an option is installed after initial
[2] Stop Stops with auto restart when communication
power-up, the setting of parameter 8-02 Control Word Source does
resumes.
not change, but the frequency converter trips and shows: Alarm
67, Option Changed. [3] Jogging Runs the motor at jog frequency until
When retrofitting a bus option into a frequency converter that communication resumes.
did not have a bus option installed earlier, change the control to
[4] Max. speed Runs the motor at maximum frequency until
bus-based. This change is required for safety reasons to avoid an
communication resumes.
unintended change.
[5] Stop and Stops the motor, then resets the frequency
Option: Function:
trip converter to restart:
NOTICE • Via the fieldbus.
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
• Via [Reset].

• Via a digital input.

[0] None [6] Qstop and This option is available only with software
[1] FC RS485 trip version 48.XX.
[2] FC USB Stops the motor with the quick stop ramp
[3] Option A (parameter 3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time). Perform
[4] Option B a reset to restart the frequency converter.

[5] Option C0 [7] Select Changes the set-up after a control word
[6] Option C1 setup 1 timeout. If communication resumes after a
[30] External Can timeout, parameter 8-05 End-of-Timeout
Function either resumes the set-up used before
the timeout, or retains the set-up endorsed by
the timeout function.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 131

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

8-04 Control Word Timeout Function 8-08 Readout Filtering

Select the timeout function. The timeout function activates when Use this function if the speed feedback value readouts on the
the control word fails to be updated within the time period fieldbus fluctuate. Select [1] Motor Data LP-Filter if the function is
specified in parameter 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time. required. A power cycle is required for changes to take effect.
Option: Function: Option: Function:
3 3 [8] Select
setup 2
See [7] Select set-up 1. [0] Motor Data
Std-Filt.
Normal fieldbus readouts.

[9] Select See [7] Select set-up 1. [1] Motor Data LP- Filtered fieldbus readouts of the following
setup 3 Filter parameters:
[10] Select See [7] Select set-up 1. • Parameter 16-10 Power [kW].
setup 4
• Parameter 16-11 Power [hp].
[26] Trip
• Parameter 16-12 Motor Voltage.
8-05 End-of-Timeout Function • Parameter 16-14 Motor current.
Select the action after receiving a valid control word following a
• Parameter 16-16 Torque [Nm].
timeout.
• Parameter 16-17 Speed [RPM].
This parameter is active only when parameter 8-04 Control
Timeout Function is set to: • Parameter 16-22 Torque [%].

• [7] Set-up 1. • Parameter 16-25 Torque [Nm] High.

• [8] Set-up 2.

• [9] Set-up 3. 3.9.2 8-1* Ctrl. Word Settings

• [10] Set-up 4.
8-10 Control Word Profile
Option: Function:
Select the interpretation of the control and status words
[0] Hold set-up Retains the set-up selected in corresponding to the installed fieldbus. Only the selections valid
parameter 8-04 Control Timeout for the fieldbus installed in slot A are visible in the LCP display.
Function and shows a warning until For guidelines in selection of [0] FC profile and [1] PROFIdrive
parameter 8-06 Reset Control Timeout profile, refer to the design guide.
toggles. Then the frequency For more guidelines in the selection of [1] PROFIdrive profile, refer
converter resumes its original set- to the operating instructions for the installed fieldbus.
up.
Option: Function:
[1] * Resume set-up Resumes the set-up that was active [0] FC profile
before the timeout.
[1] PROFIdrive profile
[3] FC Motion Profile This option is available only with
8-06 Reset Control Word Timeout
software version 48.XX.
This parameter is active only when [0] Hold set-up has been Assigns motion-specific functions to
selected in parameter 8-05 End-of-Timeout Function. various control and status word bits. This
Option: Function: option is available when [9] Positioning or
[0] * Do not reset Retains the set-up specified in [10] Synchronization is selected in
parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout Function, parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.
following a control word timeout. [5] ODVA
[1] Do reset Restores the frequency converter to the [7] CANopen DSP 402
original set-up following a control word
8-13 Configurable Status Word STW
timeout. The frequency converter performs
the reset and then immediately reverts to the This is an array parameter with 16 elements, one element for
[0] Do not reset setting. each bit in range 0–15. Elements 5 and 12–15 are configurable.
Each of the bits can be configured to any of the following
8-07 Diagnosis Trigger options.

This parameter has no function for DeviceNet. Option: Function:

Option: Function: [0] No function The input is always low.

[0] * Disable [1] * Profile Default Depending on the profile set in

[1] Trigger on alarms parameter 8-10 Control Profile.
[2] Trigger alarm/warn.

132 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

8-13 Configurable Status Word STW 8-13 Configurable Status Word STW
This is an array parameter with 16 elements, one element for This is an array parameter with 16 elements, one element for
each bit in range 0–15. Elements 5 and 12–15 are configurable. each bit in range 0–15. Elements 5 and 12–15 are configurable.
Each of the bits can be configured to any of the following Each of the bits can be configured to any of the following
options. options.
Option:
[2] Alarm 68 Only
Function:
The input goes high whenever
Option:
[75] Logic Rule 5
Function:
3 3
alarm 68, Safe Torque Off activated [80] SL digital out A
is active and goes low whenever [81] SL digital out B
alarm 68, Safe Torque Off activated [82] SL digital out C
is not active. [83] SL digital out D
[3] Trip excl Alarm 68 [84] SL digital out E
[4] Position Error This option is available only with [85] SL digital out F
software version 48.XX. [86] ATEX ETR cur. alarm
The position error exceeds the [87] ATEX ETR freq.
value of parameter 4-71 Maximum alarm
Position Error during the time in [88] ATEX ETR cur.
parameter 4-72 Position Error warning
Timeout. [89] ATEX ETR freq.
[5] Position Limit This option is available only with warning
software version 48.XX. [90] Safe Function active
A position limit is reached. [91] Safe Opt. Reset req.

[6] Touch on Target This option is available only with 8-14 Configurable Control Word CTW
software version 48.XX.
This is an array parameter with 16 elements, one element for
Target position reached in touch
each bit in range 0–15. Each of the bits can be configured to any
position mode.
of the following options.
[7] Touch Activated This option is available only with Option: Function:
software version 48.XX.
This parameter is not valid in software versions
Touch position mode is active.
before 4.93.
[10] T18 DI status
[0] None The frequency converter ignores the
[11] T19 DI status information in this bit.
[12] T27 DI status
[1] * Profile The functionality of the bit depends on the
[13] T29 DI status
default selection in parameter 8-10 Control Word Profile.
[14] T32 DI status
[15] T33 DI status [2] CTW Valid, If set to 1, the frequency converter ignores the
[16] T37 DI status The input goes high whenever active low remaining bits of the control word.
terminal 37 has 0 V and goes low [3] Safe This function is only available in bits 12–15 of
whenever terminal 37 has 24 V. Option the control word if a safety option is mounted
[21] Thermal warning Reset in the frequency converter. The reset is
[30] Brake fault (IGBT) executed on a 0⇒1 transition and resets the
[40] Out of ref range safety option as set in parameter 42-24 Restart
Behaviour.
[41] Load throttle active
[60] Comparator 0 [4] PID error Inverts the resulting error from the process PID
[61] Comparator 1 inverse controller. Available only if
[62] Comparator 2 parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to [6]
[63] Comparator 3 Surface Winder, [7] Extended PID Speed OL, or
[64] Comparator 4 [8] Extended PID Speed CL.

[65] Comparator 5 [5] PID reset I Resets the I-part of the process PID controller.
[70] Logic Rule 0 part Equivalent to parameter 7-40 Process PID I-part
[71] Logic Rule 1 Reset. Available only if parameter 1-00 Configu-
[72] Logic Rule 2 ration Mode is set to [6] Surface Winder, [7]
[73] Logic Rule 3 Extended PID Speed OL, or [8] Extended PID
[74] Logic Rule 4 Speed CL.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 133

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

8-14 Configurable Control Word CTW 8-14 Configurable Control Word CTW
This is an array parameter with 16 elements, one element for This is an array parameter with 16 elements, one element for
each bit in range 0–15. Each of the bits can be configured to any each bit in range 0–15. Each of the bits can be configured to any
of the following options. of the following options.
Option: Function: Option: Function:
3 3 [6] PID enable Enables the extended process PID controller.
Equivalent to parameter 7-50 Process PID
selection from [1] Absolute to [5] Relative Touch
Sensor.
Extended PID. Available only if
[20] Target Changes the sign of the set target position. For
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to [6]
Inverse example, if the set target is 1000, the
Surface Winder, [7] Extended PID Speed OL, or
activation of this option changes the value to
[8] Extended PID Speed CL.
-1000.
[11] Start This option is available only with software
Homing version 48.XX. 8-17 Configurable Alarm and Warningword
Starts the homing function selected in The configurable alarm and warning word has 16 bits (0–15).
parameter 17-80 Homing Function. Must remain Each of those bits can be configured to any of the following
high until homing is completed; otherwise options.
homing is aborted.
Option: Function:
[12] Activate This option is available only with software [0] * Off
Touch version 48.XX. [1] 10 Volts low warning
Select touch probe positioning mode. This [2] Live zero warning
option activates monitoring of the touch probe
[3] No motor warning
sensor input.
[4] Mains phase loss warning
[13] Sync. to This option is available only with software [5] DC link voltage high warning
Pos. Mode version 48.XX. [6] DC link voltage low warning
Select positioning in synchronization mode. [7] DC overvoltage warning
[14] Ramp 2 This option is available only with software [8] DC undervoltage warning
version 48.XX. [9] Inverter overloaded warning
Select between ramp 1 (parameter group 3-4* [10] Motor ETR overtemp warning
Ramp 1) and ramp 2 (parameter group 3-5* [11] Motor thermistor overtemp warning
Ramp 2). [12] Torque limit warning
[15] Relay 1 This option is available only with software [13] Over current warning
version 48.XX. [14] Earth fault warning
Control relay 1. [17] Controlword timeout warning
[19] Discharge temp high warning
[16] Relay2 This option is available only with software
[22] Hoist mech brake warning
version 48.XX.
Control relay 2. [23] Internal fans warning
[24] External fans warning
[17] Speed This option is available only with software
[25] Brake resistor short circuit warning
Mode version 48.XX.
[26] Brake powerlimit warning
Select the speed mode when [9] Positioning or
[27] Brake chopper short circuit warning
[10] Synchronization is selected in
[28] Brake check warning
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode. Speed
[29] Heatsink temperature warning
reference is set by reference resource 1 or
fieldbus REF1 relative to [30] Motor phase U warning
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference. [31] Motor phase V warning
[32] Motor phase W warning
[18] Virtual This option is available only with software
[34] Fieldbus communication warning
Master version 48.XX.
[36] Mains failure warning
Starts the virtual master configured in
[40] T27 overload warning
parameter 3-27 Virtual Master Max Ref.
[41] T29 overload warning
[19] Enable This option is available only with software
[45] Earth fault 2 warning
Master version 48.XX.
[47] 24V supply low warning
Offset Activates the master offset selected in
[58] AMA internal fault warning
parameter 3-26 Master Offset when
[59] Current limit warning
parameter 17-93 Master Offset Selection has a
[60] External interlock warning

134 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

8-17 Configurable Alarm and Warningword 8-17 Configurable Alarm and Warningword
The configurable alarm and warning word has 16 bits (0–15). The configurable alarm and warning word has 16 bits (0–15).
Each of those bits can be configured to any of the following Each of those bits can be configured to any of the following
options. options.
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[61]
[62]
Feedback error warning
Frequency max warning
[10068]
[10069]
Safe stop alarm
Powercard temp alarm
3 3
[64] Voltage limit warning [10073] Safestop auto restart alarm
[65] Controlboard overtemp warning [10074] PTC thermistor alarm
[66] Heatsink temp low warning [10075] Illegal profile alarm
[68] Safe stop warning [10078] Tracking error alarm
[73] Safe stop autorestart warning [10079] Illegal PS config alarm
[76] Power unit setup warning [10081] CSIV corrupt alarm
[77] Reduced powermode warning [10082] CSIV param error alarm
[78] Tracking error warning [10084] No safety option alarm
[89] Mech brake sliding warning [10090] Feedback monitor alarm
[163] ATEX ETR cur limit warning [10091] AI54 settings alarm
[165] ATEX ETR freq limit warning [10164] ATEX ETR current lim alarm
[10002] Live zero error alarm [10166] ATEX ETR freq limit alarm
[10004] Mains phase loss alarm
8-19 Product Code
[10007] DC overvoltage alarm
[10008] DC undervoltage alarm Range: Function:
[10009] Inverter overload alarm Size [0 - Select 0 to read out the actual
[10010] ETR overtemperature alarm related* 2147483647] fieldbus product code according
[10011] Thermistor overtemp alarm to the mounted fieldbus option.
Select 1 to read out the actual
[10012] Torque limit alarm
vendor ID.
[10013] Overcurrent alarm
[10014] Earth fault alarm
[10016] Short circuit alarm 3.9.3 8-3* FC Port Settings
[10017] CTW timeout alarm
[10022] Hoist brake alarm 8-30 Protocol
[10026] Brake powerlimit alarm
Option: Function:
[10027] Brakechopper shortcircuit alarm
Select the protocol to be used. Changing
[10028] Brake check alarm
protocol is not effective until after powering
[10029] Heatsink temp alarm
off the frequency converter.
[10030] Phase U missing alarm
[0] * FC
[10031] Phase V missing alarm
[1] FC MC
[10032] Phase W missing alarm
[2] Modbus RTU
[10033] Inrush fault alarm
[10034] Fieldbus com faul alarm 8-31 Address
[10036] Mains failure alarm Range: Function:
[10037] Phase imbalance alarm Size related* [ 1 - 255 ] Enter the address for the frequency
[10038] Internal fault converter (standard) port.
[10039] Heatsink sensor alarm Valid range: Depends on selected
[10045] Earth fault 2 alarm protocol.
[10046] Powercard supply alarm
[10047] 24V supply low alarm 8-32 FC Port Baud Rate
[10048] 1.8V supply low alarm Option: Function:
[10049] Speed limit alarm [0] 2400 Baud Baud rate selection for the FC (standard) port.
[10060] Ext interlock alarm
[1] 4800 Baud
[10061] Feedback error alarm
[2] 9600 Baud
[10063] Mech brake low alarm
[3] 19200 Baud
[10065] Controlboard overtemp alarm
[4] 38400 Baud
[10067] Option config changed alarm

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 135

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

8-32 FC Port Baud Rate 3.9.4 8-4* FC MC Protocol Set

Option: Function:
[5] 57600 Baud 8-40 Telegram Selection
[6] 76800 Baud Option: Function:
[7] 115200 Baud [1] * Standard telegram 1 Enables use of freely configurable
3 3 8-33 Parity / Stop Bits
telegrams or standard telegrams for
the FC port.
Option: Function:
[100] None
[0] * Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit
[101] PPO 1
[1] Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit
[102] PPO 2
[2] No Parity, 1 Stop Bit
[103] PPO 3
[3] No Parity, 2 Stop Bits
[104] PPO 4
8-34 Estimated cycle time [105] PPO 5

Range: Function: [106] PPO 6

[107] PPO 7
0 ms* [0 - In noisy environments, the interface may
[108] PPO 8
1000000 ms] be blocked due to overload or bad frames.
This parameter specifies the time between [200] Custom telegram 1 Enables use of freely configurable
2 consecutive frames on the network. If the telegrams or standard telegrams for
interface does not detect valid frames in the FC port.
that time, it flushes the receive buffer. [202] Custom telegram 3

8-35 Minimum Response Delay 8-41 Parameters for Signals

Range: Function: Option: Function:
10 ms* [ 1 - 10000 Specify the minimum delay time [0] * None This parameter
ms] between receiving a request and contains a list of
transmitting a response. This is used for signals available for
overcoming modem turnaround delays. selection in
parameter 8-42 PCD
8-36 Max Response Delay Write Configuration
and
Range: Function:
parameter 8-43 PCD
Size [ 11 - Specify the maximum allowed delay
Read Configuration.
related* 10001 ms] time between transmitting a request
and receiving a response. If a response [15] Readout: actual setup
from the frequency converter is [302] Minimum Reference
exceeding the time setting, then it is [303] Maximum Reference
discarded. [312] Catch up/slow Down Value
[341] Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time
8-37 Max Inter-Char Delay [342] Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time
Range: Function: [351] Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time
Size [ 0.00 - Specify the maximum allowed time [352] Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time
related* 35.00 ms] interval between receipt of 2 bytes. This [380] Jog Ramp Time
parameter activates timeout if [381] Quick Stop Ramp Time
transmission is interrupted. [411] Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
This parameter is active only when [412] Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
parameter 8-30 Protocol is set to [1] FC MC [413] Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
protocol. [414] Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
[416] Torque Limit Motor Mode
[417] Torque Limit Generator Mode
[553] Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value
[558] Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value
[590] Digital & Relay Bus Control
[593] Pulse Out #27 Bus Control
[595] Pulse Out #29 Bus Control
[597] Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control

136 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

8-41 Parameters for Signals 8-41 Parameters for Signals

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[615] Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value [1653] Digi Pot Reference
[625] Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value [1657] Feedback [RPM]
[653] Term 42 Output Bus Ctrl [1660] Digital Input
[663]
[673]
Terminal X30/8 Bus Control
Terminal X45/1 Bus Control
[1661] Terminal 53 Switch Setting
[1662] Analog Input 53
3 3
[683] Terminal X45/3 Bus Control [1663] Terminal 54 Switch Setting
[748] PCD Feed Forward [1664] Analog Input 54
[890] Bus Jog 1 Speed [1665] Analog Output 42 [mA]
[891] Bus Jog 2 Speed [1666] Digital Output [bin]
[1472] Legacy Alarm Word [1667] Freq. Input #29 [Hz]
[1473] Legacy Warning Word [1668] Freq. Input #33 [Hz]
[1474] Leg. Ext. Status Word [1669] Pulse Output #27 [Hz]
[1500] Operating hours [1670] Pulse Output #29 [Hz]
[1501] Running Hours [1671] Relay Output [bin]
[1502] kWh Counter [1672] Counter A
[1600] Control Word [1673] Counter B
[1601] Reference [Unit] [1674] Prec. Stop Counter
[1602] Reference % [1675] Analog In X30/11
[1603] Status Word [1676] Analog In X30/12
[1605] Main Actual Value [%] [1677] Analog Out X30/8 [mA]
[1606] Actual Position [1678] Analog Out X45/1 [mA]
[1609] Custom Readout [1679] Analog Out X45/3 [mA]
[1610] Power [kW] [1680] Fieldbus CTW 1
[1611] Power [hp] [1682] Fieldbus REF 1
[1612] Motor Voltage [1684] Comm. Option STW
[1613] Frequency [1685] FC Port CTW 1
[1614] Motor current [1686] FC Port REF 1
[1615] Frequency [%] [1687] Bus Readout Alarm/Warning
[1616] Torque [Nm] [1689] Configurable Alarm/Warning Word
[1617] Speed [RPM] [1690] Alarm Word
[1618] Motor Thermal [1691] Alarm Word 2
[1619] Thermistor Sensor Temperature [1692] Warning Word
[1620] Motor Angle [1693] Warning Word 2
[1621] Torque [%] High Res. [1694] Ext. Status Word
[1622] Torque [%] [1827] Safe Opt. Est. Speed
[1623] Motor Shaft Power [kW] [1828] Safe Opt. Meas. Speed
[1624] Calibrated Stator Resistance [1829] Safe Opt. Speed Error
[1625] Torque [Nm] High [1836] Analog Input X48/2 [mA]
[1630] DC Link Voltage [1837] Temp. Input X48/4
[1632] Brake Energy /s [1838] Temp. Input X48/7
[1633] Brake Energy Average [1839] Temp. Input X48/10
[1634] Heatsink Temp. [1843] Analog Out X49/7
[1635] Inverter Thermal [1844] Analog Out X49/9
[1638] SL Controller State [1845] Analog Out X49/11
[1639] Control Card Temp. [1860] Digital Input 2
[1645] Motor Phase U Current [3310] Sync Factor Master
[1646] Motor Phase V Current [3311] Sync Factor Slave
[1647] Motor Phase W Current [3401] PCD 1 Write to MCO
[1648] Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM] [3402] PCD 2 Write to MCO
[1650] External Reference [3403] PCD 3 Write to MCO
[1651] Pulse Reference [3404] PCD 4 Write to MCO
[1652] Feedback[Unit] [3405] PCD 5 Write to MCO

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 137

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

8-41 Parameters for Signals 8-43 PCD Read Configuration

Option: Function: Range: Function:
[3406] PCD 6 Write to MCO Size [0 - Select the parameters to be assigned to
[3407] PCD 7 Write to MCO related* 9999] the PCDs of the telegrams. The number
[3408] PCD 8 Write to MCO of available PCDs depends on the

3 3 [3409] PCD 9 Write to MCO

[3410] PCD 10 Write to MCO
telegram type. PCDs contain the actual
data values of the selected parameters.
[3421] PCD 1 Read from MCO
[3422] PCD 2 Read from MCO
8-45 BTM Transaction Command
[3423] PCD 3 Read from MCO Option: Function:
[3424] PCD 4 Read from MCO NOTICE
[3425] PCD 5 Read from MCO This parameter cannot be
[3426] PCD 6 Read from MCO adjusted while the motor is
[3427] PCD 7 Read from MCO running.
[3428] PCD 8 Read from MCO
[3429] PCD 9 Read from MCO [0] * Off
[3430] PCD 10 Read from MCO [1] Start Transaction
[3440] Digital Inputs [2] Commit transaction
[3441] Digital Outputs [3] Clear error
[3450] Actual Position
[3451] Commanded Position 8-46 BTM Transaction Status
[3452] Actual Master Position Option: Function:
[3453] Slave Index Position [0] * Off
[3454] Master Index Position [1] Transaction Started
[3455] Curve Position [2] Transaction Comitting
[3456] Track Error [3] Transaction Timeout
[3457] Synchronizing Error [4] Err. Non-existing Par.
[3458] Actual Velocity [5] Err. Par. Out of Range
[3459] Actual Master Velocity [6] Transaction Failed
[3460] Synchronizing Status
8-47 BTM Timeout
[3461] Axis Status
[3462] Program Status Range: Function:
[3464] MCO 302 Status 60 s* [1 - 360 s] Select the BTM timeout after a BTM
[3465] MCO 302 Control transaction has been started.
[3466] SPI Error Counter
8-48 BTM Maximum Errors
[3470] MCO Alarm Word 1
[3471] MCO Alarm Word 2 Range: Function:
[3644] Terminal X49/7 Bus Control 21* [0 - 21] Selects the maximum allowed number of bulk
[3654] Terminal X49/9 Bus Control transfer mode errors before aborting. If it is set to
[3664] Terminal X49/11 Bus Control maximum, there is no abort.
[4280] Safe Option Status
[4282] Safe Control Word
8-49 BTM Error Log
[4283] Safe Status Word Range: Function:
[4285] Active Safe Func. 0.255* [0.000 - List of parameters that failed during
[4287] Time Until Manual Test 9999.255] bulk transfer mode. The value after the
decimal break is the fault code (255
8-42 PCD Write Configuration stands for no error).
Range: Function:
Size [0 - Select the parameters to be assigned to
related* 9999] the PCD's telegrams. The number of
available PCDs depends on the telegram
type. The values in the PCDs are then
written to the selected parameters as
data values.

138 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.9.5 8-5* Digital/Bus 8-53 Start Select

Select the trigger for the start function.
Parameters for configuring the control word merging.
Option: Function:
[0] Digital input A digital input triggers the start function.
NOTICE
3 3
[1] Bus A serial communication port or the fieldbus
These parameters are active only when
triggers the start function.
parameter 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Digital and control
word. [2] Logic AND The fieldbus/serial communication port and a
digital input trigger the start function.

8-50 Coasting Select [3] * Logic OR The fieldbus/serial communication port or a

Select the trigger for the coasting function. digital input triggers the start function.

Option: Function:
8-54 Reversing Select
[0] Digital input A digital input triggers the coasting function.
Select the trigger for the reversing function.
[1] Bus A serial communication port or the fieldbus
Option: Function:
triggers the coasting function.
[0] Digital input A digital input triggers the reversing function.
[2] Logic AND The fieldbus/serial communication port and a
[1] Bus A serial communication port or the fieldbus
digital input trigger the coasting function.
triggers the reversing function.
[3] * Logic OR The fieldbus/serial communication port or a
[2] Logic AND The fieldbus/serial communication port and a
digital input triggers the coasting function.
digital input trigger the reversing function.

8-51 Quick Stop Select [3] Logic OR The fieldbus/serial communication port or a
Select the trigger for the quick stop function. digital input triggers the reversing function.

Option: Function:
8-55 Set-up Select
[0] Digital input
Select the trigger for the set-up selection.
[1] Bus
[2] Logic AND
Option: Function:
[3] * Logic OR [0] Digital input A digital input triggers the set-up selection.

[1] Bus A serial communication port or the fieldbus

8-52 DC Brake Select
triggers the set-up selection.
Select control of the DC brake via the terminals (digital input)
and/or via the fieldbus. [2] Logic AND The fieldbus/serial communication port and a
digital input trigger the set-up selection.
Option: Function:
[3] * Logic OR The fieldbus/serial communication port or a
NOTICE digital input triggers the set-up selection.
When parameter 1-10 Motor Construction
is set to [1] PM non-salient SPM, only 8-56 Preset Reference Select
selection [0] Digital input is available.
Option: Function:
Select the trigger for the preset reference
[0] Digital input Activate a start command via a digital input.
selection.
[1] Bus Activate a start command via the serial
[0] Digital A digital input triggers the preset reference
communication port or fieldbus option.
input selection.
[2] Logic AND Activate a start command via the fieldbus/serial
[1] Bus A serial communication port or the fieldbus
communication port and also via 1 of the
triggers the preset reference selection.
digital inputs.
[2] Logic AND The fieldbus/serial communication port and a
[3] Logic OR Activate a start command via the fieldbus/serial
digital input trigger the preset reference
communication port or via 1 of the digital
selection.
inputs.
[3] * Logic OR The fieldbus/serial communication port or a
digital input triggers the preset reference
selection.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 139

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

8-57 Profidrive OFF2 Select 3.9.7 8-9* Bus Jog

Select control of the frequency converter OFF2 selection via the
terminals (digital input) and/or via the fieldbus. This parameter is 8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed
active only when parameter 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Digital Range: Function:
and ctrl. word and parameter 8-10 Control Word Profile is set to [1]
100 RPM* [ 0 - par. 4-13 Enter the jog speed. Activate this
3 3 PROFIdrive profile.
Option: Function:
RPM] fixed jog speed via the serial port
or fieldbus option.
[0] Digital input
[1] Bus 8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed
[2] Logic AND Range: Function:
[3] * Logic OR 200 RPM* [ 0 - par. 4-13 Enter the jog speed. Activate this
RPM] fixed jog speed via the serial port
8-58 Profidrive OFF3 Select
or fieldbus option.
Select control of the frequency converter OFF3 selection via the
terminals (digital input) and/or via the fieldbus. This parameter is
active only when parameter 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Digital
and ctrl. word, and parameter 8-10 Control Word Profile is set to [1]
PROFIdrive profile.
Option: Function:
[0] Digital input
[1] Bus
[2] Logic AND
[3] * Logic OR

3.9.6 8-8* FC Port Diagnostics

These parameters are used for monitoring the bus

communication via the frequency converter port.

8-80 Bus Message Count

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of valid
telegrams detected on the bus.

8-81 Bus Error Count

Array [6]
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of telegrams
with faults (for example CRC fault) detected on the
bus.

8-82 Slave Messages Rcvd

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of valid
telegrams addressed to the slave sent by the
frequency converter.

8-83 Slave Error Count

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of error
telegrams, which are not executed by the
frequency converter.

140 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.10 Parameters: 9-** PROFIBUS

For PROFIBUS parameter descriptions, see the VLT®
PROFIBUS DP MCA 101 Programming Guide.

3.11 Parameters: 10-** DeviceNet CAN

Fieldbus 3 3
For DeviceNet parameter descriptions, see the DeviceNet
Operating Instructions.

3.12 Parameters: 12-** Ethernet

For Ethernet parameter descriptions, see the VLT®
EtherNet/IP MCA 121 Operating Instructions.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 141

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3.13 Parameters: 13-** Smart Logic Control Start

130BA062.14
event P13-01

Smart logic control (SLC) is a sequence of user-defined State 1

13-51.0
actions (see parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action) executed 13-52.0 State 2
Stop 13-51.1
by the SLC when the associated user-defined event (see event P13-02 13-52.1
parameter 13-51 SL Controller Event) is evaluated as true by
3 3
Stop
event P13-02
the SLC. State 4
13-51.3
The condition for an event can be a particular status, or 13-52.3
that the output from a logic rule or a comparator operand State 3
13-51.2
becomes true. That leads to an associated action as 13-52.2

illustrated:
Stop
event P13-02

Par. 13-51 Par. 13-52 Illustration 3.52 Events and Actions

130BB671.13
SL Controller Event SL Controller Action

Running Coast Starting and stopping the SLC

Warning Start timer
Torque limit Set Do X low
Start and stop the SLC by selecting [1] On or [0] Off in
Digital input X 30/2 Select set-up 2 parameter 13-00 SL Controller Mode. The SLC always starts
... ...
in state 0 (where it evaluates event [0]). The SLC starts
Par. 13-43
when the Start Event (defined in parameter 13-01 Start
Logic Rule Operator 2 Event) is evaluated as true (provided that [1] On is selected
in parameter 13-00 SL Controller Mode). The SLC stops when
the stop event (parameter 13-02 Stop Event) is true.
Parameter 13-03 Reset SLC resets all SLC parameters and
...
starts programming from scratch.
...

Par. 13-11
NOTICE
Comparator Operator SLC is only active in auto-on mode, not hand-on mode.

=
TRUE longer than.. 3.13.1 13-0* SLC Settings
...
... Use the SLC settings to activate, deactivate, and reset the
smart logic control sequence. The logic functions and
comparators are always running in the background, which
Illustration 3.51 Smart Logic Control (SLC)
opens for separate control of digital inputs and outputs.

13-00 SL Controller Mode

Events and actions are each numbered and linked in pairs Option: Function:
(states). This means that when the first event is fulfilled [0] Off Disables the smart logic controller.
(becomes true), the first action is executed. After this, the
[1] On Enables the smart logic controller.
conditions of the 2nd event are evaluated and if evaluated
true, the 2nd action is executed, and so on. Only 1 event is
13-01 Start Event
evaluated at any time. If an event is evaluated as false,
nothing happens (in the SLC) during the current scan Select the boolean (true or false) input to activate smart logic
interval and no other events are evaluated. This means control.
that when the SLC starts, it evaluates the first event (and Option: Function:
only the first event) in each scan interval. Only when the [0] False Select the boolean (true or false) input
first event is evaluated true, the SLC executes the first to activate smart logic control.
action and starts evaluating the 2nd event. It is possible to Enters the fixed value - false.
program 1–20 events and actions.
[1] True Enters the fixed value - true.
When the last event/action has been executed, the
sequence starts over again from the first event/action. [2] Running The motor runs.
Illustration 3.52 shows an example with 3 events/actions: [3] In range The motor runs within the programmed
current and speed ranges set in
parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low to
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High.

142 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

13-01 Start Event 13-01 Start Event

Select the boolean (true or false) input to activate smart logic Select the boolean (true or false) input to activate smart logic
control. control.
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[4] On reference The motor runs on reference. [24] Comparator 2 Use the result of comparator 2.

[5] Torque limit The torque limit set in [25] Comparator 3 Use the result of comparator 3. 3 3
parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode
[26] Logic rule 0 Use the result of logic rule 0.
or parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator
Mode is exceeded. [27] Logic rule 1 Use the result of logic rule 1.

[6] Current Limit The motor current limit set in [28] Logic rule 2 Use the result of logic rule 2.
parameter 4-18 Current Limit is exceeded. [29] Logic rule 3 Use the result of logic rule 3.
[7] Out of current The motor current is outside the range [33] Digital input Use the result of digital input 18.
range set in parameter 4-18 Current Limit. DI18
[8] Below I low The motor current is lower than set in [34] Digital input Use the result of digital input 19.
parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low. DI19
[35] Digital input Use the result of digital input 27.
[9] Above I high The motor current is higher than set in
DI27
parameter 4-51 Warning Current High.
[36] Digital input Use the result of digital input 29.
[10] Out of speed The speed is outside the range set in DI29
range parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low and [37] Digital input Use the result of digital input 32.
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High. DI32
[11] Below speed The output speed is lower than the [38] Digital input Use the result of digital input 33.
low setting in parameter 4-52 Warning Speed DI33
Low. [39] Start command A start command is issued.

[12] Above speed The output speed is higher than the [40] Drive stopped A stop command (jog, stop, quick stop,
high setting in parameter 4-53 Warning Speed coast) is issued – and not from the SLC
High. itself.

[13] Out of feedb. The feedback is outside the range set in [41] Reset Trip A reset is issued.
range parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low
[42] Auto-reset Trip An auto reset is performed.
and parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback
High. [43] Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on the
graphical LCP.
[14] Below feedb. The feedback is below the limit set in
low parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low. [44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available on the
graphical LCP.
[15] Above feedb. The feedback is above the limit set in
high parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High. [45] Left key [◄] is pressed. Only available on the
graphical LCP.
[16] Thermal The thermal warning turns on when the
warning temperature exceeds the limit in the [46] Right key [►] is pressed. Only available on the
motor, the frequency converter, the graphical LCP.
brake resistor, or the thermistor. [47] Up key [▲] is pressed. Only available on the
[17] Mains out of The mains voltage is outside the graphical LCP.
range specified voltage range. [48] Down key [▼] is pressed. Only available on the
[18] Reversing The output is high when the frequency graphical LCP.
converter is running counterclockwise
[50] Comparator 4 Use the result of comparator 4.
(the logical product of the status bits
“running” AND “reverse”). [51] Comparator 5 Use the result of comparator 5.

[19] Warning A warning is active. [60] Logic rule 4 Use the result of logic rule 4.

[20] Alarm (trip) A (trip) alarm is active. [61] Logic rule 5 Use the result of logic rule 5.

[21] Alarm (trip lock) A (trip lock) alarm is active. [76] Digital input Use the value of x30/2 (VLT® General
x30/2 Purpose I/O MCB 101).
[22] Comparator 0 Use the result of comparator 0.

[23] Comparator 1 Use the result of comparator 1.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 143

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

13-01 Start Event 13-02 Stop Event

Select the boolean (true or false) input to activate smart logic Select the boolean (true or false) input to deactivate smart logic
control. control.
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[77] Digital input Use the value of x30/3 (VLT® General [11] Below speed low
3 3 x30/3 Purpose I/O MCB 101). [12] Above speed high
[13] Out of feedb. range
[78] Digital input Use the value of x30/4 (VLT® General
x30/4 [14] Below feedb. low
Purpose I/O MCB 101).
[15] Above feedb. high
[79] Digital input Use the value of x46/1 (VLT® Extended [16] Thermal warning
x46/1 Relay Card MCB 113).
[17] Mains out of range
[80] Digital input Use the value of x46/3 (VLT® Extended [18] Reversing
x46/3 Relay Card MCB 113). [19] Warning
[20] Alarm (trip)
[81] Digital input Use the value of x46/5 (VLT® Extended
x46/5 [21] Alarm (trip lock)
Relay Card MCB 113).
[22] Comparator 0
[82] Digital input Use the value of x46/7 (VLT® Extended [23] Comparator 1
x46/7 Relay Card MCB 113).
[24] Comparator 2
[83] Digital input Use the value of x46/9 (VLT® Extended [25] Comparator 3
x46/9 Relay Card MCB 113). [26] Logic rule 0
[27] Logic rule 1
[84] Digital input Use the value of x46/11 (VLT® Extended
x46/11 [28] Logic rule 2
Relay Card MCB 113).
[29] Logic rule 3
[85] Digital input Use the value of x46/13 (VLT® Extended [30] SL Time-out 0
x46/13 Relay Card MCB 113).
[31] SL Time-out 1
[94] RS Flipflop 0 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. [32] SL Time-out 2

[95] RS Flipflop 1 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. [33] Digital input DI18
[34] Digital input DI19
[96] RS Flipflop 2 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators.
[35] Digital input DI27
[97] RS Flipflop 3 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. [36] Digital input DI29
[98] RS Flipflop 4 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. [37] Digital input DI32
[38] Digital input DI33
[99] RS Flipflop 5 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators.
[39] Start command
[100] RS Flipflop 6 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. [40] Drive stopped
[101] RS Flipflop 7 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. [41] Reset Trip
[42] Auto-reset Trip
13-02 Stop Event [43] Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on
Select the boolean (true or false) input to deactivate smart logic the graphical LCP.
control. [44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available
Option: Function: on the graphical LCP.
[0] False For descriptions of options [0] [45] Left key [◄] is pressed. Only available on
False–[61] Logic rule 5, see the graphical LCP.
parameter 13-01 Start Event.
[46] Right key [►] is pressed. Only available on
[1] True the graphical LCP.
[2] Running
[47] Up key [▲] is pressed. Only available on
[3] In range
the graphical LCP.
[4] On reference
[5] Torque limit [48] Down key [▼] is pressed. Only available on
[6] Current Limit the graphical LCP.
[7] Out of current range [50] Comparator 4
[8] Below I low [51] Comparator 5
[9] Above I high [60] Logic rule 4
[10] Out of speed range [61] Logic rule 5

144 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

13-02 Stop Event 13-02 Stop Event

Select the boolean (true or false) input to deactivate smart logic Select the boolean (true or false) input to deactivate smart logic
control. control.
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[70] SL Time-out 3 Smart logic controller timer 3 is [96] RS Flipflop 2 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1*
timed out. Comparators. 3 3
[71] SL Time-out 4 Smart logic controller timer 4 is [97] RS Flipflop 3 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1*
timed out. Comparators.

[72] SL Time-out 5 Smart logic controller timer 5 is [98] RS Flipflop 4 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1*
timed out. Comparators.

[73] SL Time-out 6 Smart logic controller timer 6 is [99] RS Flipflop 5 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1*
timed out. Comparators.

[74] SL Time-out 7 Smart logic controller timer 7 is [100] RS Flipflop 6 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1*
timed out. Comparators.

[75] Start command given [101] RS Flipflop 7 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1*
[76] Digital input x30/2 Comparators.
[77] Digital input x30/3 [102] Relay 1
[78] Digital input x30/4 [103] Relay 2
[79] Digital input x46/1 [104] Relay 3 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
[80] Digital input x46/3 113.
[81] Digital input x46/5
[105] Relay 4 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
[82] Digital input x46/7
113.
[83] Digital input x46/9
[84] Digital input x46/11 [106] Relay 5 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
[85] Digital input x46/13 113.
[90] ATEX ETR cur. Available, if parameter 1-90 Motor [107] Relay 6 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
warning Thermal Protection is set to [20]
113.
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
the alarm 164, ATEX ETR [108] Relay 7 X34/VLT® Relay Card MCB 105.
cur.lim.alarm is active, the output is [109] Relay 8 X34/VLT® Relay Card MCB 105.
1.
[110] Relay 9 X34/VLT® Relay Card MCB 105.
[91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm Available, if parameter 1-90 Motor
Thermal Protection is set to [20]
13-03 Reset SLC
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
Option: Function:
alarm 166, ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm
is active, the output is 1. [0] * Do not reset Retain programmed settings in parameter
SLC group 13-** Smart Logic.
[92] ATEX ETR freq. Available, if parameter 1-90 Motor
warning Thermal Protection is set to [20] [1] Reset SLC Reset all parameters in parameter group 13-
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If ** Smart Logic to default settings.
alarm 163, ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning
is active, the output is 1.
3.13.2 13-1* Comparators
[93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm Available, if parameter 1-90 Motor
Thermal Protection is set to [20] Comparators are used for comparing continuous variables
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If (that is output frequency, output current, analog input, and
warning 165, ATEX ETR so on) to fixed preset values.
freq.lim.warning is active, the
output is 1.

[94] RS Flipflop 0 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1*

Comparators.

[95] RS Flipflop 1 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1*

Comparators.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 145

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

Par. 13-11 13-10 Comparator Operand

130BB672.10
Comparator Operator
Par. 13-10 Option: Function:
Comparator Operand
[17] Analog input Value is in [°]. AICCT is control card
=
AICCT temperature.
Par. 13-12 TRUE longer than.
Comparator Value ... [18] Pulse input FI29 Value is in percent.
3 3 ...
[19] Pulse input FI33 Value is in percent.
Illustration 3.53 Comparators [20] Alarm number The number of registered alarms.

[21] Warning
number
There are digital values that are compared to fixed time
[22] Analog input
values. See the explanation in parameter 13-10 Comparator
x30 11
Operand. Comparators are evaluated once in each scan
[23] Analog input
interval. Use the result (true or false) directly. All
x30 12
parameters in this parameter group are array parameters
[30] Counter A
with index 0–5. Select index 0 to program comparator 0,
select index 1 to program comparator 1, and so on. [31] Counter B
[34] Analog Input
13-10 Comparator Operand x48/2
Option: Function: [35] Temp Input
Options [1] Reference % to [31] Counter B x48/4
are variables which are compared based [36] Temp Input
on their values. Options [50] FALSE to x48/7
[186] Drive in auto mode are digital values [37] Temp Input
(true/false) where the comparison is x48/10
based on the amount of time during [38] Actual Position
which they are set to true or false. See [50] FALSE Use to enter the fixed value of false in
parameter 13-11 Comparator Operator. the comparator.
Select the variable to be monitored by
[51] TRUE Use to enter the fixed value of true in
the comparator.
the comparator.
[0] DISABLED The comparator is disabled.
[52] Control ready The control board receives supply
[1] Reference % The resulting remote reference in voltage.
percent.
[53] Drive ready The frequency converter is ready for
[2] Feedback % [RPM] or [Hz], as set in operation and applies a signal on the
parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit. control board.
[3] Motor speed [RPM] or [Hz], as set in [54] Running The motor runs.
parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit.
[55] Reversing The output is active when the frequency
[4] Motor Current converter runs counterclockwise (the
[5] Motor torque logical product of the status bits running
[6] Motor power AND reverse).
[7] Motor voltage
[56] In range The motor runs within the programmed
[8] DC-link voltage
current and speed ranges set in
[9] Motor Thermal Value is in percent. parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low to
[10] Drive thermal Value is in percent. parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High.

[11] Heat sink temp. Value is in percent. [60] On reference The motor runs on reference.

[12] Analog input Value is in percent. [61] Below The motor runs at a reference which is
AI53 reference, low less than the value in
[13] Analog input Value is in percent. parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low.
AI54 [62] Above ref, high The motor runs at a reference which
[14] Analog input AIFB10 is internal 10 V supply. exceeds the value in
AIFB10 parameter 4-55 Warning Reference High.
[15] Analog input AIS24V is a 24 V switch mode power
[65] Torque limit The torque exceeds the value in
AIS24V supply.
parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode

146 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

13-10 Comparator Operand 13-10 Comparator Operand

Option: Function: Option: Function:
or parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator [93] Mech. brake The mechanical brake is active.
Mode. control

[66] Current Limit The motor current exceeds the value in [94] Safe stop active
parameter 4-18 Current Limit. [100] Comparator 0 The result of comparator 0.
3 3
[67] Out of current The motor current is outside the range [101] Comparator 1 The result of comparator 1.
range set in parameter 4-18 Current Limit. [102] Comparator 2 The result of comparator 2.
[68] Below I low The motor current is lower than the [103] Comparator 3 The result of comparator 3.
value in parameter 4-50 Warning Current
[104] Comparator 4 The result of comparator 4.
Low.
[105] Comparator 5 The result of comparator 5.
[69] Above I high The motor current is higher than the
value in parameter 4-51 Warning Current [110] Logic rule 0 The result of logic rule 0.
High. [111] Logic rule 1 The result of logic rule 1.
[70] Out of speed The speed is outside the range set in [112] Logic rule 2 The result of logic rule 2.
range parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low and
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High. [113] Logic rule 3 The result of logic rule 3.

[71] Below speed The output speed is lower than the value [114] Logic rule 4 The result of logic rule 4.
low in parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low. [115] Logic rule 5 The result of logic rule 5.
[72] Above speed The output speed is higher than the [120] SL Time-out 0 The result of SLC timer 0.
high value in parameter 4-53 Warning Speed
[121] SL Time-out 1 The result of SLC timer 1.
High.
[122] SL Time-out 2 The result of SLC timer 2.
[75] Out of feedback The feedback is outside the range set in
range parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low [123] SL Time-out 3 The result of SLC timer 3.
and parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback [124] SL Time-out 4 The result of SLC timer 4.
High.
[125] SL Time-out 5 The result of SLC timer 5.
[76] Below feedback The feedback is lower than the limit set
low in parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low. [126] SL Time-out 6 The result of SLC timer 6.

[77] Above feedback The feedback exceeds the limit set in [127] SL Time-out 7 The result of SLC timer 7.
high parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High. [130] Digital input Digital input 18 (high=true).
[80] Thermal This operand becomes true when the DI18
warning frequency converter detects any thermal [131] Digital input Digital input 19 (high=true).
warning, for instance when the DI19
temperature exceeds the limit in the [132] Digital input Digital input 27 (high=true).
motor, the frequency converter, the brake DI27
resistor, or thermistor. [133] Digital input Digital input 29 (high=true).
DI29
[82] Mains out of The mains voltage is outside the
[134] Digital input Digital input 32 (high=true).
range specified voltage range.
DI32
[85] Warning If a warning is triggered, this operand [135] Digital input Digital input 33 (high=true).
gets the warning number. DI33
[86] Alarm (trip) A trip alarm is active. [150] SL digital Use the result of the SLC output A.
output A
[87] Alarm (trip lock) A trip lock alarm is active.
[151] SL digital Use the result of the SLC output B.
[90] Bus OK Active communication (no timeout) via output B
the serial communication port. [152] SL digital Use the result of the SLC output C.
[91] Torque limit & If the frequency converter has received a output C
stop stop signal and is at the torque limit, the [153] SL digital Use the result of the SLC output D.
signal is logic 0. output D
[154] SL digital Use the result of the SLC output E.
[92] Brake fault The brake IGBT is short-circuited.
output E
(IGBT)

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 147

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

13-10 Comparator Operand 13-10 Comparator Operand

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[155] SL digital Use the result of the SLC output F. [222] Homing Ok This option is available only with
output F software version 48.20 and newer.
[160] Relay 1 Relay 1 is active. Homing is completed with the selected

3 3 [161] Relay 2 Relay 2 is active.

homing function
(parameter 17-80 Homing Function).
[162] Relay 3
[223] On Target This option is available only with
[163] Relay 4
software version 48.20 and newer.
[164] Relay 5
Positioning is completed and the on
[165] Relay 6
target signal is sent when the actual
[166] Relay 7 position is within parameter 3-05 On
[167] Relay 8 Reference Window for the duration of
[168] Relay 9 parameter 3-09 On Target Time and the
[180] Local referecnce Active when parameter 3-13 Reference Site actual speed does not exceed
active is [2] Local or when parameter 3-05 On Reference Window.
parameter 3-13 Reference Site is [0] Linked
[224] Position Error This option is available only with
to hand/auto, at the same time as the
software version 48.20 and newer.
LCP is in hand on mode.
The position error exceeds the value in
[181] Remote Active when parameter 3-13 Reference Site parameter 4-71 Maximum Position Error for
reference active is [1] Remote or [0] Linked to hand/auto, the time set in parameter 4-72 Position
while the LCP is in auto on mode. Error Timeout.
[182] Start command Active when there is an active start [225] Position Limit This option is available only with
command and no stop command. software version 48.20 and newer.
[183] Drive stopped A stop command (jog, stop, qstop, coast) The position is outside the limits set in
is issued – and not from the SLC itself. parameter 3-06 Minimum Position and
parameter 3-07 Maximum Position.
[185] Drive in hand Active when the frequency converter is
mode in hand on mode. [226] Touch on This option is available only with
Target software version 48.20 and newer.
[186] Drive in auto Active when the frequency converter is
Target position is reached in touch probe
mode in auto mode.
position mode.
[187] Start command
[227] Touch Activated This option is available only with
given
software version 48.20 and newer.
[190] Digital input Touch probe positioning active. The
x30/2 frequency converter monitors the touch
[191] Digital input probe sensor input.
x30/3
[192] Digital input 13-11 Comparator Operator
x30/4
Option: Function:
[193] Digital input
Select the operator to be used in the
x46/1
comparison. This is an array parameter containing
[194] Digital input
comparator operators 0–5.
x46/3
[195] Digital input [0] < The result of the evaluation is true when the
x46/5 variable selected in parameter 13-10 Comparator
[196] Digital input Operand is smaller than the fixed value in
x46/7 parameter 13-12 Comparator Value. The result is
false if the variable selected in
[197] Digital input
parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand is greater
x46/9
than the fixed value in
[198] Digital input
parameter 13-12 Comparator Value.
x46/11
[199] Digital input [1] ≈ (equal) The result of the evaluation is true when the
x46/13 variable selected in parameter 13-10 Comparator
Operand is approximately equal to the fixed value
in parameter 13-12 Comparator Value.

148 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

13-11 Comparator Operator set up the same digital input (for example, DI32) as start/
Option: Function: stop.

[2] > Inverse logic of option [0] <.

Parameter Setting Notes
[5] TRUE Parameter 13-00 SL Controller
longer On –
than..
Mode
Parameter 13-01 Start Event True – 3 3
[6] FALSE
Parameter 13-02 Stop Event False –
longer
than.. Parameter 13-40 Logic Rule [37] Digital
–
[7] TRUE Boolean 1 [0] Input DI32
shorter Parameter 13-42 Logic Rule
[2] Running –
than.. Boolean 2 [0]
[8] FALSE Parameter 13-41 Logic Rule [3] AND
–
shorter Operator 1 [0] NOT
than..
Parameter 13-40 Logic Rule [37] Digital
–
13-12 Comparator Value Boolean 1 [1] Input DI32
Array [6] Parameter 13-42 Logic Rule
[2] Running –
Range: Function: Boolean 2 [1]
Parameter 13-41 Logic Rule
Size [-100000 - Enter the trigger level for the [1] AND –
Operator 1 [1]
related* 100000 ] variable that is monitored by this
comparator. This is an array
Output from
parameter containing comparator
Parameter 13-15 RS-FF Operand [26] Logic parameter 13-41 Log
values 0–5.
S [0] rule 0 ic Rule Operator 1
[0].
3.13.3 RS Flip Flops Output from
Parameter 13-16 RS-FF Operand [27] Logic parameter 13-41 Log
R [0] rule 1 ic Rule Operator 1
The reset/set flip flops hold the signal until set/reset.
[1].

Output from
130BB959.10

Par. 13-15 parameter 13-15 RS-

RS-FF Operand S Parameter 13-51 SL Controller [94] RS
FF Operand S and
Par. 13-16 Event [0] Flipflop 0
RS-FF Operand R parameter 13-16 RS-
FF Operand R.
Parameter 13-52 SL Controller
Illustration 3.54 Reset/Set Flip Flops [22] Run –
Action [0]

Parameter 13-51 SL Controller [27] Logic

–
2 parameters are used, and the output can be used in the Event [1] rule 1
logic rules and as events. Parameter 13-52 SL Controller
[24] Stop –
Action [1]
130BB960.10

S Table 3.26 Operators

R
13-15 RS-FF Operand S
Flip Flop Output Option: Function:
Illustration 3.55 Flip Flop Outputs [0] False
[1] True
[2] Running
The 2 operators can be selected from a long list. As a [3] In range
special case, the same digital input can be used as both [4] On reference
Set and Reset, making it possible to use the same digital [5] Torque limit
input as start/stop. The following settings can be used to [6] Current Limit
[7] Out of current range
[8] Below I low

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 149

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

13-15 RS-FF Operand S 13-15 RS-FF Operand S

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[9] Above I high [70] SL Time-out 3
[10] Out of speed range [71] SL Time-out 4
[11] Below speed low [72] SL Time-out 5

3 3 [12]
[13]
Above speed high
Out of feedb. range
[73]
[74]
SL Time-out 6
SL Time-out 7
[14] Below feedb. low [75] Start command
[15] Above feedb. high given
[16] Thermal warning [76] Digital input x30/2
[17] Mains out of range [77] Digital input x30/3
[18] Reversing [78] Digital input x30/4
[19] Warning [79] Digital input x46/1
[20] Alarm (trip) [80] Digital input x46/3
[21] Alarm (trip lock) [81] Digital input x46/5
[22] Comparator 0 [82] Digital input x46/7
[23] Comparator 1 [83] Digital input x46/9
[24] Comparator 2 [84] Digital input x46/11
[25] Comparator 3 [85] Digital input x46/13
[26] Logic rule 0 [90] ATEX ETR cur.
[27] Logic rule 1 warning
[28] Logic rule 2 [91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm
[29] Logic rule 3 [92] ATEX ETR freq.
[30] SL Time-out 0 warning
[31] SL Time-out 1 [93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm
[32] SL Time-out 2 [94] RS Flipflop 0
[33] Digital input DI18 [95] RS Flipflop 1
[34] Digital input DI19 [96] RS Flipflop 2
[35] Digital input DI27 [97] RS Flipflop 3
[36] Digital input DI29 [98] RS Flipflop 4
[37] Digital input DI32 [99] RS Flipflop 5
[38] Digital input DI33 [100] RS Flipflop 6
[39] Start command [101] RS Flipflop 7
[40] Drive stopped [102] Relay 1
[41] Reset Trip [103] Relay 2
[42] Auto-reset Trip [104] Relay 3 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
[43] Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on 113.
the graphical LCP. [105] Relay 4 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
[44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available on 113.
the graphical LCP. [106] Relay 5 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
[45] Left key [◄] is pressed. Only available on the 113.
graphical LCP.
[107] Relay 6 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
[46] Right key [►] is pressed. Only available on the 113.
graphical LCP.
[108] Relay 7 X34/VLT® Relay Card MCB 105.
[47] Up key [▲] is pressed. Only available on the
[109] Relay 8 X34/VLT® Relay Card MCB 105.
graphical LCP.
[110] Relay 9 X34/VLT® Relay Card MCB 105.
[48] Down key [▼] is pressed. Only available on the
graphical LCP. [222] Homing Ok This option is available only with
software version 48.20 and newer.
[50] Comparator 4
Homing is completed with the
[51] Comparator 5 selected homing function
[60] Logic rule 4 (parameter 17-80 Homing Function).
[61] Logic rule 5

150 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

13-15 RS-FF Operand S 13-16 RS-FF Operand R

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[223] On Target This option is available only with [17] Mains out of range
software version 48.20 and newer. [18] Reversing
Positioning is completed and the on [19] Warning
target signal is sent when the actual
position is within parameter 3-05 On
[20]
[21]
Alarm (trip)
Alarm (trip lock)
3 3
Reference Window for the duration [22] Comparator 0
of parameter 3-09 On Target Time
[23] Comparator 1
and the actual speed does not
[24] Comparator 2
exceed parameter 3-05 On Reference
[25] Comparator 3
Window.
[26] Logic rule 0
[224] Position Error This option is available only with [27] Logic rule 1
software version 48.20 and newer. [28] Logic rule 2
The position error exceeds the value [29] Logic rule 3
in parameter 4-71 Maximum Position
[30] SL Time-out 0
Error for the time set in
[31] SL Time-out 1
parameter 4-72 Position Error
[32] SL Time-out 2
Timeout.
[33] Digital input DI18
[225] Position Limit This option is available only with [34] Digital input DI19
software version 48.20 and newer. [35] Digital input DI27
The position is outside the limits set
[36] Digital input DI29
in parameter 3-06 Minimum Position
[37] Digital input DI32
and parameter 3-07 Maximum
[38] Digital input DI33
Position.
[39] Start command
[226] Touch on Target This option is available only with [40] Drive stopped
software version 48.20 and newer. [41] Reset Trip
Target position is reached in touch [42] Auto-reset Trip
probe position mode.
[43] Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on
[227] Touch Activated This option is available only with the graphical LCP.
software version 48.20 and newer.
[44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available on
Touch probe positioning active. The
the graphical LCP.
frequency converter monitors the
touch probe sensor input. [45] Left key [◄] is pressed. Only available on the
graphical LCP.
13-16 RS-FF Operand R [46] Right key [►] is pressed. Only available on the
Option: Function: graphical LCP.
[0] False [47] Up key [▲] is pressed. Only available on the
[1] True graphical LCP.
[2] Running
[48] Down key [▼] is pressed. Only available on the
[3] In range
graphical LCP.
[4] On reference
[5] Torque limit [50] Comparator 4
[6] Current Limit [51] Comparator 5
[7] Out of current range [60] Logic rule 4
[8] Below I low [61] Logic rule 5
[9] Above I high [70] SL Time-out 3
[10] Out of speed range [71] SL Time-out 4
[11] Below speed low [72] SL Time-out 5
[12] Above speed high [73] SL Time-out 6
[13] Out of feedb. range [74] SL Time-out 7
[14] Below feedb. low [75] Start command
[15] Above feedb. high given
[16] Thermal warning [76] Digital input x30/2

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 151

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

13-16 RS-FF Operand R 13-16 RS-FF Operand R

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[77] Digital input x30/3 exceed parameter 3-05 On Reference
[78] Digital input x30/4 Window.
[79] Digital input x46/1 [224] Position Error This option is available only with
3 3 [80]
[81]
Digital input x46/3
Digital input x46/5
software version 48.20 and newer.
The position error exceeds the value
[82] Digital input x46/7 in parameter 4-71 Maximum Position
[83] Digital input x46/9 Error for the time set in
[84] Digital input x46/11 parameter 4-72 Position Error
[85] Digital input x46/13 Timeout.
[90] ATEX ETR cur. [225] Position Limit This option is available only with
warning software version 48.20 and newer.
[91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm The position is outside the limits set
[92] ATEX ETR freq. in parameter 3-06 Minimum Position
warning and parameter 3-07 Maximum
[93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm Position.
[94] RS Flipflop 0
[226] Touch on Target This option is available only with
[95] RS Flipflop 1 software version 48.20 and newer.
[96] RS Flipflop 2 Target position is reached in touch
[97] RS Flipflop 3 probe position mode.
[98] RS Flipflop 4
[227] Touch Activated This option is available only with
[99] RS Flipflop 5
software version 48.20 and newer.
[100] RS Flipflop 6
Touch probe positioning active. The
[101] RS Flipflop 7
frequency converter monitors the
[102] Relay 1 touch probe sensor input.
[103] Relay 2
[104] Relay 3 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
113. 3.13.4 13-2* Timers
[105] Relay 4 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
Use the result (true or false) from timers directly to define
113.
an event (see parameter 13-51 SL Controller Event), or as
[106] Relay 5 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB boolean input in a logic rule (see parameter 13-40 Logic
113. Rule Boolean 1, parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2, or
parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3). A timer is only false
[107] Relay 6 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
when started by an action (for example [29] Start timer 1)
113.
until the timer value entered in this parameter has elapsed.
[108] Relay 7 X34/VLT® Relay Card MCB 105. Then it becomes true again.
All parameters in this parameter group are array
[109] Relay 8 X34/VLT® Relay Card MCB 105.
parameters with index 0–2. Select index 0 to program
[110] Relay 9 X34/VLT® Relay Card MCB 105. timer 0, select index 1 to program timer 1, and so on.
[222] Homing Ok This option is available only with 13-20 SL Controller Timer
software version 48.20 and newer.
Range: Function:
Homing is completed with the
Size [0 - Enter the value to define the duration of the
selected homing function
related* 0] false output from the programmed timer. A
(parameter 17-80 Homing Function).
timer is only false if it is started by an
[223] On Target This option is available only with action (that is [29] Start timer 1) and until
software version 48.20 and newer. the given timer value has elapsed.
Positioning is completed and the on
target signal is sent when the actual
position is within parameter 3-05 On
Reference Window for the duration
of parameter 3-09 On Target Time
and the actual speed does not

152 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.13.5 13-4* Logic Rules 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1

Option: Function:
Combine up to 3 boolean inputs (true/false inputs) from [15] Above feedb. high
timers, comparators, digital inputs, status bits, and events
[16] Thermal warning
using the logical operators AND, OR, and NOT. Select
[17] Mains out of
boolean inputs for the calculation in parameter 13-40 Logic
Rule Boolean 1, parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2, and
[18]
range
Reversing
3 3
parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3. Define the operators
[19] Warning
used to logically combine the selected inputs in
[20] Alarm (trip)
parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 and
parameter 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2. [21] Alarm (trip lock)
[22] Comparator 0
[23] Comparator 1
Par. 13-41 Par. 13-43

130BB673.10
Logic Rule Operator 1 Logic Rule Operator 2 [24] Comparator 2
Par. 13-40
Logic Rule Boolean 1 [25] Comparator 3
Par. 13-42 [26] Logic rule 0
Logic Rule Boolean 2 ...
... [27] Logic rule 1
...
... [28] Logic rule 2
Par. 13-44 [29] Logic rule 3
Logic Rule Boolean 3 [30] SL Time-out 0
Illustration 3.56 Logic Rules [31] SL Time-out 1
[32] SL Time-out 2
[33] Digital input DI18
Priority of calculation [34] Digital input DI19
The results of parameter 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1, [35] Digital input DI27
parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1, and [36] Digital input DI29
parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 are calculated first. [37] Digital input DI32
The outcome (true/false) of this calculation is combined
[38] Digital input DI33
with the settings of parameter 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2
[39] Start command
and parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3, yielding the final
[40] Drive stopped
result (true/false) of the logic rule.
[41] Reset Trip
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 [42] Auto-reset Trip
Option: Function: [43] Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on the
[0] False Select the first boolean (true or false) graphical LCP.
input for the selected logic rule. [44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available on
See parameter 13-01 Start Event and the graphical LCP.
parameter 13-02 Stop Event for more
[45] Left key [◄] is pressed. Only available on the
information.
graphical LCP.
[1] True
[46] Right key [►] is pressed. Only available on the
[2] Running
graphical LCP.
[3] In range
[4] On reference [47] Up key [▲] is pressed. Only available on the
[5] Torque limit graphical LCP.
[6] Current Limit [48] Down key [▼] is pressed. Only available on the
[7] Out of current
graphical LCP.
range
[8] Below I low [50] Comparator 4

[9] Above I high [51] Comparator 5

[10] Out of speed [60] Logic rule 4

range [61] Logic rule 5
[11] Below speed low [70] SL Time-out 3
[12] Above speed high [71] SL Time-out 4
[13] Out of feedb. [72] SL Time-out 5
range [73] SL Time-out 6
[14] Below feedb. low [74] SL Time-out 7

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 153

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[75] Start command [106] Relay 5 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
given 113.
[76] Digital input x30/2
[107] Relay 6 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
3 3 [77]
[78]
Digital input x30/3
Digital input x30/4
113.

[79] Digital input x46/1 [108] Relay 7 X34/VLT® Relay Card MCB 105.
[80] Digital input x46/3 [109] Relay 8 X34/VLT® Relay Card MCB 105.
[81] Digital input x46/5
[110] Relay 9 X34/VLT® Relay Card MCB 105.
[82] Digital input x46/7
[83] Digital input x46/9 [222] Homing Ok This option is available only with
[84] Digital input software version 48.20 and newer.
x46/11 Homing is completed with the
[85] Digital input selected homing function
x46/13 (parameter 17-80 Homing Function).
[90] ATEX ETR cur. Available, if parameter 1-90 Motor [223] On Target This option is available only with
warning Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX software version 48.20 and newer.
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If alarm 164, Positioning is completed and the on
ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm is active, the target signal is sent when the actual
output is 1. position is within parameter 3-05 On
[91] ATEX ETR cur. Available, if parameter 1-90 Motor Reference Window for the duration of
alarm Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX parameter 3-09 On Target Time and the
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If alarm 166, actual speed does not exceed
ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm is active, the parameter 3-05 On Reference Window.
output is 1. [224] Position Error This option is available only with
[92] ATEX ETR freq. Available, if parameter 1-90 Motor software version 48.20 and newer.
warning Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX The position error exceeds the value
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If alarm 163, in parameter 4-71 Maximum Position
ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning is active, the Error for the time set in
output is 1. parameter 4-72 Position Error Timeout.

[93] ATEX ETR freq. Available, if parameter 1-90 Motor [225] Position Limit This option is available only with
alarm Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX software version 48.20 and newer.
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If warning The position is outside the limits set in
165, ATEX ETR freq.lim.warning is active, parameter 3-06 Minimum Position and
the output is 1. parameter 3-07 Maximum Position.

[94] RS Flipflop 0 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. [226] Touch on Target This option is available only with
software version 48.20 and newer.
[95] RS Flipflop 1 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. Target position is reached in touch
[96] RS Flipflop 2 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. probe position mode.

[97] RS Flipflop 3 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. [227] Touch Activated This option is available only with
software version 48.20 and newer.
[98] RS Flipflop 4 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators.
Touch probe positioning active. The
[99] RS Flipflop 5 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. frequency converter monitors the
[100] RS Flipflop 6 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. touch probe sensor input.

[101] RS Flipflop 7 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1
[102] Relay 1 Array [6]
[103] Relay 2
Option: Function:
[104] Relay 3 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
Select the 1st logical operator to use on the
113.
boolean inputs from parameter 13-40 Logic Rule
[105] Relay 4 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB Boolean 1 and parameter 13-42 Logic Rule
113. Boolean 2.

154 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2

Array [6] Option: Function:
Option: Function: [16] Thermal warning
Parameter numbers in square brackets stand [17] Mains out of
for the boolean inputs of parameters in range
parameter group chapter 3.13 Parameters: 13-**
Smart Logic Control.
[18]
[19]
Reversing
Warning
3 3
[20] Alarm (trip)
[0] DISABLED Ignores:
[21] Alarm (trip lock)
• Parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2.
[22] Comparator 0
• Parameter 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2.
[23] Comparator 1
• Parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3. [24] Comparator 2
[1] AND Evaluates the expression [13-40] AND [13-42]. [25] Comparator 3
[26] Logic rule 0
[2] OR Evaluates the expression [13-40] OR [13-42].
[27] Logic rule 1
[3] AND NOT Evaluates the expression [13-40] AND NOT [28] Logic rule 2
[13-42]. [29] Logic rule 3
[4] OR NOT Evaluates the expression [13-40] OR NOT [30] SL Time-out 0
[13-42]. [31] SL Time-out 1

[5] NOT AND Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] AND [32] SL Time-out 2
[13-42]. [33] Digital input DI18
[34] Digital input DI19
[6] NOT OR Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] OR
[35] Digital input DI27
[13-42].
[36] Digital input DI29
[7] NOT AND Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] AND NOT [37] Digital input DI32
NOT [13-42]. [38] Digital input DI33
[8] NOT OR Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] OR NOT [39] Start command
NOT [13-42]. [40] Drive stopped
[41] Reset Trip
13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 [42] Auto-reset Trip
Option: Function: [43] Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on the
[0] False Select the 2nd boolean (true or false) graphical LCP.
input for the selected logic rule. See [44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available on
parameter 13-01 Start Event and the graphical LCP.
parameter 13-02 Stop Event for more
[45] Left key [◄] is pressed. Only available on the
information.
graphical LCP.
[1] True
[46] Right key [►] is pressed. Only available on the
[2] Running
graphical LCP.
[3] In range
[4] On reference [47] Up key [▲] is pressed. Only available on the
[5] Torque limit graphical LCP.
[6] Current Limit [48] Down key [▼] is pressed. Only available on the
[7] Out of current graphical LCP.
range
[50] Comparator 4
[8] Below I low
[51] Comparator 5
[9] Above I high
[60] Logic rule 4
[10] Out of speed
range [61] Logic rule 5

[11] Below speed low [70] SL Time-out 3

[12] Above speed high [71] SL Time-out 4

[13] Out of feedb. [72] SL Time-out 5

range [73] SL Time-out 6
[14] Below feedb. low [74] SL Time-out 7
[15] Above feedb. high

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 155

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[75] Start command [106] Relay 5 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
given 113.
[76] Digital input x30/2
[107] Relay 6 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
3 3 [77]
[78]
Digital input x30/3
Digital input x30/4
113.

[79] Digital input x46/1 [108] Relay 7 X34/VLT® Relay Card MCB 105.
[80] Digital input x46/3 [109] Relay 8 X34/VLT® Relay Card MCB 105.
[81] Digital input x46/5
[110] Relay 9 X34/VLT® Relay Card MCB 105.
[82] Digital input x46/7
[83] Digital input x46/9 [222] Homing Ok This option is available only with
[84] Digital input software version 48.20 and newer.
x46/11 Homing is completed with the
[85] Digital input selected homing function
x46/13 (parameter 17-80 Homing Function).
[90] ATEX ETR cur. Available, if parameter 1-90 Motor [223] On Target This option is available only with
warning Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX software version 48.20 and newer.
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If alarm 164, Positioning is completed and the on
ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm is active, the target signal is sent when the actual
output is 1. position is within parameter 3-05 On
[91] ATEX ETR cur. Available, if parameter 1-90 Motor Reference Window for the duration of
alarm Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX parameter 3-09 On Target Time and the
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If alarm 166, actual speed does not exceed
ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm is active, the parameter 3-05 On Reference Window.
output is 1. [224] Position Error This option is available only with
[92] ATEX ETR freq. Available, if parameter 1-90 Motor software version 48.20 and newer.
warning Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX The position error exceeds the value
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If alarm 163, in parameter 4-71 Maximum Position
ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning is active, the Error for the time set in
output is 1. parameter 4-72 Position Error Timeout.

[93] ATEX ETR freq. Available, if parameter 1-90 Motor [225] Position Limit This option is available only with
alarm Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX software version 48.20 and newer.
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If warning The position is outside the limits set in
165, ATEX ETR freq.lim.warning is active, parameter 3-06 Minimum Position and
the output is 1. parameter 3-07 Maximum Position.

[94] RS Flipflop 0 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. [226] Touch on Target This option is available only with
software version 48.20 and newer.
[95] RS Flipflop 1 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. Target position is reached in touch
[96] RS Flipflop 2 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. probe position mode.

[97] RS Flipflop 3 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. [227] Touch Activated This option is available only with
software version 48.20 and newer.
[98] RS Flipflop 4 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators.
Touch probe positioning active. The
[99] RS Flipflop 5 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. frequency converter monitors the
[100] RS Flipflop 6 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. touch probe sensor input.

[101] RS Flipflop 7 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators.

[102] Relay 1
[103] Relay 2
[104] Relay 3 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
113.

[105] Relay 4 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB

113.

156 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3

Array [6] Array [6]
Option: Function: Option: Function:
Select the 2nd logical operator to be used on [12] Above speed high
the boolean input calculated in: [13] Out of feedb.
• Parameter 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1. range 3 3
[14] Below feedb. low
• Parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator
1. [15] Above feedb. high
[16] Thermal warning
• Parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2.
[17] Mains out of
[13-44] signifies the boolean input of range
parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3. [18] Reversing
[13-40/13-42] signifies the boolean input
[19] Warning
calculated in:
[20] Alarm (trip)
• Parameter 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1. [21] Alarm (trip lock)
• Parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator [22] Comparator 0
1. [23] Comparator 1
• Parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2. [24] Comparator 2
[25] Comparator 3
[0] DISABLED Select this option to ignore
parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3. [26] Logic rule 0
[27] Logic rule 1
[1] AND
[28] Logic rule 2
[2] OR
[29] Logic rule 3
[3] AND NOT
[30] SL Time-out 0
[4] OR NOT
[31] SL Time-out 1
[5] NOT AND
[32] SL Time-out 2
[6] NOT OR
[33] Digital input DI18
[7] NOT AND
[34] Digital input DI19
NOT
[35] Digital input DI27
[8] NOT OR NOT
[36] Digital input DI29
13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3 [37] Digital input DI32
Array [6] [38] Digital input DI33
[39] Start command
Option: Function:
[40] Drive stopped
[0] False Select the 3rd boolean (true or false)
[41] Reset Trip
input for the selected logic rule. See
[42] Auto-reset Trip
parameter 13-01 Start Event (options [0]
[43] Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on the
False–[61] Logic rule 5) and
graphical LCP.
parameter 13-02 Stop Event (options
[70] SL Time-out 3–[75] Start command [44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available on
given) for more information. the graphical LCP.

[1] True [45] Left key [◄] is pressed. Only available on the
[2] Running graphical LCP.
[3] In range [46] Right key [►] is pressed. Only available on the
[4] On reference graphical LCP.
[5] Torque limit
[47] Up key [▲] is pressed. Only available on the
[6] Current Limit
graphical LCP.
[7] Out of current
range [48] Down key [▼] is pressed. Only available on the
[8] Below I low graphical LCP.
[9] Above I high
[50] Comparator 4
[10] Out of speed
[51] Comparator 5
range
[60] Logic rule 4
[11] Below speed low
[61] Logic rule 5

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 157

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3

Array [6] Array [6]
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[70] SL Time-out 3 [104] Relay 3 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
[71] SL Time-out 4 113.
3 3 [72] SL Time-out 5
[105] Relay 4 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
[73] SL Time-out 6
113.
[74] SL Time-out 7
[75] Start command
[106] Relay 5 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
given 113.

[76] Digital input x30/2 [107] Relay 6 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
[77] Digital input x30/3 113.
[78] Digital input x30/4
[108] Relay 7 X34/VLT® Relay Card MCB 105.
[79] Digital input x46/1
[80] Digital input x46/3 [109] Relay 8 X34/VLT® Relay Card MCB 105.
[81] Digital input x46/5 [110] Relay 9 X34/VLT® Relay Card MCB 105.
[82] Digital input x46/7
[222] Homing Ok This option is available only with
[83] Digital input x46/9
software version 48.20 and newer.
[84] Digital input
Homing is completed with the
x46/11
selected homing function
[85] Digital input
(parameter 17-80 Homing Function).
x46/13
[90] ATEX ETR cur. Available, if parameter 1-90 Motor [223] On Target This option is available only with
warning Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX software version 48.20 and newer.
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If alarm 164, Positioning is completed and the on
ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm is active, the target signal is sent when the actual
output is 1. position is within parameter 3-05 On
Reference Window for the duration of
[91] ATEX ETR cur. Available, if parameter 1-90 Motor
parameter 3-09 On Target Time and the
alarm Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX
actual speed does not exceed
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If alarm 166,
parameter 3-05 On Reference Window.
ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm is active, the
output is 1. [224] Position Error This option is available only with
software version 48.20 and newer.
[92] ATEX ETR freq. Available, if parameter 1-90 Motor
The position error exceeds the value in
warning Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX
parameter 4-71 Maximum Position Error
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If alarm 163,
for the time set in
ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning is active, the
parameter 4-72 Position Error Timeout.
output is 1.
[225] Position Limit This option is available only with
[93] ATEX ETR freq. Available, if parameter 1-90 Motor
software version 48.20 and newer.
alarm Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX
The position is outside the limits set in
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR]. If warning
parameter 3-06 Minimum Position and
165, ATEX ETR freq.lim.warning is active,
parameter 3-07 Maximum Position.
the output is 1.
[226] Touch on Target This option is available only with
[94] RS Flipflop 0 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators.
software version 48.20 and newer.
[95] RS Flipflop 1 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. Target position is reached in touch
probe position mode.
[96] RS Flipflop 2 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators.
[227] Touch Activated This option is available only with
[97] RS Flipflop 3 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators.
software version 48.20 and newer.
[98] RS Flipflop 4 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. Touch probe positioning active. The
[99] RS Flipflop 5 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. frequency converter monitors the
touch probe sensor input.
[100] RS Flipflop 6 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators.

[101] RS Flipflop 7 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators.

[102] Relay 1
[103] Relay 2

158 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.13.6 13-5* States 13-51 SL Controller Event

Option: Function:
13-51 SL Controller Event [40] Drive stopped
Option: Function: [41] Reset Trip
[0] False Select the boolean input (true or false) [42] Auto-reset Trip
to define the smart logic controller
event. See parameter 13-01 Start Event
[43] Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on the
graphical LCP.
3 3
(options [0] False–[61] Logic rule 5) and
[44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available on
parameter 13-02 Stop Event (options
the graphical LCP.
[70] SL Time-out 3–[74] SL Time-out 7)
for more information. [45] Left key [◄] is pressed. Only available on the
graphical LCP.
[1] True
[2] Running [46] Right key [►] is pressed. Only available on the
[3] In range graphical LCP.

[4] On reference [47] Up key [▲] is pressed. Only available on the

[5] Torque limit graphical LCP.
[6] Current Limit
[48] Down key [▼] is pressed. Only available on the
[7] Out of current
graphical LCP.
range
[8] Below I low [50] Comparator 4
[9] Above I high [51] Comparator 5
[10] Out of speed [60] Logic rule 4
range [61] Logic rule 5
[11] Below speed low [70] SL Time-out 3
[12] Above speed high [71] SL Time-out 4
[13] Out of feedb. [72] SL Time-out 5
range [73] SL Time-out 6
[14] Below feedb. low [74] SL Time-out 7
[15] Above feedb. high [75] Start command
[16] Thermal warning given
[17] Mains out of [76] Digital input x30/2
range [77] Digital input x30/3
[18] Reversing [78] Digital input x30/4
[19] Warning [79] Digital input x46/1
[20] Alarm (trip) [80] Digital input x46/3
[21] Alarm (trip lock) [81] Digital input x46/5
[22] Comparator 0 [82] Digital input x46/7
[23] Comparator 1 [83] Digital input x46/9
[24] Comparator 2 [84] Digital input
[25] Comparator 3 x46/11
[26] Logic rule 0 [85] Digital input
[27] Logic rule 1 x46/13
[28] Logic rule 2 [90] ATEX ETR cur. Available, if parameter 1-90 Motor
[29] Logic rule 3 warning Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX
[30] SL Time-out 0 ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If alarm 164,
[31] SL Time-out 1 ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm is active, the
output is 1.
[32] SL Time-out 2
[33] Digital input DI18 [91] ATEX ETR cur. Available, if parameter 1-90 Motor
[34] Digital input DI19 alarm Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX
[35] Digital input DI27 ETR or [21] Advanced ETR]. If alarm 166,
[36] Digital input DI29 ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm is active, the
[37] Digital input DI32 output is 1.
[38] Digital input DI33 [92] ATEX ETR freq. Available, if parameter 1-90 Motor
[39] Start command warning Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 159

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

13-51 SL Controller Event 13-51 SL Controller Event

Option: Function: Option: Function:
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If alarm 163, for the time set in
ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning is active, the parameter 4-72 Position Error Timeout.
output is 1.
[225] Position Limit This option is available only with
3 3 [93] ATEX ETR freq. Available, if parameter 1-90 Motor software version 48.20 and newer.
alarm Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX The position is outside the limits set in
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If warning parameter 3-06 Minimum Position and
165, ATEX ETR freq.lim.warning is active, parameter 3-07 Maximum Position.
the output is 1.
[226] Touch on Target This option is available only with
[94] RS Flipflop 0 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. software version 48.20 and newer.
Target position is reached in touch
[95] RS Flipflop 1 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators.
probe position mode.
[96] RS Flipflop 2 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators.
[227] Touch Activated This option is available only with
[97] RS Flipflop 3 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. software version 48.20 and newer.
[98] RS Flipflop 4 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators. Touch probe positioning active. The
frequency converter monitors the
[99] RS Flipflop 5 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators.
touch probe sensor input.
[100] RS Flipflop 6 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators.

[101] RS Flipflop 7 See chapter 3.13.2 13-1* Comparators.

13-52 SL Controller Action
Option: Function:
[102] Relay 1
Select the action corresponding to the SLC
[103] Relay 2
event. Actions are executed when the
[104] Relay 3 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
corresponding event (defined in
113.
parameter 13-51 SL Controller Event) is
[105] Relay 4 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB evaluated as true.
113.
[0] DISABLED
[106] Relay 5 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB [1] No action
113. [2] Select set-up Changes the active set-up
1 (parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 1.
[107] Relay 6 X47/VLT® Extended Relay Card MCB
If the set-up is changed, it merges with
113.
other set-up commands coming from either
[108] Relay 7 X34/VLT® Relay Card MCB 105. the digital inputs or via a fieldbus.
[109] Relay 8 X34/VLT® Relay Card MCB 105. [3] Select set-up Changes the active set-up
2 parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 2.
[110] Relay 9 X34/VLT® Relay Card MCB 105.
If the set-up is changed, it merges with
[222] Homing Ok This option is available only with other set-up commands coming from either
software version 48.20 and newer. the digital inputs or via a fieldbus.
Homing is completed with the
[4] Select set-up Changes the active set-up
selected homing function
3 (parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 3.
(parameter 17-80 Homing Function).
If the set-up is changed, it merges with
[223] On Target This option is available only with other set-up commands coming from either
software version 48.20 and newer. the digital inputs or via a fieldbus.
Positioning is completed and the on
[5] Select set-up Changes the active set-up
target signal is sent when the actual
4 (parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 4.
position is within parameter 3-05 On
If the set-up is changed, it merges with
Reference Window for the duration of
other set-up commands coming from either
parameter 3-09 On Target Time and the
the digital inputs or via a fieldbus.
actual speed does not exceed
parameter 3-05 On Reference Window. [10] Select preset Selects preset reference 0.
ref 0 If the active preset reference is changed, it
[224] Position Error This option is available only with
merges with other preset reference
software version 48.20 and newer.
commands coming from either the digital
The position error exceeds the value in
inputs or via a fieldbus.
parameter 4-71 Maximum Position Error

160 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

13-52 SL Controller Action 13-52 SL Controller Action

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[11] Select preset Selects preset reference 1. [27] Coast The frequency converter coasts
ref 1 If the active preset reference is changed, it immediately. All stop commands including
merges with other preset reference the coast command stop the SLC.
commands coming from either the digital
inputs or via a fieldbus.
[28] Freeze output Freezes the output frequency of the 3 3
frequency converter.
[12] Select preset Selects preset reference 2.
[29] Start timer 0 Starts timer 0, see parameter 13-20 SL
ref 2 If the active preset reference is changed, it
Controller Timer for further description.
merges with other preset reference
commands coming from either the digital [30] Start timer 1 Starts timer 1, see parameter 13-20 SL
inputs or via a fieldbus. Controller Timer for further description.

[13] Select preset Selects preset reference 3. [31] Start timer 2 Starts timer 2, see parameter 13-20 SL
ref 3 If the active preset reference is changed, it Controller Timer for further description.
merges with other preset reference [32] Set digital Any output with smart logic output A is
commands coming from either the digital out A low low.
inputs or via a fieldbus.
[33] Set digital Any output with smart logic output B is
[14] Select preset Selects preset reference 4. out B low low.
ref 4 If the active preset reference is changed, it
[34] Set digital Any output with smart logic output C is
merges with other preset reference
out C low low.
commands coming from either the digital
inputs or via a fieldbus. [35] Set digital Any output with smart logic output D is
out D low low.
[15] Select preset Selects preset reference 5.
ref 5 If the active preset reference is changed, it [36] Set digital Any output with smart logic output E is
merges with other preset reference out E low low.
commands coming from either the digital
[37] Set digital Any output with smart logic output F is
inputs or via a fieldbus.
out F low low.
[16] Select preset Selects preset reference 6.
[38] Set digital Any output with smart logic output A is
ref 6 If the active preset reference is changed, it
out A high high.
merges with other preset reference
commands coming from either the digital [39] Set digital Any output with smart logic output B is
inputs or via a fieldbus. out B high high.

[17] Select preset Selects preset reference 7. [40] Set digital Any output with smart logic output C is
ref 7 If the active preset reference is changed, it out C high high.
merges with other preset reference [41] Set digital Any output with smart logic output D is
commands coming from either the digital out D high high.
inputs or via a fieldbus.
[42] Set digital Any output with smart logic output E is
[18] Select ramp 1 Selects ramp 1. out E high high.
[19] Select ramp 2 Selects ramp 2. [43] Set digital Any output with smart logic output F is
[20] Select ramp 3 Selects ramp 3. out F high high.

[21] Select ramp 4 Selects ramp 4. [60] Reset Counter Resets counter A to 0.
A
[22] Run Issues a start command to the frequency
[61] Reset Counter Resets counter B to 0.
converter.
B
[23] Run reverse Issues a start reverse command to the [70] Start timer 3 Starts timer 3, see parameter 13-20 SL
frequency converter. Controller Timer for further description.
[24] Stop Issues a stop command to the frequency [71] Start timer 4 Starts timer 4, see parameter 13-20 SL
converter. Controller Timer for further description.
[25] Qstop Issues a quick stop command to the [72] Start timer 5 Starts timer 5, see parameter 13-20 SL
frequency converter. Controller Timer for further description.
[26] Dcstop Issues a DC stop command to the [73] Start timer 6 Starts timer 6, see parameter 13-20 SL
frequency converter. Controller Timer for further description.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 161

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

13-52 SL Controller Action 13-52 SL Controller Action

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[74] Start timer 7 Starts timer 7, see parameter 13-20 SL [131] Deact. Speed This option is available only with software
Controller Timer for further description. Mode version 48.20 and newer.
Deactivates the speed mode and activates
[120] Start Homing This option is available only with software
3 3 version 48.20 and newer.
the option selected in
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.
Activates the homing mode and starts the
homing function selected in
parameter 17-80 Homing Function. Must
remain active until the homing is
completed otherwise the homing is
aborted.

[121] Stop Homing This option is available only with software

version 48.20 and newer.
Deactivates the homing mode, an active
homing function is aborted if the homing
is not completed.

[122] Enable This option is available only with software

Reference version 48.20 and newer.
Sets the enable reference mode.

[123] Disable This option is available only with software

Reference version 48.20 and newer.
Disables the enable reference mode.

[124] Relative This option is available only with software

Position version 48.20 and newer.
Selects the relative position mode instead
of the absolute position mode.

[125] Absolute This option is available only with software

Position version 48.20 and newer.
Selects the absolute position mode instead
of the relative position mode.

[126] Activate This option is available only with software

Touch version 48.20 and newer.
Activates the touch probe positioning
mode.

[127] Deactivate This option is available only with software

Touch version 48.20 and newer.
Deactivates the touch probe positioning
mode.

[128] Target Inverse This option is available only with software

version 48.20 and newer.
Changes the sign of the active target
position value.

[129] Target This option is available only with software

version 48.20 and newer.
The active target position is not changed.

[130] Act. Speed This option is available only with software

Mode version 48.20 and newer.
Activates the speed mode when option
[9] Positioning or option [10] Synchroni-
zationis selected in
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.

162 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.14 Parameters: 14-** Special Functions 14-01 Switching Frequency

Select the frequency converter switching frequency. Changing
3.14.1 14-0* Inverter Switching the switching frequency reduces acoustic noise from the motor.
Default values depend on power size.
14-00 Switching Pattern
Option: Function:
Option: Function:
Select the switching pattern: 60° AVM or SFAVM.
[12] 12.0kHz
[13] 14.0 kHz
3 3
NOTICE [14] 16.0kHz

The frequency converter may adjust the 14-03 Overmodulation

switching pattern automatically to avoid a
Option: Function:
trip.
[0] Off Select [0] Off for no overmodulation of the output
voltage to avoid torque ripple on the motor shaft. This
[0] 60 AVM
feature may be useful for applications such as grinding
[1] * SFAVM
machines.
14-01 Switching Frequency [1] On Select [1] On to enable the overmodulation function for
Select the frequency converter switching frequency. Changing the output voltage. This is the right option when it is
the switching frequency reduces acoustic noise from the motor. required that the output voltage is higher than 95% of
Default values depend on power size. the input voltage (typically when running over-synchro-
nously). The output voltage is increased according to
Option: Function:
the degree of overmodulation.
NOTICE
The output frequency value of the NOTICE
frequency converter must never exceed Overmodulation leads to increased torque
10% of the switching frequency. When the ripple as harmonics increase.
motor is running, adjust the switching
frequency in parameter 14-01 Switching Control in flux control principle provides an output
Frequency to minimize motor noise. current of up to 98% of the input current, regardless of
parameter 14-03 Overmodulation.

NOTICE 14-04 PWM Random

To avoid a trip, the frequency converter
can adjust the switching frequency Option: Function:
automatically. [0] * Off No change of the acoustic motor switching noise.

[1] On Select to reduce the acoustic noise from the motor.

[0] 1.0 kHz
[1] 1.5 kHz Default switching frequency for 355–1200 kW 14-06 Dead Time Compensation
[500–1600 hp], 690 V. Option: Function:
[2] 2.0 kHz Default switching frequency for 250–800 kW [350– [0] Off No compensation.
1075 hp], 400 V, and 37–315 kW [50–450 hp], 690 [1] * On Activates dead-time compensation.
V.

[3] 2.5 kHz

[4] 3.0 kHz Default switching frequency for 18.5–37 kW [25–
3.14.2 14-1* Mains On/Off
50 hp], 200 V, and 37–200 kW [50–300 hp], 400 V.
Parameters for configuring mains failure monitoring and
[5] 3.5 kHz handling. If a mains failure appears, the frequency
[6] 4.0 kHz Default switching frequency for 5.5–15 kW [7.5–20 converter tries to continue in a controlled way until the
hp], 200 V, and 11–30 kW [15-40], 400 V. power in the DC link is exhausted.
[7] 5.0 kHz Default switching frequency for 0.25–3.7 kW
[0.34–5 hp], 200 V, and 0.37–7.5 kW [0.5–10 hp],
400 V.

[8] 6.0 kHz

[9] 7.0 kHz
[10] 8.0 kHz
[11] 10.0 kHz

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 163

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

14-10 Mains Failure 14-10 Mains Failure

Options [1] Ctrl. ramp-down, [2] Ctrl. ramp-down, trip, [5] Kinetic Options [1] Ctrl. ramp-down, [2] Ctrl. ramp-down, trip, [5] Kinetic
back-up, trip, [7] Kin. back-up, trip w recovery are not active when back-up, trip, [7] Kin. back-up, trip w recovery are not active when
the option [2] Torque is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration the option [2] Torque is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration
Mode. Mode.

3 3 Option: Function: Option: Function:

NOTICE before the motor is ramped to 0, the motor is
coasted.
Parameter 14-10 Mains Failure cannot be
Limitation:
changed while the motor is running.
See the introduction text in
parameter 14-10 Mains Failure.
Parameter 14-10 Mains Failure is typically used
where very short mains interruptions (voltage [2] Ctrl. The functionality is the same as in option [1] Ctrl.
dips) are present. At 100% load and a short ramp- ramp-down, except in this option a reset is
voltage interruption, the DC voltage on the main down, necessary for starting up after power-up.
capacitors drops quickly. For larger frequency trip
converters, it only takes a few milliseconds [3] Coasting Centrifuges can run for 1 hour without supply. In
before the DC level drops to about 373 V DC, those situations, it is possible to select a coast
and the IGBTs cut off and lose the control of the function at mains interruption, together with a
motor. When mains is restored, and the IGBTs flying start, which occurs when the mains is
start again, the output frequency and voltage restored.
vector do not correspond to the speed/ [4] Kinetic Kinetic back-up ensures that the frequency
frequency of the motor, and the result is back-up converter keeps running as long as there is
normally an overvoltage or overcurrent, mostly energy in the system due to the inertia from
resulting in a trip lock. Parameter 14-10 Mains motor and load. This is done by converting the
Failure can be programmed to avoid this mechanical energy to the DC link and
situation. maintaining control of the frequency converter
Select the function according to which the and motor. This can extend the controlled
frequency converter must act when the operation, depending on the inertia in the
threshold in parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at system. For fans, it is typically several seconds;
Mains Fault is reached. for pumps up to 2 seconds; and for compressors
only for a fraction of s. Many industry
[0] No The frequency converter does not compensate
applications can extend controlled operation for
* function for a mains interruption. The voltage on the DC
many s, which is often enough time for the
link drops quickly and motor control is lost
mains to return.
within milliseconds to seconds. Trip lock is the
result.
130BC918.10

A B C DE A
UDC [V]
[1] Ctrl. Control of the motor remains with the frequency UDC
ramp- converter, and the frequency converter performs 14-11*1.35
down a controlled ramp down from n [RPM] t [S]
Ref
parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault
level. If parameter 2-10 Brake Function is [0] Off or t [S]
[2] AC brake, the ramp follows the overvoltage
ramping. If parameter 2-10 Brake Function is [1] A Normal operation
Resistor Brake, the ramp follows the setting in B Mains failure
parameter 3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time. This C Kinetic back-up
selection is useful in pump applications, where D Mains return
the inertia is low and the friction is high. When
E Normal operation: ramping
mains is restored, the output frequency ramps
the motor up to the reference speed (if the
Illustration 3.57 Kinetic Back-up
mains interruption is prolonged, the controlled
ramp down may bring the output frequency
down to 0 RPM, and when the mains is restored,
The DC level during [4] Kinetic back-up equals
the application is ramped up from 0 RPM to the
parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault *
previous reference speed via the normal ramp
1.35.
up). If the energy in the DC link disappears
If the mains does not return, UDC is maintained
as long as possible by ramping the speed down

164 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

14-10 Mains Failure 14-10 Mains Failure

Options [1] Ctrl. ramp-down, [2] Ctrl. ramp-down, trip, [5] Kinetic Options [1] Ctrl. ramp-down, [2] Ctrl. ramp-down, trip, [5] Kinetic
back-up, trip, [7] Kin. back-up, trip w recovery are not active when back-up, trip, [7] Kin. back-up, trip w recovery are not active when
the option [2] Torque is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration the option [2] Torque is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration
Mode. Mode.
Option: Function:
towards 0 RPM. Finally, the frequency converter
Option: Function:
3 3

130BC920.10
A B C D
UDC [V]

coasts. 790 V

If the mains returns while in kinetic back-up UDC

14-11*1.35
mode, UDC increases above n [RPM] t [S]

parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Ref

Faultx1.35. This is detected in 1 of the following

ways. 0
t [S]

• If UDC > parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage

A Normal operation
at Mains Faultx1.35x1.05.
B Mains failure
• If the speed is above the reference. This
C Kinetic back-up
is relevant if the mains comes back at a
D Trip
lower level than before, for example
parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains
Illustration 3.58 Kinetic Back-up Trip
Faultx1.35x1.02. This does not fulfil the
criterion in point 1, and the frequency
converter tries to reduce UDC to
parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains [6] Alarm
Faultx1.35 by increasing the speed. This [7] Kin. back- Kinetic back-up with recovery combines the
cannot be done as the mains cannot up, trip w features of kinetic back-up and kinetic back-up
be lowered. recovery with trip. This feature makes it possible to select
between kinetic back-up and kinetic back-up
• If running mechanically. The same
with trip, based on a recovery speed, config-
mechanism as in point 2 applies, but
urable in parameter 14-15 Kin. Back-up Trip
the inertia prevents the speed from
Recovery Level. If mains does not return, the
going above the reference speed. This
frequency converter ramps down to 0 RPM and
leads to the motor running mechan-
trips. If mains returns while in kinetic back-up at
ically until the speed is above the
a speed above the value in parameter 14-15 Kin.
reference speed and the situation in
Back-up Trip Recovery Level, normal operation is
point 2 occurs. Instead of waiting for
resumed. This is equal to [4] Kinetic Back-up. The
that criterion, point 3 is introduced.
DC level during [7] Kinetic back-up is
[5] Kinetic The difference between kinetic back-up with and parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains
back-up, without trip is that the latter always ramps down Faultx1.35.
trip to 0 RPM and trips, regardless of whether mains
returns or not.
The function does not detect if mains returns.
This is the reason for the relatively high level on
the DC link during ramp down.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 165

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

14-10 Mains Failure 14-10 Mains Failure

Options [1] Ctrl. ramp-down, [2] Ctrl. ramp-down, trip, [5] Kinetic Options [1] Ctrl. ramp-down, [2] Ctrl. ramp-down, trip, [5] Kinetic
back-up, trip, [7] Kin. back-up, trip w recovery are not active when back-up, trip, [7] Kin. back-up, trip w recovery are not active when
the option [2] Torque is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration the option [2] Torque is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration
Mode. Mode.

3 3 Option: Function:
A B C DA E
Option: Function:
current. This results in a higher UDC, which is

130BC922.10
UDC[V]
limited using the brake chopper/resistor brake.
UDC
14-11*1.35 A B C D E F

130BC924.10
UDC [V]
t [S]
n [RPM] UDC

Ref
14-15 UDC
14-11*1.35
t [S] t [s]
n [RPM]

Ref
A Normal operation.
B Mains failure. 0
t [s]

C Kinetic back-up.
D Mains return. A Normal operation.
E Normal operation: ramping. B Mains failure.
C Kinetic back-up.
Illustration 3.59 Kinetic Back-Up, Trip with D Mains return.
Recovery where Mains Returns above E Kinetic back-up ramping to trip.
Parameter 14-15 Kin. Back-up Trip Recovery F Trip.
Level
Illustration 3.61 Kinetic Back-Up, Trip with
Recovery where Mains Returns below
If mains return while in kinetic back-up at a Parameter 14-15 Kin. Back-up Trip Recovery
speed below parameter 14-15 Kin. Back-up Trip Level, in this Illustration a Quick Ramp is Used
Recovery Level, the frequency converter ramps
down to 0 RPM using the ramp and then trips. If
the ramp is slower than the system ramping
down on its own, the ramping is done mechan- 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault
ically and UDC is at the normal level (UDC, mx1.35). Range: Function:
A B C D E F Size [180 - This parameter defines the threshold voltage
130BC923.10

UDC[V]
related* 600 V] at which the function in
UDC
parameter 14-10 Mains Failure is activated.
14-11*1.35 t [S]
n [RPM] Select the detection level depending on the
Ref
supply quality. For a supply of 380 V, set
0 parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault
t [S]
to 342 V. This results in a DC detection level
A Normal operation. of 462 V (parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at
B Mains failure. Mains Faultx1.35).
C Kinetic back-up.
NOTICE
D Mains return.
Converting from VLT 5000 to FC 300:
E Kinetic back-up, ramping to trip.
Even though the setting of the mains
F Trip.
voltage at mains fault is the same for
VLT 5000 and FC 300, the detection
Illustration 3.60 Kinetic Back-Up, Trip with level is different. Use the following
Recovery, Trip Slow Ramp where Mains formula to obtain the same detection
Returns below Parameter 14-15 Kin. Back-up level as in VLT 5000:
Trip Recovery Level, in this Illustration a Slow Parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains
Ramp is Used Fault (VLT 5000 level) = value used in
VLT 5000 * 1.35/sqrt(2).

If the ramp is quicker than the ramp-down

speed of the application, the ramping generates

166 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

14-12 Response to Mains Imbalance 14-20 Reset Mode

Operation under severe main imbalance conditions reduces the Option: Function:
lifetime of the motor. Conditions are considered severe if the Select the reset function after tripping.
motor is operated continuously near nominal load (for example, Once reset, the frequency converter
a pump or a fan running near full speed). can be restarted.
Option:
[0] * Trip
Function:
Trips the frequency
NOTICE 3 3
The motor may start without
converter.
warning. If the specified number
[1] Warning Issues a warning. of automatic resets is reached
[2] Disabled No action.
within 10 minutes, the frequency
converter enters [0] Manual reset
14-14 Kin. Back-up Time-out mode. After the manual reset is
performed, the setting of
Range: Function:
parameter 14-20 Reset Mode
60 s* [0 - This parameter defines the kinetic back-up returns to the original selection.
60 s] timeout in flux mode when running on low If the number of automatic
voltage grids. If the supply voltage does not resets are not reached within 10
exceed the value defined in minutes, or when a manual reset
parameter 14-11 Mains Fault Voltage Level +5% is performed, the internal
within the specified time, the frequency converter automatic reset counter returns
then automatically runs a controlled ramp-down to 0.
profile before stop.

14-15 Kin. Back-up Trip Recovery Level NOTICE

Automatic reset is also valid for
Range: Function:
resetting the Safe Torque Off
Size [ 0 - 60000.000 This parameter specifies the
function in firmware version 4.3x
related* ReferenceFeed- kinetic back-up trip recovery
or earlier.
backUnit] level. The unit is defined in
parameter 0-02 Motor Speed
[0] * Manual reset Select [0] Manual reset to perform a
Unit.
reset via [Reset] or via the digital
inputs.
14-16 Kin. Back-up Gain
Range: Function: [1] Automatic reset x 1 Select [1]-[12] Automatic reset x 1…x20
to perform 1–20 automatic resets after
100 %* [0 - 500 %] Enter the kinetic back-up gain value in
tripping.
percent.
[2] Automatic reset x 2
[3] Automatic reset x 3
3.14.3 14-2* Trip Reset
[4] Automatic reset x 4
[5] Automatic reset x 5
Parameters for configuring auto reset handling, special trip
[6] Automatic reset x 6
handling, and control card self-test or initialization.
[7] Automatic reset x 7
[8] Automatic reset x 8
[9] Automatic reset x 9
[10] Automatic reset x
10
[11] Automatic reset x
15
[12] Automatic reset x
20
[13] Infinite auto reset Select this option for continuous
resetting after tripping.

[14] Reset at power-up

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 167

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

14-21 Automatic Restart Time 14-22 Operation Mode

Range: Function: Option: Function:
10 s* [0 - 600 Enter the time interval from trip to start of the terminals to each other): 18 - 27 - 32; 19 - 29 -
s] automatic reset function. This parameter is 33; 42 - 53 - 54
active when parameter 14-20 Reset Mode is set

3 3

130BA097.12
to [1]–[13] Automatic reset. 12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
FC 302

14-22 Operation Mode

Option: Function:
Use this parameter to specify normal operation;
12 13 18 19 27 32 33 20
to perform tests; or to initialize all parameters FC 301
except parameter 15-03 Power Up's,
parameter 15-04 Over Temp's, and
parameter 15-05 Over Volt's. This function is
active only when the power is cycled to the
39 42 50 53 54 55
frequency converter. FC 301 &
FC 302
Select [0] Normal operation for normal
operation of the frequency converter with the
motor in the selected application. Illustration 3.62 Test Plugs
Select [1] Control card test to test the analog
and digital inputs and outputs and the +10 V
control voltage. The test requires a test Select [2] Initialisation to reset all parameter
connector with internal connections. Use the values to default settings, except for:
following procedure for the control card test: Parameter 15-03 Power Up's,
parameter 15-04 Over Temp's, and
1. Select [1] Control card test.
parameter 15-05 Over Volt's. The frequency
2. Disconnect the mains supply and wait converter resets during the next power-up.
for the indicator light in the display to Parameter 14-22 Operation Mode also returns to
go out. the default setting [0] Normal operation.
3. Set switches S201 (A53) and S202 [0] Normal
(A54) to ON/I. * operation
4. Insert the test plug (see [1] Control Remember to set switches S201 (A53) and S202
Illustration 3.62). card test (A54) as specified in the parameter description
when performing a control card test.
5. Connect to mains supply.
Otherwise, the test fails.
6. Carry out various tests.
[2] Initiali-
7. The results are shown on the LCP and
sation
the frequency converter moves into
[3] Boot mode
an infinite loop.

8. Parameter 14-22 Operation Mode is 14-24 Trip Delay at Current Limit

automatically set to normal operation. Range: Function:
Carry out a power cycle to start up in 60 s* [0 - Enter the current limit trip delay in s. When the
normal operation after a control card 60 s] output current reaches the current limit
test. (parameter 4-18 Current Limit), a warning is
If the test is OK triggered. When the current limit warning has
LCP readout: Control card OK. been continuously present for the period specified
Disconnect the mains supply and remove the in this parameter, the frequency converter trips. To
test plug. The green indicator light on the run continuously in current limit without tripping,
control card lights up. set the parameter to 60 s. Thermal monitoring of
the frequency converter remains active.
If the test fails
LCP readout: Control card I/O failure.
Replace the frequency converter or control
card. The red indicator light on the control card
is turned on. Test plugs (connect the following

168 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit function along with an external electro-mechanical brake
Range: Function: attached to the application.

60 s* [0 - Enter the torque limit trip delay in s. When the 14-30 Current Lim Ctrl, Proportional Gain
60 s] output torque reaches the torque limits Range: Function:
(parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode and
100 %* [0 - 500 %] Enter the proportional gain value for the
parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode), a
warning is triggered. When the torque limit
current limit controller. Selection of a high 3 3
value makes the controller react faster. Too
warning has been continuously present for the
high a setting leads to controller
period specified in this parameter, the frequency
instability.
converter trips. Disable the trip delay by setting
the parameter to 60 s. Thermal monitoring of the
14-31 Current Lim Ctrl, Integration Time
frequency converter remains active.
Range: Function:
14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault Size related* [0.002 - 2 s] Controls the current limit control
integration time. Setting it to a lower
Range: Function:
value makes it react faster. A setting
Size related* [ 0 - 35 When the frequency converter detects
too low leads to control instability.
s] an overvoltage in the set time, trip is
effected after the set time.
14-32 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time
If value is 0, protection mode is
Range: Function:
disabled.
Size [1 - Controls the current limit control low-pass
NOTICE related* 100 ms] filter.
Disable protection mode in This makes it possible to react to peak
hoisting applications. values or to average values. When
selecting average values, it is sometimes
possible to run with higher output current
14-28 Production Settings and instead trip on the hardware limit for
Range: Function: current. However, the control reacts slower
0* [No action] as it does not react on immediate values.
1 [Service reset]
[2] Set Production Mode 14-35 Stall Protection
Option: Function:
14-29 Service Code
Parameter 14-35 Stall Protection is active in flux
Range: Function: mode only.
0* [-2147483647 - 2147483647] For internal use only.
[0] Disabled Disables stall protection in field weakening flux
mode and might cause the motor to be lost.
3.14.4 14-3* Current Limit Control [1] * Enabled Enables stall protection in field weakening flux
mode.
The frequency converter features an integral current limit
controller, which is activated when the motor current, and 14-36 Field-weakening Function
thus the torque, is higher than the torque limits set in Select the field weakening function mode in flux mode.
parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode and
Range: Function:
parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode.
When the current limit is reached during motor operation 0* [Auto] In this mode, the frequency converter calculates the
or regenerative operation, the frequency converter tries to optimal torque output.
reduce torque below the preset torque limits as quickly as Measured DC-link voltage determines the phase-to-
possible without losing control of the motor. phase motor voltage. Magnetizing reference is based
While the current control is active, the frequency converter on the actual voltage and utilizes the information
can only be stopped by setting a digital input to [2] Coast about the model of the motor.
inverse or [3] Coast and reset inv. Any signals on terminals 1 [1/x] The frequency converter reduces torque output.
18–33 are not active until the frequency converter is no The frequency converter sets the magnetizing
longer near the current limit. reference inversely proportional to the speed using a
By using a digital input set to [2] Coast inverse or [3] Coast static curve that shows the relationship between DC-
and reset inv., the motor does not use the ramp-down link voltage and the speed.
time, since the frequency converter is coasted. If a quick
stop is necessary, use the mechanical brake control

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 169

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

14-37 Fieldweakening Speed 14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency

Range: Function: Range: Function:
Size [10 - NOTICE Enter the minimum frequency at which
related* 60000 RPM] the automatic energy optimization (AEO)
This parameter is valid for FC 302
is to be active.
only.
3 3 14-43 Motor Cosphi
Enter the start speed for option [1]
[1/x] in parameter 14-36 Field- Range: Function:
weakening Function. Size [0.40 - The Cos(phi) setpoint is automatically set
related* 0.95] for optimum AEO performance. This
parameter should normally not be altered.
3.14.5 14-4* Energy Optimizing However, in some situations it may be
necessary to enter a new value to fine-
Parameters for adjusting the energy optimization level in tune.
both variable torque (VT) and automatic energy optimi-
zation (AEO) mode in parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics.
3.14.6 14-5* Environment
14-40 VT Level
Range: Function: NOTICE
66 % [40 - NOTICE Perform a power cycle after changing any of the
* 90 %] parameters in parameter group 14-5* Environment.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.
These parameters help the frequency converter to operate
NOTICE under special environmental conditions.
This parameter is not active when 14-51 DC-Link Compensation
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to Option: Function:
[1] PM non-salient SPM.
The rectified AC-DC voltage in the frequency converter's
DC link is associated with voltage ripples. These ripples
Enter the level of motor magnetization at low
can increase in magnitude with increased load. These
speed. Selection of a low value reduces energy
ripples are undesirable because they can generate
loss in the motor but also reduces load
current and torque ripples. A compensation method is
capability.
used to reduce these voltage ripples in the DC link. In
general, DC-link compensation is recommended for
14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation most applications, but pay attention when operating in
Range: Function: field weakening as it can generate speed oscillations at
Size [ 40 - NOTICE the motor shaft. In field weakening, turn off DC-link
related* 200 %] compensation.
This parameter is not active when
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is [0] Off Disables DC-link compensation.
set to [1] PM non-salient SPM.
[1] On Enables DC-link compensation.

Enter the minimum allowable magnetization 14-52 Fan Control

for AEO. Selection of a low value reduces
Select minimum speed of the main fan.
energy loss in the motor but can also
reduce resistance to sudden load changes. Option: Function:
[0] * Auto Select [0] Auto to run fan only when internal
14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency temperature in frequency converter is in range
35 °C to approximately 55 °C.
Range: Function:
Fan runs at low speed below 35 °C, and at full
Size [5 - 40 NOTICE speed at approximately 55 °C.
related* Hz]
This parameter is not active when
[1] On 50% The fan always runs at 50% speed or above. The
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is
fan runs at 50% speed at 35 °C, and at full
set to [1] PM non-salient SPM.
speed at approximately 55 °C.

170 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

14-52 Fan Control 14-55 Output Filter

Select minimum speed of the main fan. Option: Function:
Option: Function: [1] Sine- This setting is only for backwards compatibility. It
[2] On 75% The fan always runs at 75% speed or above. The Wave enables operation with flux control principle when
fan runs at 75% speed at 35 °C, and at full Filter parameter 14-56 Capacitance Output Filter and
speed at approximately 55 °C. parameter 14-57 Inductance Output Filter are
programmed with the output filter capacitance and
3 3
[3] On 100% The fan always runs at 100% speed.
inductance. It does not limit the range of the
[4] Auto This option is the same as [0] Auto, but with switching frequency.
(Low special considerations around and below 0 °C. In
[2] Sine- This parameter sets a minimum allowed limit to the
temp option [0] Auto there is a risk that the fan starts
Wave switching frequency and ensures that the filter is
env.) running around 0 °C as the frequency converter
Filter operated within the safe range of switching
detects a sensor fault and thus protects the
Fixed frequencies. Operation is possible with all control
frequency converter while reporting warning 66,
principles. For flux control principle, program
Heat sink Temperature Low. Option [4] Auto (Low
parameter 14-56 Capacitance Output Filter and
temp env.) can be used in very cold
parameter 14-57 Inductance Output Filter (these
environments and prevents the negative effects
parameters have no effect in VVC+ and U/f ). The
of this further cooling and avoids warning 66,
modulation pattern is set to SFAVM, which gives the
Heat sink Temperature Low.
lowest acoustic noise in the filter.

14-53 Fan Monitor

14-56 Capacitance Output Filter
Option: Function:
Compensation function of the LC filter requires the per phase
Select the frequency converter action if a fan equivalent star-connected capacitance of the filter (3 times the
fault is detected. capacity between 2 phases when capacitance is delta
[0] Disabled connection).
[1] * Warning Range: Function:
[2] Trip Size related* [0.1 - 6500 Set the capacitance of the output
uF] filter. The value can be found on the
14-55 Output Filter
filter label.
Option: Function:
NOTICE NOTICE
This is required for correct
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the
compensation in flux mode
motor is running.
(parameter 1-01 Motor Control
Principle).
NOTICE
Reset the frequency converter after selecting
[2] Sine-Wave Filter Fixed. 14-57 Inductance Output Filter
Range: Function:

CAUTION Size
related*
[0.001 -
65 mH]
Set the inductance of the output filter.
The value can be found on the filter
OVERHEATING OF FREQUENCY label.
CONVERTER NOTICE
Always set parameter 14-55 Output Filter to
This is required for correct
[2] Sine-wave fixed when using a sine-wave
compensation in flux control
filter. Failure to do so can result in
principle (parameter 1-01 Motor
overheating of the frequency converter,
Control Principle).
which can result in personal injury and
equipment damage.
14-59 Actual Number of Inverter Units
Select the type of output filter connected.
Range: Function:
[0] No This is the default setting and should be used with Size related* [ 1 - 1] Set the actual number of power units.
* Filter dU/dt filters or high frequency common mode (HF-
CM) filters.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 171

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3.14.7 14-7* Compatibility 14-89 Option Detection

Selects the behavior of the frequency converter when a change
Parameters for compatibility of VLT 3000 and VLT 5000 in the option configuration is detected.
with FC 300.
Option: Function:
14-72 VLT Alarm Word [1] Enable Option Changes frequency converter settings
3 3 Option: Function: Change and is used when modifying the
system configuration. This parameter
[0] 0 - 4294967295 Readout of the alarm word corresponding to
VLT 5000. setting returns to [0] Protect Option
Config. after an option change.
14-73 VLT Warning Word
Option: Function:
3.14.9 14-9* Fault Settings
[0] 0 - 4294967295 Readout of the warning word corresponding
to VLT 5000.
14-90 Fault Level
14-74 Leg. Ext. Status Word This is an array parameter with 26 elements. Each of the bits can
Range: Function: be configured to any of the following options. Use this
0* [0 - 4294967295] Readout of the external status word parameter to customize fault levels.
corresponding to VLT 5000. Option: Function:
[0] Off Use [0] Off with caution as it ignores all
warnings and alarms for the selected
3.14.8 14-8* Options source.

[1] Warning
14-80 Option Supplied by External 24VDC
[2] Trip Changing a fault level from default option
Option: Function:
[3] Trip Lock to [2] Trip leads to the
NOTICE automatic reset of the alarm. For alarms
This parameter is only changing function by involving overcurrent, the frequency
performing a power cycle. converter has a hardware protection that
issues a 3-minute recovery after 2
[0] No Select [0] No to use the frequency converter's 24 V DC consecutive overcurrent incidents. This
supply. hardware protection cannot be overruled.

[1] * Yes Select [1] Yes if a 24 V DC external supply is used to [3] Trip Lock
power the option. Inputs/outputs are galvanically [4] Trip w. delayed This option adds a delay between
isolated from the frequency converter when operated reset automatic resets, otherwise it is the same
from an external supply. as option [2] Trip. The delay prevents a
situation where reset is attempted
14-88 Option Data Storage repeatedly for an overcurrent situation.
Hardware protection of the frequency
Range: Function:
converter forces the 3-minute recovery time
0* [0 - 65535] This parameter stores information about options
after 2 consecutive overcurrents (within a
over a power cycle.
short time window).

14-89 Option Detection

Selects the behavior of the frequency converter when a change
in the option configuration is detected.
Option: Function:
[0] * Protect Option Freezes the current settings and
Config. prevents unwanted changes when
missing or defective options are
detected.

172 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

Failure Alarm Element in Off Warning Trip Trip Lock Trip with
parameter 14-90 F delayed
ault Level reset
10 V low 1 1490.0 X D – – –
24 V low 47 1490.1 X – – D –
1.8 V supply low
Voltage limit
48
64
1490.2
1490.3
X
X
–
D
–
–
D
–
–
– 3 3
Ground fault during ramping 14 1490.4 – – D X –
Ground fault 2 during cont. 45 1490.5 – – D X –
operation
Torque limit 12 1490.6 X D – – –
Overcurrent 13 1490.7 – – X D –
Short circuit 16 1490.8 – – X D –
Heat sink temperature 29 1490.9 – – X D –
Heat sink sensor 39 1490.10 – – X D –
Control card temperature 65 1490.11 – – X D –
Power card temperature 69 1490.12 – 2) X D –
Heat sink temperature1) 244 1490.13 – – X D –
Heat sink sensor1) 245 1490.14 – – X D –
Power card temperature1) 247 1490.15 – – X D –
Motor phase missing 30–32 1490.16 – – X D –
Inverter overloaded 9 1490.18 – – – D –
Current limit 59 1490.19 – – – D –
Locked rotor 99 1490.20 – – D X –
AIC earth fault 407 1490.21 X X X D X
404 DC link voltage out of range 404 1490.22 X X X D X
300 mains contactor fault 300 1490.23 X X X D X

Table 3.27 Selection of Action when Selected Alarm Appears

MCT 10 Set-up Software has the element numbers listed in the column ID. Use this table together with MCT 10 Set-up Software to get information
about specific fault levels.
D stands for the default setting.
X stands for a possible option.
1) Only high-power frequency converters.
2) In small and medium power frequency converters, alarm 69, Power card temperature is only a warning.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 173

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3.15 Parameters: 15-** Drive Information 15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter
Option: Function:
3.15.1 15-0* Operating Data
parameter cannot be selected via the serial
port, RS485.
15-00 Operating hours Select [0] Do not reset if no reset of the

3 3 Range:
0 h*
Function:
[0 - 2147483647 h] View how many hours the frequency
running-hours counter is required.

converter has run. The value is saved

when the frequency converter is
3.15.2 15-1* Data Log Settings
turned off.
The data log enables continuous logging of up to 4 data
15-01 Running Hours sources (parameter 15-10 Logging Source) at individual rates
(parameter 15-11 Logging Interval). A trigger event
Range: Function:
(parameter 15-12 Trigger Event) and window
0 h* [0 - View how many hours the motor has run. (parameter 15-14 Samples Before Trigger) are used to start
2147483647 h] Reset the counter in and stop the logging conditionally.
parameter 15-07 Reset Running Hours
Counter. The value is saved when the 15-10 Logging Source
frequency converter is turned off. Option: Function:
Select which variables
15-02 kWh Counter are to be logged.
Range: Function: [0] * None
0 kWh* [0 - Register the power consumption of [15] Readout: actual setup
2147483647 the motor as an average value over 1 [1472] Legacy Alarm Word
kWh] hour. Reset the counter in
[1473] Legacy Warning Word
parameter 15-06 Reset kWh Counter.
[1474] Leg. Ext. Status Word
[1600] Control Word
15-03 Power Up's
[1601] Reference [Unit]
Range: Function: [1602] Reference %
0* [0 - 2147483647 ] View the number of times the frequency [1603] Status Word
converter has been powered up. [1606] Actual Position
[1610] Power [kW]
15-04 Over Temp's
[1611] Power [hp]
Range: Function: [1612] Motor Voltage
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the number of frequency converter [1613] Frequency
temperature faults. [1614] Motor current
[1616] Torque [Nm]
15-05 Over Volt's [1617] Speed [RPM]
Range: Function: [1618] Motor Thermal
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the number of frequency converter [1620] Motor Angle
overvoltages. [1621] Torque [%] High Res.
[1622] Torque [%]
15-06 Reset kWh Counter [1624] Calibrated Stator Resistance
Option: Function: [1625] Torque [Nm] High
[0] * Do not reset No reset of the kWh counter is required. [1630] DC Link Voltage
[1632] Brake Energy /s
[1] Reset counter Press [OK] to reset the kWh counter to 0
(see parameter 15-02 kWh Counter). [1633] Brake Energy Average
[1634] Heatsink Temp.
15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter [1635] Inverter Thermal

Option: Function: [1648] Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM]

[1650] External Reference
[0] * Do not
[1651] Pulse Reference
reset
[1652] Feedback[Unit]
[1] Reset To reset the running hours counter to 0, select
counter [1] Reset and press [OK] (see [1657] Feedback [RPM]
parameter 15-01 Running Hours). This [1660] Digital Input

174 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

15-10 Logging Source 15-12 Trigger Event

Option: Function: Select the trigger event. When the trigger event occurs, a
[1662] Analog Input 53 window is applied to freeze the log. The log then retains a
[1664] Analog Input 54 specified percentage of samples before the occurrence of the
[1665] Analog Output 42 [mA] trigger event (parameter 15-14 Samples Before Trigger).

[1666] Digital Output [bin]

[1675] Analog In X30/11
Option:
[19] Warning
Function:
3 3
[1676] Analog In X30/12 [20] Alarm (trip)
[1677] Analog Out X30/8 [mA] [21] Alarm (trip lock)
[1689] Configurable Alarm/Warning Word [22] Comparator 0
[1690] Alarm Word [23] Comparator 1
[1692] Warning Word [24] Comparator 2
[1694] Ext. Status Word [25] Comparator 3
[1843] Analog Out X49/7 [26] Logic rule 0
[1844] Analog Out X49/9 [27] Logic rule 1
[1845] Analog Out X49/11 [28] Logic rule 2
[1860] Digital Input 2 [29] Logic rule 3
[3110] Bypass Status Word [33] Digital input DI18
[3466] SPI Error Counter [34] Digital input DI19
[3470] MCO Alarm Word 1 [35] Digital input DI27
[3471] MCO Alarm Word 2 [36] Digital input DI29
[37] Digital input DI32
15-11 Logging Interval
[38] Digital input DI33
Array [4] [50] Comparator 4
Range: Function: [51] Comparator 5
Size related* [ 0.000 - 0.000 ] Enter the interval in ms between [60] Logic rule 4
each sampling of the variables to [61] Logic rule 5
be logged.
15-13 Logging Mode
15-12 Trigger Event Option: Function:
Select the trigger event. When the trigger event occurs, a [0] * Log always Select [0] Log always for continuous logging.
window is applied to freeze the log. The log then retains a [1] Log once Select [1] Log once on trigger to conditionally
specified percentage of samples before the occurrence of the on trigger start and stop logging using
trigger event (parameter 15-14 Samples Before Trigger). parameter 15-12 Trigger Event and
Option: Function: parameter 15-14 Samples Before Trigger.
[0] * False
[1] True 15-14 Samples Before Trigger
[2] Running Range: Function:
[3] In range 50* [0 - 100] Before a trigger event, enter the percentage of all
[4] On reference samples which should be retained in the log. See
[5] Torque limit also parameter 15-12 Trigger Event and
[6] Current Limit parameter 15-13 Logging Mode.
[7] Out of current range
[8] Below I low
3.15.3 15-2* Historic Log
[9] Above I high
[10] Out of speed range
View up to 50 logged data items via the array parameters
[11] Below speed low
in this parameter group. Data is logged every time an
[12] Above speed high event occurs (not to be confused with SLC events). Events
[13] Out of feedb. range in this context are defined as a change in 1 of the
[14] Below feedb. low following areas:
[15] Above feedb. high • Digital inputs.
[16] Thermal warning
[17] Mains out of range
• Digital outputs.

[18] Reversing • Warning word.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 175

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

• Alarm word. 15-21 Historic Log: Value

• Status word. Array [50]

• Control word. Range: Function:

Extended Decimal value. See
• Extended status word.
status word parameter 16-94 Ext. Status
3 3 Events are logged with value and time stamp in ms. The
time interval between 2 events depends on how often
Word for a description.

events occur (maximum once every scan time). Data Table 3.28 Logged Events
logging is continuous, but if an alarm occurs, the log is
saved and the values can be viewed on the display. This
15-22 Historic Log: Time
feature is useful, for example when carrying out service
following a trip. View the historic log contained in this Array [50]
parameter via the serial communication port or via the Range: Function:
display. 0 ms* [0 - 2147483647 View the time at which the logged
15-20 Historic Log: Event ms] event occurred. Time is measured in
ms since frequency converter start. The
Array [50]
maximum value corresponds to
Range: Function: approximately 24 days, which means
0* [0 - 255 ] View the event type of the logged events. that the count restarts at 0 after this
time period.
15-21 Historic Log: Value
Array [50]
3.15.4 15-3* Alarm Log
Range: Function:
0* [0 - View the value of the logged event. Parameters in this group are array parameters where up to
2147483647 ] Interpret the event values according to 10 fault logs can be viewed. 0 is the most recent logged
Table 3.28: data, and 9 is the oldest. Fault codes, values, and time
stamp can be viewed for all logged data.
Digital input Decimal value. See
parameter 16-60 Digital 15-30 Fault Log: Error Code
Input for description after Range: Function:
converting to binary
0* [0 - 65535] View the fault code and look up its meaning in
value.
chapter 6 Troubleshooting.
Digital output Decimal value. See
(not parameter 16-66 Digital
15-31 Alarm Log: Value
monitored in Output [bin] for a
Array [10]
this SW description after
release) converting to binary Range: Function:
value. 0* [-32767 - 32767 ] View an extra description of the error.
Warning word Decimal value. See This parameter is mostly used in
parameter 16-92 Warning combination with alarm 38, internal fault.
Word for a description.
Alarm word Decimal value. See 15-32 Alarm Log: Time
parameter 16-90 Alarm Array [10]
Word for a description.
Range: Function:
Status word Decimal value. See
0 s* [0 - 2147483647 s] View the time when the logged event
parameter 16-03 Status
occurred. Time is measured in s from
Word for a description
frequency converter start-up.
after converting to binary
value.
Control word Decimal value. See 3.15.5 15-4* Drive Identification
parameter 16-00 Control
Word for a description. Parameters containing read-only information about the
hardware and software configuration of the frequency
converter.

176 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

15-40 FC Type 15-50 SW ID Power Card

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0* [0 - 6] View the frequency converter type. The readout is 0* [0 - 20 ] View the power card software version number.
identical to the FC 300 power field of the type code
definition, characters 1–6. 15-51 Frequency Converter Serial Number

15-41 Power Section

Range: Function: 3 3
0* [0 - 10 ] View the frequency converter serial number.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 20] View the frequency converter type. The readout is 15-53 Power Card Serial Number
identical to the FC 300 power field of the type Range: Function:
code definition, characters 7–10.
0* [0 - 19 ] View the power card serial number.

15-42 Voltage
15-54 Config File Name
Range: Function: Array [5]
0* [0 - 20] View the frequency converter type. The readout is
Range: Function:
identical to the FC 300 power field of the type
Size related* [0 - 16] Shows the special configuration file
code definition, characters 11–12.
names.

15-43 Software Version

15-59 Filename
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 5 ] View the combined SW version (or package
Size related* [0 - 16] Shows the currently used customer-
version) consisting of power SW and control SW.
specific initial values (CSIV) filename.

15-44 Ordered Typecode String

Range: Function: 3.15.6 15-6* Option Ident.
0* [0 - 40 ] View the type code string used for reordering the
frequency converter in its original configuration. This read-only parameter group contains information about
the hardware and software configuration of the options
15-45 Actual Typecode String installed in slots A, B, C0, and C1.
Range: Function: 15-60 Option Mounted
0* [0 - 40 ] View the actual type code string. Array [8]
Range: Function:
15-46 Frequency Converter Ordering No
0* [0 - 30 ] Shows the type of the installed option.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 8 ] View the 8-digit ordering number used for
15-61 Option SW Version
reordering the frequency converter in its original
Array [8]
configuration. To restore the ordering number after
the power card exchange, see Range: Function:
parameter 14-29 Service Code. 0* [0 - 20 ] View the installed option software version.

15-47 Power Card Ordering No 15-62 Option Ordering No

Range: Function: Array [8]
0* [0 - 8 ] View the power card ordering number. Range: Function:
0* [0 - 8 ] Shows the ordering number for the installed
15-48 LCP Id No options.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 20 ] View the LCP ID number. 15-63 Option Serial No
Array [8]
15-49 SW ID Control Card Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0* [0 - 18 ] View the installed option serial number.
0* [0 - 20 ] View the control card software version number.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 177

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

15-70 Option in Slot A 15-81 Preset Fan Running Hours

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0* [0 - 30] View the type code string for the option installed 0 h* [0 - 99999 h] Enter the preset fan running hours counter,
in slot A and a translation of the type code string. see parameter 15-80 Fan Running Hours.
For example, for type code string AX, the This parameter cannot be selected via the

3 3 translation is No option. serial port, RS485.

15-71 Slot A Option SW Version 15-89 Configuration Change Counter

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0* [0 - 20] View the software version for the option installed 0* [0 - 65535] NOTICE
in slot A.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.
15-72 Option in Slot B
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 30] View the type code string for the option installed
3.15.7 15-9* Parameter Info
in slot B and a translation of the type code string.
For example, for type code string BX, the
translation is No option.
15-92 Defined Parameters
Range: Function:
15-73 Slot B Option SW Version 0* [0 - 9999 ] View a list of all defined parameters in the
Range: Function: frequency converter. The list ends with 0.
0* [0 - 20] View the software version for the option installed
in slot B.
15-93 Modified Parameters
Range: Function:
15-74 Option in Slot C0/E0 0* [0 - 9999 ] View a list of the parameters that have been
Range: Function: changed from their default setting. The list ends
0* [0 - 30] View the type code string for the option installed with 0. Changes may not be visible until up to
in slot C and a translation of the type code string. 30 s after implementation.
For example, for type code string CXXXX, the
translation is No option.
15-98 Drive Identification
Range: Function:
15-75 Slot C0/E0 Option SW Version 0* [0 - 40] This parameter contains data used by the MCT 10
Range: Function: Set-up Software.
0* [0 - 20] View the software version for the option installed
in slot C.
15-99 Parameter Metadata
Range: Function:
15-76 Option in Slot C1/E1 0* [0 - 9999] This parameter contains data used by the MCT
Range: Function: 10 Set-up Software.
0* [0 - 30] Shows the type code string for the option in slot
C1 (CXXXX if no option) and the translation, that is
No option.

15-77 Slot C1/E1 Option SW Version

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 20] Shows the software version for the installed option
in option slot C.

15-80 Fan Running Hours

Range: Function:
0 h* [0 - 2147483647 View how many hours the heat sink
h] fan has run (increments for every
hour). The value is saved when the
frequency converter is turned off.

178 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.16 Parameters: 16-** Data Readouts 16-07 Target Position

Range: Function:

3.16.1 16-0* General Status

0 CustomRea- [-2000000000 - NOTICE
doutUnit2* 2000000000
This parameter is only
CustomRea-
valid with software
16-00 Control Word
Range: Function:
doutUnit2]
version 48.XX. 3 3
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the control word sent from the frequency Shows the actual end target
converter via the serial communication port in position for the active
hex code. positioning command in
position units. Position units
16-01 Reference [Unit] are defined in parameter
Range: Function: group 17-7* Position Scaling.
0 ReferenceFeed- [-999999 - View the present reference
backUnit* 999999 value applied on impulse or 16-08 Position Error
ReferenceFeed- analog basis in the unit Range: Function:
backUnit] resulting from the configu-
ration selected in
0 CustomRea- [-2000000000 - NOTICE
doutUnit2* 2000000000
This parameter is only
parameter 1-00 Configu- CustomRea-
valid with software
ration Mode (Hz, Nm, or doutUnit2]
version 48.XX.
RPM).

16-02 Reference [%] Shows the actual position

error in position units defined
Range: Function:
in parameter group 17-7*
0 %* [-200 - View the total reference. The total reference
Position Scaling. Position error
200 %] is the sum of digital, analog, preset, bus,
is the difference between the
and freeze references, plus catch up and
actual position and the
slow down.
commanded position. The
position error is the input for
16-03 Status Word the position PI controller.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the status word sent from the frequency 16-09 Custom Readout
converter via the serial communication port in Range: Function:
hex code.
0 CustomRea- [0 - 999999.99 View the value of custom
doutUnit* CustomRea- readout from
16-05 Main Actual Value [%] doutUnit] parameter 0-30 Unit for User-
Range: Function: defined Readout to
0 %* [-100 - 100 %] View the 2-byte word sent with the status parameter 0-32 Custom Readout
word to the fieldbus master reporting the Max Value.
main actual value.

16-06 Actual Position

3.16.2 16-1* Motor Status
Range: Function:
16-10 Power [kW]
0 CustomRea- [-2000000000 Shows the actual position in
doutUnit2* - 2000000000 position units defined in Range: Function:
CustomRea- parameter group 17-7* Position 0 kW* [0 - Shows motor power in kW. The value shown is
doutUnit2] Scaling. The value is based on 10000 calculated based on the actual motor voltage
the encoder feedback in closed kW] and motor current. The value is filtered, and
loop or on the angle calculated therefore approximately 1.3 s may pass from
by the motor control in open when an input value changes to when the
loop. For information about data readout values change. The resolution of
configuring the readouts, see readout value on fieldbus is in 10 W steps.
chapter 3.17.5 17-7* Position
Scaling.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 179

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

16-11 Power [hp] 16-17 Speed [RPM]

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0 hp* [0 - View the motor power in hp. The value 0 RPM* [-30000 - View the actual motor RPM. In open-
10000 hp] shown is calculated based on the actual 30000 RPM] loop or closed-loop process control, the
motor voltage and motor current. The value is motor RPM is estimated. In speed

3 3 filtered, and therefore approximately 1.3 ms

may pass from when an input value changes
closed-loop modes, the motor RPM is
measured.
to when the data readout values change.
16-18 Motor Thermal
16-12 Motor Voltage Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0 %* [0 - View the calculated thermal load on the motor.
0 V* [0 - 6000 V] View the motor voltage, a calculated value 100 %] The cutout limit is 100%. The basis for
used for controlling the motor. calculation is the ETR function selected in
parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection.
16-13 Frequency
Range: Function: 16-19 Thermistor Sensor Temperature
0 Hz* [0 - 6500 Hz] View the motor frequency without Range: Function:
resonance damping. 0 °C* [0 - 0 °C] Returning the actual temperature on KTY
sensor built into the motor.
16-14 Motor current See parameter group chapter 3.2.12 1-9* Motor
Range: Function: Temperature.

0 A* [0 - 10000 View the motor current measured as an

16-20 Motor Angle
A] average value, IRMS. The value is filtered, and
thus approximately 1.3 s may pass from when Range: Function:
an input value changes to when the data 0* [0 - 65535] View the current encoder/resolver angle offset
readout values change. relative to the index position. The value range
of 0–65535 corresponds to 0–2xpi (radian).
16-15 Frequency [%]
Range: Function: 16-21 Torque [%] High Res.
0 %* [-100 - View a 2-byte word reporting the actual motor Range: Function:
100 %] frequency (without resonance damping) as a 0 %* [-200 - 200 %] The value shown is the torque in percent
percentage (scale 0000–4000 hex) of of nominal torque, with sign and 0.1%
parameter 4-19 Max Output Frequency. Set resolution, applied to the motor shaft.
parameter 9-16 PCD Read Configuration index 1
to send it with the status word instead of the 16-22 Torque [%]
MAV. Range: Function:
0 %* [-200 - 200 %] Value shown is the torque in percent of
16-16 Torque [Nm]
nominal torque, with sign, applied to the
Range: Function: motor shaft.
0 [-3000 View the torque value with sign, applied to the
Nm* - 3000 motor shaft. Linearity is not exact between 16-23 Motor Shaft Power [kW]
Nm] 160% motor current and torque in relation to Range: Function:
the rated torque. Some motors supply more
0 kW* [0 - 10000 kW] Readout of the mechanical power
than 160% torque. Therefore, the minimum
applied to the motor shaft.
value and the maximum value depend on the
maximum motor current and the motor used.
16-24 Calibrated Stator Resistance
The value is filtered, and thus approximately 30
Range: Function:
ms may pass from when an input changes
value to when the data readout values change. 0.0000 Ohm* [0.0000 - 100.0000 Shows the calibrated
In flux control principle, this readout is Ohm] stator resistance.
compensated for in parameter 1-68 Motor Inertia
for improved accuracy.

180 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

16-25 Torque [Nm] High 16-34 Heatsink Temp.

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0 [-200000000 View the torque value with sign, applied 0 °C* [0 - View the frequency converter heat sink
Nm* - 200000000 to the motor shaft. Some motors supply 255 °C] temperature. The cutout limit is 90 ±5 °C (194
Nm] more than 160% torque. Therefore, the ±9 °F), and the motor cuts back in at 60
minimum value and the maximum value
depend on the maximum motor current
±5 °C (140 ±9 °F).
3 3
as well as the motor used. This specific 16-35 Inverter Thermal
readout has been adapted to be able to Range: Function:
show higher values than the standard
0 %* [0 - 100 %] View the percentage load on the inverter.
readout in parameter 16-16 Torque [Nm].

16-36 Inv. Nom. Current

3.16.3 16-3* Drive Status Range: Function:
Size [0.01 - View the inverter nominal current,
16-30 DC Link Voltage related* 10000 A] which must match the nameplate
data on the connected motor. The
Range: Function:
data is used for calculation of torque,
0 V* [0 - 10000 V] View a measured value. The value is filtered
motor overload protection, and so on.
with a 30 ms time constant.

16-37 Inv. Max. Current

16-31 System Temp.
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
Size [0.01 - View the inverter maximum current,
0 °C [-128 - NOTICE related* 10000 A] which must match the nameplate
* 127 °C]
Valid for FC 302 only. data on the connected motor. The
data is used for calculation of torque,
Shows the highest internal system temperature. motor overload protection, and so on.
In the smaller enclosure sizes (A–C), the system
temperature matches the control card 16-38 SL Controller State
temperature measurement in Range: Function:
parameter 16-39 Control Card Temp.. In the larger
0* [0 - 100] View the state of the event under execution by
enclosure sizes (D–F), the system temperature is
the SL controller.
the highest temperature measured on hardware
components with temperature sensors, for
16-39 Control Card Temp.
example, the power card(s).
Range: Function:
16-32 Brake Energy /s 0 °C* [0 - 100 °C] View the temperature on the control card,
stated in °C.
Range: Function:
0 kW* [0 - 10000 kW] View the brake power transmitted to an
16-40 Logging Buffer Full
external brake resistor, stated as an
Option: Function:
instant value.
View whether the logging buffer is full (see
16-33 Brake Energy Average chapter 3.15.2 15-1* Data Log Settings). The logging
buffer is never full when parameter 15-13 Logging
Range: Function:
Mode is set to [0] Log always.
0 kW* [0 - 10000 View the brake power transmitted to an
kW] external brake resistor. The mean power is [0] * No
calculated on an average level based on the [1] Yes
selected time period within
16-41 Logging Buffer Full
parameter 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 50 ]

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 181

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

16-44 Speed Error [RPM] 3.16.4 16-5* Ref. & Feedb.

Range: Function:
16-50 External Reference
0 RPM* [-30000 - 30000 NOTICE
RPM]
This parameter is only valid with Range: Function:
software version 48.XX. 0* [-200 - 200] View the total reference, the sum of digital,
3 3 analog, preset, fieldbus, and freeze references,
plus catch up and slow down.
Shows the difference between the
speed reference and the actual speed.
16-51 Pulse Reference
16-45 Motor Phase U Current Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0* [-200 - 200] View the reference value from programmed
0 A* [0 - 10000 A] Shows the motor phase URMS current. digital inputs. The readout can also reflect the
Facilitates monitoring of imbalance in the impulses from an incremental encoder.
motor currents, detection of weak motor
cables or imbalance in motor windings. 16-52 Feedback[Unit]
Range: Function:
16-46 Motor Phase V Current 0 Reference- [-999999.999 - View the feedback unit
Range: Function: FeedbackUnit* 999999.999 resulting from the selection
0 A* [0 - 10000 A] Shows the motor phase VRMS current. ReferenceFeed- of unit and scaling in
Facilitates monitoring of imbalance in the backUnit] parameter 3-00 Reference
motor currents, detection of weak motor Range,
cables or imbalance in motor windings. parameter 3-01 Reference/
Feedback Unit,
16-47 Motor Phase W Current parameter 3-02 Minimum
Reference, and
Range: Function:
parameter 3-03 Maximum
0 A* [0 - 10000 A] Shows the motor phase WRMS current. Reference.
Facilitates monitoring of imbalance in the
motor currents, detection of weak motor 16-53 Digi Pot Reference
cables or imbalance in motor windings.
Range: Function:
16-48 Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM] 0* [-200 - 200] View the contribution of the digital potenti-
ometer to the actual reference.
Range: Function:
0 RPM* [-30000 - 30000 This parameter specifies the 16-57 Feedback [RPM]
RPM] reference given to the frequency
Range: Function:
converter after the speed ramp.
0 RPM* [-30000 - Readout parameter where the actual motor
16-49 Current Fault Source 30000 RPM] RPM from the feedback source can be read
in both closed loop and open loop. The
Range: Function:
feedback source is selected by
0* [0 - 8] Value indicates source of current faults including parameter 7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source.
short circuit, overcurrent, and imbalance of supply
voltage (from left):
1–4 Inverter
5–8 Rectifier
0 No fault recorded

182 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.16.5 16-6* Inputs and Outputs 16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting

Option: Function:
16-60 Digital Input View the setting of input terminal 54.
Range: Function: [0] * Current
0* [0 - View the signal states from the active digital [1] Voltage
65535 ] inputs. Example: Input 18 corresponds to bit
number 5, 0 = no signal, 1 = connected signal. Bit 16-64 Analog Input 54
3 3
6 works in the opposite way, on = 0, off = 1 (Safe Range: Function:
Torque Off input). 0* [-20 - 20] View the actual value at input 54.

Bit 0 Digital input terminal 33.

16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA]
Bit 1 Digital input terminal 32.
Bit 2 Digital input terminal 29. Range: Function:
Bit 3 Digital input terminal 27. 0* [0 - 30] View the actual value at output 42 in mA. The
Bit 4 Digital input terminal 19. value shown reflects the selection in
Bit 5 Digital input terminal 18. parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output.

Bit 6 Digital input terminal 37.

16-66 Digital Output [bin]
Bit 7 Digital input VLT® General Purpose
I/O MCB 101 terminal X30/4. Range: Function:
Bit 8 Digital inputVLT®General Purpose 0* [0 - 15] View the binary value of all digital outputs.
I/O MCB 101 terminal X30/3.
16-67 Pulse Input #29 [Hz]
Bit 9 Digital input VLT® General Purpose
I/O MCB 101 terminal X30/2. Range: Function:
Bit 10–63 Reserved for future terminals. 0* [0 - 130000 ] View the actual frequency rate on terminal 29.

Table 3.29 Active Digital Inputs 16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz]
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 130000] View the actual value of the frequency applied
at terminal 33 as an impulse input.

16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz]

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 40000] View the actual value of pulses applied to
terminal 27 in digital output mode.

16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz]

Range: Function:
Illustration 3.63 Relay Settings 0* [0 - 40000] NOTICE
This parameter is available for FC 302
only.

16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting

View the actual value of pulses at terminal 29 in
Option: Function: digital output mode.
View the setting of input terminal 53.

[0] * Current
[1] Voltage

16-62 Analog Input 53

Range: Function:
0* [-20 - 20] View the actual value at input 53.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 183

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

16-71 Relay Output [bin] 16-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA]

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0* [0 - 511 ] View the settings of all relays. 0* [0 - 30 ] View the actual value at input X30/8 in mA.

16-78 Analog Out X45/1 [mA]

3 3 Range: Function:
0* [0 - 30] Shows the actual output value at terminal X45/1.
The value shown reflects the selection in
parameter 6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output.

16-79 Analog Out X45/3 [mA]

Range: Function:
Illustration 3.64 Relay Settings 0* [0 - 30] Shows the actual output value at terminal X45/3.
The value shown reflects the selection in
parameter 6-80 Terminal X45/3 Output.

16-72 Counter A
3.16.6 16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port
Range: Function:
0* [-2147483648 View the present value of counter A.
Parameters for reporting the bus references and control
- 2147483647] Counters are useful as comparator operands,
words.
see parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand.
Reset or change the value either via digital 16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1
inputs (parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs) Range: Function:
or by using an SLC action 0* [0 - View the 2-byte control word (CTW) received
(parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action). 65535 ] from the fieldbus master. Interpretation of the
control word depends on the fieldbus option
16-73 Counter B installed and the control word profile selected in
Range: Function: parameter 8-10 Control Profile.
0* [-2147483648 View the present value of counter B. For more information, refer to the relevant
- 2147483647] Counters are useful as comparator operands fieldbus manual.
(parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand).
Reset or change the value either via digital 16-82 Fieldbus REF 1
inputs (parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs) Range: Function:
or by using an SLC action 0* [-200 - 200 ] View the 2-byte word sent with the control
(parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action). word from the fieldbus master to set the
reference value.
16-74 Prec. Stop Counter For more information, refer to the relevant
Range: Function: fieldbus manual.
0* [0 - 2147483647] Returns the actual counter value of
precise counter (parameter 1-84 Precise 16-83 Fieldbus REF 2
Stop Counter Value). Range: Function:

16-75 Analog In X30/11

0 CustomRea- [-2147483647 - NOTICE
doutUnit2* 2147483647
This parameter is only
Range: Function: CustomRea-
valid with software
0* [-20 - 20 ] View the actual value at input X30/11 of VLT® doutUnit2]
version 48.XX.
General Purpose I/O MCB 101.

Shows the 32-bit position

16-76 Analog In X30/12 reference sent in PCD 2 and
Range: Function: PCD 3. In parameters related
0* [-20 - 20 ] View the actual value at input X30/12 of VLT® to PCD 2 and PCD 3, select
General Purpose I/O MCB 101. [1683] Fieldbus REF 2 for the
fieldbus which is used by the
frequency converter. The value
is in position units defined in

184 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

16-83 Fieldbus REF 2 3.16.7 16-9* Diagnosis Readouts

Range: Function:
parameter group 17-7* Position NOTICE
Scaling. When using MCT 10 Set-up Software, the readout
parameters can only be read online, that is as the actual
16-84 Comm. Option STW
Range: Function:
status. This means that the status is not stored in the
MCT 10 Set-up Software file.
3 3
0* [0 - 65535 ] Show the status word of the extended fieldbus
communication option. 16-90 Alarm Word
For more information, refer to the relevant Range: Function:
fieldbus manual. 0* [0 - 4294967295 ] Show the alarm word sent via the serial
communication port in hex code.
16-85 FC Port CTW 1
Range: Function: 16-91 Alarm Word 2
0* [0 - View the 2-byte control word (CTW) received Range: Function:
65535 ] from the fieldbus master. Interpretation of the 0* [0 - 4294967295] View the alarm word sent via the serial
control word depends on the fieldbus option communication port in hex code.
installed and the control word profile selected
in parameter 8-10 Control Profile. 16-92 Warning Word
Range: Function:
16-86 FC Port REF 1
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] Show the warning word sent via the
Range: Function:
serial communication port in hex code.
0* [-200 - View the 2-byte status word (STW) sent to the
200 ] fieldbus master. Interpretation of the status word 16-93 Warning Word 2
depends on the fieldbus option installed and the
Range: Function:
control word profile selected in
parameter 8-10 Control Profile. 0* [0 - 4294967295] View the warning word sent via the serial
communication port in hex code.
16-87 Bus Readout Alarm/Warning
16-94 Ext. Status Word
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535] Alarm and warning numbers in hex as shown in
the alarm log. The high byte contains the alarm, 0* [0 - 4294967295] Returns the extended warning word sent
the low byte contains the warning. The alarm via the serial communication port in hex
number is the first one that occurred after the code.
last reset.

16-89 Configurable Alarm/Warning Word

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535] This alarm/warning word is configured in
parameter 8-17 Configurable Alarm and
Warningword to match the actual requirements.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 185

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3.17 Parameters: 17-** Feedback 17-20 Protocol Selection

Option: Function:
More parameters to configure the feedback from the
[1] HIPERFACE Select [1] HIPERFACE if the encoder is absolute
encoder (VLT® Encoder Input MCB 102), resolver (VLT®
only.
Resolver Input MCB 103), or the frequency converter itself.
[2] EnDat
3 3 3.17.1 17-1* Inc. Enc. Interface [4] SSI

17-21 Resolution (Positions/Rev)

Parameters in this group configure the incremental
Range: Function:
interface of the VLT® Encoder Input MCB 102. Both the
Size [4 - Select the resolution of the absolute
incremental and absolute interfaces are active at the same
related* 1073741824] encoder, that is the number of
time.
counts per revolution.
The value depends on setting in
NOTICE parameter 17-20 Protocol Selection.
Do not use incremental encoders with PM motors. In a
closed-loop control, consider absolute encoders or 17-22 Multiturn Revolutions
resolvers. Range: Function:
1* [1 - 16777216] Select the number of multi-turn revolutions.
NOTICE Select value 1 for single-turn type encoders.
These parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is
running. 17-24 SSI Data Length
Range: Function:
17-10 Signal Type 13* [1 - 32] Set the number of bits for the SSI telegram. Select
Select the incremental type (A/B channel) of the encoder in use. 13 bits for single-turn encoders and 25 bits for
Find the information on the encoder datasheet. multi-turn encoders.
Select [0] None if the feedback sensor is an absolute encoder
only. 17-25 Clock Rate
Option: Function: Range: Function:
[0] None 260 kHz* [100 - 260 Set the SSI clock rate. With long
[1] * RS422 (5V TTL) kHz] encoder cables, the clock rate must be
reduced.
[2] Sinusoidal 1Vpp

17-11 Resolution (PPR) 17-26 SSI Data Format

Range: Function: Option: Function:
1024* [10 - 10000] Enter the resolution of the incremental [0] * Gray code
track, that is the number of pulses or [1] Binary code Set the data format of the SSI data.
periods per revolution.
17-34 HIPERFACE Baudrate

3.17.2 17-2* Abs. Enc. Interface Option: Function:

NOTICE
Parameters in this group configure the absolute interface This parameter cannot be adjusted while the
of the VLT® Encoder Input MCB 102. Both the incremental motor is running.
and absolute interfaces are active at the same time.
Select the baud rate of the attached encoder.
17-20 Protocol Selection
The parameter is only accessible when
Option: Function: parameter 17-20 Protocol Selection is set to [1]
NOTICE HIPERFACE.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while [0] 600
the motor is running. [1] 1200
[2] 2400
[0] * None Select [0] None if the feedback sensor is an [3] 4800
incremental encoder only. [4] * 9600
[5] 19200

186 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

17-34 HIPERFACE Baudrate 17-59 Resolver Interface

Option: Function: Activate the VLT® Resolver Input MCB 103 when the resolver
[6] 38400 parameters are selected.
To avoid damage to resolvers, adjust parameter 17-50 Poles and
parameter 17-53 Transformation Ratio before enabling this
3.17.3 17-5* Resolver Interface
parameter.
Option: Function:
3 3
This parameter group is used for setting parameters for the
VLT® Resolver Input MCB 103. [0] * Disabled
Usually, the resolver feedback is used as motor feedback [1] Enabled
from permanent magnet motors with parameter 1-01 Motor
Control Principle set to [3] Flux w/motor feedback. 3.17.4 17-6* Monitoring and Application
Resolver parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is
running. This parameter group is for selecting extra functions when
17-50 Poles VLT® Encoder Input MCB 102 or VLT® Resolver Input MCB
Range: Function: 103 is fitted into option slot B as speed feedback.
Monitoring and application parameters cannot be adjusted
2* [2 - 8] Set the pole number on the resolver.
while the motor is running.
The value is stated in the datasheet for resolvers.
17-60 Feedback Direction
17-51 Input Voltage Option: Function:
Range: Function: NOTICE
7 V* [2 - 8 V] Set the input voltage to the resolver. The This parameter cannot be adjusted
voltage is stated as RMS value. while the motor is running.
The value is stated in the datasheet for resolvers.

Change the detected encoder rotation

17-52 Input Frequency
direction without changing the wiring to
Range: Function: the encoder.
10 kHz* [2 - 15 kHz] Set the input frequency to the resolver.
[0] * Clockwise
The value is stated in the datasheet for
[1] Counter
resolvers.
clockwise

17-53 Transformation Ratio 17-61 Feedback Signal Monitoring

Range: Function: Select which reaction the frequency converter should take in
0.5* [0.1 - 1.1] Set the transformation ratio for the resolver. case a faulty encoder signal is detected.
The transformation ratio is: The encoder function in parameter 17-61 Feedback Signal
V Out Monitoring is an electrical check of the hardware circuit in the
T ratio =
V In encoder system.
The value is stated in the datasheet for
Option: Function:
resolvers.
[0] Disabled
[1] * Warning
17-56 Encoder Sim. Resolution
[2] Trip
Set the resolution and activate the encoder emulation function
[3] Jog
(generation of encoder signals from the measured position from
[4] Freeze Output
a resolver). Use this function to transfer the speed or position
[5] Max Speed
information from 1 frequency converter to another. To disable
[6] Switch to Open Loop
the function, select [0] Disabled.
[7] Select Setup 1
Option: Function:
[8] Select Setup 2
[0] * Disabled
[9] Select Setup 3
[1] 512
[10] Select Setup 4
[2] 1024
[11] Stop & Trip
[3] 2048
[12] Trip/Warning
[4] 4096
[13] Trip/Catch

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 187

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3.17.5 17-7* Position Scaling 17-73 Position Unit Denominator

See parameter 17-72 Position Unit Numerator.
Parameters in this group define how the frequency
Range: Function:
converter scales and handles the position values.
1* [-2000000000 - 2000000000]
17-70 Position Unit
3 3 Select the physical unit for showing the position values on the
17-74 Position Offset
Enter the absolute encoder position offset. Use this parameter to
LCP.
adjust the zero position of the encoder without physically
Option: Function:
moving the encoder.
[0] * pu Position unit. Set the physical unit for position values in
[1] m Meters. parameter 17-70 Position Unit.

[2] mm Millimeters. Range: Function:

0* [-2000000000 -
[3] inc Increments.
2000000000]
[4] ° Degrees.
17-75 Position Recovery at Power-up
[5] rad Radian.
Option: Function:
[6] % Percent.
NOTICE
[7] qc Quad count, which is ¼ of an encoder pulse when
This parameter is only available with software
using quadrature encoder signal.
version 48.XX.

17-71 Position Unit Scale

Select the actual position after power-up when using
Array [2] open loop or incremental encoders.
Enter the scaling factor for the position values. The scaling
[0] * Off The actual position is 0 after power-up.
function multiplies the readout values by 10x, where x is the
value of this parameter. For example, if x = 2, the value 5 is [1] On The frequency converter stores the actual position at
shown as 500. power down and uses it as the actual position when
The elements of the array are: powered up.

• Index 0 is the scaling factor for readout and settings of

position values in parameters or in a fieldbus. Index 1 17-76 Position Axis Mode
contains exceptions. Option: Function:
• Index 1 is the scaling factor for readout of position error NOTICE
(parameter 16-08 Position Error) and for the value of This parameter is only available with
parameter 3-08 On Target Window. software version 48.XX.

Range: Function:
Select the axis type for position counting.
0* [-3 - 3]
[0] Linear The motion is within a position range defined
17-72 Position Unit Numerator * Axis by parameter 3-06 Minimum Position and
This parameter is the numerator in the equation which defines parameter 3-07 Maximum Position.
the relation between 1 motor revolution and physical movement
[1] Rotary 0 Continuous motion, where the position changes
of machine.
- Max between 0 and parameter 3-07 Maximum
Par . 17 − 72
Position unit = × Motor revolutions Position. When passing the maximum position,
Par . 17 − 73
the reading restarts from 0.
Example:
Consider a turn table application. The motor makes 10 [2] Rotary This option is available only with software
revolutions when the table makes 1 revolution. The position unit Min - version 48.20 and newer.
is a degree. For this set-up, enter the following values: Max Continuous motion, where the position changes
between parameter 3-06 Minimum Position and
• Parameter 17-72 Position Unit Numerator = 360
parameter 3-07 Maximum Position. When passing
• Parameter 17-73 Position Unit Denominator = 10
the maximum position, the reading restarts from
Set the physical unit for position values in the minimum position.
parameter 17-70 Position Unit.
Range: Function:
1024* [-2000000000 -
2000000000]

188 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

17-77 Position Feedback Mode 3.17.6 17-8* Position Homing

Option: Function:
Parameters for configuring the homing function. The
NOTICE homing function creates a position reference in the
This parameter is only available with physical machine.
software version 48.2X and newer.
17-80 Homing Function 3 3
Select the mode for handling absolute encoders. Option: Function:
Select [0] Relative if the application requires to NOTICE
track the position when the position value
This parameter is only available with
exceeds the measuring range of the encoder, for
software version 48.XX.
example when using single turn encoders for
linear motion. Select [1] Absolute if the position
Select the homing function. The homing
values are always within the measuring range of
function creates a position reference in the
the encoder, for example when using a laser
physical machine. The selected homing function
distance measuring device.
can be activated with a digital input or a
[0] Relative The actual position is set to the absolute position fieldbus bit. Homing is not required when using
* read from the encoder at power-up, and then the absolute encoders. All homing functions except
frequency converter uses only the position [2] Home Sync Function require a start homing
changes for calculating the actual position. In this signal.
mode the actual position values are between
[0] No No homing function. The actual position is 0
-2147483648 and 2147483647 even when the
* Homing after power-up, independent of the physical
values exceed the measuring range of the
machine position.
encoder. To save and use the absolute position
values outside the measuring range of the [1] Home Actual position is set to the value of
encoder after power down, set Position parameter 17-82 Home Position, index 0.
parameter 17-75 Position Recovery at Power-up to
[2] Home Homing position is synchronized with the
[1] On. The position value is accurate if the
Sync homing sensor according to the setting in
encoder does not move by more than half of the
Function parameter 17-81 Home Sync Function.
encoder measuring range when the frequency
converter is powered down. [3] Analog Use the value of analog input 53 as the actual
Input 53 position. The value is scaled according to
[1] Absolute The frequency converter uses the absolute
parameter 3-06 Minimum Position and
position from the encoder as actual position
parameter 3-07 Maximum Position.
continuously. In this mode the actual position
values are between 0 and the maximum position [4] Analog Same as [3] Analog Input 53, but for analog
of the encoder. The maximum position is Input 54 input 54.
determined by the number of bits, for example, [9] Direction Perform a search for the homing sensor in the
the SSI encoder has 25 bits and its maximum with direction defined by the forward/reverse signal
value is 225 = 33554432. Set Sensor on a digital input or fieldbus, using the settings
parameter 3-07 Maximum Position to the maximum in parameter 17-83 Homing Speed and
value of the encoder scaled according to parameter 17-84 Homing Torque Limit. When the
parameter 7-94 Position PI Feedback Scale frequency converter detects the homing sensor
Numerator, parameter 7-95 Position PI Feebback input (configured in parameter group 5-1* Digital
Scale Denominator, parameter 17-72 Position Unit Inputs), it sets the actual position to the value of
Numerator, and parameter 17-73 Position Unit parameter 17-82 Home Position, index 0. The
Denominator. If the position exceeds the frequency converter then switches to the
measuring range of the encoder, the absolute positioning mode with a target defined in
position reference is lost. parameter 17-82 Home Position, index 0 + index
For example, use this option if there is a laser 1. If reversing is required for going to the target
distance-measuring device and there is a risk that position, set parameter 4-10 Motor Speed
some external objects may occasionally interfere Direction to [2] Both directions.
with the laser beam. In this case the absolute
[10] Forward Perform a search for the homing sensor in
positioning will work correctly when the external
with forward direction using the settings in
disturbance disappears.
sensor parameter 17-83 Homing Speed and
parameter 17-84 Homing Torque Limit. When the

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 189

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

17-80 Homing Function 17-81 Home Sync Function

Option: Function: Option: Function:
frequency converter detects the homing sensor • Index 0 if the homing sensor is
input (configured in parameter group 5-1* Digital approached in the forward direction.
Inputs), it sets the actual position to the value of
• Index 1 if the homing sensor is
3 3 parameter 17-82 Home Position, index 0. The
frequency converter then switches to the
approached in the reverse direction.

positioning mode with a target defined in [0] 1st time After power-up, the first detection of the
parameter 17-82 Home Position, index 0 + index * after power homing sensor triggers the function.
1. If reversing is required for going to the target [1] 1st t. After power-up, the first detection of the
position, set parameter 4-10 Motor Speed aft.pow. homing sensor in the forward direction
Direction to [2] Both directions. forward triggers the function.
[11] Reverse Same as [10] Forward with sensor, but with the [2] 1st t. After power-up, the first detection of the
with search in the reverse direction. Set aft.pow. homing sensor in the reverse direction triggers
sensor parameter 4-10 Motor Speed Direction to [1] reverse the function.
Counter clockwise or [2] Both directions.
[3] 1st time After start, the first detection of the homing
[12] Forward With this option selected, the frequency after start sensor triggers the function.
Torque converter does the following:
[4] 1st t. aft.str. After start, the first detection of the homing
Limit 1. Runs forward with the set homing
forward sensor in the forward direction triggers the
speed (parameter 17-83 Homing Speed).
function.
2. When the torque reaches the limit set
[5] 1st t. aft.str. After start, the first detection of the homing
in parameter 17-84 Homing Torque
reverse sensor in the reverse direction triggers the
Limit, and the speed is lower than the
function.
value in parameter 3-05 On Reference
Window, the actual position is set to [6] Every time Every detection of the homing sensor triggers
the value of parameter 17-82 Home the function.
Position, index 0.
[7] Every time Every detection of the homing sensor in the
3. The frequency converter positions to forward forward direction triggers the function.
the target defined in
[8] Every time Every detection of the homing sensor in the
parameter 17-82 Home Position, index 0
reverse reverse direction triggers the function.
+ index 1.

Only available in flux closed loop. 17-82 Home Position

See also parameter 17-85 Homing Timout. Range: Function:
[13] Reverse Same as [12] Forward Torque Limit but in reverse 0* NOTICE
Torque direction. Set parameter 4-10 Motor Speed [-2147483648
This parameter is only available with
Limit Direction to [1] Counter clockwise or [2] Both - 2147483647]
software version 48.XX.
directions. Only available in flux closed loop.

Array [2]
17-81 Home Sync Function
Option: Function: Set the homing position in position units
defined in parameter group 17-7* Position
NOTICE Scaling. This is an array parameter with 2
This parameter is only available with elements.
software version 48.XX. Indices in this parameter have a different
meaning in the following situations:
Select the trigger for the homing synchroni- • If parameter 17-80 Homing Function
zation function. Only active when [2] Home is set to options [10]–[13], index 0 of
Sync Function is selected in this parameter defines the actual
parameter 17-80 Homing Function. The homing home position and index 1 is used
synchronization function sets the actual as the homing offset, which defines
position to the value of parameter 17-82 Home where to stop.
Position:
• If parameter 17-80 Homing Function
is set to [2] Home Sync Function, and
parameter 17-81 Home Sync Function

190 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

17-82 Home Position 3.17.7 17-9* Position Configuration

Range: Function:
is set to [0] 1st time after power, [3] 17-90 Absolute Position Mode
1st time after start, or [6] Every time, Option: Function:
then indices have the following
NOTICE
meaning:
This parameter is only available with 3 3
- Index 0 is the homing software version 48.XX.
position when the homing
sensor is approached in the
Select the behavior when executing consecutive
forward direction.
absolute positioning commands.
- Index 1 is the homing
[0] * Standard When the frequency converter receives a new
position when the homing
absolute positioning command while the
sensor is approached in the
previous positioning command is still in progress,
reverse direction.
it executes the new positioning command
immediately without completing the previous
17-83 Homing Speed
positioning.
Range: Function:
[1] Buffered When the frequency converter receives a new
150 [-32000 - NOTICE absolute positioning command while the
RPM* 32000 RPM]
This parameter is only available previous positioning command is still in progress,
with software version 48.XX. it completes the previous command first and
then executes the new positioning command.
Enter the speed for the homing Only 1 positioning command can be buffered at
functions (parameter 17-80 Homing a time.
Function, options [10]–[13]).
17-91 Relative Position Mode
17-84 Homing Torque Limit Option: Function:
Range: Function: NOTICE
160 %* [0 - NOTICE This parameter is only available with
500 %] software version 48.XX.
This parameter is only available with
software version 48.XX.
Select which reference to use for relative
Enter the torque limit for the homing positioning commands.
functions (parameter 17-80 Homing Function,
[0] Target The frequency converter uses the latest
options [10]–[13]).
* Position target position as reference for the new
positioning command. The frequency
17-85 Homing Timout converter executes the new positioning
Range: Function: command immediately without completing
60 [0.1 - NOTICE the previous positioning.
s* 6000.0 s] The new target is calculated with the
This parameter is only available with
formula: New target = previous target +
software version 48.XX.
position reference.

Enter the timeout for the homing functions [1] Buffered The frequency converter uses the latest
(parameter 17-80 Homing Function, options [10]– Target Pos. target position as reference for the new
[13]). If the frequency converter does not detect positioning command. The frequency
the homing sensor or does not reach the torque converter executes the new positioning
limit within the timeout time, it aborts the command when it completes the previous
homing process and trips. command. Only 1 positioning command can
be buffered at a time.

[2] Commanded The frequency converter uses the

Position commanded position as reference for the
new positioning command. The frequency
converter executes the new positioning

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 191

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

17-91 Relative Position Mode 17-93 Master Offset Selection

Option: Function: Option: Function:
command immediately without completing synchronization start. The offset command is
the previous positioning. executed at every new synchronization start.
The new target is calculated with the
[1] Absolute The frequency converter adds the master offset
3 3 formula: New target = commanded position
+ position reference.
(parameter 3-26 Master Offset) to the position at
synchronization start. The offset command is
[3] Actual The frequency converter uses the actual executed with every enable master offset signal.
Position position as reference for the new
[2] Relative The frequency converter adds the master offset
positioning command. The frequency
(parameter 3-26 Master Offset) to the actual
converter executes the new positioning
synchronization position with every enable
command immediately without completing
master offset signal.
the previous positioning.
The new target is calculated with the [3] Selection The master offset (parameter 3-26 Master Offset)
formula: New target = actual position + is relative or absolute depending on the relative
position reference. position signal on a digital input or the fieldbus
bit.
17-92 Position Control Selection [4] Relative The master offset (parameter 3-26 Master Offset)
Option: Function: Home is relative to the home sensor signal. The offset

NOTICE Sensor command is executed with the next home

sensor signal when the enable master offset
This parameter is only available with
signal is active.
software version 48.XX.
[5] Relative The master offset (parameter 3-26 Master Offset)
This parameter allows to select the position Touch is relative to the touch sensor signal. The offset
control mode without using a digital input Sensor command is executed with the next touch
signal or a fieldbus bit. sensor signal when the enable master offset
signal is active.
[0] * No Use a digital input signal or a fieldbus bit to
operation activate the enable reference mode and the 17-94 Rotary Absolute Direction
relative position mode.
Option: Function:
[1] Relative
Position
This option selects the relative position mode
permanently. All positioning commands are
NOTICE
This parameter is available only with
considered to be relative. Toggling option
software version 48.XX.
[113] Enable Reference on a digital input or the
enable reference fieldbus bit triggers relative
positioning. Select the rotation direction for the absolute
position mode when parameter 17-76 Position
[2] Enable This option selects the enable reference mode
Axis Mode is set to [1] Rotary Axis. To use this
Reference permanently. Any new position reference
parameter, set parameter 4-10 Motor Speed
triggers an absolute positioning command
Direction to [2] Both directions.
with the selected position reference as target.
This option cannot be used with relative [0] * Shortest The frequency converter selects the rotation
positioning. direction that provides the shortest route to the
target position.
17-93 Master Offset Selection [1] Forward Move to the target position in the forward
Option: Function: direction.

NOTICE [2] Reverse Move to the target position in the reverse

This parameter is available only with direction.
software version 48.XX. [3] Direction The forward/reverse signal on a digital input or
fieldbus determines the rotation direction.
Select the behavior of the master offset in
synchronization mode.

[0] Absolute The frequency converter adds the master offset

* Enabled (parameter 3-26 Master Offset) to the position at

192 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.18 Parameters: 18-** Data Readouts 2 3.18.1 18-4* PGIO Data Readouts
18-27 Safe Opt. Est. Speed Parameters for configuring the readout of VLT®
Range: Function: Programmable I/O MCB 115.
0 RPM* [-30000 - 30000 Shows the speed that the frequency
18-43 Analog Out X49/7
RPM] converter estimates and sends to
VLT® Safety Option MCB 15X.
Shows the actual value at output of terminal X49/7 in V or mA. 3 3
The value reflects the selection in parameter 36-40 Terminal X49/7
Analogue Output.
18-28 Safe Opt. Meas. Speed
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 30]
0 RPM* [-30000 - 30000 Shows the speed measured by
RPM] VLT® Safety Option MCB 15X. 18-44 Analog Out X49/9
Shows the actual value at output of terminal X49/9 in V or mA.
18-29 Safe Opt. Speed Error The value reflects the selection in parameter 36-50 Terminal X49/9
Range: Function: Analogue Output.
0 RPM* [-30000 - 30000 Shows the difference between the Range: Function:
RPM] speed measured by VLT® Safety 0* [0 - 30]
Option MCB 15X and the speed
estimated by frequency converter. 18-45 Analog Out X49/11
Shows the actual value at output of terminal X49/11 in V or mA.
18-36 Analog Input X48/2 [mA] The value reflects the selection in parameter 36-60 Terminal
Range: Function: X49/11 Analogue Output.
0* [-20 - 20] View the actual current measured at input X48/2. Range: Function:
0* [0 - 30]
18-37 Temp. Input X48/4
Range: Function: 3.18.2 18-5* Active Alarms/Warnings
0* [-500 - View the actual temperature measured at input
500] X48/4. The temperature unit is based on the The parameters in this group show the numbers of
selection in parameter 35-00 Term. X48/4 currently active alarms or warnings.
Temperature Unit.
18-55 Active Alarm Numbers
18-38 Temp. Input X48/7 This parameter contains an array of up to 20 alarms that are
Range: Function: currently active. The value 0 means no alarm.

0* [-500 - View the actual temperature measured at input Range: Function:

500] X48/7. The temperature unit is based on the 0* [0 - 65535]
selection in parameter 35-02 Term. X48/7
18-56 Active Warning Numbers
Temperature Unit.
This parameter contains an array of up to 20 warnings that are
18-39 Temp. Input X48/10 currently active. The value 0 means no warning.

Range: Function: Range: Function:

0* [-500 - View the actual temperature measured at input 0* [0 - 65535]
500] X48/10. The temperature unit is based on the
18-60 Digital Input 2
selection in parameter 35-04 Term. X48/10
Temperature Unit. Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535] Shows the signal states from the active digital
inputs.
• 0 = No signal.
• 1 = Connected signal.

18-70 Mains Voltage

Range: Function:
0 V* [0 - 1000 V] Shows the mains line-to-line voltage.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 193

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

18-71 Mains Frequency

Range: Function:
0 Hz* [-100 - 100 Hz] Shows the mains frequency.

18-72 Mains Imbalance

3 3 Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Shows the maximum imbalance for the three
mains line-to-line measurements.

18-75 Rectifier DC Volt.

Range: Function:
0 V* [0 - 10000 V] Shows the DC voltage measured on the
rectifier module.

18-90 Process PID Error

Range: Function:
0 %* [-200 - 200 %] Give the present error value used by the
process PID controller.

18-91 Process PID Output

Range: Function:
0 %* [-200 - 200 %] Give the present raw output value from
the process PID controller.

18-92 Process PID Clamped Output

Range: Function:
0 %* [-200 - 200 %] Give the present output value from the
process PID controller after the clamp
limits have been observed.

18-93 Process PID Gain Scaled Output

Range: Function:
0 %* [-200 - Give the present output value from the
200 %] process PID controller after the clamp
limits have been observed, and the
resulting value has been gain scaled.

194 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.19 Parameters: 19-** Application

Parameters
Parameters in this group are available when VLT® Motion
Control Option MCO 305 is installed in the frequency
converter. For information about the option, see the VLT®
Motion Control Option MCO 305 Operating Instructions. 3 3

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 195

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3.20 Parameters: 30-** Special Features 30-00 Wobble Mode

Option: Function:
3.20.1 30-0* Wobble Function
[3] Rel. Freq.,
Up/ Down
The wobble function is primarily used for synthetic yarn
Time

3 3
winding applications. The wobble option is installed in the
frequency converter controlling the traverse frequency 30-01 Wobble Delta Frequency [Hz]
converter. The yarn moves back and forth in a diamond Range: Function:
pattern across the surface of the yarn package. To prevent
5 Hz* [0 - The delta frequency determines the magnitude of
a build-up of yarn at the same points at the surface, this
25 Hz] the wobble frequency. The delta frequency is
pattern must be altered. The wobble option can
superimposed on the center frequency.
accomplish this by continuously varying the traverse
Parameter 30-01 Wobble Delta Frequency [Hz]
velocity in a programmable cycle. The wobble function is
contains both the positive and negative delta
created by superimposing a delta frequency around a
frequency. The setting of parameter 30-01 Wobble
center frequency. To compensate for the inertia in the
Delta Frequency [Hz] must thus not exceed the
system, a quick frequency jump can be included. Suitable
setting of the center frequency. The initial ramp-
for elastic yarn applications, the option features a
up time from standstill until the wobble sequence
randomized wobble ratio.
runs is determined in chapter 3.4.2 3-1* References.

Frequency
30-02 Wobble Delta Frequency [%]
175ZB001.10

Par. 30-07: WOBB TIME

[Hz]
Par. 30-06: JUMP TIME
Par. 30-04 [Hz]: JUMP FREQ
Par. 30-09 [%] : JUMP FREQ
Range: Function:
Par. 30-01 [Hz]: DELTA FREQ.
Par. 30-02 [%]: DELTA FREQ.
(Par. 30-03) 25 %* [0 - The delta frequency can also be expressed as
Par. 30-01 [Hz] 100 %] percentage of the center frequency and can
Par. 30-02 [%]
(Par. 30-03:)
Par. 30-*1: RAMP UP Par. 30-09: RANDOM FUNC thus be maximum 100%. The function is the
CENTER FREQ Par 30-11: RANDOM MAX
Par 30-12: RANDOM MIN same as for parameter 30-01 Wobble Delta
TDOWN TUP
Par. 30-10: [RATIO TUP/ TDOWN ] Frequency [Hz].
Par. 30-08: [INDEPENDENT UP and DOWN]

Time [s]
30-03 Wobble Delta Freq. Scaling Resource
Illustration 3.65 Wobble Function
Option: Function:
Select which frequency converter
30-00 Wobble Mode input should be used to scale the
delta frequency setting.
Option: Function:
[0] * No function
NOTICE [1] Analog Input 53
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
[2] Analog Input 54
the motor is running.
[3] Frequency input 29 FC 302 only.

The standard speed open-loop mode in [4] Frequency input 33

parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is extended [7] Analog Input X30/11
with a wobble function. In this parameter, it is [8] Analog Input X30/12
possible to select which method to be used for [15] Analog Input X48/2
the wobbler. Set the parameters as absolute
30-04 Wobble Jump Frequency [Hz]
values (direct frequencies) or as relative values
(percentage of other parameter). Set the Range: Function:
wobble cycle time as an absolute value or as 0 Hz* [0 - The jump frequency is used to compensate for
independent up and down times. When using 20.0 Hz] the inertia in the traverse system. If a jump in
an absolute cycle time, the up and down times the output frequency is required at the
are configured through the wobble ratio. boundaries of the wobble sequence, the
frequency jump is set in this parameter. If the
[0] Abs. Freq.,
traverse system has a very high inertia, a high
* Abs. Time
jump frequency may create a torque limit
[1] Abs. Freq.,
warning or trip or an overvoltage warning or
Up/ Down
trip. This parameter can only be changed in stop
Time
mode.
[2] Rel. Freq.,
Abs. Time

196 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

30-05 Wobble Jump Frequency [%] 30-19 Wobble Delta Freq. Scaled
Range: Function: Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - The jump frequency can also be expressed as 0 Hz* [0 - 1000 Hz] Readout parameter. View the actual
100 %] percentage of the center frequency. The wobble delta frequency after scaling has
function is the same as for been applied.
parameter 30-04 Wobble Jump Frequency [Hz].
3 3
30-06 Wobble Jump Time 3.20.3 30-2* Adv. Start Adjust
Range: Function:
30-20 High Starting Torque Time [s]
Size related* [ 0.005 - 5.000 s]
Range: Function:
30-07 Wobble Sequence Time Size related* [0 - 60 s] NOTICE
Range: Function: This parameter is available for FC
10 s* [1 - 1000 s] This parameter determines the wobble 302 only.
sequence period. This parameter can only be
changed in stop mode.
High starting torque time for PM motor
Wobble time = tup + tdown
in flux control principle without
feedback.
30-08 Wobble Up/ Down Time
Range: Function: 30-21 High Starting Torque Current [%]
5 s* [0.1 - 1000 s] Defines the individual up and down times Range: Function:
for each wobble cycle.
Size related* [0 - NOTICE
200.0 %]
30-09 Wobble Random Function This parameter is available for
FC 302 only.
Option: Function:
[0] * Off
High starting torque current for PM
[1] On
motor in VVC+ and flux mode
without feedback.
3.20.2 Center Frequency
30-22 Locked Rotor Protection
Use parameter group 3-1* References to set the center Option: Function:
frequency.
NOTICE
30-10 Wobble Ratio This parameter is available for FC 302 only.
Range: Function:
1* [0.1 - 10] If the ratio 0.1 is selected: tdown is 10 times Available for PM motors only, in flux sensorless mode
greater than tup. and VVC+ open-loop mode.
If the ratio 10 is selected: tup is 10 times greater
[0] Off
than tdown.
[1] On Protects the motor from the locked rotor condition. The
control algorithm detects a possible locked rotor
30-11 Wobble Random Ratio Max.
condition in the motor and trips the frequency
Range: Function: converter to protect the motor.
10* [ par. 17-53 - 10] Enter the maximum allowed wobble
ratio. 30-23 Locked Rotor Detection Time [s]
Range: Function:
30-12 Wobble Random Ratio Min.
Size related* [0.05 - 1 s] Time period for detecting the locked
Range: Function: rotor condition. A low parameter
0.1* [ 0.1 - par. 30-11] Enter the minimum allowed wobble value leads to faster detection.
ratio.
30-24 Locked Rotor Detection Speed Error [%]
Range: Function:
25 %* [0 - 100 %]

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 197

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

30-25 Light Load Delay [s] 3.20.5 30-8* Compatibility (I)

Use this parameter when the light load detection is active. Enter
the delay before the frequency converter activates the light load 30-80 d-axis Inductance (Ld)
detection when the motor speed reaches the reference in Range: Function:
parameter 30-27 Light Load Speed [%].
Size [0.000 - Enter the value of the d-axis
3 3 Range:
0.000 s* [0.000 - 10.000 s]
Function: related* 1000.000 mH] inductance. Obtain the value from
the permanent magnet motor
datasheet. The d-axis inductance
30-26 Light Load Current [%] cannot be found by performing an
Use this parameter when the light load detection is active. Enter AMA.
the reference current, which is used to determine if the motion
of the lift is obstructed and if the direction is to be changed. The 30-81 Brake Resistor (ohm)
value is a percentage of nominal motor current in Range: Function:
parameter 1-24 Motor Current.
Size [ 0.01 - Set the brake resistor value in Ω. This
Range: Function: related* 65535.00 value is used for monitoring the power
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Ohm] to the brake resistor in
parameter 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring.
30-27 Light Load Speed [%]
This parameter is only active in
Use this parameter when the light load detection is active. Enter frequency converters with an integral
the reference speed during the light load detection. The value is dynamic brake.
a percentage of nominal motor speed in parameter 1-25 Motor
Nominal Speed. For standard asynchronous motors, the 30-83 Speed PID Proportional Gain
synchronous speed is used instead of parameter 1-25 Motor
Range: Function:
Nominal Speed due to slip.
Size related* [0 - 1] Enter the speed controller proportional
Range: Function: gain. Quick control is obtained at high
0 %* [0 - 100 %] amplification. However, if amplification is
too great, the process may become
3.20.4 30-5* Unit Configuration unstable.

Parameters in this group allow to configure the operation 30-84 Process PID Proportional Gain
of internal units that communicate with the frequency Range: Function:
converter. The settings affect the behavior of hardware Size related* [0 - 10] Enter the process controller proportional
components inside the frequency converter. gain. Quick control is obtained at high
amplification. However, if amplification is
30-50 Heat Sink Fan Mode
too great, the process may become
Option: Function: unstable.
[0] Simple Profile NOTICE
This parameter is available in FC 302
only.

Select how the heat sink fan responds to

operating conditions. Use
parameter 14-52 Fan Control to control the
minimum fan speed.
The simple profile is a passive fan control
based on the current temperature state of
the frequency converter. This option
represents the classic operating behavior of
fans.

[1] Reduced
Acoustics
[2] Standard
[3] Cooler
Operation

198 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.21 Parameters: 32-** MCO Basic Settings

Parameters in this group are available when VLT® Motion
Control Option MCO 305 is installed in the frequency
converter. For information about the option, see the VLT®
Motion Control Option MCO 305 Operating Instructions.

3.22 Parameters: 33-** MCO Advanced

3 3
Settings
Parameters in this group are available when VLT® Motion
Control Option MCO 305 is installed in the frequency
converter. For information about the option, see the VLT®
Motion Control Option MCO 305 Operating Instructions.

3.23 Parameters: 34-** MCO Data Readouts

Parameters in this group are available when VLT® Motion
Control Option MCO 305 is installed in the frequency
converter. For information about the option, see the VLT®
Motion Control Option MCO 305 Operating Instructions.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 199

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3.24 Parameters: 35-** Sensor Input Option 35-06 Temperature Sensor Alarm Function
Select the alarm function:
Parameters for configuring the functionality of VLT® Sensor
Option: Function:
Input MCB 114.
[0] Off
[2] Stop
3.24.1 35-0* Temp. Input Mode (MCB 114)
3 3 [5] * Stop and trip
[27] Forced stop and trip
35-00 Term. X48/4 Temperature Unit
Select the unit to be used with temperature input X48/4 settings
and readouts:
3.24.2 35-1* Temp. Input X48/4 (MCB 114)
Option: Function:
35-14 Term. X48/4 Filter Time Constant
[60] * °C
Range: Function:
[160] °F
0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 Enter the filter time constant. This is a
35-01 Term. X48/4 Input Type s] first-order digital low-pass filter time
View the temperature sensor type detected at input X48/4: constant for suppressing electrical noise
in terminal X48/4. A high time constant
Option: Function:
value improves dampening but also
[0] * Not Connected
increases the time delay through the
[1] PT100 2-wire
filter.
[3] PT1000 2-wire
[5] PT100 3-wire 35-15 Term. X48/4 Temp. Monitor
[7] PT1000 3-wire
This parameter facilitates the possibility of enabling or disabling
35-02 Term. X48/7 Temperature Unit the temperature monitor for terminal X48/4. Set the temperature
limits in parameter 35-16 Term. X48/4 Low Temp. Limit and
Select the unit to be used with temperature input X48/7 settings
parameter 35-17 Term. X48/4 High Temp. Limit.
and readouts:
Option: Function:
Option: Function:
[0] * Disabled
[60] * °C
[1] Enabled
[160] °F
35-16 Term. X48/4 Low Temp. Limit
35-03 Term. X48/7 Input Type
Range: Function:
View the temperature sensor type detected at input X48/7:
Size related* [ -50 - par. Enter the minimum temperature
Option: Function:
35-17] reading that is expected for
[0] * Not Connected normal operation of the
[1] PT100 2-wire temperature sensor at terminal
[3] PT1000 2-wire X48/4.
[5] PT100 3-wire
[7] PT1000 3-wire 35-17 Term. X48/4 High Temp. Limit
Range: Function:
35-04 Term. X48/10 Temperature Unit
Size related* [ par. 35-16 - Enter the maximum temperature
Select the unit to be used with temperature input X48/10
204] reading that is expected for
settings and readouts:
normal operation of the
Option: Function: temperature sensor at terminal
[60] * °C X48/4.
[160] °F

35-05 Term. X48/10 Input Type 3.24.3 35-2* Temp. Input X48/7 (MCB 114)
View the temperature sensor type detected at input X48/10:
Option: Function: 35-24 Term. X48/7 Filter Time Constant
[0] * Not Connected Range: Function:
[1] PT100 2-wire 0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 Enter the filter time constant. This is a
[3] PT1000 2-wire s] first-order digital low-pass filter time
[5] PT100 3-wire constant for suppressing electrical noise
[7] PT1000 3-wire

200 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

35-24 Term. X48/7 Filter Time Constant 35-36 Term. X48/10 Low Temp. Limit
Range: Function: Range: Function:
in terminal X48/7. A high time constant Size related* [ -50 - par. Enter the minimum temperature
value improves dampening but also 35-37] reading that is expected for
increases the time delay through the normal operation of the
filter. temperature sensor at terminal
X48/10.
3 3
35-25 Term. X48/7 Temp. Monitor
This parameter facilitates the possibility of enabling or disabling 35-37 Term. X48/10 High Temp. Limit
the temperature monitor for terminal X48/7. Set the temperature Range: Function:
limits in parameter 35-26 Term. X48/7 Low Temp. Limit and Size related* [ par. 35-36 - Enter the maximum temperature
parameter 35-27 Term. X48/7 High Temp. Limit. 204] reading that is expected for
Option: Function: normal operation of the
[0] * Disabled temperature sensor at terminal
[1] Enabled X48/10.

35-26 Term. X48/7 Low Temp. Limit

3.24.5 35-4* Analog Input X48/2 (MCB 114)
Range: Function:
Size related* [ -50 - par. Enter the minimum temperature
35-42 Term. X48/2 Low Current
35-27] reading that is expected for
normal operation of the Range: Function:
temperature sensor at terminal 4 mA* [ 0 - par. Enter the current (mA) that corresponds to
X48/7. 35-43 mA] the low reference value, set in
parameter 35-44 Term. X48/2 Low Ref./Feedb.
35-27 Term. X48/7 High Temp. Limit Value. The value must be more than 2 mA to
Range: Function: activate the live zero timeout function in
parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function.
Size related* [ par. 35-26 - Enter the maximum temperature
204] reading that is expected for
35-43 Term. X48/2 High Current
normal operation of the
temperature sensor at terminal Range: Function:
X48/7. 20 mA* [ par. 35-42 - Enter the current (mA) that corresponds
20 mA] to the high reference value (set in
parameter 35-45 Term. X48/2 High Ref./
3.24.4 35-3* Temp. Input X48/10 (MCB 114) Feedb. Value).

35-34 Term. X48/10 Filter Time Constant 35-44 Term. X48/2 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Range: Function: Range: Function:
0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 Enter the filter time constant. This is a 0* [-999999.999 - Enter the reference or feedback value (in
s] first-order digital low-pass filter time 999999.999] RPM, Hz, bar, and so on) that corresponds
constant for suppressing electrical noise to the voltage or current set in
in terminal X48/10. A high time constant parameter 35-42 Term. X48/2 Low Current.
value improves dampening but also
increases the time delay through the 35-45 Term. X48/2 High Ref./Feedb. Value
filter. Range: Function:
100* [-999999.999 - Enter the reference or feedback value
35-35 Term. X48/10 Temp. Monitor
999999.999] (in RPM, Hz, bar, and so on) that
This parameter facilitates the possibility of enabling or disabling corresponds to the voltage or current
the temperature monitor for terminal X48/10. Set the set in parameter 35-43 Term. X48/2 High
temperature limits in parameter 35-36 Term. X48/10 Low Temp. Current.
Limit/parameter 35-37 Term. X48/10 High Temp. Limit.
Option: Function:
[0] * Disabled
[1] Enabled

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 201

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

35-46 Term. X48/2 Filter Time Constant

Range: Function:
0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 Enter the filter time constant. This is a
s] first-order digital low-pass filter time
constant for suppressing electrical noise

3 3 in terminal X48/2. A high time constant

value improves dampening but also
increases the time delay through the
filter.

202 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.25 Parameters: 36-** Programmable I/O 36-40 Terminal X49/7 Analogue Output
Option Option: Function:
[104] Torque rel to limit
Parameters for configuring VLT® Programmable I/O MCB
[105] Torq relate to rated
115.
[106] Power
Parameters in this group are active only when VLT®
Programmable I/O MCB 115 is installed.
[107]
[108]
Speed
Torque
3 3
[109] Max Out Freq
3.25.1 36-0* I/O Mode [139] Bus ctrl. 0-20 mA
[141] Bus ctrl 0-20mA t.o.
VLT® Programmable I/O MCB 115 has 3 analog inputs and
3 configurable analog outputs. Use the parameters in this 36-42 Terminal X49/7 Min. Scale
group to configure the mode of the analog outputs. Match the minimum output of terminal X49/7 with a required
Terminals can be programmed to provide voltage, current, value. The required value is defined as a percentage of the value
or digital output. selected in parameter 36-40 Terminal X49/7 Analogue Output. To
know more about how this parameter works, see
36-03 Terminal X49/7 Mode
parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale.
Select the output mode of analog terminal X49/7.
The following example describes how the frequency converter
Option: Function: uses this parameter.
[0] * Voltage 0-10V Example
[1] Voltage 2-10V Parameter 36-03 Terminal X49/7 Mode=[0] Voltage 0-10 V
[2] Current 0-20mA Parameter 36-40 Terminal X49/7 Analogue Output=[100] Output
[3] Current 4-20mA frequency
Parameter 4-19 Max Output Frequency=200 Hz
36-04 Terminal X49/9 Mode Application requirement: If the output frequency is lower than 20
Select the output mode of analog terminal X49/9. Hz, the output of terminal X49/7 should be 0 V. To fulfil the
example requirement, enter 10% in parameter 36-42 Terminal
Option: Function:
X49/7 Min. Scale.
[0] * Voltage 0-10V
[1] Voltage 2-10V Range: Function:
[2] Current 0-20mA 0 %* [0 - 200 %]
[3] Current 4-20mA
36-43 Terminal X49/7 Max. Scale
36-05 Terminal X49/11 Mode Range: Function:
Select the output mode of analog terminal X49/11. 100 %* [0 - 200 %]

Option: Function: 36-44 Terminal X49/7 Bus Control

[0] * Voltage 0-10V
This parameter contains the output level of terminal X49/7 if the
[1] Voltage 2-10V terminal is controlled by a fieldbus.
[2] Current 0-20mA
Range: Function:
[3] Current 4-20mA
0 %* [0 - 100 %]

3.25.2 36-4* Output X49/7 36-45 Terminal X49/7 Timeout Preset

The frequency converter sends the value of this parameter to the
VLT® Programmable I/O MCB 115 has 3 analog inputs and output terminal when the terminal is controlled by a fieldbus
3 configurable analog outputs. Use the parameters in this and a timeout is detected.
group to configure the mode of the analog outputs. Range: Function:
Select the functionality of terminal X49/7. 0 %* [0 - 100 %]

36-40 Terminal X49/7 Analogue Output

Option: Function:
[0] * No operation
[100] Output frequency
[101] Reference
[102] Feedback
[103] Motor Current

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 203

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3.25.3 36-5* Output X49/9 3.25.4 36-6* Output X49/11

VLT® Programmable I/O MCB 115 has 3 analog inputs and VLT® Programmable I/O MCB 115 has 3 analog inputs and
3 configurable analog outputs. Use the parameters in this 3 configurable analog outputs. Use the parameters in this
group to configure the mode of the analog outputs. group to configure the mode of the analog outputs.

3 3 36-50 Terminal X49/9 Analogue Output 36-60 Terminal X49/11 Analogue Output
Select the functionality of terminal X49/9. Select the functionality of terminal X49/11.
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[0] * No operation [0] * No operation
[100] Output frequency [100] Output frequency
[101] Reference [101] Reference
[102] Feedback [102] Feedback
[103] Motor Current [103] Motor Current
[104] Torque rel to limit [104] Torque rel to limit
[105] Torq relate to rated [105] Torq relate to rated
[106] Power [106] Power
[107] Speed [107] Speed
[108] Torque [108] Torque
[109] Max Out Freq [109] Max Out Freq
[139] Bus ctrl. 0-20 mA [139] Bus ctrl. 0-20 mA
[141] Bus ctrl 0-20mA t.o. [141] Bus ctrl 0-20mA t.o.

36-52 Terminal X49/9 Min. Scale 36-62 Terminal X49/11 Min. Scale
Match the minimum output of terminal X49/9 with a required Match the minimum output of terminal X49/11 with a required
value. For more information, see parameter 36-42 Terminal X49/7 value. For more information, see parameter 36-42 Terminal X49/7
Min. Scale. Min. Scale.
Range: Function: Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 200 %] 0 %* [0 - 200 %]

36-53 Terminal X49/9 Max. Scale 36-63 Terminal X49/11 Max. Scale
Scale the maximum output of terminal X49/9. For more Scale the maximum output of terminal X49/11. For more
information, see parameter 36-43 Terminal X49/7 Max. Scale. information, see parameter 36-43 Terminal X49/7 Max. Scale.
Range: Function: Range: Function:
100 %* [0 - 200 %] 100 %* [0 - 200 %]

36-54 Terminal X49/9 Bus Control 36-64 Terminal X49/11 Bus Control
This parameter contains the output level of terminal X49/9 if the This parameter contains the output level of terminal X49/11 if
terminal is controlled by a fieldbus. the terminal is controlled by a fieldbus.
Range: Function: Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %] 0 %* [0 - 100 %]

36-55 Terminal X49/9 Timeout Preset 36-65 Terminal X49/11 Timeout Preset
The frequency converter sends the value of this parameter to the The frequency converter sends the value of this parameter to the
output terminal when the terminal is controlled by a fieldbus output terminal when the terminal is controlled by a fieldbus
and a timeout is detected. and a timeout is detected.
Range: Function: Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %] 0 %* [0 - 100 %]

204 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3.26 Parameters: 42-** Safety Functions

The parameters in group 42 are available when a safety
option is installed in the frequency converter. For
information about the safety related parameters, see the
operating instructions for the safety options:
• Safety Option MCB 150/151 Operating Instructions. 3 3
• Safety Option MCB 152 Operating Instructions.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 205

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

3.27 Parameters: 43-** Unit Readouts 43-01 Auxiliary Temp.

Range: Function:
The parameters in this group provide readouts for
monitoring the operation of frequency converters in the
0 °C* [-128 - NOTICE
127 °C]
D–F enclosure sizes. This parameter is valid for FC 302 only.

3 3 3.27.1 43-0* Component Status Shows the temperature of an auxiliary

component. The elements of the array
This parameter group contains read-only information on reference the temperature measurements from
hardware components in the power section. All parameters the NTC temperature sensors connected to
in this group are arrays: hardware components in the frequency
converter. Refer to the operating instructions
for specifications of temperature sensor
• [0]: Power card 1 (the master power card in a
placement.
parallel frequency converter, or the only power
card in a frequency converter with a single
43-02 Component SW ID
inverter section).
Range: Function:
• [1]: Power card 2 (inverter connection in a parallel
0* [0 - 20] Shows the software version of the installed option.
frequency converter).
• [2]: Power card 3 (inverter connection in a parallel
frequency converter). 3.27.2 43-1* Power Card Status
• [3]: Power card 4 (inverter connection in a parallel
This parameter group contains read-only information on
frequency converter).
the power card status. All parameters in this group are
• [4]: Power card 5 (rectifier connection in a parallel arrays:
frequency converter).
• [5]: Power card 6 (rectifier connection in a parallel • [0]: Power card 1 (the master power card in a
frequency converter). parallel frequency converter, or the only power
card in a frequency converter with a single
• [6]: Power card 7 (rectifier connection in a parallel
inverter section).
frequency converter).
• [7]: Power card 8 (rectifier connection in a parallel • [1]: Power card 2 (inverter connection in a parallel
frequency converter). frequency converter).

• [8]: Inrush card (optional). • [2]: Power card 3 (inverter connection in a parallel
frequency converter).
• [9]: Fan power card 1 (optional).
• [3]: Power card 4 (inverter connection in a parallel
• [10]: Fan power card 2 (optional). frequency converter).
43-00 Component Temp. • [4]: Power card 5 (rectifier connection in a parallel
Range: Function: frequency converter).
0 °C* [-128 - NOTICE • [5]: Power card 6 (rectifier connection in a parallel
127 °C] frequency converter).
This parameter is valid for FC 302 only.
• [6]: Power card 7 (rectifier connection in a parallel
Shows the temperature of a system component. frequency converter).
The elements of the array reference local PCB
temperature sensor measurements.
• [7]: Power card 8 (rectifier connection in a parallel
frequency converter).
Parameter 16-31 System Temp. uses all elements
in this array to calculate the system 43-10 HS Temp. ph.U
temperature. Range: Function:
0 °C* [-128 - NOTICE
127 °C]
This parameter is valid for FC 302 only.

Shows the heat sink temperature at the

location of the phase U IGBT power module.
This measurement is not available in all

206 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

43-10 HS Temp. ph.U 43-14 PC Fan B Speed

Range: Function: Range: Function:
enclosure sizes. Parameter 16-34 Heatsink Temp. instructions. A typical placement for fan B is
uses the value in this parameter. on the enclosure door (the internal fan).
The value of this parameter is:
43-11 HS Temp. ph.V
Range: Function:
• The actual fan speed when there is a 3 3
DC fan in the frequency converter.
0 °C* [-128 - NOTICE • Relative speed when there is an AC
127 °C]
This parameter is valid for FC 302 only. fan in the frequency converter.

Shows the heat sink temperature at the 43-15 PC Fan C Speed

location of the phase V IGBT power module. Range: Function:
This measurement is not available in all 0 RPM* [0 - NOTICE
enclosure sizes. Parameter 16-34 Heatsink Temp. 65535
This parameter is valid for FC 302 only.
uses the value in this parameter. RPM]

43-12 HS Temp. ph.W Shows the measured speed of fan C on the

power card. Each power card has up to 3 fan
Range: Function:
connections. Place the fan in the frequency
0 °C* [-128 - NOTICE converter according to the operating
127 °C]
This parameter is valid for FC 302 only. instructions. A typical placement for fan C is
inside the enclosure (the mixing fan).
Shows the heat sink temperature at the The value of this parameter is:
location of the phase W IGBT power module. • The actual fan speed when there is a
This measurement is not available in all DC fan in the frequency converter.
enclosure sizes. Parameter 16-34 Heatsink Temp.
uses the value in this parameter.
• Relative speed when there is an AC
fan in the frequency converter.

43-13 PC Fan A Speed

43-20 FPC Fan A Speed
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0 RPM* [0 - NOTICE 0 RPM* [0 - 65535 RPM] Shows the speed of the power card
65535
This parameter is valid for FC 302 only. fan A.
RPM]

Shows the measured speed of fan A on the 43-21 FPC Fan B Speed
power card. Each power card has up to 3 fan Range: Function:
connections. Place the fan in the frequency 0 RPM* [0 - 65535 RPM] Shows the speed of the power card
converter according to the operating fan B.
instructions. A typical placement for fan A is in
the backchannel (the external fan). 43-22 FPC Fan C Speed
The value of this parameter is:
Range: Function:
• The actual fan speed when there is a
0 RPM* [0 - 65535 RPM] Shows the speed of the power card
DC fan in the frequency converter.
fan C.
• Relative speed when there is an AC
fan in the frequency converter. 43-23 FPC Fan D Speed
Range: Function:
43-14 PC Fan B Speed
0 RPM* [0 - 65535 RPM] Shows the speed of the power card
Range: Function: fan D.
0 RPM* [0 - NOTICE
65535
This parameter is valid for FC 302 only. 43-24 FPC Fan E Speed
RPM] Range: Function:
Shows the measured speed of fan B on the 0 RPM* [0 - 65535 RPM] Shows the speed of the power card
power card. Each power card has up to 3 fan fan E.
connections. Place the fan in the frequency
converter according to the operating

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 207

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

43-25 FPC Fan F Speed

Range: Function:
0 RPM* [0 - 65535 RPM] Shows the speed of the power card
fan F.

3 3

208 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Integrated Motion Controlle... Programming Guide

4 Integrated Motion Controller

4.1 Introduction
NOTICE
The integrated motion control is only available with special IMC software version 48.XX. To order the frequency
converter with the IMC software, use the type code with software release version S067. The IMC software removes the
following features from the frequency converter: 4 4
• PM and SynRM motor support in VVC+.
• Wobble function.
• Surface winder function.
• Extended process PID.
• VLT® Motion Control Option MCO 305 support.

The integrated motion controller (IMC) enables position control. Position control is available when [0] U/f, [2] Flux sensorless,
or [3] Flux w/ motor feedb is selected in parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle.

To activate the IMC functionality, select [9] Positioning or [10] Synchronization in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode. IMC
enables the following functions:
• Positioning: Absolute, relative, and touch probe.
• Homing.
• Position synchronization.
• Virtual master.

Position control in both positioning and synchronization modes can be either sensorless or with feedback. In the sensorless
control principle, the motor angle calculated by the motor controller is used as feedback. In the closed-loop control
principle, VLT® AutomationDrive FC 302 supports 24 V encoders as standard. With extra options, the frequency converter
supports most standard incremental encoders, absolute encoders, and resolvers.
The position controller can handle both linear and rotary systems. The controller can scale positions to any relevant physical
unit such as mm or degrees.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 209

 Integrated Motion Controlle... VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

4.2 Positioning, Homing, Synchronization

4.2.1 Positioning

The frequency converter supports relative positioning and absolute positioning. A positioning command requires 3 inputs:
• Target position.
• Speed reference.
• Ramp times.
4 4
These 3 inputs can come from various sources, see Illustration 4.1.

130BE774.10
Par. 3-20 Preset target
positions
Target position Profile generator
Fieldbus reference 1 or 2 + Commanded
position
Par. 3-16 Reference
resource 2

Par. 3-17 Reference

resource 3
Speed
Par. 3-03 Default speed
Speed ref.
Fieldbus reference 1

Par. 3-15 Reference

resource 1 Acceleration

Ramp settings: Acceleration/Deceleration

Parameter groups
3-4*–3-7*

Illustration 4.1 Positioning References

In each control cycle (1 ms) the profile generator calculates position, speed, and acceleration required to do the specified
movement. The outputs from the profile generator are used at inputs for the position and speed controller as described in
chapter 4.3.1 Control Loops.

4.2.2 Homing

Homing is required for creating a reference to the physical machine position in closed-loop control principle with
incremental encoder or in sensorless control principle. IMC supports various homing functions with or without a homing
sensor. Select the homing function in parameter 17-80 Homing Function. After selecting a homing function, complete homing
before executing absolute positioning.

210 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Integrated Motion Controlle... Programming Guide

4.2.3 Synchronization

In synchronization mode, the frequency converter follows the position of a master signal. The master signal and the offset
between the master and the follower are handled as shown in Illustration 4.2.

130BE775.10
Profile generator
Commanded
Fieldbus reference 1
Master position Synchronization:
position
4 4
Par. 3-22 – 3-25,
Par. 3-16 Reference 7-97, 7-99.
resource 2

Speed

Position ref.
Par. 3-26 Position offset

Speed ref. Acceleration

Par. 3-02 Offset speed Offset handling

Ramp settings:
Parameter groups Acceleration/Deceleration
3-4*–3-7*

Illustration 4.2 Synchronization References

In each control cycle (1 ms) the profile generator calculates position, speed, and acceleration required to do the specified
movement. The outputs from the profile generator are used at inputs for the position and speed controller as described in
chapter 4.3.1 Control Loops.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 211

 Integrated Motion Controlle... VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

4.3 Control
4.3.1 Control Loops

In positioning and synchronization mode, 2 extra control loops control the motor in addition to the motor controller
running flux control principle, sensorless, or with motor feedback. The position PI controller is the outer loop providing the
setpoint for the speed PID, which provides the reference for the motor controller. For a closed loop, feedback source can be
selected individually for each of 3 controllers.

4 4 For sensorless control principle, select [0] Motor feedb. P1-02 in the following parameters:
• Speed PID: Parameter 7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source.
• Position PI: Parameter 7-90 Position PI Feedback Source.

With this set-up, both controllers use the motor angle calculated by the motor controller. Illustration 4.3 shows the control
structure and parameters affecting the control behavior:

130BE776.10
Par. 7-90 Position PI
Feedback Source

Par. 7-00 Speed PID

Feedback Source
Profile Commanded
generator position 7-9* Par. 7-99 4-1*
Position PI
Ctrl.

Par. 7-98
+
Speed 7-0*
Position PI
Speed PID
Feed Flux motor
Forward
Par. 7-08
+ control
Factor
Speed PID
Acceleration Par. 1-69 Torque Accel. Feed
System Inertia Forward
Factor

Illustration 4.3 Positioning and Synchronization Mode

4.3.2 Control and Status Signals

IMC control and status signals are available as digital I/O bits and fieldbus bits. Table 4.1 shows the available options:

Name Function Digital Control word Digital Status word

input1) output
Control signals
Activates the master offset when
Enable master offset parameter 17-93 Master Offset Selection is set to x x – –
options [0]–[5].
Start homing Starts selected homing function. x x – –
Start virtual master Starts the virtual master. x x – –
Activate touch Selects touch probe positioning mode. x x – –
Relative position Selects between absolute and relative positioning. x x – –
Enable reference Starts selected motion. x x – –
Sync. to position
Selects positioning in synchronizing mode. x x – –
mode
Home sensor Selects input for home sensor. x – – –
Home sensor inverse Selects input for home sensor. x – – –
Touch sensor Selects input for touch probe sensor. x – – –
Touch sensor inverse Selects input for touch probe sensor. x – – –

212 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Integrated Motion Controlle... Programming Guide

Name Function Digital Control word Digital Status word

input1) output
Selects speed mode when parameter 1-00 Configu-
Speed mode ration Mode is set to [9] Positioning or [10] x x – –
Synchronization.
Changes the sign of the set target position. For
Target inverse example, if the set target is 1000, the activation of x x – –
this option changes the value to -1000.
Status signals
Reverse after ramp Indicates the sign of speed reference after the ramp. – – x – 4 4
Virtual master dir. Controls the direction of followers. – – x –
Homing is completed with the selected homing
Homing OK – – x x
function.
Positioning: Target position reached.
On target Synchronization: Follower position aligned with – – x x
master position.
Position error Maximum position error exceeded. – – x x
A position limit is reached (parameter 3-06 Minimum
Position limit – – x –
Position or parameter 3-07 Maximum Position).
Target position is reached in touch probe position
Touch on target – – x x
mode.
Touch activated Touch probe positioning active. – – x x

Table 4.1 Control and Status Signals

1) For best accuracy, use fast digital inputs 18, 32, and 33 for home and touch probe sensors.

When [3] FC Motion Profile is selected in • [13] Sync. to Pos. Mode

parameter 8-10 Control Word Profile, the bits in the control
• [14] Ramp 2
word and the status word have the following meaning:
• [15] Relay 1

Bit 0 1 • [16] Relay 2

0 Preset reference LSB – • [17] Speed Mode
1 Preset reference MSB –
• [18] Start Virtual Master
21) Preset reference EXB –
3 Coast stop No coast stop
• [19] Activate Master Offset

4 Quick stop No quick stop • [20] Target Inverse

51) No reference Enable reference

6 Ramp stop Start
7 No reset Reset
8 No jog Jog
91) Absolute Relative
10 Data not valid Data valid
111) No homing Start homing
121) No touch Activate touch
13 Setup select LSB –
14 Setup select MSB –
15 No reversing Reversing

Table 4.2 Control Word

1) Different from [0] FC profile.
Options for bits 0–2, and 12–15 in parameter 8-14 Configurable
Control Word CTW:

• [11] Start Homing

• [12] Activate Touch Probe

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 213

 Integrated Motion Controlle... VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

Bit 0 1
0 Control not ready Control ready
Frequency converter not
1 Frequency converter ready
ready
2 Coasting Enable
3 No error Trip
41) Not homed Home done
5 Reserved Reserved

4 4 6
7
No error
No warning
Trip lock
Warning
81) Not on target position Target position reached
9 Local operation Bus control
10 Out of frequency limit Frequency limit OK
11 No operation In operation
12 Frequency converter OK Stopped, auto start
13 Voltage OK Voltage exceeded
14 Torque OK Torque exceeded
15 Timer OK Timer exceeded

Table 4.3 Status Word

1) Different from [0] FC profile.
Options for bits 5 and 12–15 in parameter 8-13 Configurable Status
Word STW:

• [4] Position Error

• [5] Position Limit

• [6] Touch on Target

• [7] Touch Activated

214 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

5 Parameter Lists

5.1 Introduction
Frequency converter series
All = valid for FC 301 and FC 302 series
01 = valid for FC 301 only
02 = valid for FC 302 only
Changes during operation
True means that the parameter can be changed while the
frequency converter is in operation. False means that the 5 5
frequency converter must be stopped before a change can
be made.
4 set-up
All set-ups: the parameter can be set individually in each
of the 4 set-ups, for example 1 single parameter can have
4 different data values.
1 set-up: The data value is the same in all set-ups.

Data Description Type

type
2 Integer 8 Int8
3 Integer 16 Int16
4 Integer 32 Int32
5 Unsigned 8 Uint8
6 Unsigned 16 Uint16
7 Unsigned 32 Uint32
9 Visible string VisStr
33 Normalized value 2 bytes N2
35 Bit sequence of 16 boolean variables V2
54 Time difference w/o date TimD

Table 5.1 Data Type

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 215

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

5.1.1 Conversion Conversion index Conversion factor

100 1
The various attributes of each parameter are shown in 75 3600000
factory setting. Parameter values are transferred as whole 74 3600
numbers only. Conversion factors are therefore used to 70 60
transfer decimals. 67 1/60
6 1000000
A conversion factor of 0.1 means that the value transferred 5 100000
is multiplied by 0.1. The value 100 is therefore read as 10.0. 4 10000
3 1000
2 100

5 5 1
0
10
1
-1 0.1
-2 0.01
-3 0.001
-4 0.0001
-5 0.00001
-6 0.000001

Table 5.2 Conversion Table

5.2 Parameter Lists and Options, Software Version 7.60 (Standard)

5.2.1 0-** Operation / Display

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter only during index
# operation
0-0* Basic Settings
0-01 Language [0] English 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-02 Motor Speed Unit ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-03 Regional Settings [0] International 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-04 Operating State at Power-up (Hand) [1] Forced stop, ref=old All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-09 Performance Monitor 0% All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
0-1* Set-up Operations
0-10 Active Set-up [1] Set-up 1 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-11 Edit Set-up [1] Set-up 1 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-12 This Set-up Linked to [0] Not linked All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
0-14 Readout: Edit Set-ups / Channel 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
0-15 Readout: actual setup 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
0-2* LCP Display
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small 1614 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small 1610 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-23 Display Line 2 Large 1613 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-24 Display Line 3 Large 1602 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-25 My Personal Menu ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
0-3* LCP Custom Readout
0-30 Unit for User-defined Readout [0] None All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-31 Min Value of User-defined Readout 0 CustomReadoutUnit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
100 CustomRea-
0-32 Max Value of User-defined Readout doutUnit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32

216 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

0-33 Source for User-defined Readout [240] Default Source All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-37 Display Text 1 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[25]
0-38 Display Text 2 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[25]
0-39 Display Text 3 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[25]
0-4* LCP Keypad
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-41 [Off] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-44 [Off/Reset] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-45 [Drive Bypass] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-5* Copy/Save
0-50 LCP Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
5 5
0-51 Set-up Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-6* Password
0-60 Main Menu Password 100 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16
0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-65 Quick Menu Password 200 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16
0-66 Access to Quick Menu w/o Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-67 Bus Password Access 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
0-68 Safety Parameters Password 300 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
Password Protection of Safety
0-69 Parameters [0] Disabled 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8

5.2.2 1-** Load and Motor

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter only during index
# operation
1-0* General Settings
1-00 Configuration Mode ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-01 Motor Control Principle ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-02 Flux Motor Feedback Source [1] 24V encoder All set-ups x FALSE - Uint8
1-03 Torque Characteristics [0] Constant torque All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-04 Overload Mode [0] High torque All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-05 Local Mode Configuration [2] As mode par 1-00 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-06 Clockwise Direction [0] Normal All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-07 Motor Angle Offset Adjust [0] Manual All set-ups x FALSE - Uint8
1-1* Special Settings
1-10 Motor Construction [0] Asynchron All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-11 Motor Model ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE - Uint8
1-14 Damping Gain 140 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-15 Low Speed Filter Time Const. ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-16 High Speed Filter Time Const. ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-17 Voltage filter time const. ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
1-18 Min. Current at No Load 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-2* Motor Data
1-20 Motor Power [kW] ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 1 Uint32
1-21 Motor Power [HP] ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-22 Motor Voltage ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-23 Motor Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-24 Motor Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 67 Uint16
1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint32

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 217

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) [0] Off All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-3* Adv. Motor Data
1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-35 Main Reactance (Xh) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32
1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld) ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -4 Int32
1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq) ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -6 Int32
1-39 Motor Poles ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8

5 5 1-40
1-41
Back EMF at 1000 RPM
Motor Angle Offset
ExpressionLimit
0 N/A
All set-ups
All set-ups
x FALSE
FALSE
0
0
Uint16
Int16
1-44 d-axis Inductance Sat. (LdSat) ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -6 Int32
1-45 q-axis Inductance Sat. (LqSat) ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -6 Int32
1-46 Position Detection Gain 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-47 Torque Calibration ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-48 Inductance Sat. Point ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE 0 Int16
1-5* Load Indep. Setting
1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-52 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-53 Model Shift Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -1 Uint16
1-54 Voltage reduction in fieldweakening 0V All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
1-55 U/f Characteristic - U ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-56 U/f Characteristic - F ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-58 Flying Start Test Pulses Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-59 Flying Start Test Pulses Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-6* Load Depen. Setting
1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-61 High Speed Load Compensation 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-62 Slip Compensation ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-64 Resonance Damping ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-65 Resonance Damping Time Constant 5 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
1-67 Load Type [0] Passive load All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
1-68 Motor Inertia 0 kgm² All set-ups x FALSE -4 Uint32
1-69 System Inertia ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -4 Uint32
1-7* Start Adjustments
1-70 PM Start Mode [0] Rotor Detection All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-71 Start Delay 0s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
1-72 Start Function [2] Coast/delay time All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-73 Flying Start ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-74 Start Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-75 Start Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-76 Start Current 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
1-8* Stop Adjustments
1-80 Function at Stop [0] Coast All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-81 Min Speed for Function at Stop [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-82 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-83 Precise Stop Function [0] Precise ramp stop All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value 100000 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32

218 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

Precise Stop Speed Compensation

1-85 Delay 10 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
1-9* Motor Temperature
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-91 Motor External Fan ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-93 Thermistor Resource [0] None All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-94 ATEX ETR cur.lim. speed reduction 0% 2 set-ups x TRUE -1 Uint16
1-95 Thermistor Sensor Type [0] KTY Sensor 1 All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
1-96 Thermistor Sensor Resource [0] None All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
1-97 Thermistor Threshold level 80 °C 1 set-up x TRUE 100 Int16
1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. points freq. ExpressionLimit 1 set-up x TRUE -1 Uint16
1-99 ATEX ETR interpol points current ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint16
5 5
5.2.3 2-** Brakes

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter only during index
# operation
2-0* DC-Brake
2-00 DC Hold Current 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
2-01 DC Brake Current 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-02 DC Braking Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-05 Maximum Reference MaxReference (P303) All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
2-06 Parking Current 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-07 Parking Time 3s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-1* Brake Energy Funct.
2-10 Brake Function ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
2-13 Brake Power Monitoring [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-15 Brake Check [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-16 AC brake Max. Current 100 % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint32
2-17 Over-voltage Control [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-18 Brake Check Condition [0] At Power Up All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-19 Over-voltage Gain 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-2* Mechanical Brake
2-20 Release Brake Current ImaxVLT (P1637) All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
2-21 Activate Brake Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
2-22 Activate Brake Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-23 Activate Brake Delay 0s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
2-24 Stop Delay 0s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
2-25 Brake Release Time 0.20 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
2-26 Torque Ref 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
2-27 Torque Ramp Up Time 0.2 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
2-28 Gain Boost Factor 1 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
2-29 Torque Ramp Down Time 0s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
2-3* Adv. Mech Brake
2-30 Position P Start Proportional Gain 0.0000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
2-31 Speed PID Start Proportional Gain 0.0150 N/A All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
2-32 Speed PID Start Integral Time 200.0 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
2-33 Speed PID Start Lowpass Filter Time 10.0 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 219

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

5.2.4 3-** Reference / Ramps

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter only during index
# operation
3-0* Reference Limits
3-00 Reference Range ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-02 Minimum Reference ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
3-03 Maximum Reference ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
3-04 Reference Function [0] Sum All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

5 5 3-1* References
3-10 Preset Reference 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
3-11 Jog Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
[0] Linked to Hand /
3-13 Reference Site Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-14 Preset Relative Reference 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
3-15 Reference Resource 1 ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-16 Reference Resource 2 ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-17 Reference Resource 3 ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-18 Relative Scaling Reference Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-19 Jog Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
3-4* Ramp 1
3-40 Ramp 1 Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-45 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-46 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-47 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-48 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-5* Ramp 2
3-50 Ramp 2 Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-55 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-56 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-57 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-58 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-6* Ramp 3
3-60 Ramp 3 Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-65 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-66 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-67 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-68 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-7* Ramp 4
3-70 Ramp 4 Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-75 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-76 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-77 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8

220 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

3-78 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-8* Other Ramps
3-80 Jog Ramp Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-82 Quick Stop Ramp Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-83 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-84 Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-89 Ramp Lowpass Filter Time 1 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
3-9* Digital Pot.Meter
3-90 Step Size 0.10 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
3-91
3-92
Ramp Time
Power Restore
1s
[0] Off
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-2
-
Uint32
Uint8
5 5
3-93 Maximum Limit 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
3-94 Minimum Limit -100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
3-95 Ramp Delay ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 TimD

5.2.5 4-** Limits / Warnings

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter only during index
# operation
4-1* Motor Limits
4-10 Motor Speed Direction ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode 100 % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-18 Current Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint32
4-19 Max Output Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
4-2* Limit Factors
4-20 Torque Limit Factor Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-21 Speed Limit Factor Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-23 Brake Check Limit Factor Source [0] DC-link voltage All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-24 Brake Check Limit Factor 98 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
4-3* Motor Speed Mon.
4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error 300 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
4-34 Tracking Error Function ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-35 Tracking Error 10 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-36 Tracking Error Timeout 1s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
4-37 Tracking Error Ramping 100 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-38 Tracking Error Ramping Timeout 1s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
4-39 Tracking Error After Ramping Timeout 5s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
4-4* Speed Monitor
4-43 Motor Speed Monitor Function ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-44 Motor Speed Monitor Max 300 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-45 Motor Speed Monitor Timeout 0.1 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
4-5* Adj. Warnings
4-50 Warning Current Low 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
4-51 Warning Current High ImaxVLT (P1637) All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 221

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

4-52 Warning Speed Low 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16

4-53 Warning Speed High ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-54 Warning Reference Low -999999.999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-55 Warning Reference High 999999.999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-56 Warning Feedback Low ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-57 Warning Feedback High ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-59 Motor Check At Start [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-6* Speed Bypass
4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16

5 5 4-62
4-63
Bypass Speed To [RPM]
Bypass Speed To [Hz]
ExpressionLimit
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
67
-1
Uint16
Uint16

5.2.6 5-** Digital In/Out

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter only during index
# operation
5-0* Digital I/O mode
5-00 Digital I/O Mode [0] PNP All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode [0] Input All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode [0] Input All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5-1* Digital Inputs
5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-11 Terminal 19 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-16 Terminal X30/2 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-17 Terminal X30/3 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-18 Terminal X30/4 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
5-20 Terminal X46/1 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-21 Terminal X46/3 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-22 Terminal X46/5 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-23 Terminal X46/7 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-24 Terminal X46/9 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-25 Terminal X46/11 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-26 Terminal X46/13 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-3* Digital Outputs
5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-31 Terminal 29 Digital Output ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-4* Relays
5-40 Function Relay ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-41 On Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-42 Off Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-5* Pulse Input
5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32

222 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

0 ReferenceFeed-
5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value backUnit All set-ups x TRUE -3 Int32
5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE -3 Int32
5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29 100 ms All set-ups x FALSE -3 Uint16
5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
0 ReferenceFeed-
5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value backUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33 100 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
5-6* Pulse Output
5-60
5-62
Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable
Pulse Output Max Freq #27
ExpressionLimit
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-
0
Uint8
Uint32
5 5
5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq #29 ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-68 Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6 ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-7* 24V Encoder Input
5-70 Term 32/33 Pulses Per Revolution 1024 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
5-71 Term 32/33 Encoder Direction [0] Clockwise All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
5-8* I/O Options
5-80 AHF Cap Reconnect Delay 25 s 2 set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint16
5-9* Bus Controlled
5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-93 Pulse Out #27 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
5-94 Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
5-95 Pulse Out #29 Bus Control 0% All set-ups x TRUE -2 N2
5-96 Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up x TRUE -2 Uint16
5-97 Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
5-98 Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16

5.2.7 6-** Analog In/Out

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter only during index
# operation
6-0* Analog I/O Mode
6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-1* Analog Input 1
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current 0.14 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-13 Terminal 53 High Current 20 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
0 ReferenceFeed-
6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value backUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-2* Analog Input 2
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-23 Terminal 54 High Current 20 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 223

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

0 ReferenceFeed-
6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value backUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-3* Analog Input 3
6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
0 ReferenceFeed-
6-34 Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value backUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-35 Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-36 Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16

5 5 6-4* Analog Input 4

6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-41 Terminal X30/12 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
0 ReferenceFeed-
6-44 Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value backUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-45 Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-46 Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-5* Analog Output 1
6-50 Terminal 42 Output ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale 100 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-53 Term 42 Output Bus Ctrl 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
6-54 Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
6-55 Analog Output Filter [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
6-6* Analog Output 2
6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-61 Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale 100 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-63 Terminal X30/8 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout
6-64 Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
6-7* Analog Output 3
6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-71 Terminal X45/1 Min. Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-72 Terminal X45/1 Max. Scale 100 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-73 Terminal X45/1 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
Terminal X45/1 Output Timeout
6-74 Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
6-8* Analog Output 4
6-80 Terminal X45/3 Output ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-81 Terminal X45/3 Min. Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-82 Terminal X45/3 Max. Scale 100 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-83 Terminal X45/3 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
Terminal X45/3 Output Timeout
6-84 Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16

224 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

5.2.8 7-** Controllers

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter only during index
# operation
7-0* Speed PID Ctrl.
7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
7-01 Speed PID Droop 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
7-02 Speed PID Proportional Gain ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
7-03 Speed PID Integral Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
7-04 Speed PID Differentiation Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
7-05
7-06
Speed PID Diff. Gain Limit
Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time
5 N/A
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-1
-4
Uint16
Uint16
5 5
7-07 Speed PID Feedback Gear Ratio 1 N/A All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
7-08 Speed PID Feed Forward Factor 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
7-09 Speed PID Error Correction w/ Ramp ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint32
7-1* Torque PI Ctrl.
7-10 Torque PI Feedback Source [0] Controller Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-12 Torque PI Proportional Gain 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-13 Torque PI Integration Time 0.020 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
7-16 Torque PI Lowpass Filter Time 5 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
7-18 Torque PI Feed Forward Factor 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-19 Current Controller Rise Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-2* Process Ctrl. Feedb
7-20 Process CL Feedback 1 Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-22 Process CL Feedback 2 Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-3* Process PID Ctrl.
7-30 Process PID Normal/ Inverse Control [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-31 Process PID Anti Windup [1] On All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-32 Process PID Start Speed 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
7-33 Process PID Proportional Gain ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
7-34 Process PID Integral Time 10000 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
7-35 Process PID Differentiation Time 0s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
7-36 Process PID Diff. Gain Limit 5 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-39 On Reference Bandwidth 5% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
7-4* Adv. Process PID I
7-40 Process PID I-part Reset [0] No All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-41 Process PID Output Neg. Clamp -100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
7-42 Process PID Output Pos. Clamp 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
7-43 Process PID Gain Scale at Min. Ref. 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
7-44 Process PID Gain Scale at Max. Ref. 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
7-45 Process PID Feed Fwd Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Process PID Feed Fwd Normal/ Inv.
7-46 Ctrl. [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-48 PCD Feed Forward 0 N/A All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint16
7-49 Process PID Output Normal/ Inv. Ctrl. [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-5* Adv. Process PID II
7-50 Process PID Extended PID [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-51 Process PID Feed Fwd Gain 1 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
7-52 Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp up 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
7-53 Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp down 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
7-56 Process PID Ref. Filter Time 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
7-57 Process PID Fb. Filter Time 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 225

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

5.2.9 8-** Comm. and Options

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter only during index
# operation
8-0* General Settings
[0] Digital and
8-01 Control Site ctrl.word All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-02 Control Word Source ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-03 Control Word Timeout Time 1s 1 set-up TRUE -1 Uint32
8-04 Control Word Timeout Function ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8

5 5 8-05
8-06
End-of-Timeout Function
Reset Control Word Timeout
[1] Resume set-up
[0] Do not reset
1 set-up
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-
-
Uint8
Uint8
8-07 Diagnosis Trigger [0] Disable 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-08 Readout Filtering ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-1* Ctrl. Word Settings
8-10 Control Word Profile [0] FC profile All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-13 Configurable Status Word STW ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-14 Configurable Control Word CTW [1] Profile default 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-17 Configurable Alarm and Warningword [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
8-19 Product Code ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
8-3* FC Port Settings
8-30 Protocol [0] FC 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-31 Address 1 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
8-32 FC Port Baud Rate ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
[0] Even Parity, 1 Stop
8-33 Parity / Stop Bits Bit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-34 Estimated cycle time 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
8-35 Minimum Response Delay 10 ms 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-36 Max Response Delay ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-37 Max Inter-Char Delay ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -5 Uint16
8-4* FC MC protocol set
[1] Standard telegram
8-40 Telegram Selection 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-41 Parameters for Signals 0 All set-ups FALSE - Uint16
8-42 PCD Write Configuration ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
8-43 PCD Read Configuration ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
8-45 BTM Transaction Command [0] Off All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
8-46 BTM Transaction Status [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-47 BTM Timeout 60 s 1 set-up FALSE 0 Uint16
8-48 BTM Maximum Errors 21 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
8-49 BTM Error Log 0.255 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
8-5* Digital/Bus
8-50 Coasting Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-51 Quick Stop Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-52 DC Brake Select ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-53 Start Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-54 Reversing Select ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-55 Set-up Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-56 Preset Reference Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-57 Profidrive OFF2 Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-58 Profidrive OFF3 Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-8* FC Port Diagnostics
8-80 Bus Message Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32

226 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

8-81 Bus Error Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32

8-82 Slave Messages Rcvd 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-83 Slave Error Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-9* Bus Jog
8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16

5.2.10 9-** PROFIdrive

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter only during index
#
9-00 Setpoint 0 N/A All set-ups
operation
TRUE 0 Uint16
5 5
9-07 Actual Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-15 PCD Write Configuration ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint16
9-16 PCD Read Configuration ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
9-18 Node Address 126 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
9-19 Drive Unit System Number 1034 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-22 Telegram Selection [100] None 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
9-23 Parameters for Signals 0 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
9-27 Parameter Edit [1] Enabled 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint16
[1] Enable cyclic
9-28 Process Control master 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
9-44 Fault Message Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-45 Fault Code 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-47 Fault Number 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-52 Fault Situation Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-53 Profibus Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
[255] No baudrate
9-63 Actual Baud Rate found All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
9-64 Device Identification 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-65 Profile Number 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 OctStr[2]
9-67 Control Word 1 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
9-68 Status Word 1 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
9-70 Edit Set-up [1] Set-up 1 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
9-71 Profibus Save Data Values [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
9-72 ProfibusDriveReset [0] No action 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
9-75 DO Identification 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-80 Defined Parameters (1) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-81 Defined Parameters (2) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-82 Defined Parameters (3) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-83 Defined Parameters (4) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-84 Defined Parameters (5) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-85 Defined Parameters (6) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-90 Changed Parameters (1) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-91 Changed Parameters (2) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-92 Changed Parameters (3) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-93 Changed Parameters (4) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-94 Changed Parameters (5) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-99 Profibus Revision Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 227

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

5.2.11 10-** CAN Fieldbus

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter only during index
# operation
10-0* Common Settings
10-00 CAN Protocol ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
10-01 Baud Rate Select ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-02 MAC ID ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-05 Readout Transmit Error Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-06 Readout Receive Error Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8

5 5 10-07 Readout Bus Off Counter

10-1* DeviceNet
0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8

10-10 Process Data Type Selection ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-11 Process Data Config Write ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
10-12 Process Data Config Read ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
10-13 Warning Parameter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
10-14 Net Reference [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-15 Net Control [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-2* COS Filters
10-20 COS Filter 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
10-21 COS Filter 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
10-22 COS Filter 3 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
10-23 COS Filter 4 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
10-3* Parameter Access
10-30 Array Index 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-31 Store Data Values [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-32 Devicenet Revision ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
10-33 Store Always [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
10-34 DeviceNet Product Code ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
10-39 Devicenet F Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
10-5* CANopen
10-50 Process Data Config Write. ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
10-51 Process Data Config Read. ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16

5.2.12 12-** Ethernet

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter only during index
# operation
12-0* IP Settings
12-00 IP Address Assignment ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-01 IP Address 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-02 Subnet Mask 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-03 Default Gateway 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-04 DHCP Server 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-05 Lease Expires ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 TimD
12-06 Name Servers 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-07 Domain Name 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[48]
12-08 Host Name 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[48]
12-09 Physical Address 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[17]
12-1* Ethernet Link Parameters
12-10 Link Status [0] No Link All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-11 Link Duration ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 TimD

228 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

12-12 Auto Negotiation ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

12-13 Link Speed ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-14 Link Duplex ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-18 Supervisor MAC 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 OctStr[6]
12-19 Supervisor IP Addr. 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-2* Process Data
12-20 Control Instance ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
12-21 Process Data Config Write ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
12-22 Process Data Config Read ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
12-23 Process Data Config Write Size 16 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-24 Process Data Config Read Size 16 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-27
12-28
Master Address
Store Data Values
0 N/A
[0] Off
2 set-ups
All set-ups
FALSE
TRUE
0
-
OctStr[4]
Uint8
5 5
12-29 Store Always [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
12-3* EtherNet/IP
12-30 Warning Parameter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-31 Net Reference [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-32 Net Control [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-33 CIP Revision ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-34 CIP Product Code ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
12-35 EDS Parameter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-37 COS Inhibit Timer 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-38 COS Filter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-4* Modbus TCP
12-40 Status Parameter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-41 Slave Message Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-42 Slave Exception Message Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-5* EtherCAT
12-50 Configured Station Alias 0 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 Uint16
12-51 Configured Station Address 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-59 EtherCAT Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-6* Ethernet PowerLink
12-60 Node ID 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
12-62 SDO Timeout 30000 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
12-63 Basic Ethernet Timeout 5000.000 ms All set-ups TRUE -6 Uint32
12-66 Threshold 15 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-67 Threshold Counters 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-68 Cumulative Counters 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-69 Ethernet PowerLink Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-8* Other Ethernet Services
12-80 FTP Server [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-81 HTTP Server [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-82 SMTP Service [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-83 SNMP Agent [1] Enabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-84 Address Conflict Detection [1] Enabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-85 ACD Last Conflict 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 OctStr[35]
12-89 Transparent Socket Channel Port ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-9* Advanced Ethernet Services
12-90 Cable Diagnostic [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-91 Auto Cross Over [1] Enabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-92 IGMP Snooping [1] Enabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-93 Cable Error Length 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
12-94 Broadcast Storm Protection -1 % 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int8
12-95 Inactivity timeout 120 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 229

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

12-96 Port Config ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

12-97 QoS Priority ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int8
12-98 Interface Counters 4000 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-99 Media Counters 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32

5.2.13 13-** Smart Logic

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter only during index
# operation
13-0* SLC Settings

5 5 13-00
13-01
SL Controller Mode
Start Event
ExpressionLimit
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
2 set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-
-
Uint8
Uint8
13-02 Stop Event ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-03 Reset SLC [0] Do not reset SLC All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-1* Comparators
13-10 Comparator Operand ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-11 Comparator Operator ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-12 Comparator Value ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
13-1* RS Flip Flops
13-15 RS-FF Operand S ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-16 RS-FF Operand R ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-2* Timers
13-20 SL Controller Timer ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -3 TimD
13-4* Logic Rules
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2 ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3 ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-5* States
13-51 SL Controller Event ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-52 SL Controller Action ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

5.2.14 14-** Special Functions

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter only during index
# operation
14-0* Inverter Switching
14-00 Switching Pattern [1] SFAVM All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-01 Switching Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-03 Overmodulation ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-04 Acoustic Noise Reduction [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-06 Dead Time Compensation [1] On All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-1* Mains Failure
14-10 Mains Failure [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-11 Mains Fault Voltage Level ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-12 Response to Mains Imbalance [0] Trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-14 Kin. Back-up Time-out 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-15 Kin. Back-up Trip Recovery Level ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
14-16 Kin. Back-up Gain 100 % All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
14-2* Trip Reset

230 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

14-20 Reset Mode [0] Manual reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-21 Automatic Restart Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-22 Operation Mode [0] Normal operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-23 Typecode Setting ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint16
14-24 Trip Delay at Current Limit 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-28 Production Settings [0] No action All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-29 Service Code 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
14-3* Current Limit Ctrl.
14-30 Current Lim Ctrl, Proportional Gain 100 % All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
14-31
14-32
Current Lim Ctrl, Integration Time
Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time
ExpressionLimit
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
All set-ups
FALSE
TRUE
-3
-4
Uint16
Uint16
5 5
14-35 Stall Protection [1] Enabled All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-36 Field-weakening Function [0] Auto All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
14-37 Fieldweakening Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE 67 Uint16
14-4* Energy Optimising
14-40 VT Level 66 % All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-43 Motor Cosphi ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
14-5* Environment
14-50 RFI Filter [1] On 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
14-51 DC-Link Compensation ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-52 Fan Control [0] Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-53 Fan Monitor [1] Warning All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-55 Output Filter [0] No Filter All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-56 Capacitance Output Filter ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -7 Uint16
14-57 Inductance Output Filter ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -6 Uint16
14-59 Actual Number of Inverter Units ExpressionLimit 1 set-up x FALSE 0 Uint8
14-7* Compatibility
14-72 Legacy Alarm Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
14-73 Legacy Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
14-74 Leg. Ext. Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
14-8* Options
14-80 Option Supplied by External 24VDC [1] Yes 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-88 Option Data Storage 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
[0] Protect Option
14-89 Option Detection Config. 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
14-9* Fault Settings
14-90 Fault Level ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8

5.2.15 15-** Drive Information

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter only during index
# operation
15-0* Operating Data
15-00 Operating hours 0h All set-ups FALSE 74 Uint32
15-01 Running Hours 0h All set-ups FALSE 74 Uint32
15-02 kWh Counter 0 kWh All set-ups FALSE 75 Uint32
15-03 Power Up's 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-04 Over Temp's 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-05 Over Volt's 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 231

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

15-06 Reset kWh Counter [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-1* Data Log Settings
15-10 Logging Source 0 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
15-11 Logging Interval ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -3 TimD
15-12 Trigger Event [0] False 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
15-13 Logging Mode [0] Log always 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-14 Samples Before Trigger 50 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
15-2* Historic Log
15-20 Historic Log: Event 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
15-21 Historic Log: Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32

5 5 15-22 Historic Log: Time

15-3* Fault Log
0 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32

15-30 Fault Log: Error Code 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-31 Fault Log: Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
15-32 Fault Log: Time 0s All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-4* Drive Identification
15-40 FC Type 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[6]
15-41 Power Section 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-42 Voltage 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-43 Software Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[5]
15-44 Ordered Typecode String 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-45 Actual Typecode String 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-46 Frequency Converter Ordering No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-47 Power Card Ordering No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-48 LCP Id No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-49 SW ID Control Card 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-50 SW ID Power Card 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-51 Frequency Converter Serial Number 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[10]
15-53 Power Card Serial Number 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[19]
15-54 Config File Name ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[16]
15-59 Filename ExpressionLimit 1 set-up FALSE 0 VisStr[16]
15-6* Option Ident
15-60 Option Mounted 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-61 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-62 Option Ordering No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-63 Option Serial No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[18]
15-70 Option in Slot A 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-71 Slot A Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-72 Option in Slot B 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-73 Slot B Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-74 Option in Slot C0/E0 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-75 Slot C0/E0 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-76 Option in Slot C1/E1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-77 Slot C1/E1 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-8* Operating Data II
15-80 Fan Running Hours 0h All set-ups TRUE 74 Uint32
15-81 Preset Fan Running Hours 0h All set-ups TRUE 74 Uint32
15-89 Configuration Change Counter 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-9* Parameter Info
15-92 Defined Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-93 Modified Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-98 Drive Identification 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-99 Parameter Metadata 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16

232 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

5.2.16 16-** Data Readouts

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter only during index
# operation
16-0* General Status
16-00 Control Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
0 ReferenceFeed-
16-01 Reference [Unit] backUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-02 Reference % 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-03 Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-05 Main Actual Value [%] 0%
0 CustomRea-
All set-ups FALSE -2 N2
5 5
16-06 Actual Position doutUnit2 All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-09 Custom Readout 0 CustomReadoutUnit All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-1* Motor Status
16-10 Power [kW] 0 kW All set-ups FALSE 1 Int32
16-11 Power [hp] 0 hp All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-12 Motor Voltage 0V All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
16-13 Frequency 0 Hz All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
16-14 Motor current 0A All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-15 Frequency [%] 0% All set-ups FALSE -2 N2
16-16 Torque [Nm] 0 Nm All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-17 Speed [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups FALSE 67 Int32
16-18 Motor Thermal 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-19 Thermistor Sensor Temperature 0 °C All set-ups FALSE 100 Int16
16-20 Motor Angle 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
16-21 Torque [%] High Res. 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-22 Torque [%] 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-23 Motor Shaft Power [kW] 0 kW All set-ups TRUE 1 Int32
16-24 Calibrated Stator Resistance 0.0000 Ohm All set-ups x TRUE -4 Uint32
16-25 Torque [Nm] High 0 Nm All set-ups FALSE -1 Int32
16-3* Drive Status
16-30 DC Link Voltage 0V All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-31 System Temp. 0 °C All set-ups x TRUE 100 Int8
16-32 Brake Energy /s 0 kW All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-33 Brake Energy Average 0 kW All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-34 Heatsink Temp. 0 °C All set-ups FALSE 100 Uint8
16-35 Inverter Thermal 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-36 Inv. Nom. Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
16-37 Inv. Max. Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
16-38 SL Controller State 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-39 Control Card Temp. 0 °C All set-ups FALSE 100 Uint8
16-40 Logging Buffer Full [0] No All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
16-41 LCP Bottom Statusline 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 VisStr[50]
16-45 Motor Phase U Current 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
16-46 Motor Phase V Current 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
16-47 Motor Phase W Current 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
16-48 Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups FALSE 67 Int32
16-49 Current Fault Source 0 N/A All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint8
16-5* Ref. & Feedb.
16-50 External Reference 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-51 Pulse Reference 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 233

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

0 ReferenceFeed-
16-52 Feedback[Unit] backUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-53 Digi Pot Reference 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -2 Int16
16-57 Feedback [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups FALSE 67 Int32
16-6* Inputs & Outputs
16-60 Digital Input 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting [0] Current All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
16-62 Analog Input 53 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting [0] Current All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
16-64 Analog Input 54 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16

5 5 16-66
16-67
Digital Output [bin]
Freq. Input #29 [Hz]
0 N/A
0 N/A
All set-ups
All set-ups x
FALSE
FALSE
0
0
Int16
Int32
16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups x FALSE 0 Int32
16-71 Relay Output [bin] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-72 Counter A 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-73 Counter B 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-74 Prec. Stop Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
16-75 Analog In X30/11 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-76 Analog In X30/12 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-78 Analog Out X45/1 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-79 Analog Out X45/3 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-82 Fieldbus REF 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 N2
16-84 Comm. Option STW 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-85 FC Port CTW 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-86 FC Port REF 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 N2
16-87 Bus Readout Alarm/Warning 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-89 Configurable Alarm/Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-9* Diagnosis Readouts
16-90 Alarm Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-91 Alarm Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-92 Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-93 Warning Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-94 Ext. Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32

5.2.17 17-** Position Feedback

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter only during index
# operation
17-1* Inc. Enc. Interface
17-10 Signal Type [1] RS422 (5V TTL) All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-11 Resolution (PPR) 1024 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
17-2* Abs. Enc. Interface
17-20 Protocol Selection [0] None All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-21 Resolution (Positions/Rev) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
17-22 Multiturn Revolutions 1 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
17-24 SSI Data Length 13 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
17-25 Clock Rate 260 kHz All set-ups FALSE 3 Uint16

234 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

17-26 SSI Data Format [0] Gray code All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-34 HIPERFACE Baudrate [4] 9600 All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-5* Resolver Interface
17-50 Poles 2 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 Uint8
17-51 Input Voltage 7V 1 set-up FALSE -1 Uint8
17-52 Input Frequency 10 kHz 1 set-up FALSE 2 Uint8
17-53 Transformation Ratio 0.5 N/A 1 set-up FALSE -1 Uint8
17-56 Encoder Sim. Resolution [0] Disabled 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
17-59 Resolver Interface [0] Disabled 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-6* Monitoring and App.
17-60 Feedback Direction [0] Clockwise All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-61 Feedback Signal Monitoring
17-7* Position Scaling
[1] Warning All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5 5
17-70 Position Unit [0] pu All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
17-71 Position Unit Scale 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int8
17-72 Position Unit Numerator 1024 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
17-73 Position Unit Denominator 1 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
17-74 Position Offset 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32

5.2.18 18-** Data Readouts 2

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter only during index
# operation
18-2* Motor Readouts
18-27 Safe Opt. Est. Speed 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Int32
18-28 Safe Opt. Meas. Speed 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Int32
18-29 Safe Opt. Speed Error 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Int32
18-3* Analog Readouts
18-36 Analog Input X48/2 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
18-37 Temp. Input X48/4 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
18-38 Temp. Input X48/7 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
18-39 Temp. Input X48/10 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
18-4* PGIO Data Readouts
18-43 Analog Out X49/7 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
18-44 Analog Out X49/9 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
18-45 Analog Out X49/11 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
18-5* Active Alarms/Warnings
18-55 Active Alarm Numbers 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
18-56 Active Warning Numbers 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
18-6* Inputs & Outputs 2
18-60 Digital Input 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
18-7* Rectifier Status
18-70 Mains Voltage 0V All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint16
18-71 Mains Frequency 0 Hz All set-ups x TRUE -1 Int16
18-72 Mains Imbalance 0% All set-ups x TRUE -1 Uint16
18-75 Rectifier DC Volt. 0V All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint16
18-9* PID Readouts
18-90 Process PID Error 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
18-91 Process PID Output 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
18-92 Process PID Clamped Output 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
18-93 Process PID Gain Scaled Output 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 235

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

5.2.19 30-** Special Features

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter only during index
# operation
30-0* Wobbler
[0] Abs. Freq., Abs.
30-00 Wobble Mode Time All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
30-01 Wobble Delta Frequency [Hz] 5 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
30-02 Wobble Delta Frequency [%] 25 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Wobble Delta Freq. Scaling

5 5 30-03
30-04
Resource
Wobble Jump Frequency [Hz]
[0] No function
0 Hz
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-
-1
Uint8
Uint8
30-05 Wobble Jump Frequency [%] 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
30-06 Wobble Jump Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
30-07 Wobble Sequence Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
30-08 Wobble Up/ Down Time 5s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
30-09 Wobble Random Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
30-10 Wobble Ratio 1 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
30-11 Wobble Random Ratio Max. 10 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
30-12 Wobble Random Ratio Min. 0.1 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
30-19 Wobble Delta Freq. Scaled 0 Hz All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
30-2* Adv. Start Adjust
30-20 High Starting Torque Time [s] ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE -2 Uint16
30-21 High Starting Torque Current [%] ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE -1 Uint32
30-22 Locked Rotor Protection ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
30-23 Locked Rotor Detection Time [s] ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE -2 Uint8
Locked Rotor Detection Speed Error
30-24 [%] 25 % All set-ups x TRUE -1 Uint32
30-25 Light Load Delay [s] 0.000 s All set-ups x TRUE -3 Uint32
30-26 Light Load Current [%] 0% All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint16
30-27 Light Load Speed [%] 0% All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint16
30-5* Unit Configuration
30-50 Heat Sink Fan Mode ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups x TRUE - uint8
30-8* Compatibility (I)
30-80 d-axis Inductance (Ld) ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -6 Int32
30-81 Brake Resistor (ohm) ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint32
30-83 Speed PID Proportional Gain ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
30-84 Process PID Proportional Gain ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16

5.2.20 32-** MCO Basic Settings

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter only during index
# operation
32-0* Encoder 2
32-00 Incremental Signal Type [1] RS422 (5V TTL) 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-01 Incremental Resolution 1024 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-02 Absolute Protocol [0] None 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-03 Absolute Resolution 8192 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-04 Absolute Encoder Baudrate X55 [4] 9600 All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
32-05 Absolute Encoder Data Length 25 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
32-06 Absolute Encoder Clock Frequency 262 kHz 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-07 Absolute Encoder Clock Generation [1] On 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

236 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

32-08 Absolute Encoder Cable Length 0m 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

32-09 Encoder Monitoring [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-10 Rotational Direction [1] No action 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-11 User Unit Denominator 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-12 User Unit Numerator 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-13 Enc.2 Control [0] No soft changing 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-14 Enc.2 node ID 127 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
32-15 Enc.2 CAN guard [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-3* Encoder 1
32-30 Incremental Signal Type [1] RS422 (5V TTL) 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-31 Incremental Resolution 1024 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-32
32-33
Absolute Protocol
Absolute Resolution
[0] None
8192 N/A
2 set-ups
2 set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-
0
Uint8
Uint32
5 5
32-35 Absolute Encoder Data Length 25 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
32-36 Absolute Encoder Clock Frequency 262 kHz 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-37 Absolute Encoder Clock Generation [1] On 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-38 Absolute Encoder Cable Length 0m 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
32-39 Encoder Monitoring [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-40 Encoder Termination [1] On 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-43 Enc.1 Control [0] No soft changing 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-44 Enc.1 node ID 127 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
32-45 Enc.1 CAN guard [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-5* Feedback Source
32-50 Source Slave [2] Encoder 2 X55 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-51 MCO 302 Last Will [1] Trip 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-52 Source Master [1] Encoder 1 X56 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-6* PID Controller
32-60 Proportional factor 30 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-61 Derivative factor 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-62 Integral factor 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-63 Limit Value for Integral Sum 1000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
32-64 PID Bandwidth 1000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
32-65 Velocity Feed-Forward 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-66 Acceleration Feed-Forward 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-67 Max. Tolerated Position Error 20000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-68 Reverse Behavior for Slave [0] Reversing allowed 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-69 Sampling Time for PID Control 1 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
32-70 Scan Time for Profile Generator 1 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
Size of the Control Window
32-71 (Activation) 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Size of the Control Window
32-72 (Deactiv.) 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-73 Integral limit filter time 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int16
32-74 Position error filter time 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int16
32-8* Velocity & Accel.
32-80 Maximum Velocity (Encoder) 1500 RPM 2 set-ups TRUE 67 Uint32
32-81 Shortest Ramp 1s 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
32-82 Ramp Type [0] Linear 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-83 Velocity Resolution 100 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-84 Default Velocity 50 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-85 Default Acceleration 50 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-86 Acc. up for limited jerk 100 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
32-87 Acc. down for limited jerk 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
32-88 Dec. up for limited jerk 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 237

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

32-89 Dec. down for limited jerk 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32

32-9* Development
32-90 Debug Source [0] Controlcard 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

5.2.21 33-** MCO Adv. Settings

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
amete only during index
r# operation
33-0* Home Motion
33-00 Force HOME [0] Home not forced 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

5 5 33-01
33-02
Zero Point Offset from Home Pos.
Ramp for Home Motion
0 N/A
10 N/A
2 set-ups
2 set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
0
0
Int32
Uint32
33-03 Velocity of Home Motion 10 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-04 Behaviour during HomeMotion [0] Revers and index 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-1* Synchronization
33-10 Sync Factor Master 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-11 Sync Factor Slave 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-12 Position Offset for Synchronization 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-13 Accuracy Window for Position Sync. 1000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-14 Relative Slave Velocity Limit 0% 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
33-15 Marker Number for Master 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-16 Marker Number for Slave 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-17 Master Marker Distance 4096 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-18 Slave Marker Distance 4096 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-19 Master Marker Type [0] Encoder Z positive 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-20 Slave Marker Type [0] Encoder Z positive 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-21 Master Marker Tolerance Window 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-22 Slave Marker Tolerance Window 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-23 Start Behaviour for Marker Sync [0] Leading marker 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
33-24 Marker Number for Fault 10 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-25 Marker Number for Ready 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-26 Velocity Filter 0 us 2 set-ups TRUE -6 Int32
33-27 Offset Filter Time 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
33-28 Marker Filter Configuration [0] Marker filter 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-29 Filter Time for Marker Filter 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
33-30 Maximum Marker Correction 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-31 Synchronisation Type [0] Standard 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-32 Feed Forward Velocity Adaptation 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-33 Velocity Filter Window 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-34 Slave Marker filter time 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
33-4* Limit Handling
33-40 Behaviour atEnd Limit Switch [0] Call error handler 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-41 Negative Software End Limit -500000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-42 Positive Software End Limit 500000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-43 Negative Software End Limit Active [0] Inactive 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-44 Positive Software End Limit Active [0] Inactive 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-45 Time in Target Window 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
33-46 Target Window LimitValue 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-47 Size of Target Window 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-5* I/O Configuration
33-50 Terminal X57/1 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-51 Terminal X57/2 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-52 Terminal X57/3 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

238 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

33-53 Terminal X57/4 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-54 Terminal X57/5 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-55 Terminal X57/6 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-56 Terminal X57/7 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-57 Terminal X57/8 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-58 Terminal X57/9 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-59 Terminal X57/10 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-60 Terminal X59/1 and X59/2 Mode [1] Output 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
33-61 Terminal X59/1 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-62 Terminal X59/2 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-63 Terminal X59/1 Digital Output [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-64
33-65
Terminal X59/2 Digital Output
Terminal X59/3 Digital Output
[0] No function
[0] No function
2 set-ups
2 set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-
-
Uint8
Uint8
5 5
33-66 Terminal X59/4 Digital Output [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-67 Terminal X59/5 Digital Output [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-68 Terminal X59/6 Digital Output [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-69 Terminal X59/7 Digital Output [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-70 Terminal X59/8 Digital Output [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-8* Global Parameters
33-80 Activated Program Number -1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int8
33-81 Power-up State [1] Motor on 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-82 Drive Status Monitoring [1] On 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-83 Behaviour afterError [0] Coast 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-84 Behaviour afterEsc. [0] Controlled stop 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-85 MCO Supplied by External 24VDC [0] No 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-86 Terminal at alarm [0] Relay 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-87 Terminal state at alarm [0] Do nothing 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-88 Status word at alarm 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-9* MCO Port Settings
33-90 X62 MCO CAN node ID 127 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
33-91 X62 MCO CAN baud rate [20] 125 Kbps 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-94 X60 MCO RS485 serial termination [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-95 X60 MCO RS485 serial baud rate [2] 9600 Baud 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

5.2.22 34-** MCO Data Readouts

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
amete only during index
r# operation
34-0* PCD Write Par.
34-01 PCD 1 Write to MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-02 PCD 2 Write to MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-03 PCD 3 Write to MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-04 PCD 4 Write to MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-05 PCD 5 Write to MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-06 PCD 6 Write to MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-07 PCD 7 Write to MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-08 PCD 8 Write to MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-09 PCD 9 Write to MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-10 PCD 10 Write to MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-2* PCD Read Par.
34-21 PCD 1 Read from MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-22 PCD 2 Read from MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-23 PCD 3 Read from MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 239

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

34-24 PCD 4 Read from MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-25 PCD 5 Read from MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-26 PCD 6 Read from MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-27 PCD 7 Read from MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-28 PCD 8 Read from MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-29 PCD 9 Read from MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-30 PCD 10 Read from MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-4* Inputs & Outputs
34-40 Digital Inputs 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-41 Digital Outputs 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-5* Process Data

5 5 34-50
34-51
Actual Position
Commanded Position
0 N/A
0 N/A
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
0
0
Int32
Int32
34-52 Actual Master Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-53 Slave Index Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-54 Master Index Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-55 Curve Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-56 Track Error 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-57 Synchronizing Error 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-58 Actual Velocity 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-59 Actual Master Velocity 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-60 Synchronizing Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-61 Axis Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-62 Program Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-64 MCO 302 Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-65 MCO 302 Control 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-66 SPI Error Counter 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
34-7* Diagnosis readouts
34-70 MCO Alarm Word 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
34-71 MCO Alarm Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32

5.2.23 35-** Sensor Input Option

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
amete only during index
r# operation
35-0* Temp. Input Mode
35-00 Term. X48/4 Temperature Unit [60] °C All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-01 Term. X48/4 Input Type [0] Not Connected All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-02 Term. X48/7 Temperature Unit [60] °C All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-03 Term. X48/7 Input Type [0] Not Connected All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-04 Term. X48/10 Temperature Unit [60] °C All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-05 Term. X48/10 Input Type [0] Not Connected All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Temperature Sensor Alarm
35-06 Function [5] Stop and trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-1* Temp. Input X48/4
35-14 Term. X48/4 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
35-15 Term. X48/4 Temp. Monitor [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-16 Term. X48/4 Low Temp. Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
35-17 Term. X48/4 High Temp. Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
35-2* Temp. Input X48/7
35-24 Term. X48/7 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
35-25 Term. X48/7 Temp. Monitor [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-26 Term. X48/7 Low Temp. Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16

240 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

35-27 Term. X48/7 High Temp. Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
35-3* Temp. Input X48/10
35-34 Term. X48/10 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
35-35 Term. X48/10 Temp. Monitor [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-36 Term. X48/10 Low Temp. Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
35-37 Term. X48/10 High Temp. Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
35-4* Analog Input X48/2
35-42 Term. X48/2 Low Current 4 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
35-43 Term. X48/2 High Current 20 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
35-44 Term. X48/2 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
35-45 Term. X48/2 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
35-46 Term. X48/2 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
5 5
5.2.24 36-** Programmable I/O Option

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
amete only during index
r# operation
36-0* I/O Mode
36-03 Terminal X49/7 Mode [0] Voltage 0-10V All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
36-04 Terminal X49/9 Mode [0] Voltage 0-10V All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
36-05 Terminal X49/11 Mode [0] Voltage 0-10V All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
36-4* Output X49/7
36-40 Terminal X49/7 Analogue Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
36-42 Terminal X49/7 Min. Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
36-43 Terminal X49/7 Max. Scale 100 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
36-44 Terminal X49/7 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
36-45 Terminal X49/7 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
36-5* Output X49/9
36-50 Terminal X49/9 Analogue Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
36-52 Terminal X49/9 Min. Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
36-53 Terminal X49/9 Max. Scale 100 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
36-54 Terminal X49/9 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
36-55 Terminal X49/9 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
36-6* Output X49/11
36-60 Terminal X49/11 Analogue Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
36-62 Terminal X49/11 Min. Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
36-63 Terminal X49/11 Max. Scale 100 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
36-64 Terminal X49/11 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
36-65 Terminal X49/11 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 241

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

5.2.25 43-** Unit Readouts

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
amete only during index
r# operation
43-0* Component Status
43-00 Component Temp. 0 °C All set-ups x TRUE 100 Int8
43-01 Auxiliary Temp. 0 °C All set-ups x TRUE 100 Int8
43-02 Component SW ID 0 N/A All set-ups x TRUE 0 VisStr[18]
43-1* Power Card Status
43-10 HS Temp. ph.U 0 °C All set-ups x TRUE 100 Int8

5 5 43-11
43-12
HS Temp. ph.V
HS Temp. ph.W
0 °C
0 °C
All set-ups
All set-ups
x
x
TRUE
TRUE
100
100
Int8
Int8
43-13 PC Fan A Speed 0 RPM All set-ups x TRUE 67 Uint16
43-14 PC Fan B Speed 0 RPM All set-ups x TRUE 67 Uint16
43-15 PC Fan C Speed 0 RPM All set-ups x TRUE 67 Uint16
43-2* Fan Pow.Card Status
43-20 FPC Fan A Speed 0 RPM All set-ups x TRUE 67 Uint16
43-21 FPC Fan B Speed 0 RPM All set-ups x TRUE 67 Uint16
43-22 FPC Fan C Speed 0 RPM All set-ups x TRUE 67 Uint16
43-23 FPC Fan D Speed 0 RPM All set-ups x TRUE 67 Uint16
43-24 FPC Fan E Speed 0 RPM All set-ups x TRUE 67 Uint16
43-25 FPC Fan F Speed 0 RPM All set-ups x TRUE 67 Uint16

242 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

5.3 Parameter Lists and Options, Software Version 48.20 (IMC)

5.3.1 0-** Operation / Display

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter # only during index
operation
0-0* Basic Settings
0-01 Language [0] English 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-02 Motor Speed Unit [0] RPM 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-03 Regional Settings [0] International 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8

0-04
Operating State at Power-up
(Hand)
[1] Forced stop,
ref=old All set-ups TRUE - Uint8 5 5
0-09 Performance Monitor 0% All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
0-1* Set-up Operations
0-10 Active Set-up [1] Set-up 1 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-11 Edit Set-up [1] Set-up 1 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-12 This Set-up Linked to [0] Not linked All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
0-14 Readout: Edit Set-ups / Channel 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
0-15 Readout: actual setup 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
0-2* LCP Display
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 1617 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small 1614 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small 1610 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-23 Display Line 2 Large 1613 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-24 Display Line 3 Large 1602 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-25 My Personal Menu ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
0-3* LCP Custom Readout
0-30 Unit for User-defined Readout [0] None All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Min Value of User-defined 0 CustomRea-
0-31 Readout doutUnit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
Max Value of User-defined 100 CustomRea-
0-32 Readout doutUnit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
0-33 Source for User-defined Readout [240] Default Source All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-37 Display Text 1 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[25]
0-38 Display Text 2 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[25]
0-39 Display Text 3 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[25]
0-4* LCP Keypad
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-41 [Off] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-44 [Off/Reset] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-45 [Drive Bypass] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-5* Copy/Save
0-50 LCP Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-51 Set-up Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-6* Password
0-60 Main Menu Password 100 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16
Access to Main Menu w/o
0-61 Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-65 Quick Menu Password 200 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 243

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

Access to Quick Menu w/o

0-66 Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-67 Bus Password Access 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
0-68 Safety Parameters Password 300 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
Password Protection of Safety
0-69 Parameters [0] Disabled 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8

5.3.2 1-** Load and Motor

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter # only during index

5 5 1-0* General Settings

operation

1-00 Configuration Mode ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

1-01 Motor Control Principle ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-02 Flux Motor Feedback Source [1] 24V encoder All set-ups x FALSE - Uint8
1-03 Torque Characteristics [0] Constant torque All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-04 Overload Mode [0] High torque All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-05 Local Mode Configuration [2] As mode par 1-00 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-06 Clockwise Direction [0] Normal All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-07 Motor Angle Offset Adjust [0] Manual All set-ups x FALSE - Uint8
1-1* Special Settings
1-10 Motor Construction [0] Asynchron All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-11 Motor Model ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE - Uint8
1-18 Min. Current at No Load 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-2* Motor Data
1-20 Motor Power [kW] ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 1 Uint32
1-21 Motor Power [HP] ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-22 Motor Voltage ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-23 Motor Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-24 Motor Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 67 Uint16
1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint32
Automatic Motor Adaptation
1-29 (AMA) [0] Off All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-3* Adv. Motor Data
1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-35 Main Reactance (Xh) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32
1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld) ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -4 Int32
1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -6 Int32
1-39 Motor Poles ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE 0 Uint16
1-41 Motor Angle Offset 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-44 d-axis Inductance Sat. (LdSat) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -6 Int32
1-45 q-axis Inductance Sat. (LqSat) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -6 Int32
1-46 Position Detection Gain 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-47 Torque Calibration ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-48 d-axis Inductance Sat. Point ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-49 q-axis Inductance Sat. Point 35 % All set-ups x FALSE 0 Uint16
1-5* Load Indep. Setting

244 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

Motor Magnetisation at Zero

1-50 Speed 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
Min Speed Normal Magnetising
1-51 [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
Min Speed Normal Magnetising
1-52 [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-53 Model Shift Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -1 Uint16
Voltage reduction in
1-54 fieldweakening 0V All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
1-55 U/f Characteristic - U ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-56 U/f Characteristic - F ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16

1-57
Torque Estimation Time
Constant 150 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16 5 5
1-58 Flying Start Test Pulses Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
Flying Start Test Pulses
1-59 Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-6* Load Depen. Setting
1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-61 High Speed Load Compensation 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-62 Slip Compensation ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
Slip Compensation Time
1-63 Constant ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-64 Resonance Damping ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
Resonance Damping Time
1-65 Constant 5 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
1-67 Load Type ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
1-68 Motor Inertia 0 kgm² All set-ups x TRUE -4 Uint32
1-69 System Inertia ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE -4 Uint32
1-7* Start Adjustments
1-70 PM Start Mode [0] Rotor Detection All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-71 Start Delay 0s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
1-72 Start Function [2] Coast/delay time All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-73 Flying Start ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-74 Start Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-75 Start Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-76 Start Current 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
1-8* Stop Adjustments
1-80 Function at Stop [0] Coast All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Min Speed for Function at Stop
1-81 [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
Min Speed for Function at Stop
1-82 [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-9* Motor Temperature
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-91 Motor External Fan ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-93 Thermistor Resource [0] None All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
ATEX ETR cur.lim. speed
1-94 reduction 0% 2 set-ups x TRUE -1 Uint16
1-95 KTY Sensor Type [0] KTY Sensor 1 All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
1-96 KTY Thermistor Resource [0] None All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
1-97 KTY Threshold level 80 °C 1 set-up x TRUE 100 Int16
1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. points freq. ExpressionLimit 1 set-up x TRUE -1 Uint16
1-99 ATEX ETR interpol points current ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint16

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 245

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

5.3.3 2-** Brakes

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter # only during index
operation
2-0* DC-Brake
2-00 DC Hold Current 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
2-01 DC Brake Current 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-02 DC Braking Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16

5 5 2-05
2-06
Maximum Reference
Parking Current
MaxReference (P303)
50 %
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-3
0
Int32
Uint16
2-07 Parking Time 3s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-1* Brake Energy Funct.
2-10 Brake Function ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
2-13 Brake Power Monitoring [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-15 Brake Check [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-16 AC brake Max. Current 100 % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint32
2-17 Over-voltage Control [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-18 Brake Check Condition [0] At Power Up All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-19 Over-voltage Gain 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-2* Mechanical Brake
2-20 Release Brake Current ImaxVLT (P1637) All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
2-21 Activate Brake Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
2-22 Activate Brake Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-23 Activate Brake Delay ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
2-24 Stop Delay 0s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
2-25 Brake Release Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
2-26 Torque Ref 15 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
2-27 Torque Ramp Up Time 0.2 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
2-28 Gain Boost Factor ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
2-29 Torque Ramp Down Time 0.2 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
2-3* Adv. Mech Brake
Position P Start Proportional
2-30 Gain 0.05 N/A All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
Speed PID Start Proportional
2-31 Gain 0.05 N/A All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
2-32 Speed PID Start Integral Time 20.0 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
Speed PID Start Lowpass Filter
2-33 Time 2.0 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
Zero Speed Position P Propor-
2-34 tional Gain 0.0000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32

246 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

5.3.4 3-** Reference / Ramps

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter # only during index
operation
3-0* Reference Limits
3-00 Reference Range ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-02 Minimum Reference ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
3-03 Maximum Reference ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
3-04 Reference Function [0] Sum All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-05 On Reference Window ExpressionLimit
-100000 CustomRea-
All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5 5
3-06 Minimum Position doutUnit2 All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
100000 CustomRea-
3-07 Maximum Position doutUnit2 All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
5 CustomRea-
3-08 On Target Window doutUnit2 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
3-09 On Target Time 1 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
3-1* References
3-10 Preset Reference 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
3-11 Jog Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
[0] Linked to Hand /
3-13 Reference Site Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-14 Preset Relative Reference 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
3-15 Reference Resource 1 ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-16 Reference Resource 2 ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-17 Reference Resource 3 ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Relative Scaling Reference
3-18 Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-19 Jog Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
3-2* References II
0 CustomRea-
3-20 Preset Target doutUnit2 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
0 CustomRea-
3-21 Touch Target doutUnit2 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
3-22 Master Scale Numerator 1 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
3-23 Master Scale Denominator 1 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
3-24 Master Lowpass Filter Time 20 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
3-25 Master Bus Resolution 65536 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
0 CustomRea-
3-26 Master Offset doutUnit2 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
3-27 Virtual Master Max Ref 50.0 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
3-28 Master Offset Speed Ref 1500 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
3-4* Ramp 1
3-40 Ramp 1 Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.
3-45 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.
3-46 End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 247

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.

3-47 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-48 End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-5* Ramp 2
3-50 Ramp 2 Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.
3-55 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.

5 5 3-56 End
Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8

3-57 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8

Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-58 End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-6* Ramp 3
3-60 Ramp 3 Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.
3-65 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.
3-66 End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-67 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-68 End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-7* Ramp 4
3-70 Ramp 4 Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.
3-75 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.
3-76 End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-77 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-78 End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-8* Other Ramps
3-80 Jog/Homing Ramp Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-82 Quick Stop Ramp Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at
3-83 Decel. Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at
3-84 Decel. End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-89 Ramp Lowpass Filter Time 1 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
3-9* Digital Pot.Meter
3-90 Step Size 0.10 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
3-91 Ramp Time 1s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-92 Power Restore [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-93 Maximum Limit 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
3-94 Minimum Limit -100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16

248 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

3-95 Ramp Delay ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 TimD

5.3.5 4-** Limits / Warnings

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter # only during index
operation
4-1* Motor Limits
4-10 Motor Speed Direction ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-13
4-14
Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
ExpressionLimit
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
67
-1
Uint16
Uint16
5 5
4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode 100 % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-18 Current Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint32
4-19 Max Output Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
4-2* Limit Factors
4-20 Torque Limit Factor Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-21 Speed Limit Factor Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Brake Check Limit Factor
4-23 Source [0] DC-link voltage All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-24 Brake Check Limit Factor 98 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
4-3* Motor Speed Mon.
4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function [2] Trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error 300 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout 0.05 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
4-34 Tracking Error Function ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-35 Tracking Error 10 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-36 Tracking Error Timeout 1s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
4-37 Tracking Error Ramping 100 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
Tracking Error Ramping
4-38 Timeout 1s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
Tracking Error After Ramping
4-39 Timeout 5s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
4-4* Speed Monitor
4-43 Motor Speed Monitor Function ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-44 Motor Speed Monitor Max 300 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-45 Motor Speed Monitor Timeout 0.1 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
4-5* Adj. Warnings
4-50 Warning Current Low 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
4-51 Warning Current High ImaxVLT (P1637) All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
4-52 Warning Speed Low 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-53 Warning Speed High ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-54 Warning Reference Low -999999.999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-55 Warning Reference High 999999.999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
-999999.999 Referen-
4-56 Warning Feedback Low ceFeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
999999.999 Referen-
4-57 Warning Feedback High ceFeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-6* Speed Bypass
4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 249

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

4-62 Bypass Speed To [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16

4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-7* Position Monitor
4-70 Position Error Function [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1000 CustomRea-
4-71 Maximum Position Error doutUnit2 All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
4-72 Position Error Timeout 0.100 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
[3] Abs. Pos. Mode
4-73 Position Limit Function Stop All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-74 Start Fwd/Rev Function [0] Stop All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-75 Touch Timout 6000.0 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16

5 5 5.3.6 5-** Digital In/Out

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter # only during index
operation
5-0* Digital I/O mode
5-00 Digital I/O Mode [0] PNP All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode [0] Input All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode [0] Input All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5-1* Digital Inputs
5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-11 Terminal 19 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-16 Terminal X30/2 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-17 Terminal X30/3 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-18 Terminal X30/4 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
5-20 Terminal X46/1 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-21 Terminal X46/3 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-22 Terminal X46/5 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-23 Terminal X46/7 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-24 Terminal X46/9 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-25 Terminal X46/11 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-26 Terminal X46/13 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-3* Digital Outputs
5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-31 Terminal 29 Digital Output ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-4* Relays
5-40 Function Relay ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-41 On Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-42 Off Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-5* Pulse Input
5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
0 ReferenceFeed-
5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value backUnit All set-ups x TRUE -3 Int32
5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE -3 Int32

250 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29 100 ms All set-ups x FALSE -3 Uint16
5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
0 ReferenceFeed-
5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value backUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33 100 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
5-6* Pulse Output
Terminal 27 Pulse Output
5-60 Variable ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-62 Pulse Output Max Freq #27 ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32

5-63
Terminal 29 Pulse Output
Variable ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5 5
5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq #29 ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output
5-66 Variable ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-68 Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6 ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-7* 24V Encoder Input
Term 32/33 Pulses Per
5-70 Revolution 1024 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
5-71 Term 32/33 Encoder Direction [0] Clockwise All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
[0] Quadrature A/B
5-72 Term 32/33 Encoder Type Format All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
5-8* I/O Options
5-80 AHF Cap Reconnect Delay 25 s 2 set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint16
5-9* Bus Controlled
5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-93 Pulse Out #27 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
5-94 Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
5-95 Pulse Out #29 Bus Control 0% All set-ups x TRUE -2 N2
5-96 Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up x TRUE -2 Uint16
5-97 Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout
5-98 Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16

5.3.7 6-** Analog In/Out

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter # only during index
operation
6-0* Analog I/O Mode
6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-1* Analog Input 1
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current 0.14 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-13 Terminal 53 High Current 20 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. 0 ReferenceFeed-
6-14 Value backUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb.
6-15 Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
Terminal 53 Filter Time
6-16 Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 251

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

6-2* Analog Input 2

6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current 0.14 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-23 Terminal 54 High Current 20 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. 0 ReferenceFeed-
6-24 Value backUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb.
6-25 Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
Terminal 54 Filter Time
6-26 Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16

5 5 6-3* Analog Input 3

6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. 0 ReferenceFeed-
6-34 Value backUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb.
6-35 Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
Term. X30/11 Filter Time
6-36 Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-4* Analog Input 4
6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-41 Terminal X30/12 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. 0 ReferenceFeed-
6-44 Value backUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb.
6-45 Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
Term. X30/12 Filter Time
6-46 Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-5* Analog Output 1
6-50 Terminal 42 Output ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale 100 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-53 Term 42 Output Bus Ctrl 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
Terminal 42 Output Timeout
6-54 Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
6-55 Analog Output Filter [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
6-6* Analog Output 2
6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-61 Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale 100 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-63 Terminal X30/8 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
Terminal X30/8 Output
6-64 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
6-7* Analog Output 3
6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-71 Terminal X45/1 Min. Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-72 Terminal X45/1 Max. Scale 100 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-73 Terminal X45/1 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
Terminal X45/1 Output
6-74 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
6-8* Analog Output 4
6-80 Terminal X45/3 Output ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-81 Terminal X45/3 Min. Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16

252 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

6-82 Terminal X45/3 Max. Scale 100 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-83 Terminal X45/3 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
Terminal X45/3 Output
6-84 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16

5.3.8 7-** Controllers

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter # only during index
operation
7-0* Speed PID Ctrl.
7-00
7-01
Speed PID Feedback Source
Speed PID Droop
ExpressionLimit
0 RPM
All set-ups
All set-ups
FALSE
TRUE
-
67
Uint8
Uint16
5 5
7-02 Speed PID Proportional Gain 0.015 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
7-03 Speed PID Integral Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
7-04 Speed PID Differentiation Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
7-05 Speed PID Diff. Gain Limit 5 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
7-06 Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
Speed PID Feedback Gear
7-07 Ratio 1 N/A All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
Speed PID Accel. Feed Forward
7-08 Factor 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
Speed PID Error Correction w/
7-09 Ramp 300 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint32
7-1* Torque PI Ctrl.
7-10 Torque PI Feedback Source [0] Controller Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-12 Torque PI Proportional Gain 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-13 Torque PI Integration Time 0.020 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
7-16 Torque PI Lowpass Filter Time 5 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
7-18 Torque PI Feed Forward Factor 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-19 Current Controller Rise Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-2* Process Ctrl. Feedb
Process CL Feedback 1
7-20 Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Process CL Feedback 2
7-22 Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-3* Process PID Ctrl.
Process PID Normal/ Inverse
7-30 Control [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-31 Process PID Anti Windup [1] On All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-32 Process PID Start Speed 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
7-33 Process PID Proportional Gain 0.01 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
7-34 Process PID Integral Time 10000 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
Process PID Differentiation
7-35 Time 0s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
7-36 Process PID Diff. Gain Limit 5 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
Process PID Feed Forward
7-38 Factor 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-39 On Reference Bandwidth 5% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
7-9* Position PI Ctrl.
[0] Motor feedb.
7-90 Position PI Feedback Source P1-02 All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
7-91 Position PI Droop 0.0 ° All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
7-92 Position PI Proportional Gain 0.0150 N/A All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 253

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

7-93 Position PI Integral Time 20000.0 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32

Position PI Feedback Scale
7-94 Numerator 1 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
Position PI Feebback Scale
7-95 Denominator 1 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
Position PI Maximum Speed
7-97 Above Master 100 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
Position PI Feed Forward
7-98 Factor 98 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
Position PI Minimum Ramp
7-99 Time 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32

5 5 5.3.9 8-** Comm. and Options

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter # only during index
operation
8-0* General Settings
[0] Digital and
8-01 Control Site ctrl.word All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-02 Control Word Source ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-03 Control Word Timeout Time 1s 1 set-up TRUE -1 Uint32
Control Word Timeout
8-04 Function ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-05 End-of-Timeout Function [1] Resume set-up 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-06 Reset Control Word Timeout [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-07 Diagnosis Trigger [0] Disable 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-08 Readout Filtering ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-1* Ctrl. Word Settings
8-10 Control Word Profile ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-13 Configurable Status Word STW [1] Profile Default All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Configurable Control Word
8-14 CTW [1] Profile default All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Configurable Alarm and
8-17 Warningword [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
8-19 Product Code ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
8-3* FC Port Settings
8-30 Protocol [0] FC 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-31 Address 1 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
8-32 FC Port Baud Rate ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
[0] Even Parity, 1
8-33 Parity / Stop Bits Stop Bit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-34 Estimated cycle time 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
8-35 Minimum Response Delay 10 ms 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-36 Max Response Delay ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-37 Max Inter-Char Delay ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -5 Uint16
8-4* FC MC protocol set
[1] Standard telegram
8-40 Telegram Selection 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-41 Parameters for Signals 0 All set-ups FALSE - Uint16
8-42 PCD Write Configuration ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
8-43 PCD Read Configuration ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
8-5* Digital/Bus
8-50 Coasting Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

254 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

8-51 Quick Stop Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-52 DC Brake Select ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-53 Start Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-54 Reversing Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-55 Set-up Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-56 Preset Reference Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-57 Profidrive OFF2 Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-58 Profidrive OFF3 Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-8* FC Port Diagnostics
8-80 Bus Message Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-81 Bus Error Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-82
8-83
Slave Messages Rcvd
Slave Error Count
0 N/A
0 N/A
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
0
0
Uint32
Uint32
5 5
8-9* Bus Jog
8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed 100 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16

5.3.10 9-** PROFIdrive

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter # only during index
operation
9-00 Setpoint 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-07 Actual Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-15 PCD Write Configuration ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint16
9-16 PCD Read Configuration ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
9-18 Node Address 126 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
9-19 Drive Unit System Number 1034 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-22 Telegram Selection [100] None 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
9-23 Parameters for Signals 0 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
9-27 Parameter Edit [1] Enabled 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint16
[1] Enable cyclic
9-28 Process Control master 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
9-44 Fault Message Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-45 Fault Code 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-47 Fault Number 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-52 Fault Situation Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-53 Profibus Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
[255] No baudrate
9-63 Actual Baud Rate found All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
9-64 Device Identification 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-65 Profile Number 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 OctStr[2]
9-67 Control Word 1 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
9-68 Status Word 1 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
9-70 Edit Set-up [1] Set-up 1 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
9-71 Profibus Save Data Values [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
9-72 ProfibusDriveReset [0] No action 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
9-75 DO Identification 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-80 Defined Parameters (1) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-81 Defined Parameters (2) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-82 Defined Parameters (3) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-83 Defined Parameters (4) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-84 Defined Parameters (5) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-85 Defined Parameters (6) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 255

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

9-90 Changed Parameters (1) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16

9-91 Changed Parameters (2) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-92 Changed Parameters (3) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-93 Changed Parameters (4) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-94 Changed Parameters (5) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-99 Profibus Revision Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

5.3.11 10-** CAN Fieldbus

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter # only during index

5 5 10-0* Common Settings

operation

10-00 CAN Protocol ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8

10-01 Baud Rate Select ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-02 MAC ID ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Readout Transmit Error
10-05 Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Readout Receive Error
10-06 Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-07 Readout Bus Off Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-1* DeviceNet
10-10 Process Data Type Selection ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-11 Process Data Config Write ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
10-12 Process Data Config Read ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
10-13 Warning Parameter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
10-14 Net Reference [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-15 Net Control [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-2* COS Filters
10-20 COS Filter 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
10-21 COS Filter 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
10-22 COS Filter 3 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
10-23 COS Filter 4 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
10-3* Parameter Access
10-30 Array Index 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-31 Store Data Values [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-32 Devicenet Revision ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
10-33 Store Always [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
10-34 DeviceNet Product Code ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
10-39 Devicenet F Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
10-5* CANopen
10-50 Process Data Config Write. ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
10-51 Process Data Config Read. ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16

256 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

5.3.12 12-** Ethernet

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter # only during index
operation
12-0* IP Settings
12-00 IP Address Assignment ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-01 IP Address 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-02 Subnet Mask 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-03 Default Gateway 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-04 DHCP Server 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-05
12-06
Lease Expires
Name Servers
ExpressionLimit
0 N/A
All set-ups
1 set-up
TRUE
TRUE
0
0
TimD
OctStr[4]
5 5
12-07 Domain Name 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[48]
12-08 Host Name 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[48]
12-09 Physical Address 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[17]
12-1* Ethernet Link Parameters
12-10 Link Status [0] No Link All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-11 Link Duration ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 TimD
12-12 Auto Negotiation ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-13 Link Speed ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-14 Link Duplex ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-2* Process Data
12-20 Control Instance ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
12-21 Process Data Config Write ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
12-22 Process Data Config Read ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
Process Data Config Write
12-23 Size 16 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Process Data Config Read
12-24 Size 16 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-27 Master Address 0 N/A 2 set-ups FALSE 0 OctStr[4]
12-28 Store Data Values [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-29 Store Always [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
12-3* EtherNet/IP
12-30 Warning Parameter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-31 Net Reference [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-32 Net Control [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-33 CIP Revision ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-34 CIP Product Code ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
12-35 EDS Parameter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-37 COS Inhibit Timer 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-38 COS Filter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-4* Modbus TCP
12-40 Status Parameter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-41 Slave Message Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Slave Exception Message
12-42 Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-5* EtherCAT
12-50 Configured Station Alias 0 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 Uint16
12-51 Configured Station Address 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-59 EtherCAT Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-6* Ethernet PowerLink
12-60 Node ID 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
12-62 SDO Timeout 30000 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 257

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

12-63 Basic Ethernet Timeout 5000.000 ms All set-ups TRUE -6 Uint32

12-66 Threshold 15 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-67 Threshold Counters 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-68 Cumulative Counters 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-69 Ethernet PowerLink Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-8* Other Ethernet Services
12-80 FTP Server [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-81 HTTP Server [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-82 SMTP Service [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Transparent Socket Channel
12-89 Port ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

5 5 12-9* Advanced Ethernet Services

12-90 Cable Diagnostic [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-91 Auto Cross Over [1] Enabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-92 IGMP Snooping [1] Enabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-93 Cable Error Length 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
12-94 Broadcast Storm Protection -1 % 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int8
12-95 Broadcast Storm Filter [0] Broadcast only 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-96 Port Config ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-98 Interface Counters 4000 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-99 Media Counters 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32

5.3.13 13-** Smart Logic

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter # only during index
operation
13-0* SLC Settings
13-00 SL Controller Mode ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-01 Start Event ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-02 Stop Event ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-03 Reset SLC [0] Do not reset SLC All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-1* Comparators
13-10 Comparator Operand ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-11 Comparator Operator ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-12 Comparator Value ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
13-1* RS Flip Flops
13-15 RS-FF Operand S ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-16 RS-FF Operand R ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-2* Timers
13-20 SL Controller Timer ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -3 TimD
13-4* Logic Rules
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2 ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3 ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-5* States
13-51 SL Controller Event ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-52 SL Controller Action ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

258 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

5.3.14 14-** Special Functions

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter # only during index
operation
14-0* Inverter Switching
14-00 Switching Pattern [1] SFAVM All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-01 Switching Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-03 Overmodulation [1] On All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-04 PWM Random [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-06 Dead Time Compensation [1] On All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-1* Mains On/Off
14-10 Mains Failure [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5 5
Mains Voltage at Mains
14-11 Fault ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
Function at Mains
14-12 Imbalance [0] Trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-14 Kin. Backup Time Out 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Kin. Backup Trip Recovery
14-15 Level ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
14-16 Kin. Backup Gain 100 % All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
14-2* Trip Reset
14-20 Reset Mode [0] Manual reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-21 Automatic Restart Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-22 Operation Mode [0] Normal operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-23 Typecode Setting ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-24 Trip Delay at Current Limit 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-28 Production Settings [0] No action All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-29 Service Code 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
14-3* Current Limit Ctrl.
Current Lim Ctrl, Propor-
14-30 tional Gain 100 % All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
Current Lim Ctrl, Integration
14-31 Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
14-32 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
14-35 Stall Protection [1] Enabled All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-36 Fieldweakening Function [0] Auto All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
14-4* Energy Optimising
14-40 VT Level 66 % All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
AEO Minimum Magneti-
14-41 sation ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-43 Motor Cosphi ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
14-5* Environment
14-50 RFI Filter [1] On 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
14-51 DC Link Compensation ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-52 Fan Control [0] Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-53 Fan Monitor ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-55 Output Filter [0] No Filter All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-56 Capacitance Output Filter ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -7 Uint16
14-57 Inductance Output Filter ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -6 Uint16

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 259

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

Actual Number of Inverter

14-59 Units ExpressionLimit 1 set-up x FALSE 0 Uint8
14-7* Compatibility
14-72 Legacy Alarm Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
14-73 Legacy Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
14-74 Leg. Ext. Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
14-8* Options
Option Supplied by External
14-80 24VDC [1] Yes 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-88 Option Data Storage 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
[0] Protect Option

5 5 14-89 Option Detection

14-9* Fault Settings
Config. 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8

14-90 Fault Level ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8

5.3.15 15-** Drive Information

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter # only during index
operation
15-0* Operating Data
15-00 Operating hours 0h All set-ups FALSE 74 Uint32
15-01 Running Hours 0h All set-ups FALSE 74 Uint32
15-02 kWh Counter 0 kWh All set-ups FALSE 75 Uint32
15-03 Power Up's 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-04 Over Temp's 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-05 Over Volt's 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-06 Reset kWh Counter [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Reset Running Hours
15-07 Counter [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-1* Data Log Settings
15-10 Logging Source 0 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
15-11 Logging Interval ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -3 TimD
15-12 Trigger Event [0] False 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
15-13 Logging Mode [0] Log always 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-14 Samples Before Trigger 50 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
15-2* Historic Log
15-20 Historic Log: Event 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
15-21 Historic Log: Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-22 Historic Log: Time 0 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32
15-3* Fault Log
15-30 Fault Log: Error Code 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-31 Fault Log: Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
15-32 Fault Log: Time 0s All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-4* Drive Identification
15-40 FC Type 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[6]
15-41 Power Section 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-42 Voltage 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-43 Software Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[5]
15-44 Ordered Typecode String 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-45 Actual Typecode String 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
Frequency Converter
15-46 Ordering No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-47 Power Card Ordering No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]

260 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

15-48 LCP Id No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]

15-49 SW ID Control Card 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-50 SW ID Power Card 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
Frequency Converter Serial
15-51 Number 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[10]
15-53 Power Card Serial Number 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[19]
15-58 Smart Setup Filename ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 VisStr[20]
15-59 CSIV Filename ExpressionLimit 1 set-up FALSE 0 VisStr[16]
15-6* Option Ident
15-60 Option Mounted 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-61 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-62
15-63
Option Ordering No
Option Serial No
0 N/A
0 N/A
All set-ups
All set-ups
FALSE
FALSE
0
0
VisStr[8]
VisStr[18]
5 5
15-70 Option in Slot A 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-71 Slot A Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-72 Option in Slot B 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-73 Slot B Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-74 Option in Slot C0/E0 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
Slot C0/E0 Option SW
15-75 Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-76 Option in Slot C1/E1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
Slot C1/E1 Option SW
15-77 Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-8* Operating Data II
15-80 Fan Running Hours 0h All set-ups TRUE 74 Uint32
15-81 Preset Fan Running Hours 0h All set-ups TRUE 74 Uint32
Configuration Change
15-89 Counter 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-9* Parameter Info
15-92 Defined Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-93 Modified Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-98 Drive Identification 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-99 Parameter Metadata 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16

5.3.16 16-** Data Readouts

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter # only during index
operation
16-0* General Status
16-00 Control Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
0 ReferenceFeed-
16-01 Reference [Unit] backUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-02 Reference % 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-03 Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-05 Main Actual Value [%] 0% All set-ups FALSE -2 N2
0 CustomRea-
16-06 Actual Position doutUnit2 All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
0 CustomRea-
16-07 Target Position doutUnit2 All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
0 CustomRea-
16-08 Position Error doutUnit2 All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
0 CustomRea-
16-09 Custom Readout doutUnit All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 261

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

16-1* Motor Status

16-10 Power [kW] 0 kW All set-ups FALSE 1 Int32
16-11 Power [hp] 0 hp All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-12 Motor Voltage 0V All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
16-13 Frequency 0 Hz All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
16-14 Motor current 0A All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-15 Frequency [%] 0% All set-ups FALSE -2 N2
16-16 Torque [Nm] 0 Nm All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-17 Speed [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups FALSE 67 Int32
16-18 Motor Thermal 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-19 KTY sensor temperature 0 °C All set-ups FALSE 100 Int16

5 5 16-20
16-21
Motor Angle
Torque [%] High Res.
0 N/A
0%
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
FALSE
0
-1
Uint16
Int16
16-22 Torque [%] 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-23 Motor Shaft Power [kW] 0 kW All set-ups TRUE 1 Int32
16-24 Calibrated Stator Resistance 0.0000 Ohm All set-ups x TRUE -4 Uint32
16-25 Torque [Nm] High 0 Nm All set-ups FALSE -1 Int32
16-3* Drive Status
16-30 DC Link Voltage 0V All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-32 Brake Energy /s 0 kW All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-33 Brake Energy Average 0 kW All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-34 Heatsink Temp. 0 °C All set-ups FALSE 100 Uint8
16-35 Inverter Thermal 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-36 Inv. Nom. Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
16-37 Inv. Max. Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
16-38 SL Controller State 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-39 Control Card Temp. 0 °C All set-ups FALSE 100 Uint8
16-40 Logging Buffer Full [0] No All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
16-41 LCP Bottom Statusline 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 VisStr[50]
16-44 Speed Error [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups FALSE 67 Int32
16-45 Motor Phase U Current 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
16-46 Motor Phase V Current 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
16-47 Motor Phase W Current 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
Speed Ref. After Ramp
16-48 [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups FALSE 67 Int32
16-49 Current Fault Source 0 N/A All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint8
16-5* Ref. & Feedb.
16-50 External Reference 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-51 Pulse Reference 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
0 ReferenceFeed-
16-52 Feedback[Unit] backUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-53 Digi Pot Reference 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -2 Int16
16-57 Feedback [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups FALSE 67 Int32
16-6* Inputs & Outputs
16-60 Digital Input 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting [0] Current All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
16-62 Analog Input 53 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting [0] Current All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
16-64 Analog Input 54 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-66 Digital Output [bin] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-67 Freq. Input #29 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups x FALSE 0 Int32
16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32

262 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups x FALSE 0 Int32
16-71 Relay Output [bin] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-72 Counter A 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-73 Counter B 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-75 Analog In X30/11 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-76 Analog In X30/12 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-78 Analog Out X45/1 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-79 Analog Out X45/3 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-82 Fieldbus REF 1 0 N/A
0 CustomRea-
All set-ups FALSE 0 N2
5 5
16-83 Fieldbus REF 2 doutUnit2 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int32
16-84 Comm. Option STW 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-85 FC Port CTW 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-86 FC Port REF 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 N2
Bus Readout Alarm/
16-87 Warning 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
Configurable Alarm/
16-89 Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-9* Diagnosis Readouts
16-90 Alarm Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-91 Alarm Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-92 Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-93 Warning Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-94 Ext. Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32

5.3.17 17-** Position Feedback

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter # only during index
operation
17-1* Inc. Enc. Interface
17-10 Signal Type [1] RS422 (5V TTL) All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-11 Resolution (PPR) 1024 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
17-2* Abs. Enc. Interface
17-20 Protocol Selection [0] None All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-21 Resolution (Positions/Rev) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
17-22 Multiturn Revolutions 1 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
17-24 SSI Data Length 13 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
17-25 Clock Rate 260 kHz All set-ups FALSE 3 Uint16
17-26 SSI Data Format [0] Gray code All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-34 HIPERFACE Baudrate [4] 9600 All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-5* Resolver Interface
17-50 Poles 2 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 Uint8
17-51 Input Voltage 7V 1 set-up FALSE -1 Uint8
17-52 Input Frequency 10 kHz 1 set-up FALSE 2 Uint8
17-53 Transformation Ratio 0.5 N/A 1 set-up FALSE -1 Uint8
17-56 Encoder Sim. Resolution [0] Disabled 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
17-59 Resolver Interface [0] Disabled 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-6* Monitoring and App.
17-60 Feedback Direction [0] Clockwise All set-ups FALSE - Uint8

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 263

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

Feedback Signal
17-61 Monitoring [1] Warning All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
17-7* Position Scaling
17-70 Position Unit [0] pu All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
17-71 Position Unit Scale 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int8
17-72 Position Unit Numerator 1024 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
17-73 Position Unit Denominator 1 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
0 CustomRea-
17-74 Position Offset doutUnit2 All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
Position Recovery at
17-75 Power-up [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

5 5 17-76
17-77
Position Axis Mode
Position Feedback Mode
[0] Linear Axis
[0] Relative
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
FALSE
-
-
Uint8
Uint8
17-8* Position Homing
17-80 Homing Function [0] No Homing All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
[0] 1st time after
17-81 Home Sync Function power All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-82 Home Position 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
17-83 Homing Speed 150 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Int16
17-84 Homing Torque Limit 160 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
17-85 Homing Timout 60 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
17-9* Position Config
17-90 Absolute Position Mode [0] Standard All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-91 Relative Position Mode [0] Target Position All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-92 Position Control Selection [0] No operation All set-ups FALSE - uint8
17-93 Master Offset Selection [0] Absolute Enabled All set-ups FALSE - uint8
17-94 Rotary Absolute Direction [0] Shortest All set-ups FALSE - uint8

5.3.18 18-** Data Readouts 2

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter # only during index
operation
18-3* Analog Readouts
18-36 Analog Input X48/2 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
18-37 Temp. Input X48/4 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
18-38 Temp. Input X48/7 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
18-39 Temp. Input X48/10 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
18-5* Active Alarms/Warnings
18-55 Active Alarm Numbers 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
18-56 Active Warning Numbers 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
18-6* Inputs & Outputs 2
18-60 Digital Input 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16

5.3.19 30-** Special Features

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter # only during index
operation
30-2* Adv. Start Adjust
High Starting Torque Time
30-20 [s] ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE -2 Uint16
High Starting Torque
30-21 Current [%] ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE -1 Uint32

264 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

30-22 Locked Rotor Protection ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8

Locked Rotor Detection
30-23 Time [s] ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE -2 Uint8
Locked Rotor Detection
30-24 Speed Error [%] 25 % All set-ups x TRUE -1 Uint32
30-8* Compatibility (I)
30-80 d-axis Inductance (Ld) ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -6 Int32
30-81 Brake Resistor (ohm) ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint32
Speed PID Proportional
30-83 Gain 0.015 N/A All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
Process PID Proportional
30-84 Gain 0.100 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
5 5
5.3.20 35-** Sensor Input Option

Par- Parameter description Default value 4 set-up FC 302 Change Conversion Type
ameter # only during index
operation
35-0* Temp. Input Mode
Term. X48/4 Temperature
35-00 Unit [60] °C All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-01 Term. X48/4 Input Type [0] Not Connected All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Term. X48/7 Temperature
35-02 Unit [60] °C All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-03 Term. X48/7 Input Type [0] Not Connected All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Term. X48/10 Temperature
35-04 Unit [60] °C All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-05 Term. X48/10 Input Type [0] Not Connected All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Temperature Sensor Alarm
35-06 Function [5] Stop and trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-1* Temp. Input X48/4
Term. X48/4 Filter Time
35-14 Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
35-15 Term. X48/4 Temp. Monitor [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Term. X48/4 Low Temp.
35-16 Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
Term. X48/4 High Temp.
35-17 Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
35-2* Temp. Input X48/7
Term. X48/7 Filter Time
35-24 Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
35-25 Term. X48/7 Temp. Monitor [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Term. X48/7 Low Temp.
35-26 Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
Term. X48/7 High Temp.
35-27 Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
35-3* Temp. Input X48/10
Term. X48/10 Filter Time
35-34 Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
Term. X48/10 Temp.
35-35 Monitor [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Term. X48/10 Low Temp.
35-36 Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
Term. X48/10 High Temp.
35-37 Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 265

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

35-4* Analog Input X48/2

35-42 Term. X48/2 Low Current 4 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
35-43 Term. X48/2 High Current 20 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
Term. X48/2 Low Ref./
35-44 Feedb. Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
Term. X48/2 High Ref./
35-45 Feedb. Value 100 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
Term. X48/2 Filter Time
35-46 Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16

5 5

266 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Troubleshooting Programming Guide

6 Troubleshooting

6.1 Status Messages Alarms that are trip locked offer extra protection, meaning
that the mains supply must be switched off before the
A warning or an alarm is signalled by the relevant indicator alarm can be reset. After being switched back on, the
light on the front of the frequency converter and indicated frequency converter is no longer blocked and can be reset
by a code on the display. once the cause has been rectified.

A warning remains active until its cause is no longer Alarms that are not trip locked can also be reset using the
present. Under certain circumstances, operation of the automatic reset function in parameter 14-20 Reset Mode
motor may still be continued. Warning messages may be (Warning: Automatic wake-up is possible.)
critical, but are not necessarily so.
If a warning or alarm is marked against a code in Table 6.1,
In the event of an alarm, the frequency converter trips.
Reset the alarm to resume operation once the cause has
this means that either a warning occurs before an alarm, or 6 6
it is possible to specify whether a warning or an alarm
been rectified. should be shown for a given fault.

3 ways to reset: This is possible, for instance, in parameter 1-90 Motor

• Press [Reset]. Thermal Protection. After an alarm or trip, the motor carries
• Via a digital input with the reset function. on coasting, and the alarm and warning flash. Once the
problem has been rectified, only the alarm continues
• Via serial communication/optional fieldbus. flashing until the frequency converter is reset.
NOTICE
After a manual reset pressing [Reset], press [Auto On] to NOTICE
restart the motor. No missing motor phase detection (numbers 30-32) and
no stall detection are active when parameter 1-10 Motor
If an alarm cannot be reset, the reason may be that its Construction is set to [1] PM non-salient SPM.
cause has not been rectified, or the alarm is trip locked
(see also Table 6.1).

Number Description Warning Alarm/ Alarm/ Parameter

trip trip lock reference
1 10 volts low X – –
2 Live zero error (X) (X) – Parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function
3 No motor (X) – – Parameter 1-80 Function at Stop
4 Mains phase loss (X) (X) (X) Parameter 14-12 Response to Mains
Imbalance

5 DC-link voltage high X – – –

6 DC-link voltage low X – – –
7 DC overvoltage X X – –
8 DC undervoltage X X – –
9 Inverter overloaded X X – –
10 Motor ETR overtemperature (X) (X) – Parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection
11 Motor thermistor overtemperature (X) (X) – Parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection
12 Torque limit X X – –
13 Overcurrent X X X –
14 Ground fault X X – –
15 Hardware mismatch – X X –
16 Short circuit – X X –
17 Control word timeout (X) (X) – Parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout
Function

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 267

 Troubleshooting VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

Number Description Warning Alarm/ Alarm/ Parameter

trip trip lock reference
20 Temp. input error – X – –
21 Param error – X –
22 Hoist mech. brake (X) (X) – Parameter group 2-2* Mechanical Brake
23 Internal fans X – – –
24 External fans X – – –
25 Brake resistor short-circuited X – – –
26 Brake resistor power limit (X) (X) – Parameter 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring
27 Brake chopper short-circuited X X –
28 Brake check (X) (X) – Parameter 2-15 Brake Check
29 Heat sink temp X X X
30 Motor phase U missing (X) (X) (X) Parameter 4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function
31 Motor phase V missing (X) (X) (X) Parameter 4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function

6 6 32
33
Motor phase W missing
Inrush fault
(X) (X)
X
(X)
X
Parameter 4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function
–
34 Fieldbus communication fault X X – –
35 Option fault – – X –
36 Mains failure X X – –
37 Imbalance of supply voltage X – –
38 Internal fault X X –
39 Heat sink sensor X X –
40 Overload of digital output terminal 27 (X) – – Parameter 5-00 Digital I/O Mode,
parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode
41 Overload of digital output terminal 29 (X) – – Parameter 5-00 Digital I/O Mode,
parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode
42 Ovrld X30/6-7 (X) – – –
43 Ext. supply (option) X – – –
45 Ground fault 2 X X – –
46 Pwr. card supply – X X –
47 24 V supply low X X X –
48 1.8 V supply low – X X –
50 AMA calibration failed – X – –
51 AMA check Unom and Inom – X – –
52 AMA low Inom – X – –
53 AMA motor too big – X – –
54 AMA motor too small – X – –
55 AMA parameter out of range – X – –
56 AMA interrupted by user – X – –
57 AMA time-out – X – –
58 AMA internal fault X X – –
59 Current limit X – –
60 External interlock X X – –
61 Feedback error (X) (X) – Parameter 4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function
62 Output frequency at maximum limit X – –
63 Mechanical brake low (X) – Parameter 2-20 Release Brake Current
64 Voltage limit X – – –
65 Control board overtemperature X X X –
66 Heat sink temperature low X – –
67 Option configuration has changed – X – –
68 Safe stop (X) (X)1) – Parameter 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop
69 Pwr. card temp – X X –
70 Illegal FC configuration – – X –

268 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Troubleshooting Programming Guide

Number Description Warning Alarm/ Alarm/ Parameter

trip trip lock reference
71 PTC 1 Safe Stop – X – –
72 Dangerous failure – X –
73 Safe Stop Auto Restart (X) (X) – Parameter 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop
74 PTC Thermistor – – X –
75 Illegal Profile Sel. – X – –
76 Power unit setup X – – –
77 Reduced power mode X – – Parameter 14-59 Actual Number of Inverter
Units
78 Tracking error (X) (X) – Parameter 4-34 Tracking Error Function
79 Illegal PS config – X X
80 Frequency converter Initialized to default value – X – –
81 CSIV corrupt – X – –
82
83
CSIV parameter error
Illegal option combination
–
–
X
–
–
X
–
–
6 6
84 No safety option – X – –
88 Option detection – – X –
89 Mechanical brake sliding X – – –
90 Feedback monitor (X) (X) – Parameter 17-61 Feedback Signal Monitoring
91 Analog input 54 wrong settings – – X S202
99 Locked rotor – X X –
101 Speed monitor X X –
104 Mixing fans X X – –
122 Mot. rotat. unexp. – X – –
123 Motor mod. changed – X – –
163 ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning X – –
164 ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm – X – –
165 ATEX ETR freq.lim.warning X – –
166 ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm – X – –
210 Position tracking X X – Parameter 4-70 Position Error Function,
parameter 4-71 Maximum Position Error,
parameter 4-72 Position Error Timeout
211 Position limit X X – Parameter 3-06 Minimum Position,
parameter 3-07 Maximum Position,
parameter 4-73 Position Limit Function
212 Homing not done – X – Parameter 17-80 Homing Function
213 Homing timeout – X – Parameter 17-85 Homing Timout
214 No sensor input – X – –
215 Start fwd/rev X X – Parameter 4-74 Start Fwd/Rev Function
216 Touch timeout – X – Parameter 4-75 Touch Timout
220 Configuration File Version not supported X – – –
246 Pwr.card supply – – X –
250 New spare part – – X –
251 New type code – X X –
430 PWM Disabled – X – –

Table 6.1 Alarm/Warning Code List

(X) Dependent on parameter.
1) Cannot be auto reset via parameter 14-20 Reset Mode.

A trip is the action following an alarm. The trip coasts the motor and is reset by pressing [Reset] or by a digital input
(parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs). The original event that caused an alarm cannot damage the frequency converter or
cause dangerous conditions. A trip lock is an action when an alarm occurs, which could damage the frequency converter or
connected parts. A trip lock situation can only be reset by cycling power.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 269

 Troubleshooting VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

Warning Yellow
Alarm Flashing red
Trip locked Yellow and red

Table 6.2 Indicator Light

Bit Hex Dec Alarm word Alarm word 2 Warning word Warning Extended
word 2 status word
Alarm Word Extended Status Word
0 00000001 1 Brake check (A28) Servicetrip, read/ Brake check (W28) Start delayed Ramping
write
1 00000002 2 Pwr.card temp Servicetrip, Pwr.card temp Stop delayed AMA running
(A69) (reserved) (A69)
2 00000004 4 Earth fault (A14) Servicetrip, Earth fault (W14) Reserved Start CW/CCW
typecode/ start_possible is active, when the
6 6 sparepart DI selections [12] OR [13] are
active and the requested direction
matches the reference sign
3 00000008 8 Ctrl.card temp Servicetrip, Ctrl.card temp Reserved Slow down
(A65) (reserved) (W65) slow down command active, for
example via CTW bit 11 or DI
4 00000010 16 Ctrl. word TO (A17) Servicetrip, Ctrl. word TO Catch up
(reserved) (W17) catch up command active, for
example via CTW bit 12 or DI
5 00000020 32 Overcurrent (A13) Reserved Overcurrent (W13) Reserved Feedback high
feedback >parameter 4-57 Warning
Feedback High
6 00000040 64 Torque limit (A12) Reserved Torque limit (W12) Reserved Feedback low
feedback <parameter 4-56 Warning
Feedback Low
7 00000080 128 Motor th over Reserved Motor th over Reserved Output current high
(A11) (W11) current >parameter 4-51 Warning
Current High
8 00000100 256 Motor ETR over Reserved Motor ETR over Reserved Output current low
(A10) (W10) current <parameter 4-50 Warning
Current Low
9 00000200 512 Inverter overld. Discharge high Inverter Overld Discharge Output freq high
(A9) (W9) high speed >parameter 4-53 Warning
Speed High
10 00000400 1024 DC under volt (A8) Start failed DC under volt Multi-motor Output freq low
(W8) underload speed <parameter 4-52 Warning
Speed Low
11 00000800 2048 DC over volt (A7) Speed limit DC over volt (W7) Multi-motor Brake check OK
overload brake test NOT OK
12 00001000 4096 Short circuit (A16) External interlock DC voltage low Compressor Braking max.
(W6) interlock BrakePower > Brakepowerlimit
(2-12)
13 00002000 8192 Inrush fault (A33) Illegal option DC voltage high Mechanical Braking
combi. (W5) brake sliding
14 00004000 16384 Mains ph. loss (A4) No safety option Mains ph. loss Safe option Out of speed range
(W4) warning
15 00008000 32768 AMA not OK Reserved No motor (W3) Auto DC OVC active
braking
16 00010000 65536 Live zero error (A2) Reserved Live zero error AC brake
(W2)

270 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Troubleshooting Programming Guide

Bit Hex Dec Alarm word Alarm word 2 Warning word Warning Extended
word 2 status word
17 00020000 131072 Internal fault (A38) KTY error 10 V low (W1) KTY warn Password timelock
number of allowed password trials
exceeded - timelock active
18 00040000 262144 Brake overload Fans error Brake overload Fans warn Password protection
(A26) (W26) 0-61 = ALL_NO_ACCESS OR
BUS_NO_ACCESS OR
BUS_READONLY
19 00080000 524288 U phase loss (A30) ECB error Brake resistor ECB warn Reference high
(W25) reference >parameter 4-55 Warning
Reference High
20 00100000 1048576 V phase loss (A31) Hoist Brake IGBT (W27) Hoist Reference low
mechanical mechanical reference <parameter 4-54 Warning

6 6
brake (A22) brake (W22) Reference Low
21 00200000 2097152 W phase Loss Reserved Speed limit (W49) Reserved Local reference
(A32) reference site = REMOTE -> auto
on pressed & active
22 00400000 4194304 Fieldbus fault Reserved Fieldbus fault Reserved Protection mode notification
(A34) (W34)
23 00800000 8388608 24 V supply low Reserved 24 V supply Low Reserved Unused
(A47) (W47)
24 01000000 16777216 Mains failure (A36) Reserved Mains failure Reserved Unused
(W36)

25 02000000 33554432 1.8 V supply low Current limit Current limit (W59) Reserved Unused
(A48) (A59)
26 04000000 67108864 Brake resistor (A25) Motor rotating Low temp (W66) Reserved Unused
unexpectedly
(A122)
27 08000000 134217728 Brake IGBT (A27) Reserved Voltage limit Reserved Unused
(W64)
28 10000000 268435456 Option change Reserved Encoder loss (W90) Reserved Unused
(A67)
29 20000000 536870912 Drive initialized Encoder loss Output freq. lim. BackEMF too Unused
(A80) (A90) (W62) high
30 40000000 1073741824 Safe stop (A68) PTC thermistor Safe stop (W68) PTC thermi- Unused
(A74) stor (W74)
31 80000000 2147483648 Mech. brake low Dangerous Extended status Protection mode
(A63) failure (A72) word

Table 6.3 Description of Alarm Word, Warning Word, and Extended Status Word

The alarm words, warning words and extended status WARNING/ALARM 2, Live zero error
words can be read out via a serial bus or optional fieldbus This warning or alarm only appears if programmed in
for diagnostics. See also parameter 16-94 Ext. Status Word. parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function. The signal on 1
of the analog inputs is less than 50% of the minimum
WARNING 1, 10 Volts low
value programmed for that input. Broken wiring or a faulty
The control card voltage is less than 10 V from terminal 50.
device sending the signal can cause this condition.
Remove some of the load from terminal 50, as the 10 V
supply is overloaded. Maximum 15 mA or minimum 590 Ω. Troubleshooting
A short circuit in a connected potentiometer or incorrect • Check connections on all analog mains terminals.
wiring of the potentiometer can cause this condition.
Troubleshooting
• Remove the wiring from terminal 50. If the
warning clears, the problem is with the wiring. If
the warning does not clear, replace the control
card.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 271

 Troubleshooting VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

- Control card terminals 53 and 54 for Troubleshooting

signals, terminal 55 common. • Check that the supply voltage matches the drive
voltage.
- VLT® General Purpose I/O MCB 101
terminals 11 and 12 for signals, terminal • Perform an input voltage test.
10 common.
• Perform a soft-charge circuit test.
- VLT® Analog I/O Option MCB 109 WARNING/ALARM 9, Inverter overload
terminals 1, 3, and 5 for signals, The frequency converter has run with more than 100%
terminals 2, 4, and 6 common. overload for too long and is about to cut out. The counter
• Check that the drive programming and switch for electronic thermal inverter protection issues a warning
settings match the analog signal type. at 98% and trips at 100% with an alarm. The frequency
converter cannot be reset until the counter is below 90%.
• Perform an input terminal signal test.
Troubleshooting
WARNING/ALARM 3, No motor
No motor is connected to the output of the frequency
• Compare the output current shown on the LCP
6 6 converter.
•
with the frequency converter rated current.
Compare the output current shown on the LCP
WARNING/ALARM 4, Mains phase loss
with the measured motor current.
A phase is missing on the supply side, or the mains
voltage imbalance is too high. This message also appears • Show the thermal frequency converter load on
for a fault in the input rectifier. Options are programmed in the LCP and monitor the value. When running
parameter 14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance. above the frequency converter continuous
current rating, the counter increases. When
Troubleshooting
running below the frequency converter
• Check the supply voltage and supply currents to continuous current rating, the counter decreases.
the frequency converter.
WARNING/ALARM 10, Motor overload temperature
WARNING 5, DC link voltage high
According to the electronic thermal protection (ETR), the
The DC-link voltage (DC) is higher than the high-voltage
motor is too hot.
warning limit. The limit depends on the drive voltage
rating. The unit is still active. Select 1 of these options:

WARNING 6, DC link voltage low

• The frequency converter issues a warning or an
alarm when the counter is >90% if
The DC-link voltage (DC) is lower than the low voltage
parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection is set to
warning limit. The limit depends on the drive voltage
warning options.
rating. The unit is still active.
WARNING/ALARM 7, DC overvoltage
• The frequency converter trips when the counter
reaches 100% if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal
If the DC-link voltage exceeds the limit, the frequency
Protection is set to trip options.
converter trips after a certain time.
The fault occurs when the motor runs with more than
Troubleshooting
100% overload for too long.
• Connect a brake resistor.
Troubleshooting
• Extend the ramp time.
• Check for motor overheating.
• Change the ramp type.
• Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded.
• Activate the functions in parameter 2-10 Brake
• Check that the motor current set in
Function.
parameter 1-24 Motor Current is correct.
• Increase parameter 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter
• Ensure that the motor data in parameters 1-20 to
Fault.
1-25 is set correctly.
• If the alarm/warning occurs during a power sag,
• If an external fan is in use, check that it is
use kinetic back-up (parameter 14-10 Mains
selected in parameter 1-91 Motor External Fan.
Failure).
WARNING/ALARM 8, DC under voltage
• Running AMA in parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor
Adaptation (AMA) tunes the frequency converter
If the DC-link voltage drops below the undervoltage limit,
to the motor more accurately and reduces
the drive checks for 24 V DC back-up supply. If no 24 V DC
thermal loading.
back-up supply is connected, the drive trips after a fixed
time delay. The time delay varies with unit size.

272 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Troubleshooting Programming Guide

WARNING/ALARM 11, Motor thermistor overtemp ALARM 14, Earth (ground) fault
Check whether the thermistor is disconnected. Select There is current from the output phase to ground, either in
whether the frequency converter issues a warning or an the cable between the frequency converter and the motor,
alarm in parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. or in the motor itself. The current transducers detect the
ground fault by measuring current going out from the
Troubleshooting
frequency converter and current going into the frequency
• Check for motor overheating. converter from the motor. Ground fault is issued if the
• Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded. deviation of the 2 currents is too large. The current going
• When using terminal 53 or 54, check that the out of the frequency converter must be the same as the
thermistor is connected correctly between either current going into the frequency converter.
terminal 53 or 54 (analog voltage input) and Troubleshooting
terminal 50 (+10 V supply). Also check that the • Remove power to the frequency converter and
terminal switch for 53 or 54 is set for voltage. repair the ground fault.
Check that parameter 1-93 Thermistor Resource
selects terminal 53 or 54. • Check for ground faults in the motor by

• When using terminal 18, 19, 31, 32, or 33 (digital

measuring the resistance to ground of the motor
cables and the motor with a megohmmeter.
6 6
inputs), check that the thermistor is connected
correctly between the digital input terminal used • Reset any potential individual offset in the 3
current transducers in the frequency converter.
(digital input PNP only) and terminal 50. Select
Perform the manual initialization or perform a
the terminal to use in parameter 1-93 Thermistor
complete AMA. This method is most relevant
Resource.
after changing the power card.
WARNING/ALARM 12, Torque limit
ALARM 15, Hardware mismatch
The torque has exceeded the value in
A fitted option is not operational with the present control
parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode or the value in
card hardware or software.
parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode.
Parameter 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit can change this Record the value of the following parameters and contact
warning from a warning-only condition to a warning Danfoss.
followed by an alarm. • Parameter 15-40 FC Type.
Troubleshooting • Parameter 15-41 Power Section.
• If the motor torque limit is exceeded during • Parameter 15-42 Voltage.
ramp-up, extend the ramp-up time.
• Parameter 15-43 Software Version.
• If the generator torque limit is exceeded during
ramp-down, extend the ramp-down time. • Parameter 15-45 Actual Typecode String.

• If torque limit occurs while running, increase the • Parameter 15-49 SW ID Control Card.
torque limit. Make sure that the system can • Parameter 15-50 SW ID Power Card.
operate safely at a higher torque.
• Parameter 15-60 Option Mounted.
• Check the application for excessive current draw
• Parameter 15-61 Option SW Version (for each
on the motor.
option slot).
WARNING/ALARM 13, Over current
ALARM 16, Short circuit
The inverter peak current limit (approximately 200% of the
There is short-circuiting in the motor or motor wiring.
rated current) is exceeded. The warning lasts approximately
1.5 s, then the frequency converter trips and issues an Troubleshooting
alarm. Shock loading or quick acceleration with high-inertia • Remove the power to the frequency converter
loads can cause this fault. If the acceleration during ramp- and repair the short circuit.
up is quick, the fault can also appear after kinetic back-up.
If extended mechanical brake control is selected, a trip can WARNING
be reset externally. HIGH VOLTAGE
Troubleshooting Frequency converters contain high voltage when
• Remove the power and check if the motor shaft connected to AC mains input, DC supply, or load sharing.
can be turned. Failure to use qualified personnel to install, start up, and
maintain the frequency converter can result in death or
• Check that the motor size matches the frequency
serious injury.
converter.
• Disconnect power before proceeding.
• Check that the motor data is correct in
parameters 1-20 to 1-25.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 273

 Troubleshooting VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

WARNING/ALARM 17, Control word timeout there is no feedback from the sensor, this alarm appears.
There is no communication to the frequency converter. For frequency converters with AC fans, the voltage to the
The warning is only active when parameter 8-04 Control fan is monitored.
Word Timeout Function is NOT set to [0] Off.
If parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout Function is set to [5] Troubleshooting
Stop and trip, a warning appears, and the frequency • Check for proper fan operation.
converter ramps down to a stop and shows an alarm.
• Cycle power to the frequency converter and
Troubleshooting check that the fan operates briefly at start-up.
• Check the connections on the serial communi- • Check the sensors on the heat sink.
cation cable.
WARNING 25, Brake resistor short circuit
• Increase parameter 8-03 Control Word Timeout
The brake resistor is monitored during operation. If a short
Time.
circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled and the
• Check the operation of the communication warning appears. The frequency converter is still
equipment.
6 6
operational, but without the brake function.
• Verify that proper EMC installation was Troubleshooting
performed. • Remove the power to the frequency converter
WARNING/ALARM 20, Temp. input error and replace the brake resistor (refer to
The temperature sensor is not connected. parameter 2-15 Brake Check).

WARNING/ALARM 21, Parameter error WARNING/ALARM 26, Brake resistor power limit
The parameter is out of range. The parameter number is The power transmitted to the brake resistor is calculated as
shown in the display. a mean value over the last 120 s of run time. The
calculation is based on the DC-link voltage and the brake
Troubleshooting
resistor value set in parameter 2-16 AC brake Max. Current.
• Set the affected parameter to a valid value. The warning is active when the dissipated braking power
WARNING/ALARM 22, Hoist mechanical brake is higher than 90% of the brake resistor power. If option [2]
The value of this warning/alarm shows the type of Trip is selected in parameter 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring,
warning/alarm. the frequency converter trips when the dissipated braking
0 = The torque reference was not reached before timeout power reaches 100%.
(parameter 2-27 Torque Ramp Up Time).
WARNING/ALARM 27, Brake chopper fault
1 = Expected brake feedback was not received before
The brake transistor is monitored during operation, and if a
timeout (parameter 2-23 Activate Brake Delay,
short circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled, and a
parameter 2-25 Brake Release Time).
warning is issued. The frequency converter is still
WARNING 23, Internal fan fault operational, but since the brake transistor has short-
The fan warning function is a protective function that circuited, substantial power is transmitted to the brake
checks if the fan is running/mounted. The fan warning can resistor, even if it is inactive.
be disabled in parameter 14-53 Fan Monitor ([0] Disabled).
Troubleshooting
For frequency converters with DC fans, a feedback sensor • Remove power to the frequency converter and
is mounted in the fan. If the fan is commanded to run and remove the brake resistor.
there is no feedback from the sensor, this alarm appears.
WARNING/ALARM 28, Brake check failed
For frequency converters with AC fans, the voltage to the
The brake resistor is not connected or not working.
fan is monitored.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
• Check parameter 2-15 Brake Check.
• Check for proper fan operation.
ALARM 29, Heat Sink temp
• Cycle power to the frequency converter and
The maximum temperature of the heat sink is exceeded.
check that the fan operates briefly at start-up.
The temperature fault is not reset until the temperature
• Check the sensors on the control card. drops below a defined heat sink temperature. The trip and
WARNING 24, External fan fault reset points are different based on the frequency converter
The fan warning function is a protective function that power size.
checks if the fan is running/mounted. The fan warning can Troubleshooting
be disabled in parameter 14-53 Fan Monitor ([0] Disabled). Check for the following conditions:
For frequency converters with DC fans, a feedback sensor • The ambient temperature is too high.
is mounted in the fan. If the fan is commanded to run and • The motor cables are too long.

274 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Troubleshooting Programming Guide

• Incorrect airflow clearance above and below the Troubleshooting

frequency converter. • Remove the power from the frequency converter
and check motor phase W.
• Blocked airflow around the frequency converter.
ALARM 33, Inrush fault
• Damaged heat sink fan.
Too many power-ups have occurred within a short time
• Dirty heat sink. period.
ALARM 30, Motor phase U missing Troubleshooting
Motor phase U between the frequency converter and the • Let the unit cool to operating temperature.
motor is missing.
WARNING/ALARM 34, Fieldbus communication fault
WARNING The fieldbus on the communication option card is not
working.
HIGH VOLTAGE
Frequency converters contain high voltage when WARNING/ALARM 35, Option fault
connected to AC mains input, DC supply, or load sharing. An option alarm is received. The alarm is option-specific.
Failure to use qualified personnel to install, start up, and
maintain the frequency converter can result in death or
The most likely cause is a power-up or a communication
fault. 6 6
serious injury. WARNING/ALARM 36, Mains failure
• Disconnect power before proceeding. This warning/alarm is only active if the supply voltage to
the frequency converter is lost and parameter 14-10 Mains
Failure is not set to [0] No function.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
• Remove the power from the frequency converter • Check the fuses to the frequency converter and
and check motor phase U.
mains supply to the unit.
ALARM 31, Motor phase V missing
ALARM 37, Phase imbalance
Motor phase V between the frequency converter and the
There is a current imbalance between the power units.
motor is missing.
ALARM 38, Internal fault
WARNING When an internal fault occurs, a code number defined in
HIGH VOLTAGE Table 6.4 is shown.
Frequency converters contain high voltage when Troubleshooting
connected to AC mains input, DC supply, or load sharing. • Cycle power.
Failure to use qualified personnel to install, start up, and
maintain the frequency converter can result in death or
• Check that the option is properly installed.

serious injury. • Check for loose or missing wiring.

• Disconnect power before proceeding. It may be necessary to contact the Danfoss supplier or
service department. Note the code number for further
troubleshooting directions.
Troubleshooting
• Remove the power from the frequency converter Number Text
and check motor phase V. 0 The serial port cannot be initialized. Contact the
Danfoss supplier or Danfoss service department.
ALARM 32, Motor phase W missing
Motor phase W between the frequency converter and the 256–258 The power EEPROM data is defective or too old.
motor is missing. Replace the power card.
512–519 Internal fault. Contact the Danfoss supplier or
WARNING Danfoss service department.
783 Parameter value outside of minimum/maximum
HIGH VOLTAGE
limits.
Frequency converters contain high voltage when
1024–1284 Internal fault. Contact the Danfoss supplier or
connected to AC mains input, DC supply, or load sharing.
Danfoss service department.
Failure to use qualified personnel to install, start up, and
maintain the frequency converter can result in death or 1299 The option software in slot A is too old.
serious injury. 1300 The option software in slot B is too old.
1302 The option software in slot C1 is too old.
• Disconnect power before proceeding.
1315 The option software in slot A is not supported/
allowed.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 275

 Troubleshooting VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

Number Text WARNING 42, Overload of digital output on X30/6 or

1316 The option software in slot B is not supported/ overload of digital output on X30/7
allowed. For terminal X30/6, check the load connected to terminal
1318 The option software in slot C1 is not supported/ X30/6 or remove the short-circuit connection. Also check
allowed. parameter 5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101) (VLT®
1379–2819 Internal fault. Contact the Danfoss supplier or General Purpose I/O MCB 101).
Danfoss service department. For terminal X30/7, check the load connected to terminal
1792 Hardware reset of digital signal processor. X30/7 or remove the short-circuit connection. Check
1793 Motor-derived parameters not transferred correctly parameter 5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101) (VLT®
to the digital signal processor. General Purpose I/O MCB 101).
1794 Power data not transferred correctly at power-up
ALARM 43, Ext. supply
to the digital signal processor.
VLT® Extended Relay Option MCB 113 is mounted without
1795 The digital signal processor has received too many
external 24 V DC. Either connect a 24 V DC external supply
unknown SPI telegrams. The frequency converter
or specify that no external supply is used via
6 6 also uses this fault code if the MCO does not
power up correctly. This situation can occur due to
parameter 14-80 Option Supplied by External 24VDC, [0] No.
A change in parameter 14-80 Option Supplied by External
poor EMC protection or improper grounding.
24VDC requires a power cycle.
1796 RAM copy error.
2561 Replace the control card. ALARM 45, Earth fault 2
2820 LCP stack overflow. Ground fault.
2821 Serial port overflow. Troubleshooting
2822 USB port overflow. • Check for proper grounding and loose
3072–5122 Parameter value is outside its limits. connections.
5123 Option in slot A: Hardware incompatible with the
• Check for proper wire size.
control board hardware.
5124 Option in slot B: Hardware incompatible with the • Check the motor cables for short circuits or
control board hardware.
leakage currents.
5125 Option in slot C0: Hardware incompatible with the ALARM 46, Power card supply
control board hardware. The supply on the power card is out of range. Another
5126 Option in slot C1: Hardware incompatible with the reason can be a defective heat sink fan.
control board hardware. There are 3 supplies generated by the switch mode supply
5376–6231 Internal fault. Contact the Danfoss supplier or (SMPS) on the power card:
Danfoss service department. • 24 V.
Table 6.4 Internal Fault Codes • 5 V.
• ±18 V.
ALARM 39, Heat sink sensor
No feedback from the heat sink temperature sensor. When powered with VLT® 24 V DC Supply MCB 107, only
the 24 V and 5 V supplies are monitored. When powered
The signal from the IGBT thermal sensor is not available on with 3-phase mains voltage, all 3 supplies are monitored.
the power card. The problem could be on the power card,
on the gatedrive card, or the ribbon cable between the Troubleshooting
power card and gatedrive card. • Check for a defective power card.
WARNING 40, Overload of digital output terminal 27 • Check for a defective control card.
Check the load connected to terminal 27 or remove the • Check for a defective option card.
short-circuit connection. Check parameter 5-00 Digital I/O
Mode and parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode.
• If a 24 V DC supply is used, verify proper supply
power.
WARNING 41, Overload of digital output terminal 29
Check the load connected to terminal 29 or remove the
• Check for a defective heat sink fan.

short-circuit connection. Also check parameter 5-00 Digital WARNING 47, 24 V supply low
I/O Mode and parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode. The supply on the power card is out of range.
There are 3 supplies generated by the switch mode supply
(SMPS) on the power card:
• 24 V.
• 5 V.
• ±18 V.

276 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Troubleshooting Programming Guide

Troubleshooting external fault condition. To resume normal operation, apply

• Check for a defective power card. 24 V DC to the terminal programmed for external interlock,
and reset the frequency converter.
WARNING 48, 1.8 V supply low
The 1.8 V DC supply used on the control card is outside of WARNING/ALARM 61, Feedback error
the allowable limits. The supply is measured on the control An error between calculated speed and speed
card. measurement from feedback device.
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
• Check for a defective control card. • Check the settings for warning/alarm/disabling in
parameter 4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function.
• If an option card is present, check for
overvoltage. • Set the tolerable error in parameter 4-31 Motor
Feedback Speed Error.
WARNING 49, Speed limit
The warning is shown when the speed is outside of the • Set the tolerable feedback loss time in
specified range in parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit parameter 4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout.
[RPM] and parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM].
ALARM 50, AMA calibration failed
WARNING 62, Output frequency at maximum limit
The output frequency has reached the value set in
6 6
Contact the Danfoss supplier or Danfoss service parameter 4-19 Max Output Frequency. Check the
department. application for possible causes. Possibly increase the
output frequency limit. Be sure that the system can
ALARM 51, AMA check Unom and Inom
operate safely at a higher output frequency. The warning
The settings for motor voltage, motor current, and motor
clears when the output drops below the maximum limit.
power are wrong.
ALARM 63, Mechanical brake low
Troubleshooting
The actual motor current has not exceeded the release
• Check the settings in parameters 1-20 to 1-25. brake current within the start delay time window.
ALARM 52, AMA low Inom
WARNING 64, Voltage limit
The motor current is too low.
The combination of load and speed requires a motor
Troubleshooting voltage higher than the actual DC-link voltage.
• Check the settings in parameter 1-24 Motor WARNING/ALARM 65, Control card over temperature
Current.
The cutout temperature of the control card is 85 °C
ALARM 53, AMA motor too big (185 °F).
The motor is too large for the AMA to operate.
Troubleshooting
ALARM 54, AMA motor too small • Check that the ambient operating temperature is
The motor is too small for the AMA to operate. within the limits.
ALARM 55, AMA parameter out of range • Check for clogged filters.
The AMA cannot run because the parameter values of the
motor are outside of the acceptable range. • Check the fan operation.

ALARM 56, AMA interrupted by user • Check the control card.

The AMA is manually interrupted. WARNING 66, Heat sink temperature low
ALARM 57, AMA internal fault The frequency converter is too cold to operate. This
Try to restart the AMA. Repeated restarts can overheat the warning is based on the temperature sensor in the IGBT
motor. module. Increase the ambient temperature of the unit.
Also, a trickle amount of current can be supplied to the
ALARM 58, AMA Internal fault frequency converter whenever the motor is stopped by
Contact the Danfoss supplier. setting parameter 2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current to 5% and
WARNING 59, Current limit parameter 1-80 Function at Stop.
The current is higher than the value in ALARM 67, Option module configuration has changed
parameter 4-18 Current Limit. Ensure that the motor data in One or more options have either been added or removed
parameters 1-20 to 1-25 is set correctly. Increase the current since the last power-down. Check that the configuration
limit if necessary. Ensure that the system can operate safely change is intentional and reset the unit.
at a higher limit.
ALARM 68, Safe Stop activated
WARNING 60, External interlock Safe Torque Off (STO) has been activated. To resume
A digital input signal indicates a fault condition external to normal operation, apply 24 V DC to terminal 37, then send
the frequency converter. An external interlock has a reset signal (via bus, digital I/O, or by pressing [Reset]).
commanded the frequency converter to trip. Clear the

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 277

 Troubleshooting VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

ALARM 69, Power card temperature WARNING 77, Reduced power mode
The temperature sensor on the power card is either too The frequency converter is operating in reduced power
hot or too cold. mode (less than the allowed number of inverter sections).
This warning is generated on power cycle when the
Troubleshooting
frequency converter is set to run with fewer inverters and
• Check that the ambient operating temperature is remains on.
within limits.
ALARM 78, Tracking error
• Check for clogged filters.
The difference between setpoint value and actual value
• Check fan operation. exceeds the value in parameter 4-35 Tracking Error.
• Check the power card. Troubleshooting
ALARM 70, Illegal FC configuration • Disable the function or select an alarm/warning
The control card and power card are incompatible. To in parameter 4-34 Tracking Error Function.
check compatibility, contact the Danfoss supplier with the • Investigate the mechanics around the load and
type code from the unit nameplate and the part numbers motor. Check feedback connections from motor
6 6 of the cards. encoder to frequency converter.
ALARM 71, PTC 1 safe stop • Select motor feedback function in
STO has been activated from the VLT® PTC Thermistor Card parameter 4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function.
MCB 112 (motor too warm). Normal operation can be
resumed when the MCB 112 applies 24 V DC to terminal • Adjust the tracking error band in
parameter 4-35 Tracking Error and
37 again (when the motor temperature reaches an
parameter 4-37 Tracking Error Ramping.
acceptable level), and when the digital input from the MCB
112 is deactivated. When that happens, send a reset signal ALARM 79, Illegal power section configuration
(via bus or digital I/O, or press [Reset]). The scaling card has an incorrect part number or is not
installed. The MK102 connector on the power card could
ALARM 72, Dangerous failure
not be installed.
STO with trip lock. An unexpected combination of STO
ALARM 80, Drive initialized
commands has occurred:
Parameter settings are initialized to default settings after a
• VLT® PTC Thermistor Card MCB 112 enables manual reset. To clear the alarm, reset the unit.
X44/10, but STO is not enabled.
ALARM 81, CSIV corrupt
• MCB 112 is the only device using STO (specified
CSIV file has syntax errors.
through selection [4] PTC 1 alarm or [5] PTC 1
warning in parameter 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop), ALARM 82, CSIV parameter error
STO is activated, and X44/10 is not activated. CSIV failed to initialize a parameter.

WARNING 73, Safe Stop auto restart ALARM 83, Illegal option combination
STO activated. With automatic restart enabled, the motor The mounted options are incompatible.
can start when the fault is cleared. ALARM 84, No safety option
ALARM 74, PTC Thermistor The safety option was removed without applying a general
Alarm related to VLT® PTC Thermistor Card MCB 112. The reset. Reconnect the safety option.
PTC is not working. ALARM 88, Option detection
ALARM 75, Illegal profile sel. A change in the option layout is detected.
Do not write the parameter value while the motor is Parameter 14-89 Option Detection is set to [0] Frozen config-
running. Stop the motor before writing the MCO profile to uration and the option layout has been changed.
parameter 8-10 Control Word Profile. • To apply the change, enable option layout
WARNING 76, Power unit setup changes in parameter 14-89 Option Detection.
The required number of power units do not match the • Alternatively, restore the correct option configu-
detected number of active power units. ration.
This warning occurs when replacing a module for an F-size WARNING 89, Mechanical brake sliding
enclosure if the power-specific data in the module power The hoist brake monitor detects a motor speed exceeding
card does not match the rest of the frequency converter. 10 RPM.
Troubleshooting ALARM 90, Feedback monitor
• Confirm that the spare part and its power card Check the connection to encoder/resolver option and, if
are the correct part number. necessary, replace VLT® Encoder Input MCB 102 or VLT®
Resolver Input MCB 103.

278 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Troubleshooting Programming Guide

ALARM 91, Analog input 54 wrong settings ALARM 213, Homing timeout
Set switch S202 in position OFF (voltage input) when a Homing was started but did not finish within the time
KTY sensor is connected to analog input terminal 54. defined in parameter 17-85 Homing Timout.
ALARM 99, Locked rotor ALARM 214, No sensor input
The rotor is blocked. A homing process with a homing function that requires a
sensor, or touch probe positioning is started with no input
WARNING/ALARM 101, Speed monitor
defined for the sensor.
The motor speed monitor value is out of range. See
parameter 4-43 Motor Speed Monitor Function. WARNING/ALARM 215, Start Fwd/Rev
One of the hardware end-limit options, [12] Enable Start
WARNING/ALARM 104, Mixing fan fault
Forward or [13] Enable Start Reverse is active.
The fan is not operating. The fan monitor checks that the
fan is spinning at power-up or whenever the mixing fan is WARNING/ALARM 216, Touch Timeout
turned on. The mixing-fan fault can be configured as a A touch probe sensor is not found within the time in
warning or an alarm trip in parameter 14-53 Fan Monitor. parameter 4-75 Touch Timout. The timeout timer is started
as soon as the touch probe positioning is activated even if
Troubleshooting
• Cycle power to the frequency converter to the application is not moving. 6 6
determine if the warning/alarm returns. WARNING 220, Configuration file version not supported
The frequency converter does not support the current
WARNING/ALARM 122, Mot. rotat. unexp.
configuration file version. Customization is aborted.
The frequency converter performs a function that requires
the motor to be at standstill, for example DC hold for PM ALARM 246, Power card supply
motors. This alarm is only for enclosure size F frequency converters.
It is equivalent to alarm 46, Power card supply.
WARNING 123, Motor Mod. Changed
The motor selected in parameter 1-11 Motor Model is not The report value in the alarm log indicates which power
correct. Check the motor model. module generated the alarm:
1 = Inverter module to the far left.
WARNING 163, ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning
The frequency converter has run above the characteristic 2 = Middle inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency
curve for more than 50 s. The warning is activated at 83% converter.
and deactivated at 65% of the allowed thermal overload. 2 = Right inverter module in F1 or F3 frequency
ALARM 164, ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm converter.
Operating above the characteristic curve for more than 3 = Right inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency
60 s within a period of 600 s activates the alarm, and the converter.
frequency converter trips.
5 = Rectifier module.
WARNING 165, ATEX ETR freq.lim.warning
The frequency converter is running for more than 50 s WARNING 249, Rect. low temperature
below the allowed minimum frequency The temperature of the rectifier heat sink is lower than
(parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. points freq.). expected.

ALARM 166, ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm Troubleshooting

The frequency converter has operated for more than 60 s • Check the temperature sensor.
(in a period of 600 s) below the allowed minimum WARNING 250, New spare part
frequency (parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. points freq.). The power or switch mode supply has been exchanged.
WARNING/ALARM 210, Position tracking Restore the frequency converter type code in the EEPROM.
The actual position error exceeds the value in Select the correct type code in parameter 14-23 Typecode
parameter 4-71 Maximum Position Error. Setting according to the label on the frequency converter.
Parameter 4-70 Position Error Function defines whether this Remember to select Save to EEPROM at the end.
is a warning or an alarm. WARNING 251, New typecode
WARNING/ALARM 211, Position limit The power card or other components are replaced, and the
The position is outside the limits defined in type code has changed.
parameter 3-06 Minimum Position and WARNING 253, Digital output X49/9 overload
parameter 3-07 Maximum Position. Parameter 4-73 Position Digital output X49/9 is overloaded.
Limit Function defines the function for this warning/alarm.
WARNING 254, Digital output X49/11 overload
WARNING/ALARM 212, Homing not done Digital output X49/11 is overloaded.
A homing function is selected in parameter 17-80 Homing
WARNING 255, Digital output X49/7 overload
Function and absolute positioning is executed before
Digital output X49/7 is overloaded.
homing is completed.

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 279

 Troubleshooting VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

ALARM 430, PWM Disabled

The PWM on the power card is disabled.

6 6

280 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Appendix Programming Guide

7 Appendix

7.1 Symbols, Abbreviations, and Conventions

°C Degrees Celsius
°F Degrees Fahrenheit
AC Alternating current
AEO Automatic energy optimization
ASM Asynchronous motor or standard induction motor
AWG American wire gauge
AMA Automatic motor adaptation
DC Direct current
EMC Electro-magnetic compatibility
ETR Electronic thermal relay
fM,N Nominal motor frequency

7 7
FC Frequency converter
IINV Rated inverter output current
ILIM Current limit
IM,N Nominal motor current
IVLT,MAX Maximum output current
IVLT,N Rated output current supplied by the frequency converter
IP Ingress protection
IPM PM motor with interior-mounted magnets
LCP Local control panel
MCT Motion control tool
ns Synchronous motor speed
PM,N Nominal motor power
PELV Protective extra low voltage
PCB Printed circuit board
PM Motor Permanent magnet motor
PWM Pulse width modulation
RPM Revolutions per minute
Regen Regenerative terminals
SPM PM motor with surface-mounted magnets
SynRM Synchronous reluctance motor
TLIM Torque limit
UM,N Nominal motor voltage

Table 7.1 Symbols and Abbreviations

Conventions
Numbered lists indicate procedures.
Bullet lists indicate other information.
Italicized text indicates:
• Cross-reference.
• Link.
• Parameter name.
• Parameter group name.
• Parameter option.
• Footnote.
All dimensions in drawings are in [mm] (in).

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 281

Index VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

Index Data readout.............................................................................. 179, 193

Default settings................................................................................... 215
A DeviceNet CAN fieldbus.................................................................. 141
Abbreviation........................................................................................ 281 Diagnosis............................................................................................... 185
Adjustable warning............................................................................. 83 Digital input............................................................................................ 88
Alarm...................................................................................................... 267 Discharge time......................................................................................... 7
Alarm log............................................................................................... 176 Display mode......................................................................................... 15
Analog I/O mode................................................................................ 111
Analog input............................................................................... 111, 201 E
Analog output.................................................................. 114, 116, 117 Encoder........................................................................................... 81, 108
ASM............................................................................................................ 37 Ethernet................................................................................................. 141
Automatic motor adaptation (AMA) ETR........................................................................................................... 180
Warning............................................................................................. 277
F
B Fans
Brake Warning............................................................................................. 279
energy functions.............................................................................. 60 FC MC protocol................................................................................... 136
power...................................................................................................... 4
resistor............................................................................................... 272 Fieldbus jog.......................................................................................... 140
DC brake.............................................................................................. 60 Flux........................................................................................ 35, 38, 39, 47
Mechanical brake............................................................................. 63
Freeze output.................................................................................... 3, 88
Brake resistor
Frequency converter identification............................................. 176
Warning............................................................................................. 274
Frequency converter status............................................................ 181
Break-away torque.................................................................................. 4
Fuse......................................................................................................... 275
C
G
Capacitor................................................................................................. 98
General settings........................................................................... 35, 131
Clockwise................................................................................................. 51
General status...................................................................................... 179
Coast............................................................................................................ 3
Graphical display.................................................................................. 12
Coasting............................................................................................ 14, 88
Ground
Comparator.......................................................................................... 145
Warning............................................................................................. 276
Compatibility.............................................................................. 172, 198
Configuration...................................................................................... 131 H
Control Heat sink
Advanced process PID control.................................................. 127 Warning................................................................................... 276, 277
principle.............................................................................................. 35
Current limit control..................................................................... 169 High voltage............................................................................................. 6
Process control feedback............................................................ 126
Process PID control....................................................................... 127 I
Smart logic control........................................................................ 142
Speed PID control.......................................................................... 120 I/O option.............................................................................................. 109
Torque PI control............................................................................ 126 Identification, frequency converter............................................. 176
U/f control principle........................................................................ 35
Indexed parameter.............................................................................. 20
Control cables........................................................................................... 9
Indicator light........................................................................................ 13
Control card
Warning............................................................................................. 277 Initialization............................................................................................ 22

Convention........................................................................................... 281 Input

option....................................................................................... 240, 265
Cooling..................................................................................................... 55
Inputs
Analog input..................................................................... 4, 112, 113
D Digital I/O mode............................................................................... 88
Data log settings................................................................................ 174 Inverter switching.............................................................................. 163

282 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Index Programming Guide

J P
Jog................................................................................................................ 3 Parameter information..................................................................... 178
Parameter set-up.................................................................................. 17
L Password.................................................................................................. 33
Language package............................................................................... 24 Phase loss.............................................................................................. 272
LCP...................................................................................... 3, 4, 12, 15, 20 Port diagnostics.................................................................................. 140
LCP copy/save........................................................................................ 32 Port setting........................................................................................... 135
LCP custom readout............................................................................ 30 Potentiometer
LCP display.............................................................................................. 27 Digital potentiometer..................................................................... 78
Voltage reference via a potentiometer.................................... 10
LCP key..................................................................................................... 22
Potentiometer reference.................................................................... 10
LED............................................................................................................. 12
Power card
Load dependent settings.................................................................. 48 Warning............................................................................................. 278
Load sharing............................................................................................. 6 PROFIBUS.............................................................................................. 141
Local reference...................................................................................... 25 Protection mode..................................................................................... 7
Log........................................................................................................... 175 Pulse input............................................................................................ 105
Logic rule............................................................................................... 153 Pulse output......................................................................................... 106
Pulse start/stop..................................................................................... 10
M
Main menu................................................................................ 13, 17, 19 Q
Main reactance...................................................................................... 42 Quick menu..................................................................................... 13, 17
Mains
on/off................................................................................................. 163
R
Mains supply............................................................................................. 5
Ramp.................................................................................... 73, 74, 75, 77
MCB 113.......................................................................................... 94, 117
RCD............................................................................................................... 5
MCB 114................................................................................................. 200
Reference....................................................................................... 67, 182
Monitoring............................................................................................ 187
Reference limit....................................................................................... 67
Motor
Advanced motor data.................................................................... 43 Relay........................................................................................................ 100
data................................................................................................ 37, 41 Relay output........................................................................................... 95
feedback monitoring...................................................................... 81
Reset................................................................................................ 14, 277
limit....................................................................................................... 79
protection........................................................................................... 53 Resolver interface.............................................................................. 187
speed, rated.......................................................................................... 3 Rotor
speed, synchronous........................................................................... 3 Warning............................................................................................. 279
status.................................................................................................. 179
temperature....................................................................................... 53 Rs flip flops........................................................................................... 149
Overheating.................................................................................... 273
PM motor............................................................................................ 38 S
Warning.......................................................................... 272, 273, 275
Safe Torque Off
Warning............................................................................................. 277
N
Safety precautions.................................................................................. 6
Numerical local control panel.......................................................... 20
Sensor input option.......................................................................... 200
Serial communication........................................................................... 4
O
Shielded/armored................................................................................... 9
Operating data.................................................................................... 174
Short circuit.......................................................................................... 273
Operating mode................................................................................... 25
SLC........................................................................................................... 142
Output speed......................................................................................... 50
Smart application set-up................................................................... 19
Overcurrent trip.................................................................................... 98
Smart logic control............................................................................ 142

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 283

Index VLT® AutomationDrive FC 301/302

Special features................................................................................... 196

Special settings..................................................................................... 37
Speed bypass......................................................................................... 85
Speed up/Speed down....................................................................... 10
Start adjustments................................................................................. 50
Start delay............................................................................................... 50
Start function......................................................................................... 50
Start/stop................................................................................................... 9
Stator leakage reactance................................................................... 42
Status message...................................................................................... 12
Stop adjustments................................................................................. 51
Supply voltage.................................................................................... 275
Symbol................................................................................................... 281
SynRM....................................................................................................... 39

T
Terminals
Terminal 42...................................................................................... 114
Terminal 53...................................................................................... 111
Terminal 54...................................................................................... 112
Terminal X30/11............................................................................. 113
Terminal X30/12............................................................................. 113
Terminal X30/8............................................................................... 116
Terminal X45/1............................................................................... 118
Terminal X45/3............................................................................... 119
Terminal X48/10............................................................................. 201
Terminal X48/2............................................................................... 201
Terminal X48/4............................................................................... 200
Thermal load................................................................................. 46, 180
Thermistor.......................................................................................... 5, 53
Thermistor
Warning............................................................................................. 278
Timer....................................................................................................... 152
Torque....................................................................................................... 41
Torque
Limit.................................................................................................... 273
Trip reset................................................................................................ 167

U
U/f characteristic................................................................................... 47
Unintended start..................................................................................... 6

V
Voltage imbalance............................................................................. 272
VVC+............................................................................................................ 5

W
Warning................................................................................................. 267
Wobble function................................................................................. 196

284 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. MG33MN02

Index Programming Guide

MG33MN02 Danfoss A/S © 08/2017 All rights reserved. 285

Danfoss can accept no responsibility for possible errors in catalogues, brochures and other printed material. Danfoss reserves the right to alter its products without notice. This also applies to
products already on order provided that such alterations can be made without subsequential changes being necessary in specifications already agreed. All trademarks in this material are property
of the respective companies. Danfoss and the Danfoss logotype are trademarks of Danfoss A/S. All rights reserved.

Danfoss A/S
Ulsnaes 1
DK-6300 Graasten
vlt-drives.danfoss.com

130R0334 MG33MN02 08/2017

*MG33MN02*